Edsg281001 (Sky Air - R410a)

EDSG281001
[50Hz]
RXS, RKS, RZR series
EDSG281001
Part 1 SkyAir Inverter Series ....................................................... 1

1. External Appearance...............................................................................3
2. Model Name, Power Supply and Nomenclature .....................................4
2.1 Model Name and Power Supply...............................................................4
2.2 Nomenclature ...........................................................................................5
3. Functions.................................................................................................6
3.1 Indoor Unit................................................................................................6
3.2 Outdoor Unit .............................................................................................7
4. Specifications ..........................................................................................8
5. Dimensions and Service Space ............................................................25
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
Indoor Unit..............................................................................................25
Wired Remote Controller........................................................................39
Wireless Remote Controller ...................................................................41
Outdoor Unit ...........................................................................................43
Installation Service Space ......................................................................49
6. Piping Diagrams....................................................................................55
6.1 Indoor Unit..............................................................................................55
6.2 Indoor Unit + Outdoor Unit .....................................................................57
6.3 Outdoor Unit ...........................................................................................62
7. Wiring Diagrams....................................................................................66
7.1 Indoor Unit..............................................................................................66
7.2 Outdoor Unit ...........................................................................................72
7.3 Field Wiring ............................................................................................80
8. Electric Characteristics..........................................................................81
8.1 RXS50FAVMA / RXS60FVMA / RXS71FVMA
RKS25AVMG / RKS35AVMG / RKS50AVMG / RKS60AVMG ..............81
8.2 RZR71KUV1 / RZR100KUV1 / RZR125KUV1 / RZR140KUV1 .............82
8.3 RZR100HUY1 / RZR125HUY1 / RZR140HUY1 ....................................84
9. Capacity Tables ....................................................................................86

9.1 Capacity Tables......................................................................................86
9.2 Capacity Correction Factor by the Length of Refrigerant Piping ............95
10.Operation Limits ....................................................................................97

11.Fan Performance ..................................................................................99
11.1 FBQ-B ....................................................................................................99
11.2 FBQ-D ..................................................................................................100
12.Air Velocity and Temperature Distributions.........................................102

12.1 FFQ ......................................................................................................102
12.2 FHQ......................................................................................................104
13.Sound Level ........................................................................................106

13.1 Overall Sound Level .............................................................................106
13.2 Octave Band Level ...............................................................................108
Part 2 Installation of Indoor / Outdoor Unit.............................. 113

1. Centre of Gravity .................................................................................114
2. Installation of Indoor Unit ....................................................................117
2.1 FCQ71KVEA / FCQ100KVEA / FCQ125KVEA / FCQ140KVEA..........117
2.2 FFQ25BV1B / FFQ35BV1B / FFQ50BV1B / FFQ60BV1B...................142
2.3 FHQ35BVV1B / FHQ50BVV1B / FHQ60BVV1B / FHQ71BVV1B /
FHQ100BVV1B / FHQ125BVV1B ........................................................165
Table of Contents
EDSG281001
2.4 FBQ50BV1A / FBQ60BV1A / FBQ71BV1A..........................................190

2.5 FBQ71DV1 / FBQ100DV1 / FBQ125DV1 / FBQ140DV1.....................211
3. Installation of Outdoor Unit..................................................................238

3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
RKS25AVMG / RKS35AVMG ..............................................................238

RXS50FAVMA / RXS60FVMA / RKS50AVMG / RKS60AVMG ..........246
RXS71FVMA ........................................................................................254
RZR71KUV1 / RZR100KUV1 / RZR125KUV1 / RZR140KUV1
RZR100HUY1 / RZR125HUY1 / RZR140HUY1 ..................................262
Part 3 Detail Information of Options ........................................ 279

1. Accessories.........................................................................................281
1.1 Indoor Unit............................................................................................281
1.2 Outdoor Unit .........................................................................................284
2. Remote Controller ...............................................................................285

2.1 BRC1C61 Wired Remote Controller ................................................285
2.2 BRC1D61 Wired Remote Controller with
Weekly Schedule Timer .......................................................................289
2.3 BRC1E61 Navigation Remote Controller (Wired Type)...................297
2.4 Wireless Remote Controller .................................................................336
3. FCQ.....................................................................................................338
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
3.16
BYCP125K-W1 Decoration Panel ...................................................338

KDBH55K160F Sealing Member of Air Discharge Outlet................343
KDBP55H160FA Panel Spacer .......................................................347
KDDP55K160(K) Fresh Air Intake Kit (Chamber Type)...................350
KDDP55X160 Fresh Air Intake Kit (Direct Installation Type)...........355
KAFP556H80 / KAFP556H160, KAFP557H80 / KAFP557H160
High Efficiency Filter (Including Chamber) ......................................358
Replacement High Efficiency Filter..................................................361
KDDFP55H160 High Efficiency Filter Chamber ..............................362
KAFP551K160 Replacement Long-life Filter ...................................365
KAFP55H160 Ultra Long-life Filter Unit (Including Chamber) .........366
KAFP55H160H Replacement Ultra Long-life Filter..........................369
KKSJ55K160 Chamber Connection Kit ...........................................370
KDJP55H80 / KDJP55H160 Branch Duct Chamber........................371
KDTP55K80 / KDTP55K160 Insulation Kit for High Humidity..........374
KRP1H98 Installation Box for Adaptor PCB ....................................376
KRCS01-4B Remote Sensor (for Indoor Temperature)...................381
4. FFQ .....................................................................................................385
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
BYFQ60B8W1 Decoration Panel.....................................................385

KDBH44BA60 Sealing Member of Air Discharge Outlet..................388
KDBQ44BA60A Panel Spacer.........................................................390
KAFQ441BA60 Replacement Long-life Filter ..................................393
KDDQ44XA60 Fresh Air Intake Kit (Direct Installation Type) ..........394
DTA112BA51 Interface Adaptor for SkyAir Series ..........................396
KRP1BA101 Installation Box for Adaptor PCB ................................398
5. FHQ.....................................................................................................407
5.1 KDU50N60VE / KDU50N125VE Drain-up Kit..................................407
5.2 KAF501DA56 / KAF501DA80 / KAF501DA112 / KAF501DA160
Replacement Long-life Filter............................................................412
ii
Table of Contents
EDSG281001
5.3 KHFP5MA35 / KHFP5MA63 / KHFP5MA160

L-type Piping Kit (for Upward Direction) ..........................................413
5.4 KRP1CA93 Installation Box for Adaptor PCB..................................414
5.5 KRCS01-1B Remote Sensor (for Indoor Temperature)...................416
5.6 DTA112BA51 Interface Adaptor for SkyAir Series ..........................420
5.7 KJB212AA / KJB311AA Electrical Box with Earth Terminal ............422
6. FBQ.....................................................................................................424
6.1 KTBJ25K56W / KTBJ25K80W (T) (F) / KTBJ25K160W(T) (F)
Service Access Panel ......................................................................424
6.2 KDAJ25K56A / KDAJ25K71A / KDAJ25K140A
Air Discharge Adaptor......................................................................427
6.3 KAF372AA80 / KAF372AA160 / KAF373AA80 / KAF373AA160
High Efficiency Filter ........................................................................429
6.4 KDDF37AA80 / KDDF37AA160 High Efficiency Filter Chamber .....430
6.5 KAF371AA80 / KAF371AA160 Long Life Filter ...............................433
6.6 KAF375AA80 / KAF375AA160 Long Life Filter Chamber Kit ..........434
6.7 KRP4A96 Mounting Plate for Adaptor PCB.....................................437
7. Outdoor Unit........................................................................................446
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
Table of Contents
KPW937A4 Air Direction Adjustment Grille .....................................446

KKP937A4 Drain Plug .....................................................................448
KKP945A4 Drain Plug .....................................................................449
KKPJ5F180 Central Drain Plug .......................................................450
K-KYZP15C Wire Fixture for Preventing Overturning......................451
KPT-60B160 Fixture for Preventing Overturning .............................453
KRP58M51 Demand Adaptor ..........................................................455
iii
EDSG281001
iv
Table of Contents
EDSG281001
Part 1
SkyAir Inverter Series
Model series
Class
25
35
50
60
FCQ
FFQ
Indoor
unit
25B
FHQ
100
125
140
71K
100K
125K
140K
35B
50B
60B
35BV
50BV
60BV
71BV
50B
60B
71B
FBQ-B
FBQ-D
71D
RXS
Outdoor
unit
71
RKS
25A
RZR
35A
50FA
60F
50A
60A
100BV 125BV
100D
125D
140D
71F
71KU
100KU 125KU 140KU

100HU 125HU 140HU
1. External Appearance...............................................................................3
2. Model Name, Power Supply and Nomenclature .....................................4
2.1 Model Name and Power Supply...............................................................4
2.2 Nomenclature ...........................................................................................5
3. Functions.................................................................................................6
3.1 Indoor Unit................................................................................................6
3.2 Outdoor Unit .............................................................................................7
4. Specifications ..........................................................................................8
5. Dimensions and Service Space ............................................................25
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
Indoor Unit..............................................................................................25
Wired Remote Controller........................................................................39
Wireless Remote Controller ...................................................................41
Outdoor Unit ...........................................................................................43
Installation Service Space ......................................................................49
6. Piping Diagrams....................................................................................55
6.1 Indoor Unit..............................................................................................55
6.2 Indoor Unit + Outdoor Unit .....................................................................57
6.3 Outdoor Unit ...........................................................................................62
7. Wiring Diagrams....................................................................................66
7.1 Indoor Unit..............................................................................................66
7.2 Outdoor Unit ...........................................................................................72
SkyAir RXS, RKS, RZR Series
EDSG281001
7.3 Field Wiring ............................................................................................80
8. Electric Characteristics..........................................................................81
8.1 RXS50FAVMA / RXS60FVMA / RXS71FVMA
RKS25AVMG / RKS35AVMG / RKS50AVMG / RKS60AVMG ..............81
8.2 RZR71KUV1 / RZR100KUV1 / RZR125KUV1 / RZR140KUV1 .............82
8.3 RZR100HUY1 / RZR125HUY1 / RZR140HUY1 ....................................84
9. Capacity Tables ....................................................................................86

9.1 Capacity Tables......................................................................................86
9.2 Capacity Correction Factor by the Length of Refrigerant Piping ............95
10.Operation Limits ....................................................................................97

11.Fan Performance ..................................................................................99
11.1 FBQ-B ....................................................................................................99
11.2 FBQ-D ..................................................................................................100
12.Air Velocity and Temperature Distributions.........................................102

12.1 FFQ ......................................................................................................102
12.2 FHQ......................................................................................................104
13.Sound Level ........................................................................................106

13.1 Overall Sound Level .............................................................................106
13.2 Octave Band Level ...............................................................................108
EDSG281001
External Appearance
1. External Appearance
Indoor Unit
FCQ
FFQ
FHQ
FBQ50~71B
FBQ71~140D
Remote Controller
Wired Type
BRC1C61
BRC1D61
Wireless Type
BRC1E61
Outdoor Unit
RKS25AVMG / RKS35AVMG
RXS50FAVMA / RXS60FVMA
RXS71FVMA
RZR71KUV1
RZR100~140KUV1
RZR100~140HUY1
Model Name, Power Supply and Nomenclature
EDSG281001
2. Model Name, Power Supply and Nomenclature

2.1
Model Name and Power Supply

Indoor unit
FCQ71KVEA
Notes:
Outdoor unit
Power supply
RZR71KUV1
FCQ100KVEA
RZR100KUV1
FCQ125KVEA
RZR125KUV1
FCQ140KVEA
RZR140KUV1
FCQ100KVEA
RZR100HUY1
FCQ125KVEA
RZR125HUY1
FCQ140KVEA
RZR140HUY1
FFQ25BV1B
RKS25AVMG
FFQ35BV1B
RKS35AVMG
FFQ50BV1B
RKS50AVMG
FFQ60BV1B
RKS60AVMG
FHQ35BVV1B
RKS35AVMG
FHQ50BVV1B
RKS50AVMG
FHQ60BVV1B
RKS60AVMG
FHQ71BVV1B
RZR71KUV1
FHQ100BVV1B
RZR100KUV1
FHQ125BVV1B
RZR125KUV1
FHQ100BVV1B
RZR100HUY1
FHQ125BVV1B
RZR125HUY1
FBQ50BV1A
RXS50FAVMA
FBQ60BV1A
RXS60FVMA
FBQ71BV1A
RXS71FVMA
FBQ71DV1
RZR71KUV1
FBQ100DV1
RZR100KUV1
FBQ125DV1
RZR125KUV1
FBQ140DV1
RZR140KUV1
FBQ100DV1
RZR100HUY1
FBQ125DV1
RZR125HUY1
FBQ140DV1
RZR140HUY1
1 phase, 220-240V, 50Hz
3 phase, 380-415V, 50Hz
1 phase, 220-240V, 50Hz /

220-230V, 60Hz
1 phase, 220-240V, 50Hz /

220-230V, 60Hz
1 phase, 220-240V, 50Hz
3 phase, 380-415V, 50Hz

1 phase, 220-240V, 50Hz /
220-230V, 60Hz
1 phase, 220-240V, 50Hz
3 phase, 380-415V, 50Hz
1. : New Model or Changed Model

2. Power Supply Intake : Outdoor Unit
EDSG281001
2.2
Model Name, Power Supply and Nomenclature
Nomenclature
Indoor Unit
FB
50
V1
For Australia
Power Supply Symbol
VE : 1 phase, 220-240V, 50Hz / 220V, 60Hz
V1 : 1 phase, 220-240V, 50Hz
Indicates Major Design Category
Capacity Indication
Refrigerant : R-410A
FC : Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type
FF
: Compact Multi Flow Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type
FH : Ceiling Suspended Type
FB-B : Ceiling Mounted Built-in Type
FB-D : Duct Connection Middle and High Static Pressure Type
Outdoor Unit
60
VM
A
For Australia
Power Supply Symbol
VM : 1 phase, 220-240V, 50Hz / 220-230V, 60Hz
Capacity Indication
Refrigerant : R-410A, Inverter (High grade model)
X : Inverter Heat Pump
K : Inverter Cooling Only
Outdoor Unit for Pair Use
RZ
100
KU
V1
Power Supply Symbol
V1 : 1 phase, 220-240V, 50Hz
Y1 : 3 phase, 380-415V, 50Hz
Capacity Indication
Refrigerant : R-410A, Cooling Only
Outdoor Unit for Inverter
Functions
EDSG281001
3. Functions
3.1
Indoor Unit
Items
Control
FCQ
FFQ
FHQ35~60
FHQ71~125
FBQ50~71B
Auto swing
Features
Swing pattern selection
Switchable fan speed
Program Dry
High ceiling application
{ (*1)
{ (*1)
High fan speed mode
Wired type
Wireless type
Year-round cooling applicable
Timer selector
Mould resistant treatment for filter
Mould-proofing drain pan
Drain pump mechanism
Pre-charged for up to 10 m
Pre-charged for up to 30 m
Long-life filter
Filter sign
Ceiling soiling prevention
Two selectable
thermo-sensors
Mould
prevention
Work &
servicing
Control
features
Option
Others
FBQ71~140D
Low gas pressure detection
Emergency operation
Self-diagnosis function
Auto-restart
Control by 2 remote controllers
Control by 1 remote controller
External command control
Central remote control
Interlock control
Ultra long life filter
High-efficiency filter
Fresh air intake kit
PE fin for outdoor unit
Notes:
{ : Functions exist.
: No functions
*1 : Installable on max. 3.5 m high ceiling
EDSG281001
3.2
Functions
Outdoor Unit
Functions
RKS25AVMG
RKS35AVMG
RKS50AVMG
RKS60AVMG
RZR71KUV1
RZR100KUV1 / RZR125KUV1 / RZR140KUV1
RZR100HUY1 / RZR125HUY1 / RZR140HUY1
Inverter Control
(For Comfortable Air Conditioning)
Night time Quiet Operation

Function for cooling
10~46CDB
5~46CDB
Items
Control
Operation
Range
Wide Operation Range
Notes:
Cooling
: No functions
Functions
RXS50FAVMA
RXS60FVMA
RXS71FVMA
Inverter Control
(For Comfortable Air Conditioning)
Night time Quiet Operation

Function for cooling
Items
Control
Operation
Range
Wide Operation Range
Notes:
Cooling
10~46CDB
Heating
15~18CWB
: No functions
Specifications
EDSG281001
4. Specifications
FCQ (Ceiling mounted cassette type round flow)
Model
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
Power supply
kW
Btu/h
kcal/h
Cooling capacity *1 *2
Indoor unit
Colour
Dimensions
Coil
Fan
HWD
Type
Rowsstagesfin pitch
Face area
Model
Type
Motor output
Air flow rate (H/L)
Sound level (H/L) *5

Mass (weight)
Liquid
Piping
Gas
connections
Drain
Remote controller (option)
Decoration
panel (option)
Outdoor unit
Colour
Dimensions
W
m/min
cfm
dB(A)
kg
mm
mm
mm
mm
kg
HWD
Type
Coil
Rowsstagesfin pitch
Face area
Model
Comp.
Type
Motor output
Type
Motor output
Fan
Air flow rate
Cooling
Sound level *5
Night quiet mode
Mass (weight)
Liquid
Piping
Gas
connections
Drain
Safety devices
Capacity step
Refrigerant control
Max. length
Ref. piping
Max. height difference
Model
Refrigerant
Charge (factory charge)
Model
Ref. oil
Charge
Drawing No.
mm
kW
W
m/min
dB(A)
dB(A)
kg
mm
mm
mm
%
m
m
kg
L
FCQ100KVEA
RZR100KUV1
V1: 1 phase, 220-240V, 50Hz
10.0 (5.0-11.2)
34,100 (17,100-38,200)
8,600 (4,300-9,600)
FCQ100KVEA
298840840
Cross fin coil (Multi louver fins and Hi-XSL tubes)
2121.2
0.535
QTS48C15M
Turbo fan
120
32/20
1,129/706
43/32
24
9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
I.D.25 O.D.32
BRC1C61
BRC7F632F
BYCP125K-W1
Fresh white
50950950
Resin net (with mould resistance)
5.5
RZR100KUV1
Ivory white
1,170900320
Cross fin coil (Louver fins and Hi-XSL tubes)
1521.4
1.027
JT100G-VD@T3
Hermetically sealed scroll type
1.8
Propeller
70+70
95
49
45
92
9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
26.0 (Hole) *3
High pressure switch. Fuse.
Compressor revolution speed control (inverter system)
Electronic expansion valve
50 (equivalent length 70m)
30
R-410A
2.4 (charged for 30m)
Refer to the name plate of compressor.
1.2
C : 3D065827A
*1. The above data are based on the following conditions.

Cooling
Piping length
Indoor : 27CDB, 19.0CWB

Outdoor : 35CDB, 24CWB
7.5m
(Horizontal)
*2.
*3.
*4.
*5.
Wired *4
Wireless
Model
Colour
Dimensions HWD
Air filter
Mass (weight)
Notes:
mm
FCQ71KVEA
RZR71KUV1
V1: 1 phase, 220-240V, 50Hz
7.1 (3.2-8.0)
24,200 (10,900-27,300)
6,100 (2,800-6,900)
FCQ71KVEA
256840840
2101.2
0.446
QTS48C15M
Turbo fan
56
21/13.5
741/476
35/28
21
9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
I.D.25 O.D.32
BRC1C61
BRC7F632F
BYCP125K-W1
Fresh white
50950950
5.5
RZR71KUV1
Ivory white
770900320
1341.4
0.67
2YC63FXD#D
Hermetically sealed swing type
1.5
Propeller
70
52
48
47
61
9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
26.0 (Hole) *3
30
R-410A
0.75
C : 3D065827A
Conversion formulae
kcal/h=kW860
Btu/h=kW3412
cfm=m/min35.3
Capacities are net, including a deduction for cooling for indoor fan motor heat.
In case of drain piping for outdoor unit, drain piping kit (option) is needed.
Wire for remote controller : Field supplied.
Anechoic chamber conversion value, measured according to JIS parameters and criteria. During operation
these values are somewhat higher owing to ambient conditions.
EDSG281001
Specifications

Model
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
Power supply
kW
Btu/h
kcal/h
Indoor unit
Colour
Dimensions
Coil
Fan
HWD
Type
Rowsstagesfin pitch
Face area
Model
Type
Motor output
Air flow rate (H/L)

Mass (weight)
Liquid
Piping
Gas
connections
Drain
Decoration
panel (option)
W
m/min
cfm
dB(A)
kg
mm
mm
mm
Wired *4
Wireless
Model
Colour
Dimensions HWD
Air filter
Mass (weight)
mm
kg
Outdoor unit
Colour
Dimensions
HWD
Type
Coil
Rowsstagesfin pitch
Face area
Model
Comp.
Type
Motor output
Type
Motor output
Fan
Air flow rate
Cooling
Sound level *5
Night quiet mode
Mass (weight)
Liquid
Piping
Gas
connections
Drain
Safety devices
Capacity step
Refrigerant control
Max. length
Ref. piping
Model
Refrigerant
Model
Ref. oil
Charge
Drawing No.
Notes:
mm
mm
kW
W
m/min
dB(A)
dB(A)
kg
mm
mm
mm
%
m
m
kg
L
FCQ125KVEA
RZR125KUV1
V1: 1 phase, 220-240V, 50Hz
12.5 (5.7-14.0)
42,700 (19,400-47,800)
10,800 (4,900-12,000)
FCQ125KVEA
298840840
2121.2
0.535
QTS48C15M
Turbo fan
120
33/22.5
1,164/794
44/34
24
9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
I.D.25 O.D.32
BRC1C61
BRC7F632F
BYCP125K-W1
Fresh white
50950950
5.5
RZR125KUV1
Ivory white
1,170900320
Cross fin coil (Waffle fins and Hi-XSL tubes)
2521.4
1.01
JT100G-VD@T3
2.4
Propeller
70+70
95
50
45
97
9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
26.0 (Hole) *3
30
R-410A
1.2
C : 3D065827A
FCQ140KVEA
RZR140KUV1
V1: 1 phase, 220-240V, 50Hz
14.0 (6.2-15.4)
47,800 (21,200-52,500)
12,000 (5,300-13,200)
FCQ140KVEA
298840840
2121.2
0.535
QTS48C15M
Turbo fan
120
33/22.5
1,164/794
44/36
24
9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
I.D.25 O.D.32
BRC1C61
BRC7F632F
BYCP125K-W1
Fresh white
50950950
5.5
RZR140KUV1
Ivory white
1,170900320
2521.4
1.01
JT100G-VD@T3
3.1
Propeller
70+70
95
50
46
97
9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
26.0 (Hole) *3
30
R-410A
1.2
C : 3D065827A

Cooling
Piping length

7.5m
(Horizontal)
*2.
*3.
*4.
*5.
Conversion formulae
kcal/h=kW860
Btu/h=kW3412
cfm=m/min35.3
Specifications
EDSG281001

Model
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
Power supply
kW
Btu/h
kcal/h
Indoor unit
Colour
Dimensions
Coil
Fan
HWD
Type
Rowsstagesfin pitch
Face area
Model
Type
Motor output
Air flow rate (H/L)

Mass (weight)
Liquid
Piping
Gas
connections
Drain
Decoration
panel (option)
Outdoor unit
Colour
Dimensions
W
m/min
cfm
dB(A)
kg
mm
mm
mm
mm
kg
HWD
Type
Coil
Rowsstagesfin pitch
Face area
Model
Comp.
Type
Motor output
Type
Motor output
Fan
Air flow rate
Cooling
Sound level *5
Night quiet mode
Mass (weight)
Liquid
Piping
Gas
connections
Drain
Safety devices
Capacity step
Refrigerant control
Max. length
Ref. piping
Model
Refrigerant
Model
Ref. oil
Charge
Drawing No.
mm
kW
W
m/min
dB(A)
dB(A)
kg
mm
mm
mm
%
m
m
kg
L
FCQ125KVEA
RZR125HUY1
3 phase, 380-415V, 50Hz
12.5 (5.7-14.0)
42,700 (19,400-47,800)
10,800 (4,900-12,000)
FCQ125KVEA
298840840
2121.2
0.535
QTS48C15M
Turbo fan
120
33/22.5
1,164/794
44/34
24
9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
I.D.25 O.D.32
BRC1C61
BRC7F632F
BYCP125K-W1
Fresh white
50950950
5.5
RZR125HUY1
Ivory white
1,345900320
2601.4
1.153
JT1G-VDYR@T
2.3
Propeller
70+70
100
50
45
104
9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
26.0 (Hole) *3
30
R-410A
1.2
C : 3D065827A

Cooling
Piping length

7.5m
(Horizontal)
*2.
*3.
*4.
*5.
10
Wired *4
Wireless
Model
Colour
Dimensions HWD
Air filter
Mass (weight)
Notes:
mm
FCQ100KVEA
RZR100HUY1
3 phase, 380-415V, 50Hz
10.0 (5.0-11.2)
34,100 (17,100-38,200)
8,600 (4,300-9,600)
FCQ100KVEA
298840840
2121.2
0.535
QTS48C15M
Turbo fan
120
32/20
1,129/706
43/32
24
9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
I.D.25 O.D.32
BRC1C61
BRC7F632F
BYCP125K-W1
Fresh white
50950950
5.5
RZR100HUY1
Ivory white
1,345900320
1601.4
1.172
JT1G-VDYR@T
1.6
Propeller
70+70
100
49
45
94
9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
26.0 (Hole) *3
30
R-410A
1.2
C : 3D065827A
Conversion formulae
kcal/h=kW860
Btu/h=kW3412
cfm=m/min35.3
EDSG281001
Specifications

Model
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
FCQ140KVEA
RZR140HUY1
3 phase, 380-415V, 50Hz
14.0 (6.2-15.4)
47,800 (21,200-52,500)
12,000 (5,300-13,200)
FCQ140KVEA
298840840
2121.2
0.535
QTS48C15M
Turbo fan
120
33/22.5
1,164/794
44/36
24
9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
I.D.25 O.D.32
BRC1C61
BRC7F632F
BYCP125K-W1
Fresh white
50950950
5.5
RZR140HUY1
Ivory white
1,345900320
2601.4
1.153
JT1G-VDYR@T
2.8
Propeller
70+70
100
50
46
104
9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
26.0 (Hole) *3
30
R-410A
1.2
C : 3D065827A
Power supply
kW
Btu/h
kcal/h
Indoor unit
Colour
Dimensions
Coil
Fan
HWD
Type
Rowsstagesfin pitch
Face area
Model
Type
Motor output
Air flow rate (H/L)

Mass (weight)
Liquid
Piping
Gas
connections
Drain
Decoration
panel (option)
W
m/min
cfm
dB(A)
kg
mm
mm
mm
Wired *4
Wireless
Model
Colour
Dimensions HWD
Air filter
Mass (weight)
mm
kg
Outdoor unit
Colour
Dimensions
HWD
Type
Coil
Rowsstagesfin pitch
Face area
Model
Comp.
Type
Motor output
Type
Motor output
Fan
Air flow rate
Cooling
Sound level *5
Night quiet mode
Mass (weight)
Liquid
Piping
Gas
connections
Drain
Safety devices
Capacity step
Refrigerant control
Max. length
Ref. piping
Model
Refrigerant
Model
Ref. oil
Charge
Drawing No.
Notes:
mm
mm
kW
W
m/min
dB(A)
dB(A)
kg
mm
mm
mm
%
m
m
kg
L

Cooling
Piping length

7.5m
(Horizontal)
*2.
*3.
*4.
*5.
Conversion formulae
kcal/h=kW860
Btu/h=kW3412
cfm=m/min35.3
11
Specifications
EDSG281001
FFQ (Compact multi flow ceiling mounted cassette type)

Model
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
Power supply
kW
Btu/h
kcal/h
Cooling capacity *1
Indoor unit
Colour
Dimensions
Coil
Fan
HWD
Type
RowsStagesFin pitch
Face area
Type
Motor output
Air flow rate (H/L)

Mass (weight)
Liquid
Piping
Gas
connections
Drain
Decoration
panel (option)
W
m/min
cfm
dB(A)
kg
mm
mm
mm
mm
kg
HWD
Type
Coil
Rowsstagesfin pitch
Face area
Model
Comp.
Type
Motor output
Type
Fan
Motor output
Air flow rate (H/L)
Cooling
Sound level *3
Night quiet mode
Mass (weight)
Liquid
Piping
Gas
connections
Drain
Safety devices
Capacity step
Refrigerant control
Max. length
Ref. Piping
Model
Refrigerant
Model
Ref. Oil
Charge
Drawing No.
Notes:
Wired *2
Wireless
Model
Colour
Dimentions HWD
Air filter
Mass (weight)
Outdoor unit
Colour
Dimentions
mm
mm
kW
W
m/min
dB(A)
dB(A)
kg
mm
mm
mm
%
m
m
kg
L
FFQ25BV1B
RKS25AVMG
VM: 1 phase, 220-240V, 50Hz/220-230V, 60Hz
2.5 (1.2-3.0)
8,550 (4,100-10,250)
2,150 (1,030-2,580)
FFQ25BV1B
286575575
2101.5
0.269
Turbo fan
55
9.0/6.5
317/229
29.5/24.5
17.5
6.4 (Flare)
9.5 (Flare)
VP20 (I.D.20 O.D.26)
BRC1C61
BRC7E531W
BYFQ60B8W1
White (RAL 9010)
55700700
Removable/washable/mildew proof/long life
2.7
RKS25AVMG
Ivory white
550765285
Cross fin coil (Waffle fins and Hi-XD tubes)
2241.4
0.425
1YC23NXD#A
0.6
Propeller
23
33.5/23.4
46
34
6.4 (Flare)
9.5 (Flare)
18.0 (Hole)
Fuse.
20
15
R-410A
0.375
FFQ35BV1B
RKS35AVMG
VM: 1 phase, 220-240V, 50Hz/220-230V, 60Hz
3.4 (1.2-3.7)
11,600 (4,100-12,600)
2,920 (1,030-3,180)
FFQ35BV1B
286575575
2101.5
0.269
Turbo fan
55
10.0/6.5
353/229
32/25
17.5
6.4 (Flare)
9.5 (Flare)
VP20 (I.D.20 O.D.26)
BRC1C61
BRC7E531W
BYFQ60B8W1
White (RAL 9010)
55700700
2.7
RKS35AVMG
Ivory white
550765285
2241.4
0.425
1YC23NXD#A
0.6
Propeller
23
33.5/23.4
47
34
6.4 (Flare)
9.5 (Flare)
18.0 (Hole)
Fuse.
20
15
R-410A
0.375

Cooling
Piping length

Outdoor : 35CDB
7.5m
(Horizontal)
Conversion formulae
kcal/h=kW860
Btu/h=kW3412
cfm=m/min35.3
*2. Wire for remote controller : field supplied.

*3. Anechoic chamber conversion value, measured according to JIS parameters and criteria. During operation
12
EDSG281001
Specifications
FFQ (Compact multi flow ceiling mounted cassette type)

Model
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
Power supply
kW
Btu/h
kcal/h
Cooling capacity *1
Indoor unit
Colour
Dimensions
Coil
Fan
HWD
Type
RowsStagesFin pitch
Face area
Type
Motor output
Air flow rate (H/L)

Mass (weight)
Liquid
Piping
Gas
connections
Drain
Remote controlle (option)
Decoration
panel (option)
m
W
m/min
cfm
dB(A)
kg
mm
mm
mm
Wired *2
Wireless
Model
Colour
Dimentions HWD
Air filter
Mass (weight)
mm
kg
Outdoor unit
Colour
Dimentions
HWD
Type
Coil
Rowsstagesfin pitch
Face area
Model
Comp.
Type
Motor output
Type
Fan
Motor output
Air flow rate (HH/H/L)
Cooling
Sound level *3
Night quiet mode
Mass (weight)
Liquid
Piping
Gas
connections
Drain
Safety devices
Capacity step
Refrigerant control
Max. length
Ref. Piping
Model
Refrigerant
Model
Ref. Oil
Charge
Drawing No.
Notes:
mm
mm
kW
W
m/min
dB(A)
dB(A)
kg
mm
mm
mm
%
m
m
kg
L
FFQ50BV1B
RKS50AVMG
VM: 1 phase, 220-240V, 50Hz/220-230V, 60Hz
4.7 (1.7-5.6)
16,000 (5,800-19,100)
4,040 (1,460-4,820)
FFQ50BV1B
286575575
2101.5
0.269
Turbo fan
55
12.0/8.0
423/282
36/27
17.5
6.4 (Flare)
12.7 (Flare)
VP20 (I.D.20 O.D.26)
BRC1C61
BRC7E531W
BYFQ60B8W1
White (RAL 9010)
55700700
2.7
RKS50AVMG
Ivory white
735825300
Cross fin coil (Waffle fins and Hi-XA tubes)
2321.8
0.595
2YC36BXD#A
1.1
Propeller
53
50.9/48.9/41.7
47
47
6.4 (Flare)
12.7 (Flare)
18.0 (Hole)
Fuse.
30
20
R-410A
0.65
FFQ60BV1B
RKS60AVMG
VM: 1 phase, 220-240V, 50Hz/220-230V, 60Hz
5.8 (1.7-6.0)
19,800 (5,800-20,500)
4,990 (1,460-5,160)
FFQ60BV1B
286575575
2101.5
0.269
Turbo fan
55
15.0/10.0
529/353
41/32
17.5
6.4 (Flare)
12.7 (Flare)
VP20 (I.D.20 O.D.26)
BRC1C61
BRC7E531W
BYFQ60B8W1
White (RAL 9010)
55700700
2.7
RKS60AVMG
Ivory white
735825300
2321.8
0.595
2YC36BXD#A
1.1
Propeller
53
54.2/50.9/45.0
49
47
6.4 (Flare)
12.7 (Flare)
18.0 (Hole)
Fuse.
30
20
R-410A
0.65

Cooling
Piping length

Outdoor : 35CDB
7.5m
(Horizontal)
Conversion formulae
kcal/h=kW860
Btu/h=kW3412
cfm=m/min35.3

13
Specifications
EDSG281001
FHQ (Ceiling suspended type)

Model
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
FHQ35BVV1B
RKS35AVMG
VM: 1 phase, 220-240V, 50Hz/220-230V, 60Hz
3.4 (1.2-3.7)
11,600 (4,100-12,600)
2,920 (1,030-3,180)
FHQ35BVV1B
White
195960680
2121.75
0.182
Sirocco fan
62
13/10
458/353
37/32
Removable/washable/mildew proof
24
6.4 (Flare)
9.5 (Flare)
VP20 (I.D.20 O.D.26)
BRC1C61
BRC7EA66
RKS35AVMG
Ivory white
550765285
2241.4
0.425
1YC23NXD#A
0.6
Propeller
23
33.5/23.4
47
34
6.4 (Flare)
9.5 (Flare)
18.0 (hole)
Fuse.
20
15
R-410A
0.375
C: 3D061270
Power supply
kW
Btu/h
kcal/h
Cooling capacity *1
Indoor unit
Colour
Dimensions
Coil
Fan
HWD
Type
Rowsstagesfin pitch
Face area
Type
Motor output
Air flow rate (H/L)

Air filter
Mass (weight)
Liquid
Piping
Gas
connections
Drain
Outdoor unit
Colour
Dimentions
m
W
m/min
cfm
dB(A)
kg
mm
mm
mm
Wired *2
Wireless
HWD
Type
Coil
Rowsstagesfin pitch
Face area
Model
Comp.
Type
Motor output
Type
Fan
Motor output
Air flow rate (H/L)
Cooling
Sound level *3
Night quiet mode
Mass (weight)
Liquid
Piping
Gas
connections
Drain
Safety devices
Capacity step
Refrigerant control
Max. length
Ref. Piping
Model
Refrigerant
Model
Ref. Oil
Charge
Drawing No.
Notes:
mm
mm
kW
W
m/min
dB(A)
dB(A)
kg
mm
mm
mm
%
m
m
kg
L

Cooling
Piping length

Outdoor : 35CDB
7.5m
(Horizontal)
Conversion formulae
kcal/h=kW860
Btu/h=kW3412
cfm=m/min35.3

14
EDSG281001
Specifications

Model
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
Power supply
kW
Btu/h
kcal/h
Cooling capacity *1
Indoor unit
Colour
Dimensions
Coil
Fan
HWD
Type
Rowsstagesfin pitch
Face area
Type
Motor output
Air flow rate (H/L)

Air filter
Mass (weight)
Liquid
Piping
Gas
connections
Drain
m
W
m/min
cfm
dB(A)
kg
mm
mm
mm
Wired *2
Wireless
Outdoor unit
Colour
Dimentions
HWD
Type
Coil
Rowsstagesfin pitch
Face area
Model
Comp.
Type
Motor output
Type
Fan
Motor output
Air flow rate (HH/H/L)
Cooling
Sound level *3
Night quiet mode
Mass (weight)
Liquid
Piping
Gas
connections
Drain
Safety devices
Capacity step
Refrigerant control
Max. length
Ref. Piping
Model
Refrigerant
Model
Ref. Oil
Charge
Drawing No.
Notes:
mm
mm
kW
W
m/min
dB(A)
dB(A)
kg
mm
mm
mm
%
m
m
kg
L
FHQ50BVV1B
RKS50AVMG
VM: 1 phase, 220-240V, 50Hz/220-230V, 60Hz
5.0 (1.7-5.6)
17,100 (5,800-19,100)
4,300 (1,460-4,820)
FHQ50BVV1B
White
195960680
3121.75
0.182
Sirocco fan
62
13/10
458/353
38/33
Removable/washable
25
6.4 (Flare)
12.7 (Flare)
VP20 (I.D.20 O.D.26)
BRC1C61
BRC7EA66
RKS50AVMG
Ivory white
735825300
2321.8
0.595
2YC36BXD#A
1.1
Propeller
53
50.9/48.9/41.7
47
47
6.4 (Flare)
12.7 (Flare)
18.0 (Hole)
Fuse.
30
20
R-410A
0.65
C: 3D061271
FHQ60BVV1B
RKS60AVMG
VM: 1 phase, 220-240V, 50Hz/220-230V, 60Hz
5.7 (1.7-6.0)
19,400 (5,800-20,500)
4,900 (1,460-5,160)
FHQ60BVV1B
White
1951,160680
2121.75
0.233
Sirocco fan
62
17/13
600/458
39/33
Removable/washable
27
6.4 (Flare)
12.7 (Flare)
VP20 (I.D.20 O.D.26)
BRC1C61
BRC7EA66
RKS60AVMG
Ivory white
735825300
2321.8
0.595
2YC36BXD#A
1.1
Propeller
53
54.2/50.9/45.0
49
47
6.4 (Flare)
12.7 (Flare)
18.0 (Hole)
Fuse.
30
20
R-410A
0.65
C: 3D061272

Cooling
Piping length

Outdoor : 35CDB
7.5m
(Horizontal)
Conversion formulae
kcal/h=kW860
Btu/h=kW3412
cfm=m/min35.3

15
Specifications
EDSG281001

Model
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
FHQ71BVV1B
RZR71KUV1
V1: 1 phase, 220-240V, 50Hz
7.1 (3.2-8.0)
24,200 (10,900-27,300)
6,100 (2,800-6,900)
FHQ71BVV1B
White
1951,160680
3121.75
0.233
Sirocco fan
62
17/14
600/494
39/35
27
9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
VP20 (I.D.20 O.D.26)
BRC1C61
BRC7EA66
RZR71KUV1
Ivory white
770900320
1341.4
0.67
2YC63FXD#D
1.7
Propeller
70
52
48
47
61
9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
26.0 (Hole) *3
30
R-410A
0.75
C : 3D065808A
Power supply
kW
Btu/h
kcal/h
Indoor unit
Colour
Dimensions
Coil
Fan
HWD
Type
Rowsstagesfin pitch
Face area
Type
Motor output
Air flow rate (H/L)

Air Filter
Mass (weight)
Liquid
Piping
Gas
connections
Drain
W
m/min
cfm
dB(A)
Wired *4
Wireless
HWD
Type
Coil
Rowsstagesfin pitch
Face area
Model
Comp.
Type
Motor output
Type
Motor output
Fan
Air flow rate
Cooling
Sound level *5
Night quiet mode
Mass (weight)
Liquid
Piping
Gas
connections
Drain
Safety devices
Capacity step
Refrigerant control
Max. length
Ref. piping
Model
Refrigerant
Model
Ref. oil
Charge
Drawing No.
mm
kW
W
m/min
dB(A)
dB(A)
kg
mm
mm
mm
%
m
m
kg
L

Cooling
Piping length

7.5m
(Horizontal)
*2.
*3.
*4.
*5.
16
kg
mm
mm
mm
Outdoor Unit
Colour
Dimensions
Notes:
mm
Conversion formulae
kcal/h=kW860
Btu/h=kW3412
cfm=m/min35.3
EDSG281001
Specifications

Model
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
Power supply
kW
Btu/h
kcal/h
Indoor unit
Colour
Dimensions
Coil
Fan
HWD
Type
Rowsstagesfin pitch
Face area
Type
Motor output
Air flow rate (H/L)

Air filter
Mass (weight)
Liquid
Piping
Gas
connections
Drain
m
W
m/min
cfm
dB(A)
kg
mm
mm
mm
Wired *4
Wireless
Outdoor unit
Colour
Dimensions
HWD
Type
Coil
Rowsstagesfin pitch
Face area
Model
Comp.
Type
Motor output
Type
Motor output
Fan
Air flow rate
Cooling
Sound level *5
Night quiet mode
Mass (weight)
Liquid
Piping
Gas
connections
Drain
Safety devices
Capacity step
Refrigerant control
Max. length
Ref. piping
Model
Refrigerant
Model
Ref. oil
Charge
Drawing No.
Notes:
mm
mm
kW
W
m/min
dB(A)
dB(A)
kg
mm
mm
mm
%
m
m
kg
L
FHQ100BVV1B
RZR100KUV1
V1: 1 phase, 220-240V, 50Hz
10.0 (5.0-11.2)
34,100 (17,100-38,200)
8,600 (4,300-9,600)
FHQ100BVV1B
White
1951,400680
3121.75
0.293
Sirocco fan
130
24/20
847/706
42/37
32
9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
VP20 (I.D.20 O.D.26)
BRC1C61
BRC7EA66
RZR100KUV1
Ivory white
1,170900320
1521.4
1.027
JT100G-VD@T3
2.1
Propeller
70+70
95
49
45
92
9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
26.0 (Hole) *3
30
R-410A
1.2
C : 3D065808A
FHQ125BVV1B
RZR125KUV1
V1: 1 phase, 220-240V, 50Hz
12.5 (5.7-14.0)
42,700 (19,400-47,800)
10,800 (4,900-12,000)
FHQ125BVV1B
White
1951,590680
3121.75
0.341
Sirocco fan
130
30/25
1,059/883
44/39
35
9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
VP20 (I.D.20 O.D.26)
BRC1C61
BRC7EA66
RZR125KUV1
Ivory white
1,170900320
2521.4
1.01
JT100G-VD@T3
2.6
Propeller
70+70
95
50
45
97
9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
26.0 (Hole) *3
30
R-410A
1.2
C : 3D065808A

Cooling
Piping length

7.5m
(Horizontal)
*2.
*3.
*4.
*5.
Conversion formulae
kcal/h=kW860
Btu/h=kW3412
cfm=m/min35.3
17
Specifications
EDSG281001

Model
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
Power supply
kW
Btu/h
kcal/h
Indoor unit
Colour
Dimensions
Coil
Fan
HWD
Type
Rowsstagesfin pitch
Face area
Type
Motor output
Air flow rate (H/L)

Air filter
Mass (weight)
Liquid
Piping
Gas
connections
Drain
W
m/min
cfm
dB(A)
Wired *4
Wireless
HWD
Type
Coil
Rowsstagesfin pitch
Face area
Model
Comp.
Type
Motor output
Type
Motor output
Fan
Air flow rate
Cooling
Sound level *5
Night quiet mode
Mass (weight)
Liquid
Piping
Gas
connections
Drain
Safety devices
Capacity step
Refrigerant control
Max. length
Ref. piping
Model
Refrigerant
Model
Ref. oil
Charge
Drawing No.
mm
kW
W
m/min
dB(A)
dB(A)
kg
mm
mm
mm
%
m
m
kg
L
FHQ125BVV1B
RZR125HUY1
3 phase, 380-415V, 50Hz
12.5 (5.7-14.0)
42,700 (19,400-47,800)
10,800 (4,900-12,000)
FHQ125BVV1B
White
1951,590680
3121.75
0.341
Sirocco fan
130
30/25
1,059/883
44/39
35
9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
VP20 (I.D.20 O.D.26)
BRC1C61
BRC7EA66
RZR125HUY1
Ivory white
1,345900320
2601.4
1.153
JT1G-VDYR@T
2.6
Propeller
70+70
100
50
45
104
9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
26.0 (Hole) *3
30
R-410A
1.2
C : 3D065808A

Cooling
Piping length

7.5m
(Horizontal)
*2.
*3.
*4.
*5.
18
kg
mm
mm
mm
Outdoor unit
Colour
Dimensions
Notes:
mm
FHQ100BVV1B
RZR100HUY1
3 phase, 380-415V, 50Hz
10.0 (5.0-11.2)
34,100 (17,100-38,200)
8,600 (4,300-9,600)
FHQ100BVV1B
White
1951,400680
3121.75
0.293
Sirocco fan
130
24/20
847/706
42/37
32
9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
VP20 (I.D.20 O.D.26)
BRC1C61
BRC7EA66
RZR100HUY1
Ivory white
1,345900320
1601.4
1.172
JT1G-VDYR@T
2.1
Propeller
70+70
100
49
45
94
9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
26.0 (Hole) *3
30
R-410A
1.2
C : 3D065808A
Conversion formulae
kcal/h=kW860
Btu/h=kW3412
cfm=m/min35.3
EDSG281001
Specifications
FBQ (Ceiling mounted built-in type)

Model
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
Power supply
kW
Btu/h
kcal/h
kW
Btu/h
kcal/h
Cooling capacity *1
Heating capacity *1
Indoor unit
External static
pressure *4
Dimensions
Coil
Fan
FBQ50BV1A
RXS50FAVMA
VM: 1 phase, 220-240V, 50Hz/220-230V, 60Hz
5.0 (1.7-5.6)
17,100 (5,800-19,100)
4,300 (1,460-4,820)
6.0 (1.7-7.0)
20,500 (5,800-23,700)
5,160 (1,460-6,020)
FBQ50BV1A
FBQ60BV1A
RXS60FVMA
VM: 1 phase, 220-240V, 50Hz/220-230V, 60Hz
5.7 (1.7-7.0)
19,400 (5,800-23,900)
4,900 (1,460-6,020)
7.0 (1.7-8.0)
23,900 (5,800-27,300)
6,020 (1,460-6,880)
FBQ60BV1A
High-Standard-Low
Pa
88-49-20
88-49-20
HWD
Type
Rowsstagesfin pitch
Face area
Type
Motor output
mm
W
m/min
300700800
3141.75
0.132
Sirocco fan
85
13/9
459/318
14/10
494/353
33/29
34
6.4 (Flare)
12.7 (Flare)
VP25 (I.D.25 O.D.32)
BRC1C61
BRC4C62
RXS50FAVMA
Ivory white
735825300
2321.8
0.595
2YC36BXD#A
1.1
Propeller
53
50.9/48.9/41.7
3001,000800
2141.75
0.220
Sirocco fan
110
18/13
635/459
19/14
671/494
34/30
41
6.4 (Flare)
12.7 (Flare)
VP25 (I.D.25 O.D.32)
BRC1C61
BRC4C62
RXS60FVMA
Ivory white
735825300
2321.8
0.595
2YC36BXD#A
1.1
Propeller
53
54.2/50.9/45.0
m/min
/45.0/45.0
/46.3/46.3
dB(A)
dB(A)
kg
mm
mm
mm
47/48
48
6.4 (Flare)
12.7 (Flare)
18.0 (Hole)
Fuse.
30
20
R-410A
0.65
C: 3D055515
49/49
48
6.4 (Flare)
12.7 (Flare)
18.0 (Hole)
Fuse.
30
20
R-410A
0.65
C: 3D055516
Air flow
rate (H/L)
Cooling
Heating

Air filter
Mass (weight)
Liquid
Piping
Gas
connections
Drain
W
m/min
cfm
m/min
cfm
dB(A)
kg
mm
mm
mm
Wired *2
Wireless
Outdoor unit
Colour
Dimentions
HWD
Type
Coil
Rowsstagesfin pitch
Face area
Model
Comp.
Type
Motor output
Type
Motor output
Fan
Air flow
Cooling
rate
(HH/H/L) Heating
Cooling / heating
Sound level *3
Night quiet mode
Mass (weight)
Liquid
Piping
Gas
connections
Drain
Safety devices
Capacity step
Refrigerant control
Max. length
Ref. Piping
Model
Refrigerant
Model
Ref. Oil
Charge
Drawing No.
Notes:
mm
kW
%
m
m
kg
L

Cooling
Outdoor : 35CDB
Heating
Indoor : 20CDB
Conversion formulae
Piping length
7.5m
(Horizontal)
kcal/h=kW860
Btu/h=kW3412
cfm=m/min35.3

*4. Initial setting is Standard.
19
Specifications
EDSG281001
FBQ (Ceiling mounted built-in type)

Model
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
FBQ71BV1A
RXS71FVMA
VM: 1 phase, 220-240V, 50Hz/220-230V, 60Hz
6.7 (2.3-8.0)
22,900 (7,900-27,300)
5,800 (1,980-6,900)
8.2 (2.3-10.0)
28,000 (7,900-34,100)
7,050 (1,980-8,600)
FBQ71BV1A
Power supply
kW
Btu/h
kcal/h
kW
Btu/h
kcal/h
Cooling capacity *1
Heating capacity *1
Indoor unit
External static
pressure *4
Dimensions
Coil
Fan
High-Standard-Low
Pa
88-49-20
HWD
Type
Rowsstagesfin pitch
Face area
Type
Motor output
mm
W
m/min
3001,000800
2141.75
0.220
Sirocco fan
110
18/13
635/459
19/14
671/494
34/30
41
6.4 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
VP25 (I.D.25 O.D.32)
BRC1C61
BRC4C62
RXS71FVMA
Ivory white
770900320
2341.4
0.641
2YC36BXD#A
1.92
Propeller
66
57.1/54.5/46.0
m/min
/52.5/52.5
dB(A)
dB(A)
kg
mm
mm
mm
52/52
71
6.4 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
26.0 (Hole)
Fuse.
30
20
R-410A
0.75
C: 3D054918
Air flow
rate (H/L)
Cooling
Heating

Air filter
Mass (weight)
Liquid
Piping
Gas
connections
Drain
Outdoor unit
Colour
Dimentions
W
m/min
cfm
m/min
cfm
dB(A)
kg
mm
mm
mm
Wired *2
Wireless
HWD
Type
Coil
Rowsstagesfin pitch
Face area
Model
Comp.
Type
Motor output
Type
Motor output
Fan
Air flow
Cooling
rate
(HH/H/L) Heating
Cooling / heating
Sound level *3
Night quiet mode
Mass (weight)
Liquid
Piping
Gas
connections
Drain
Safety devices
Capacity step
Refrigerant control
Max. length
Ref. Piping
Model
Refrigerant
Model
Ref. Oil
Charge
Drawing No.
Notes:
mm
kW
%
m
m
kg
L

Cooling
Outdoor : 35CDB
Heating
Indoor : 20CDB
Conversion formulae
Piping length
kcal/h=kW860
Btu/h=kW3412
cfm=m/min35.3
7.5m
(Horizontal)

*4. Initial setting is Standard.
20
EDSG281001
Specifications
FBQ (Duct connection middle and high static pressure type)

Model
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
FBQ71DV1
RZR71KUV1
V1: 1 phase, 220-240V, 50Hz
7.1 (3.2-8.0)
24,200 (10,900-27,300)
6,100 (2,800-6,900)
FBQ71DV1
3001,000700
3161.75
0.249
Sirocco fan
350
18/15
635/530
37/32
*3
36
9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
I.D.25 O.D.32
BRC1C61
BRC4C62
RZR71KUV1
Ivory white
770900320
1341.4
0.67
2YC36FXD#D
1.5
Propeller
70
FBQ100DV1
RZR100KUV1
V1: 1 phase, 220-240V, 50Hz
10.0 (5.0-11.2)
34,100 (17,100-38,200)
8,600 (4,300-9,600)
FBQ100DV1
3001,400700
3161.75
0.383
Sirocco fan
350
32/23
1,130/812
38/33
*3
46
9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
I.D.25 O.D.32
BRC1C61
BRC4C62
RZR100KUV1
Ivory white
1,170900320
1521.4
1.027
JT100G-VD@T3
1.8
Propeller
70+70
m/min
52
95
dB(A)
dB(A)
kg
mm
mm
mm
48
47
61
9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
26.0 (Hole) *4
30
R-410A
0.75
C: 3D065826A
49
45
92
9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
26.0 (Hole) *4
30
R-410A
1.2
C: 3D065826A
Power supply
kW
Btu/h
kcal/h
Indoor unit
Colour
Dimensions
HWD
Type
Coil
Rowsstagesfin pitch
Face area
Type
Motor output
Fan
Air flow
rate (H/L) Cooling
Air filter
Mass (weight)
Liquid
Piping
Gas
connections
Drain
Wired *5
Wireless
Outdoor unit
Colour
Dimentions
HWD
Type
Coil
Rowsstagesfin pitch
Face area
Model
Comp.
Type
Motor output
Type
Motor output
Fan
Air flow
Cooling
rate
Cooling
Sound level *6
Night quiet mode
Mass (weight)
Liquid
Piping
Gas
connections
Drain
Safety devices
Capacity step
Refrigerant control
Max. length
Ref. Piping
Model
Refrigerant
Model
Ref. Oil
Charge
Drawing No.
Notes:
mm
m
W
m/min
cfm
dB(A)
kg
mm
mm
mm
mm
kW
%
m
m
kg
L
*1. The above data based on the conditions shown in the table below.
Mark
Cooling
Piping length
(1)

7.5m
(Horizontal)
Conversion formulae
kcal/h=kW860
Btu/h=kW3412
cfm=m/min35.3
*2. Capacities are net, including a deduction for cooling for indoor fan motor heat.
*3. Air filter is not standard accessory, but please mount it in the duct system of the suction side.
Select its colorimetric method (gravity method) 50% or more.
*4. In case of drain piping for outdoor unit, drain piping kit (option) is needed.
*5. Wire for remote controller : Field supplied.
21
Specifications
EDSG281001

Model
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
FBQ125DV1
RZR125KUV1
V1: 1 phase, 220-240V, 50Hz
12.5 (5.7-14.0)
42,700 (19,400-47,800)
10,800 (4,900-12,000)
FBQ125DV1
3001,400700
3161.75
0.383
Sirocco fan
350
39/28
1,377/988
40/36
*3
46
9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
I.D.25 O.D.32
BRC1C61
BRC4C62
RZR125KUV1
Ivory white
1,170900320
2521.4
1.01
JT100G-VD@T3
2.4
Propeller
70+70
FBQ140DV1
RZR140KUV1
V1: 1 phase, 220-240V, 50Hz
14.0 (6.25-15.4)
47,800 (21,300-52,500)
12,000 (5,400-13,200)
FBQ140DV1
3001,400700
3161.75
0.383
Sirocco fan
350
39/28
1,377/988
40/36
*3
46
9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
I.D.25 O.D.32
BRC1C61
BRC4C62
RZR140KUV1
Ivory white
1,170900320
2521.4
1.01
JT100G-VD@T3
2.9
Propeller
70+70
m/min
95
95
dB(A)
dB(A)
kg
mm
mm
mm
50
45
97
9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
26.0 (Hole) *4
Compressor revolution speed control (Inverter system)
30
R-410A
1.2
C : 3D065826A
50
46
97
9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
26.0 (Hole) *4
30
R-410A
1.2
C : 3D065826A
Power supply
kW
Btu/h
kcal/h
Indoor unit
Colour
Dimensions
HWD
Type
Coil
Rowsstagesfin pitch
Face area
Type
Motor output
Fan
Air flow
rate (H/L) Cooling
Air filter
Mass (weight)
Liquid
Piping
Gas
connections
Drain
Wired *5
Wireless
Outdoor unit
Colour
Dimensions
HWD
Type
Coil
Rowsstagesfin pitch
Face area
Model
Comp.
Type
Motor output
Type
Motor output
Fan
Air Flow Cooling
Rate
Cooling
Sound level *6
Night quiet mode
Mass (weight)
Liquid
Piping
Gas
connections
Drain
Safety devices
Capacity control method
Refrigerant control
Max. length
Ref. piping
Model
Refrigerant
Model
Ref. oil
Charge
Drawing No.
Notes:
mm
m
W
m/min
cfm
dB(A)
kg
mm
mm
mm
mm
kW
%
m
m
kg
L
Mark
Cooling
Piping length
(1)

7.5m
(Horizontal)
Conversion formulae
kcal/h=kW860
Btu/h=kW3412
cfm=m/min35.3
22
EDSG281001
Specifications

Model
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
FBQ100DV1
RZR100HUY1
3 phase, 380-415V, 50Hz
10.0 (5.0-11.2)
34,100 (17,100-38,200)
8,600 (4,300-9,600)
FBQ100DV1
3001,400700
3161.75
0.383
Sirocco fan
350
32/23
1,130/812
38/33
*3
46
9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
I.D.25 O.D.32
BRC1C61
BRC4C62
RZR100HUY1
Ivory white
1,345900320
1601.4
1.172
JT1G-VDYR@T
1.6
Propeller
70+70
FBQ125DV1
RZR125HUY1
3 phase, 380-415V, 50Hz
12.5 (5.7-14.0)
42,700 (19,400-47,800)
10,800 (4,900-12,000)
FBQ125DV1
3001,400700
3161.75
0.383
Sirocco fan
350
39/28
1,377/988
40/36
*3
46
9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
I.D.25 O.D.32
BRC1C61
BRC4C62
RZR125HUY1
Ivory white
1,345900320
2601.4
1.153
JT1G-VDYR@T
2.3
Propeller
70+70
m/min
100
100
dB(A)
dB(A)
kg
mm
mm
mm
49
45
94
9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
26.0 (Hole) *4
30
R-410A
1.2
C : 3D065826A
50
45
104
9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
26.0 (Hole) *4
30
R-410A
1.2
C : 3D065826A
Power supply
kW
Btu/h
kcal/h
Indoor unit
Colour
Dimensions
HWD
Type
Coil
Rowsstagesfin pitch
Face area
Type
Motor output
Fan
Air flow
rate (H/L) Cooling
Air filter
Mass (weight)
Liquid
Piping
Gas
connections
Drain
Wired *5
Wireless
Outdoor unit
Colour
Dimensions
HWD
Type
Coil
Rowsstagesfin pitch
Face area
Model
Comp.
Type
Motor output
Type
Motor output
Fan
Air Flow Cooling
Rate
Cooling
Sound level *6
Night quiet mode
Mass (weight)
Liquid
Piping
Gas
connections
Drain
Safety devices
Capacity control method
Refrigerant control
Max. length
Ref. piping
Model
Refrigerant
Model
Ref. oil
Charge
Drawing No.
Notes:
mm
m
W
m/min
cfm
dB(A)
kg
mm
mm
mm
mm
kW
%
m
m
kg
L
Mark
Cooling
Piping length
(1)

7.5m
(Horizontal)
Conversion formulae
kcal/h=kW860
Btu/h=kW3412
cfm=m/min35.3
23
Specifications
EDSG281001

Model
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
FBQ140DV1
RZR140HUY1
3 phase, 380-415V, 50Hz
14.0 (6.25-15.4)
47,800 (21,300-52,500)
12,000 (5,400-13,200)
FBQ140DV1
3001,400700
3161.75
0.383
Sirocco fan
350
39/28
1,377/988
40/36
*3
46
9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
I.D.25 O.D.32
BRC1C61
BRC4C62
RZR140HUY1
Ivory white
1,345900320
2601.4
1.153
JT1G-VDYR@T
2.8
Propeller
70+70
m/min
100
dB(A)
dB(A)
kg
mm
mm
mm
50
46
104
9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
26.0 (Hole) *4
30
R-410A
1.2
C: 3D065826A
Power supply
kW
Btu/h
kcal/h
Indoor unit
Colour
Dimensions
HWD
Type
Coil
Rowsstagesfin pitch
Face area
Type
Motor output
Fan
Air flow
rate (H/L) Cooling
Air filter
Mass (weight)
Liquid
Piping
Gas
connections
Drain
Wired *5
Wireless
Outdoor unit
Colour
Dimentions
HWD
Type
Coil
Rowsstagesfin pitch
Face area
Model
Comp.
Type
Motor output
Type
Motor output
Fan
Air flow
Cooling
rate
Cooling
Sound level *6
Night quiet mode
Mass (weight)
Liquid
Piping
Gas
connections
Drain
Safety devices
Capacity step
Refrigerant control
Max. length
Ref. Piping
Model
Refrigerant
Model
Ref. Oil
Charge
Drawing No.
Notes:
mm
m
W
m/min
cfm
dB(A)
kg
mm
mm
mm
mm
kW
%
m
m
kg
L
Mark
Cooling
Piping length
(1)

7.5m
(Horizontal)
Conversion formulae
kcal/h=kW860
Btu/h=kW3412
cfm=m/min35.3
24
EDSG281001
Dimensions and Service Space
5. Dimensions and Service Space

5.1
Indoor Unit
5.1.1
FCQ
3D058460B
Unit (mm)
FCQ71KVEA
25
EDSG281001
26
3D058469B
Unit (mm)
FCQ100KVEA / FCQ125KVEA / FCQ140KVEA
260
25
750
ADJUSTABLE (0~545)
62.5
196
575
A ARROW VIEW
700
211
172
700
1
62.5
PIPE CONNECTION
SIDE
DRAIN CONNECTION
SIDE
NOTE) 2.
145
183
285
45 OR LESS
62.5
320
45 OR LESS
NOTE) 4.
575
A
NOTE) 1. STICKING LOCATION FOR MANUFACTURE'S LABEL
MANUFACTURE'S LABEL FOR INDOOR UNIT : ON THE BELL MOUTH INSIDE
SUCTION GRILLE
MANUFACTURE'S LABEL FOR DECORATION PANEL : ON THE INNER FRAME
INSIDE SUCTION GRILLE
2. IN CASE OF USING WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER, THIS POSITION WILL
BE A SIGNAL RECEIVER.
REFER TO THE DRAWING OF WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER IN DETAIL. DECORATION PANEL
3. WHEN THE TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY IN THE CEILING EXCEED 30C
BYFQ60BW1 WHITE Ral 9010
AND RH 80% OR THE FRESH AIR IS INDUCTED INTO THE CEILING OR THE
UNIT CONTINUES 24 HOUR OPERATION, AN ADDITIONAL INSULATION
(THICKNESS 10mm OR MORE OF GLASSWOOL OR POLYETHYLENE FORM)
IS REQUIRED.
4. THOUGH THE INSTALLATION IS ACCEPTABLE UP TO MAXIMUM OF 660mm
SQUARE CEILING OPENING, KEEP THE CLEARANCE OF 45mm OR LESS
BETWEEN THE MAIN UNIT AND THE CEILING OPENING SO THAT THE PANEL
OVERLAP ALLOWANCE CAN BE ENSURED.
SUSPENTION BOLT
4-M8~M10
205
533 (SUSPENTION POSITION)

5
62.5
585~660 (CEILING OPENING SPACE)

(180)
55
30
295 OR MORE
150
89
DRAIN HOSE (ACCESSORY)
SUCTION GRILLE
AIR DISCHARGE GRILL
REMOTE CONTROL CODE
AND CONTROL WIRING CONNECTION
4 POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
3 DRAIN PIPE CONNECTION
2 GAS PIPE CONNECTION
1 LIQUID PIPE CONNECTION
PART NAME
ITEM
8
7
6
5
1500mm OR MORE *
1500mm
OR MORE *
3D039003B
VP20 (O.D. 26)

9.5 (FLARE CONNECTION)
REMARK
I.D. 25 (OUTLET)
* WHEN THE DISCHARGE GRILL IS CLOSEOUT,

THE REQUIRED SPACE IS 200mm OR MORE.
1500mm
OR MORE *
CEILING
OUTDOOR AIR INTAKE

(DIRECT CONNECTION)
B ARROW VIEW
100
210
REQUIRED SPACE
1500mm OR MORE *
4-M4 HOLE
89
Unit (mm)
5.1.2
1500 OR MORE
(REQUIRED SPACE)
FROM THE FLOOR SIDE
2500 OR MORE
FOR HEIGHT INSTALLATION

300 OR LESS 533 (SUSPENTION POSITION)
320
EDSG281001
FFQ
FFQ25BV1B / FFQ35BV1B
27
260
25
62.5
196
575
A ARROW VIEW
211
172
700
1
62.5
PIPE CONNECTION
SIDE
DRAIN CONNECTION
SIDE
NOTE) 2.
45 OR LESS
62.5
320
45 OR LESS
NOTE) 4.
575
533 (SUSPENTION POSITION)

5
62.5

(180)
700
145
183
285
A
NOTE) 1. STICKING LOCATION FOR MANUFACTURE'S LABEL
MANUFACTURE'S LABEL FOR INDOOR UNIT : ON THE BELL MOUTH INSIDE
SUCTION GRILLE
MANUFACTURE'S LABEL FOR DECORATION PANEL : ON THE INNER FRAME
INSIDE SUCTION GRILLE
2. IN CASE OF USING WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER, THIS POSITION WILL
BE A SIGNAL RECEIVER.
REFER TO THE DRAWING OF WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER IN DETAIL. DECORATION PANEL
3. WHEN THE TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY IN THE CEILING EXCEED 30C
BYFQ60BW1 WHITE Ral 9010
AND RH 80% OR THE FRESH AIR IS INDUCTED INTO THE CEILING OR THE
UNIT CONTINUES 24 HOUR OPERATION, AN ADDITIONAL INSULATION
(THICKNESS 10mm OR MORE OF GLASSWOOL OR POLYETHYLENE FORM)
IS REQUIRED.
4. THOUGH THE INSTALLATION IS ACCEPTABLE UP TO MAXIMUM OF 660mm
SQUARE CEILING OPENING, KEEP THE CLEARANCE OF 45mm OR LESS
BETWEEN THE MAIN UNIT AND THE CEILING OPENING SO THAT THE PANEL
OVERLAP ALLOWANCE CAN BE ENSURED.
SUSPENTION BOLT
4-M8~M10
205
750
ADJUSTABLE (0~545)
55
30
295 OR MORE
28
1500 OR MORE
(REQUIRED SPACE)
FROM THE FLOOR SIDE
2500 OR MORE
FOR HEIGHT INSTALLATION

300 OR LESS 533 (SUSPENTION POSITION)
320
150
89
DRAIN HOSE (ACCESSORY)
SUCTION GRILLE
AIR DISCHARGE GRILL
REMOTE CONTROL CODE
AND CONTROL WIRING CONNECTION
4 POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
3 DRAIN PIPE CONNECTION
2 GAS PIPE CONNECTION
1 LIQUID PIPE CONNECTION
PART NAME
ITEM
8
7
6
5
1500mm OR MORE *
1500mm
OR MORE *
3D039005B
VP20 (O.D. 26)

REMARK
I.D. 25 (OUTLET)
* WHEN THE DISCHARGE GRILL IS CLOSEOUT,

THE REQUIRED SPACE IS 200mm OR MORE.
1500mm
OR MORE *
CEILING
OUTDOOR AIR INTAKE

(DIRECT CONNECTION)
B ARROW VIEW
100
210
REQUIRED SPACE
1500mm OR MORE *
4-M4 HOLE
89
Unit (mm)

EDSG281001
FFQ50BV1B / FFQ60BV1B
EDSG281001
5.1.3
FHQ
3D037996A
Unit (mm)
FHQ35BVV1B
29
155
Obstacle
55
Floor side
Drain pipe
connection VP20
(For left piping)
30 or more
(Service space)
16
The front
960
(Hanging position)
920
17
127
142
170
105
13
4-M8 ~ M10
18
90
58
85
160
(Note.2)
Brand name plate
30 or more
(Service space)
10
36
192
135
40
105
Note) 1. Location of unit's Name plate : Bottom of fan housing inside the suction grille.
2. In case of using wireless remote controller, this position will be a signal
receiver. Refer to the drawing of wireless remote controller in detail.
3. The remote control code is the standard <about 3m outside the machine> attached.
(0.5mm2 2 wicks O.D. 5.4)
(It is not attached to VRV.)
For height installaion
80
(Required space)
80
From the floor side 2500 or more
680
300 or more
(Required space)
210
Hanging bolt
195
11
45
50
65
145
100
60
36
26
Upward drain pipe connection

Upward gas pipe connection
Upward liquid pipe connection
16
17
18
3D027536D
Slit hole
Hole of wall for taking out in piping back
15
Slit hole
Right side drain pipe connection
14
Slit hole
Left back drain pipe connection
Left side drain pipe connection
Right side pipe connection

12
13
Slit hole
Upward piping and wiring connection opening lid

11
M4
Suspention bracket
8
Backward piping and wiring connection opening lid
VP 20
Earth terminal (Inside the electric components box)
7
6.4 flare
Drain pipe connection
6
10
12.7 flare
4
Description
Liquid pipe connection
Air filter
3
Name
Gas pipe connection
Air suction grille

2
105
65
Position : Hole of wall

for taking out in piping back
(View from the front)
60
(Required space)
Air discharge grille
14
Number
55
80
15
Position slit hole for taking out in piping back
60
12
115 60
5
170
40
260
300
90
102
225
(Hanging position)
275
185
275
135
30
155
Unit (mm)

EDSG281001
FHQ50BVV1B
Obstacle
Floor side
55
Drain pipe
connection VP20
(For left piping)
30 or more
(Service space)
80
18 17
The front
1160
1120
(Hanging position)
Note) 1. Location of unit's Name plate: Bottom of fan housing inside the suction grille.
2. In case of using wireless remote controller, this position will be a signal receiver.
Refer to the drawing of wireless remote controller in detail.
(0.5mm2 2wicks O. D. 5.4)
13
5
(Required space)

155
680
300 or more
(Required space)
Hanging bolt
4-M8~M10
195
300
80
170
105
127
65
80
14
15
65
3D037994A
Slit hole
Slit hole
Slit hole
Slit hole
100
60
36
26
12.7 flare
6.4 flare
VP20
M4
Description

105
145 60
Name
Air suction grille
Air filter
Gas pipe connection
Suspention bracket
55
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
11
45
Brand name plate

(Note. 2)
30 or more
(Services pace)
60
12

50
36
85
102
160
185
192
10
135
Unit (mm)
115 60
5
135 (Required space)
170
105
90
16 142
58
40
210
260
(Hanging position)
275
90
40
275
155

225
EDSG281001
FHQ60BVV1B
31
155
(Required space)
13
Obstacle
55
Floor side
4-M8 ~ M10
Drain pipe
connection VP20
(For left piping)
30 or more
(Service space)
80
The front
1160
(Hanging position)
1120
18 17 16
105
80
90
170
127
142
58
85
185
(Note.2)
Brand name plate
30 or more
(Service space)
10
36
192
135
40
105
50
11
45
65
145

11
12
18
3D027538F
26
36
60
16
100
15
17
Slit hole
14
Slit hole
Slit hole

9
10
Suspention bracket
8
13
Slit hole

7
M4
VP20
9.5 flare

6
15.9 flare
Gas pipe connection
5
Description
Air filter
Name
Air suction grille
14
65

105
60
(Required space)
Number
55
80
15

60
12
40
170
90
210
2
(0.5mm 2 wicks O.D. 5.4)
680
300 or more
(Required space)
(Hanging position)
Hanging bolt
195
300
160
275
260
275
102
225
155
115 60
135
32
5
Unit (mm)

EDSG281001
FHQ71BVV1B
155
13
Obstacle
55
680
Floor side
300 or more
Drain pipe
connection VP20
(For left piping)
(Service space)
30 or more
80
The front
1400
(Hanging position)
1360
18 17
16
105
80
170
127
142
90
102
185
(Service space)
30 or more
10
(Note.2)
36
192
Brand name plate
85
58
135
40
105
11
65
145
100
60
36

16
18
26
Slit hole

15
Slit hole

14
Slit hole

12

11
13
Slit hole

3D044893A
M4
Suspention bracket
8
9
VP20

7
10
9.5 flare
15.9 flare
17
115 60
Description
Gas pipe connection
Name
Air filter
4
135
Position:Hole of wall
105
60
Unit (mm)
65
5
Air suction grille

3
14
80
15

55
60
Number
45
50
12
(Required space)
170
40
210
(Required space)
(Required space)
3.The remote control code is the standard <about 3m outside the machine> attached.
(0.5mm2wicksO.D. 5.4)
90
260
Hanging bolt
4-M8 ~ M10
195
300
155
(Hanging position)
275
160
275

225
EDSG281001
FHQ100BVV1B
33
13
(Required space)
Obstacle
55
680
Floor side
Drain pipe
connection VP20
(For left piping)
30 or more
(Service space)
80
3.The remote control code is the standard <about 3m outside the machine> attached.
(0.5mm2wicksO.D. 5.4)
(It is attached to VRV.)
155
210
Hanging bolt
4-M8 ~ M10
195
1550
The front
1590
(Hanging position)
18 17
16
105
80
170
127
142
90
30 or more
(Service space)
10
185
(Note.2)
Brand name plate
85
135
14
15
Air filter
65
145
60
36
26

17
18
16
100
Slit hole

14
Slit hole

13
15
Slit hole

11
12

9
10
3D044894B
M4
Slit hole
VP20

7
Suspention bracket
9.5 flare
15.9 flare
115 60
Description
Name

105
60
Gas pipe connection
Air suction grille
80
3
4

55
60
Number
11
45
50
40
36
192
58
12
(Required space)
105
135
170
40
260
300
300 or more
(Required space)
(Hanging position)
275
160
275
90
102
225
65
34
155
Unit (mm)

EDSG281001
FHQ125BVV1B
EDSG281001
5.1.4
FBQ-B
3D053083
Unit (mm)
FBQ50BV1A
35
250
208
150
300
245
215
150
135
300
SERVICE
SPACE
NOTE) 2
5 150=750
785
1000
760
65
A VIEW
60
50
SUSPENSION BOLT
57
SERVICE SPACE
300 OR MORE
2
45
25
46
440
315
800
10
25
FBQ60 12.7 (FLARE CONNECTION)

FBQ71 15.9 (FLARE CONNECTION)
NOTE) 1. LOCATION OF UNIT'S NAME PLATE: FAN HOSING SURFACE.

2. IF THE CEILING IS NOT REMOVABLE, A 300mm SERVICE SPACE
MUST BE KEPT BETWEEN THE UNIT AND THE CEILING.
3. MOUNT THE AIR FILTER AT THE SUCTION SIDE.
SELECT ITS COLORIMETHOD (GRAVITY METHOD)
50% OR MORE.
4. PIPE SPECIFICATION
27
6 120=720
856
833
135 120
160
228
67
150
200
630
(SUSPENSION POSITION)
195
11 65=715
2 65=130
145
3 65=195
160P. C. D.
125
(KNOCK HOLE)
600
3D053084A
VP25 (O. D. 32, I. D. 25)

NOTE) 4.
6.4 FLARE CONNECTION
DESCRIPTION
VP25 (O. D. 32, I. D. 25)
600 600
B VIEW
FRESH AIR INTAKE POSITION
INSPECTION HOLE
SWITCH BOX
SUCTION FLANGE
DISCHARGE FLANGE
DRAIN HOLE
POWER WIRING PORT
INTERUNIT WIRING PORT
DRAIN PIPE CONNETION
GAS PIPE CONNECTION
LIQUID PIPE CONNECTION
NAME
6-M5HOLE
(CIRCUMFERENCE)
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
NUMBER
12 65=780
1050
(SUSPENSION POSITION)
36
100
Unit (mm)

EDSG281001
FBQ60BV1A / FBQ71BV1A
EDSG281001
5.1.5
FBQ-D
3D060775C
Unit (mm)
FBQ71DV1
37
EDSG281001
38
3D060776C
Unit (mm)
FBQ100DV1 / FBQ125DV1 / FBQ140DV1
EDSG281001
5.2
Wired Remote Controller
BRC1C61
Unit (mm)
3D028952
BRC1D61
Unit (mm)
NOTE) 1. REMOTE CONTROLLER CORD AND STAPLE ARE NOT ATTACHED.
THEY ARE FIELD SUPPLIED PARTS.
SPECIFICATIONS OF CORD
REMOTE CONTROLLER DIMENSIONS
SIZE
TOTAL
LENGTH
FOR AUSTRALIA
FOR OTHER COUNTRIES
SHIELD WIRE
VINYL CORD WITH SHEATH OR CABLE
(INSULATED THICKNESS: 1mm OR MORE) (INSULATED THICKNESS: 1mm OR MORE)
0.75 ~ 1.25mm2
500m
38
84
120
42
TYPE
120
18
17
CORD OUTLET HOLE
23 28
46
INSTALLATION METHOD
A EXPOSED BODY, EXPOSED CORD
B EXPOSED BODY, EMBEDDED CORD

C EXPOSED BODY, EMBEDDED CORD
17
CONDUIT
REMOTE CONTROLLER
REMOTE CONTROLLER
REMOTE CONTROLLER
(
17
0~5
BETWEEN REMOTE
CONTROLLER AND
CONTROL BOX
117
STAPLE
17
THROUGH HOLE
(12 ~ 16)
CONTROL BOX
3D048117
39
EDSG281001
BRC1E61
Unit (mm)
3D064037
40
EDSG281001
5.3
Wireless Remote Controller
BRC7F632F (for FCQ)
Unit (mm)
3D052918C
BRC7E531W (for FFQ)

Unit (mm)
RECEIVER INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
TRANSMITTING PART
157
DRAIN PIPING SIDE
REFRIGERANT PIPING SIDE
RECEIVER
62
17.5
REMOTE CONTROLLER HOLDER

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
<INSTALLATION TO WALL SURFACE>
LIQUID CRYSTAL
REMOTE CONTROLLER
(WIRELESS)
RECEIVER DETAIL
DECORATION PANEL
(BYFQ60BW1)
(BYFQ60B7W1)
(BYFQ60B8W1)
REMOTE CONTROLLER
HOLDER
3D038937A
41
EDSG281001
BRC7EA66 (for FHQ)

Unit (mm)
TRANSMITTING PART
157
RECEIVER INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

RECEIVER
17.5
62

< INSTALLATION TO WALL SURFACE >
RECEIVER DETAIL
LIQUID CRYSTAL
REMOTE CONTROLLER
(WIRELESS)
REMOTE CONTROLLER
HOLDER
3D028963B
BRC4C62 (for FBQ)

Unit (mm)
RECEIVER DETAIL
157
120

TRANSMITTING PART
62
17.5
18
0.5
35
2 5 9 Slot

< INSTALLATION TO WALL SURFACE >
Switch box
(Field Supplied
parts)
Service space for ceiling installation

more than 90
(Service space)
REMOTE CONTROLLER
HOLDER
NOTE Do not install more than 3 receivers in the vicinity of

one another.
With 4 or more units, there is always the possibility
of malfunction.
42
72
83.5
P1 P2
LIQUID CRYSTAL
REMOTE CONTROLLER
(WIRELESS)
106
(Ceiling Opening)
70
49
(Ceiling Opening)
3D007898B
EDSG281001
5.4
Outdoor Unit
3D059795E
Unit (mm)
43
EDSG281001
44
3D051657P
Unit (mm)
EDSG281001
3D054589C
Unit (mm)
RXS71FVMA
45
EDSG281001
3D065759
REMARK
ITEM
PART NAME
Unit (mm)
RZR71KUV1
46
EDSG281001
3D065775A
Unit (mm)
47
EDSG281001
48
3D065788A
Unit (mm)
EDSG281001
5.5
Installation Service Space
RZR71KUV1
3D046687C
49
EDSG281001
3D046687C
50
EDSG281001
3D046687C
51
EDSG281001

3D058489C
52
EDSG281001
3D058489C
53
EDSG281001
3D058489C
54
EDSG281001
Piping Diagrams
6. Piping Diagrams
6.1
Indoor Unit
FFQ25BV1B / FFQ35BV1B / FFQ50BV1B / FFQ60BV1B
4D039335
FHQ35BVV1B / FHQ50BVV1B / FHQ60BVV1B / FHQ71BVV1B / FHQ100BVV1B / FHQ125BVV1B
C : 4D037995H
55
Piping Diagrams
EDSG281001
FBQ50BV1A / FBQ60BV1A / FBQ71BV1A
4D053090A
56
EDSG281001
6.2
Piping Diagrams
Indoor Unit + Outdoor Unit
1
3D065423
FCQ71KVEA / FHQ71BVV1B / FBQ71DV1 + RZR71KUV1
57
Piping Diagrams
EDSG281001
3D065422A
58
EDSG281001
Piping Diagrams
1
3D065869A

FCQ140KVEA / FBQ140DV1 + RZR140KUV1
59
Piping Diagrams
EDSG281001
3D065421B
FCQ100KVEA / FHQ100BVV1B / FBQ100DV1 + RZR100HUY1
60
EDSG281001
Piping Diagrams
1
3D065843B

FCQ140KVEA / FBQ140DV1 + RZR140HUY1
61
Piping Diagrams
6.3
EDSG281001
Outdoor Unit
3D047318G
62
EDSG281001
Piping Diagrams
1
3D051636N
63
Piping Diagrams
EDSG281001
3D051637Q
64
EDSG281001
Piping Diagrams
1
3D054593F
RXS71FVMA
65
INDOOR UNIT
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
(HUMIDITY SENSOR UNIT)
C1
CAPACITOR
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
(SERVICE MONITOR GREEN)
K1R
MAGNETIC RELAY
KPR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1P)
M1F
MOTOR (INDOOR FAN)
M1P MOTOR (DRAIN PUMP)
M1S MOTOR (SWING FLAP)
R1T
THERMISTOR (AIR)
R2T
THERMISTOR (COIL)
R3T
THERMISTOR PTC
S1L
FLOAT SWITCH
SS1
SELECTOR SWITCH
(EMERGENCY)
V1R
DIODE BRIDGE
X1M TERMINAL STRIP
X2M TERMINAL STRIP
Z1C
FERRITE CORE
Z1F
NOISE FILTER
PS
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
RC
SIGNAL RECEIVER CIRCUIT
TC
SIGNAL TRANSMISSION CIRCUIT
RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT (ATTACHED TO
WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER)
A3P
A4P
BS1
PUSH BUTTON (ON/OFF)
H1P
LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
(ON-RED)
H2P
(TIMER-GREEN)
H3P
(FILTER SIGN-RED)
H4P
(DEFROST-ORANGE)
SELECTOR SWITCH
SS1
(MAIN/SUB)
SELECTOR SWITCH
SS2
(WIRELESS ADDRESS SET)
CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS
X24A CONNECTOR (WIRELESS
REMOTE CONTROLLER)
X33A CONNECTOR
(ADAPTOR FOR WIRING)
X35A CONNECTOR (GROUP CONTROL
ADAPTOR)
WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER
THERMISTOR (AIR)
R1T
SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB)
SS1
A1P
A2P
WHT
RED
2
3
CONTROL BOX
X35A X33A
A1P
A2P
X2M
X27A
A2P
CN1 R1T
X16A
X25A
YLW
YLW
Z1F K1R
RC TC
KPR
M
~
M1P
+
PS
X15A
X24A
SS1 NOTE) 3
X35A
NOTE) 3
HAP
100~140-CLASS
N=1
X36A
X33A
NOTE) 3
X30A
NORM. EMG.
X18A
MS
M1F 3~
Z1C
X20A
- C1
R3T
t V1R+
S1L
YLW
ORG
BLU
BLK
M1S
MSW
X1M
F2
F1
P2
P1
X24A
NOTE) 3
A1P
SS2
SS1
A4P
H1P
H2P BS1
H3P
H4P
MS
3~
71-CLASS
M1F
WHT
Z1C
X20A
N=1
NOTE) 2
CENTRAL REMOTE
CONTROLLER
P2
P1 R1T WIRED REMOTE
CONTROLLER
SS1
X1A
X1A
RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT
X2A
A3P
3D058379A
NOTES)
1.
: TERMINAL
,
: CONNECTOR
: FIELD WIRING
2. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTALLATION
MANUAL.
3. X24A, X33A, X35A ARE CONNECTED WHEN THE OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES ARE BEING USED.
4. REMOTE CONTROLLER MODEL VARIES ACCORDING TO THE COMBINATION SYSTEM, CONFIRM ENGINEERING DATA AND CATALOGS,
ETC. BEFORE CONNECTING.
5. CONFIRM THE METHOD OF SETTING THE SELECTOR SWITCH (SS1, SS2) BY INSTALLATION MANUAL AND ENGINEERING DATA, ETC.
6. SYMBOLS SHOWS AS FOLLOWS: RED : RED BLK : BLACK WHT : WHITE YLW : YELLOW GRN : GREEN ORG : ORANGE BRN : BROWN
PNK : PINK GRY : GRAY BLU : BLUE
7. SHOWS ONLY IN CASE OF PROTECTED PIPES.
USE H07RN-F IN CASE OF NO PROTECTION.
X1M
X24A
REMOTE CONTROLLER
INDOOR UNIT INDOOR UNIT

(MASTER)
(SLAVE)
X2M
X2M
1
1
2
2
3
3
IN CASE OF SIMULTANEOUS
OPERATION SYSTEM
H05VV-U4G2.5
NOTE) 7
GRN/YLW
BLK
X2M
A1P
WHT
ORG
BRN
BLU
TO OUTDOOR
UNIT
TO OUTDOOR UNIT
R2T
RED
66
WHT
ORG
BRN
BLU
7.1
RED
GRN
Wiring Diagrams
EDSG281001
7. Wiring Diagrams
Indoor Unit
FCQ71KVEA / FCQ100KVEA / FCQ125KVEA / FCQ140KVEA
EDSG281001
Wiring Diagrams
1
3D064844
67
X15A
X25A
X33A
X35A
X40A
X60A
X61A
A3P
A4P
BS1
H1P
H2P
H3P
H4P
SS1
SS2

LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (ON-RED)
LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (TIMER-GREEN)
LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (FILTER SIGN-RED)
LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (DEFROST-ORANGE)
SELECTOR SWITCH (WIRELESS ADDRESS SET)
CONNECTOR (FLOAT SWITCH)
CONNECTOR (DRAIN PUMP)
CONNECTOR (ADAPTOR FOR WIRING)
CONNECTOR (GROUP CONTROL ADAPTOR)
CONNECTOR (ON/OFF INPUT FROM OUTSIDE)
CONNECTOR
(INTERFACE ADAPTOR FOR SKY AIR SERIES)
WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER

(RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT)

CAPACITOR (M1F)
FUSE (F5A 250V)
LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (SERVICE MONITOR GREEN)
MAGNETIC RELAY (M1S)
MAGNETIC RELAY (M1P)
MOTOR (INDOOR FAN)
MOTOR (SWING FLAP)
THERMO SWITCH (M1F EMBEDDED)
THERMISTOR (AIR)
THERMISTOR (COIL-1)
THERMISTOR (COIL-2)
LIMIT SWITCH (SWING FLAP)
TRANSFORMER (220-240V/22V)
PHASE CONTROL CIRCUIT
TERMINAL BLOCK
TERMINAL BLOCK
THERMISTOR (AIR)
X1M X2M
C1 T1R
X2M
A1P
X2M
F1U
1 BLK
2 WHT
3 RED
: CONNECTOR
X40A
X27A
A1P
RC
X60A
X61A
TC
X19A
t
X17A
X33A
X25A NOTE) 6
X35A HAP
X20A
X15A
X14A
KAR X29A
V1TR
S1Q
MSW
~
M1S
M1F
NOTE) 6
BLK
BLK
BLK
RED
M
~
Q1M
X1M
SS1
P2
P2
X24A
P1 R1T
P1
NOTE)4 X5A
WIRED REMOTE
CONTROLLER
GRY
PRP
BLU
C1
X26A
: CONNECTER COLOUR FOR PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD.
: CONNECTER COLOUR FOR COMPONENTS.
: CONNECTER DISCRIMINATION COLOUR FOR COMPONENTS.
X10A T1R X11A
YLW
WHT
YLW
R3T
KPR
X18A
R2T
3D037842D
2.
: FIELD WIRING
3. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED
INSTALLATION MANUAL.
4. X24A IS CONNECTED WHEN THE WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER KIT IS BEING USED.
5. REMOTE CONTROLLER MODEL VARIES ACCORDING TO THE COMBINATION SYSTEM, CONFIRM ENGINEERING MATERIALS AND
CATALOGS, ETC. BEFORE CONNECTING.
6. IN CASE INSTALLING THE DRAIN PUMP(M1P), REMOVE THE JUMPER CONNECTOR OF X15A AND EXECUTE THE ADDITIONAL
WIRING FOR FLOAT SWITCH AND DRAIN PUMP.
7. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS: RED : RED BLK : BLACK WHT : WHITE YLW : YELLOW PRP : PURPLE GRY : GRAY BLU : BLUE
NOTES)
1.
: TERMINAL
CONTROL BOX
A1P
1
2
3
TO OUTDOOR UNIT
H05VV-U4G2.5
A3P
A4P
SS1
H1P
REMOTE
H2PBS1
CONTROLLER
SS2
H3P
X24A X2A
H4P
NOTE) 4
X1A X1A
X2M
1
2
3
INDOOR UNIT INDOOR UNIT

(MASTER)
(SLAVE)
OPERATION SYSTEM
TO OUTDOOR UNIT
R1T
YLW
WHT
68
R1T
SS1
A1P
C1
F1U
HAP
KAR
KPR
M1F
M1S
Q1M
R1T
R2T
R3T
S1Q
T1R
V1TR
X1M
X2M
RC
TC
Wiring Diagrams
EDSG281001
FHQ35BVV1B / FHQ50BVV1B / FHQ60BVV1B
H1P
CAPACITOR (M1F)
(SERVICE MONITOR GREEN) H2P
SELECTOR SWITCH
(MAIN/SUB)
MOTOR (SWING FLAP) H4P

THERMISTOR (AIR)
THERMISTOR (COIL)
LIMIT SWITCH (SWING FLAP) SS2
TRANSFORMER (220-240V/22V)
M1S
Q1M
R1T
R2T
S1Q
T1R
SELECTOR SWITCH
(WIRELESS ADDRESS SET)
TERMINAL BLOCK
X25A CONNECTOR (DRAIN PUMP)
SIGNAL RECEIVER CIRCUIT X33A CONNECTOR
2.
TO OUTDOOR UNIT
X61A
X40A
X60A
X2M
CONTROL BOX
T1R
C1
X1M
X35A X24A
A1P
X15A X33A X25A
X2A
SS2
SS1
X1A
X1A
A3P
H05VV-U4G2.5
A2P
H1P
BS1
H2P
H3P
H4P
X40A
X27A
A1P
RC
X60A
X61A
R1T
TC
X19A
R2T
X25A
KPR
X33A
X5A
X15A
X14A
KAR X29A
X20A
X26A
X24A
NOTE)4
V1TR
X35A HAP
T1R X11A
t
NOTE)6
X10A
X18A
C1
SS1
P2
P1
R1T
S1Q
~
M1S
MSW
M1F
3D043825B
Q1M
WIRED REMOTE
CONTROLLER
NOTE)6
BLK
BLK
BLK
RED
GRY
PRP
BLU
P1
P2
X1M
3. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH
THE ATTACHED INSTALLATION MANUAL.
4. X24A IS CONNECTED WHEN THE WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER KIT IS BEING USED.
5. REMOTE CONTROLLER MODEL VARIES ACCORDING TO THE COMBINATION SYSTEM,
CONFIRM ENGINEERING MATERIALS AND CATALOGS, ETC. BEFORE CONNECTING.
6. IN CASE INSTALLING THE DRAIN PUMP (M1P), REMOVE THE JUMPER CONNECTOR OF X15A AND EXECUTE THE ADDITIONAL
WIRING FOR FLOAT SWITCH AND DRAIN PUMP.
7. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS: RED : RED BLK : BLACK WHT : WHITE YLW : YELLOW PRP : PURPLE GRY : GRAY BLU : BLUE
A1P
REMOTE
CONTROLLER
X24A
NOTE)4
X2M
: FIELD WIRING
X2M
OPERATION SYSTEM
INDOOR UNIT INDOOR UNIT TO OUTDOOR X2M
(MASTER) (SLAVE)
1 BLK
UNIT
2 WHT
1
1
3 RED
2
2
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB) X40A CONNECTOR

(ON/OFF INPUT FROM OUTSIDE) NOTES)
WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER
(RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT)
X60A CONNECTOR
: TERMINAL
1.
A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD X61A (INTERFACE ADAPTOR
,
: CONNECTOR
FOR SKY AIR SERIES)
A3P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
TC
WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER X35A CONNECTOR
(GROUP CONTROL ADAPTOR)
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR)
RC
X2M
V1TR PHASE CONTROL CIRCUIT CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS

X1M TERMINAL BLOCK
X15A CONNECTOR (FLOAT SWITCH)
SS1

(DEFROST-ORANGE)
MOTOR (INDOOR FAN)

(FILTER SIGN-RED)
M1F
KPR
MAGNETIC RELAY (M1S)

MAGNETIC RELAY (M1P) H3P

(TIMER-GREEN)

(ON-RED)
KAR
HAP
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD BS1
C1
YLW
WHT
A1P
EDSG281001
Wiring Diagrams
FHQ71BVV1B / FHQ100BVV1B / FHQ125BVV1B
69
CAPACITOR (M1F)
FUSE (250V, 5A, B )
F1U
HAP
MAGNETIC RELAY (M1P)
MOTOR (INDOOR FAN)
MOTOR (DRAIN PUMP)
THERMISTOR (AIR)
THERMISTOR (LIQUID)
THERMISTOR (COIL)
SELECTOR SWITCH
KPR
M1F
M1P
Q1M
R1T
R2T
R3T
SS1
TRANSFORMER
T1R
TERMINAL STRIP
X2M
RC
TC
SS1
(INTERFACE ADAPTOR
FOR SKYAIR SERIES)
CONNECTOR
X61A
(GROUP CONTROL ADAPTOR)
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
X60A
X35A
X33A
THERMISTOR (AIR)
R1T
TERMINAL STRIP
X1M
(220-240V/22V)
FLOAT SWITCH
S1L
(EMERGENCY)
MAGNETIC RELAY (M1F)
K1R~4R
(SERVICE MONITOR GREEN)
C1
X35A
X60A
X33A
X61A
C1
RED
X1M
T1R
X2M
CONTROL BOX
SS1 NOTE) 7
A1P
WHT
BLK
F1U
X27A
RC
X60A
X61A
INDOOR UNIT
TC
X18A
X33A
X25A WHT
KPR
X35A HAP
M
~
M1P
X10A T1R X11A

t
X19A
SS1
X17A
A1P
X1M
P2
P1
WIRED REMOTE
CONTROLLER
(OPTIONAL PARTS)
SS1
P2
P1 R1T
FH
K1R
X15A
FC
FL
FM
K3R
RED
GRY
BLK
BLU
S1L
M1F WHT
M
C1
~
YLW
Q1M
X21A NOTE) 7 NOTE) 7

ORG
FLL
X5A
K2R
K4R
NORM. EMG.
R3T
3D052779B
NOTES) 1.
: TERMINAL
,
: CONNECTOR
2.
: FIELD WIRING
3. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTALLATION MANUAL.
4. REMOTE CONTROLLER MODEL VARIES ACCORDING TO THE COMBINATION SYSTEM,
CONFIRM ENGINEERING MATERIALS AND CATALOGS, ETC. BEFORE CONNECTING.
5. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS : RED : RED BLK : BLACK WHT : WHITE YLW : YELLOW
GRN : GREEN GRY : GRAY BLU : BLUE ORG : ORANGE
6. CONFIRM THE METHOD OF SETTING THE SELECTOR SWITCH (SS1) BY INSTALLATION
MANUAL AND ENGINEERING MATERIALS, ETC.
7. GROUND THE SHIELD OF THE REMOTE CONTROLLER CORD TO THE INDOOR UNIT.
H05VV-U4G2.5
TO OUTDOOR UNIT
X2M
R2T
R1T
GRN/YLW
70
A1P
Wiring Diagrams
EDSG281001
EDSG281001
Wiring Diagrams
1
3D066031A
FBQ71DV1 / FBQ100DV1 / FBQ125DV1 / FBQ140DV1
71
Wiring Diagrams
7.2
EDSG281001
Outdoor Unit
3D046707M
72
EDSG281001
Wiring Diagrams
1
3D050981L
73
Wiring Diagrams
EDSG281001
3P193830
RXS50FAVMA
74
EDSG281001
Wiring Diagrams
1
3P177229B
RXS60FVMA
75
Wiring Diagrams
EDSG281001
3D053931J
RXS71FVMA
76
EDSG281001
Wiring Diagrams
1
3D065772A
RZR71KUV1
77
Wiring Diagrams
EDSG281001
3D065771A
78
EDSG281001
Wiring Diagrams
1
3D065770
79
Wiring Diagrams
7.3
EDSG281001
Field Wiring
C : 4D067292
80
EDSG281001
Electric Characteristics
8. Electric Characteristics
8.1
RXS50FAVMA / RXS60FVMA / RXS71FVMA

RKS25AVMG / RKS35AVMG / RKS50AVMG / RKS60AVMG
REPRESENTATIVE UNIT
COMBINATION
POWER SUPPLY
COMP
INDOOR UNIT
OUTDOOR UNIT
Hz-Volts
VOLTAGE
RANGE
MCA
MFA
RHz
FFQ25BV1B
RKS25AVMG
50 - 220
50 - 230
50 - 240
MAX.50Hz 264V
MIN.50Hz 198V
9.75
10
55
50 - 220
50 - 230
50 - 240
MAX.50Hz 264V
MIN.50Hz 198V
FFQ35BV1B
FHQ35BVV1B
FFQ50BV1B
FHQ50BVV1B
FBQ50BV1A
FFQ60BV1B
FHQ60BVV1B
FBQ60BV1A
FBQ71BV1A
RKS35AVMG
RKS35AVMG
RKS50AVMG
RKS50AVMG
RXS50FAVMA
RKS60AVMG
RKS60AVMG
RXS60FVMA
RXS71FVMA
IFM
FLA
FLA
23
0.16
55
0.6
23
0.16
55
0.6
23
0.22
62
0.6
53
0.32
55
0.7
53
0.32
62
0.6
53
0.19
85
0.7
53
0.39
55
0.7
53
0.39
62
0.6
53
0.39
85
0.8
66
0.40
110
0.8
3.7
3.5
3.4
4.8
9.75
10
79
4.6
4.4
4.5
50 - 220
50 - 230
50 - 240
MAX.50Hz 264V
MIN.50Hz 198V
50 - 220
50 - 230
50 - 240
MAX.50Hz 264V
MIN.50Hz 198V
50 - 220
50 - 230
50 - 240
MAX.50Hz 264V
MIN.50Hz 198V
50 - 220
50 - 230
50 - 240
MAX.50Hz 264V
MIN.50Hz 198V
50 - 220
50 - 230
50 - 240
MAX.50Hz 264V
MIN.50Hz 198V
50 - 220
50 - 230
50 - 240
MAX.50Hz 264V
MIN.50Hz 198V
50 - 220
50 - 230
50 - 240
MAX.50Hz 264V
MIN.50Hz 198V
50 - 220
50 - 230
50 - 240
MAX.50Hz 264V
MIN.50Hz 198V
SYMBOLS:
MCA : MIN. CIRCUIT AMPS (A)
MFA : MAX. FUSE AMPS (A)
RLA : RATED LOAD AMPS (A)
OFM : OUTDOOR FAN MOTOR
IFM : INDOOR FAN MOTOR
FLA : FULL LOAD AMPS (A)
W
: FAN MOTOR RATED OUTPUT (W)
RHz : RATED OPERATING FREQUENCY (Hz)
RLA
OFM
9.75
10
76
4.3
4.1
7.1
19.75
20
71
6.8
6.5
7.6
19.75
20
76
7.2
6.9
8.9
19.75
20
77
8.4
8.1
9.2
19.75
20
83
8.8
8.4
8.8
19.75
20
87
8.4
8.1
10.0
19.75
20
86
9.6
9.2
11.6
19.75
20
61
11.1
10.6
NOTES:
1. RLA is based on the following conditions.
Indoor temp. 27CDB/19CWB
Outdoor temp. 35CDB.
2. Maximum allowable voltage variation between phases is 2%.
3. Select wire size based on the larger value of MCA.
4. Instead of fuse, use circuit breaker.
3D054913E
3D055934D
3D040400E
3D054945F
C : 3D054944C
3D055935E
3D054946C
3D054947B
81
8.2
EDSG281001
4D066509
82
EDSG281001
C : 3D066073
83
8.3
EDSG281001
4D066511
84
EDSG281001
C : 3D066073
85
Capacity Tables
EDSG281001
9. Capacity Tables
9.1
Capacity Tables
FFQ25BV1B + RKS25AVMG
3D055938C
3D055939C
86
EDSG281001
Capacity Tables
3D055942C
3D055943C
87
Capacity Tables
EDSG281001
FHQ35BVV1B + RKS35AVMG
COOLING
INDOOR
EWB EDB
C
C
20
14.0
22
16.0
25
18.0
27
19.0
30
22.0
32
24.0
50Hz 220 - 240V
TC
3.48
3.64
3.80
3.87
4.11
4.27
20
SHC
2.76
2.72
2.87
3.05
2.95
2.88
PI
0.81
0.81
0.81
0.82
0.82
0.83
Symbols
AFR : Air flow rate
BF : Bypass factor
EWB : Entering wet bulb temp.
EDB : Entering dry bulb temp.
TC : Total capacity
SHC : Sensible heat capacity
PI
: Power input
TC
3.33
3.48
3.64
3.72
3.95
4.11
AFR
BF
25
SHC
2.69
2.65
2.81
2.99
2.90
2.83
13
0.20
PI
0.88
0.89
0.89
0.89
0.90
0.91
OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE (CDB)

30
32
TC
SHC
PI
TC
SHC
PI
3.17 2.61 0.96 3.10 2.58 0.99
3.32 2.58 0.97 3.26 2.55 1.00
3.48 2.74 0.97 3.42 2.72 1.00
3.56 2.93 0.97 3.49 2.90 1.00
3.79 2.84 0.98 3.73 2.82 1.01
3.95 2.78 0.98 3.89 2.76 1.02
TC
3.01
3.17
3.32
3.40
3.63
3.79
35
SHC
2.54
2.51
2.68
2.87
2.79
2.73
PI
1.04
1.04
1.05
1.05
1.06
1.06
TC
2.85
3.01
3.16
3.24
3.48
3.63
40
SHC
2.47
2.44
2.61
2.80
2.73
2.68
PI
1.12
1.12
1.13
1.13
1.13
1.14
NOTES:
1. Capacities are based on the following conditions.
(1) Corresponding refrigerant piping length : 7.5m
(2) Level difference
: 0m
2.
shows nominal (rated) capacities and power input.
(m/min.)
(C)
(C)
(kW)
(kW)
(kW)
3D054891B
COOLING
50Hz 230V
AFR
BF
INDOOR
EWB EDB
C
C
20
14.0
22
16.0
25
18.0
27
19.0
30
22.0
32
24.0
20
SHC
3.71
3.64
3.80
4.00
3.85
3.74
25
SHC
3.59
3.53
3.70
3.90
3.76
3.66
TC
5.12
5.35
5.58
5.70
6.04
6.27
PI
1.32
1.33
1.33
1.34
1.35
1.36
Symbols
AFR : Air flow rate
BF : Bypass factor
TC : Total capacity
PI
: Power input
TC
4.89
5.12
5.35
5.47
5.81
6.04
(m/min.)
(C)
(C)
(kW)
(kW)
(kW)
13
0.10
PI
1.45
1.45
1.46
1.47
1.48
1.48

30
32
TC
SHC
PI
TC
SHC
PI
4.66 3.47 1.57 4.56 3.43 1.62
4.89 3.42 1.58 4.79 3.38 1.63
5.12 3.59 1.59 5.02 3.55 1.64
5.23 3.80 1.59 5.14 3.76 1.64
5.58 3.67 1.60 5.49 3.64 1.66
5.81 3.58 1.61 5.72 3.55 1.66
TC
4.42
4.65
4.88
5.00
5.35
5.58
35
SHC
3.36
3.31
3.49
3.70
3.58
3.50
PI
1.70
1.71
1.72
1.72
1.73
1.74
TC
4.19
4.42
4.65
4.77
5.11
5.34
40
SHC
3.24
3.20
3.39
3.60
3.50
3.42
PI
1.83
1.84
1.84
1.85
1.86
1.87
NOTES:
: 0m
2.
3D055285B
88
EDSG281001
Capacity Tables
COOLING
50Hz 230V
AFR
BF
INDOOR
EWB EDB
C
C
20
14.0
22
16.0
25
18.0
27
19.0
30
22.0
32
24.0
20
SHC
4.25
4.18
4.36
4.59
4.42
4.30
25
SHC
4.12
4.05
4.25
4.48
4.32
4.21
TC
5.84
6.10
6.36
6.50
6.89
7.15
PI
1.53
1.54
1.55
1.56
1.57
1.58
Symbols
AFR : Air flow rate
BF : Bypass factor
TC : Total capacity
PI
: Power input
TC
5.57
5.84
6.10
6.23
6.62
6.89
17
0.20
PI
1.68
1.69
1.70
1.70
1.72
1.73

30
32
TC
SHC
PI
TC
SHC
PI
5.31 3.98 1.83 5.20 3.93 1.89
5.57 3.93 1.84 5.47 3.88 1.90
5.83 4.13 1.85 5.73 4.08 1.91
5.97 4.36 1.85 5.86 4.32 1.91
6.36 4.22 1.87 6.25 4.18 1.92
6.62 4.12 1.87 6.52 4.08 1.93
TC
5.04
5.31
5.57
5.70
6.09
6.36
35
SHC
3.85
3.80
4.01
4.25
4.12
4.03
PI
1.98
1.99
2.00
2.00
2.01
2.02
TC
4.78
5.04
5.30
5.43
5.83
6.09
40
SHC
3.72
3.68
3.90
4.14
4.03
3.94
PI
2.13
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
2.17
NOTES:
: 0m
2.
(m/min.)
(C)
(C)
(kW)
(kW)
(kW)
3D055286B
FBQ50BV1A + RXS50FAVMA
COOLING
INDOOR
EWB EDB
C
C
20
14.0
22
16.0
25
18.0
27
19.0
30
22.0
32
24.0
HEATING
INDOOR
EDB
C
15.0
20.0
22.0
24.0
25.0
27.0
50Hz 220 - 240V / 60Hz 220 - 230V
TC
5.12
5.35
5.58
5.70
6.04
6.27
20
SHC
3.65
3.59
3.73
3.91
3.77
3.66
PI
1.52
1.53
1.54
1.54
1.55
1.56
TC
4.89
5.12
5.35
5.47
5.81
6.04
25
SHC
3.53
3.47
3.63
3.81
3.67
3.58
PI
1.67
1.67
1.68
1.69
1.70
1.71
TC
4.04
3.83
3.75
3.67
3.62
3.54
PI
1.63
1.68
1.69
1.71
1.72
1.74
AFR
OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE (CWB)

-5
0
6
TC
PI
TC
PI
TC
PI
4.72 1.71 5.39 1.79 6.21 1.89
4.51 1.76 5.19 1.83 6.00 1.93
4.43 1.77 5.10 1.85 5.92 1.95
4.34 1.79 5.02 1.87 5.83 1.96
4.30 1.80 4.98 1.88 5.79 1.97
4.22 1.82 4.90 1.90 5.71 1.99
Symbols
AFR : Air flow rate
BF : Bypass factor
TC : Total capacity
PI
: Power input
(m/min.)
(C)
(C)
(kW)
(kW)
(kW)
13
0.15

30
32
TC
SHC
PI
TC
SHC
PI
4.66 3.41 1.81 4.56 3.36 1.87
4.89 3.36 1.82 4.79 3.32 1.88
5.12 3.52 1.83 5.02 3.48 1.89
5.23 3.71 1.83 5.14 3.67 1.89
5.58 3.59 1.85 5.49 3.55 1.91
5.81 3.49 1.86 5.72 3.46 1.91
50Hz 220 - 240V / 60Hz 220 - 230V

-10
AFR
BF
TC
4.42
4.65
4.88
5.00
5.35
5.58
35
SHC
3.29
3.25
3.42
3.61
3.50
3.41
PI
1.96
1.97
1.98
1.98
1.99
2.00
TC
4.19
4.42
4.65
4.77
5.11
5.34
40
SHC
3.18
3.14
3.32
3.51
3.41
3.33
PI
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
14
10
TC
6.75
6.54
6.46
6.38
6.33
6.25
PI
1.95
1.99
2.01
2.03
2.04
2.05
NOTES:
: 0m
2.
C : 3D055273A
89
Capacity Tables
EDSG281001
FBQ60BV1A + RXS60FVMA
COOLING
INDOOR
EWB EDB
C
C
20
14.0
22
16.0
25
18.0
27
19.0
30
22.0
32
24.0
HEATING
INDOOR
EDB
C
15.0
20.0
22.0
24.0
25.0
27.0
50Hz 220 - 240V / 60Hz 220 - 230V
TC
5.84
6.10
6.36
6.50
6.89
7.15
20
SHC
4.42
4.34
4.56
4.82
4.65
4.53
PI
1.71
1.72
1.73
1.74
1.75
1.76
TC
5.57
5.84
6.10
6.23
6.62
6.89
25
SHC
4.28
4.22
4.44
4.71
4.55
4.44
PI
1.88
1.89
1.90
1.90
1.92
1.92
TC
4.71
4.47
4.37
4.28
4.23
4.13
PI
1.91
1.96
1.98
2.00
2.01
2.03
AFR

-5
0
6
TC
PI
TC
PI
TC
PI
5.50 2.00 6.29 2.10 7.24 2.21
5.26 2.06 6.05 2.15 7.00 2.26
5.16 2.08 5.95 2.17 6.90 2.28
5.07 2.10 5.86 2.19 6.81 2.30
5.02 2.11 5.81 2.20 6.76 2.31
4.92 2.13 5.71 2.22 6.66 2.33
Symbols
AFR : Air flow rate
BF : Bypass factor
TC : Total capacity
PI
: Power input
18
0.15

30
32
TC
SHC
PI
TC
SHC
PI
5.31 4.16 2.04 5.20 4.10 2.11
5.57 4.09 2.05 5.47 4.05 2.12
5.83 4.33 2.06 5.73 4.29 2.13
5.97 4.60 2.07 5.86 4.56 2.13
6.36 4.46 2.08 6.25 4.42 2.15
6.62 4.36 2.09 6.52 4.32 2.16
50Hz 220 - 240V / 60Hz 220 - 230V

-10
AFR
BF
TC
5.04
5.31
5.57
5.70
6.09
6.36
35
SHC
4.03
3.97
4.22
4.49
4.36
4.27
PI
2.21
2.22
2.23
2.23
2.24
2.25
TC
4.78
5.04
5.30
5.43
5.83
6.09
40
SHC
3.90
3.86
4.11
4.39
4.27
4.18
PI
2.37
2.38
2.39
2.39
2.41
2.42
19
10
TC
7.87
7.63
7.54
7.44
7.39
7.09
PI
2.28
2.33
2.35
2.38
2.39
2.41
NOTES:
: 0m
2.
(m/min.)
(C)
(C)
(kW)
(kW)
(kW)
3D055274A
FBQ71BV1A + RXS71FVMA
COOLING
INDOOR
EWB EDB
C
C
20
14.0
22
16.0
25
18.0
27
19.0
30
22.0
32
24.0
HEATING
INDOOR
EDB
C
15.0
20.0
22.0
24.0
25.0
27.0
50Hz 220 - 240V / 60Hz 220 - 230V
TC
6.86
7.17
7.48
7.64
8.10
8.41
20
SHC
5.00
4.91
5.13
5.40
5.20
5.06
PI
1.97
1.98
1.99
2.00
2.02
2.03
TC
6.55
6.86
7.17
7.32
7.79
8.10
25
SHC
4.84
4.77
4.99
5.27
5.08
4.95
PI
2.16
2.17
2.18
2.19
2.21
2.22
TC
5.52
5.24
5.12
5.01
4.95
4.84
PI
2.26
2.32
2.34
2.37
2.38
2.40
AFR

-5
0
6
TC
PI
TC
PI
TC
PI
6.45 2.37 7.37 2.48 8.48 2.61
6.16 2.43 7.09 2.54 8.20 2.67
6.05 2.45 6.98 2.56 8.09 2.69
5.94 2.48 6.86 2.59 7.82 2.71
5.88 2.49 6.81 2.60 7.57 2.71
5.77 2.51 6.69 2.62 7.09 2.71
Symbols
AFR : Air flow rate
BF : Bypass factor
TC : Total capacity
PI
: Power input
(m/min.)
(C)
(C)
(kW)
(kW)
(kW)
18
0.11

30
32
TC
SHC
PI
TC
SHC
PI
6.24 4.69 2.35 6.12 4.62 2.43
6.55 4.62 2.36 6.42 4.56 2.44
6.86 4.86 2.37 6.73 4.80 2.45
7.01 5.13 2.38 6.89 5.08 2.46
7.47 4.97 2.40 7.35 4.92 2.47
7.78 4.85 2.41 7.66 4.80 2.48
50Hz 220 - 240V / 60Hz 220 - 230V

-10
AFR
BF
TC
5.93
6.24
6.55
6.70
7.16
7.47
35
SHC
4.53
4.47
4.72
5.00
4.85
4.74
PI
2.54
2.55
2.56
2.57
2.59
2.60
TC
5.62
5.93
6.23
6.39
6.85
7.16
40
SHC
4.38
4.33
4.59
4.87
4.74
4.64
PI
2.73
2.74
2.75
2.76
2.78
2.79
19
10
TC
9.22
8.80
8.31
7.82
7.57
7.09
PI
2.70
2.75
2.75
2.76
2.76
2.76
NOTES:
: 0m
2.
3D055275A
90
EDSG281001
Capacity Tables
1
3D066512A
91
Capacity Tables
EDSG281001
3D066761

92
EDSG281001
Capacity Tables
1
3D066513A

93
Capacity Tables
EDSG281001
3D066762
FCQ140KVEA / FBQ140DV1 + RZR140KUV1

FCQ140KVEA / FBQ140DV1 + RZR140HUY1
94
EDSG281001
9.2
Capacity Tables
Capacity Correction Factor by the Length of Refrigerant Piping

The capacity of the unit has to be corrected in accordance with the length of refrigerant piping.
(The distance between the indoor unit and the outdoor unit)
RXS60, 71:Heating(96.1%)
RXS50:Heating(93.6%)
(%)
Capacity correction factor
100
95
90
RKS25,35:Cooling(94.6%)
85
RXS,RKS60, 71:Cooling(85.9%)
80
RXS,RKS50:Cooling(90.4%)
75
70
05
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 (m)
Length of refrigerant piping (Total length)
Notes:
1. line: Correction factor for Cooling Capacity,

line: Correction factor for Heating Capacity
2. The correction factor remains the same whether the outdoor unit is to be installed above or below
the indoor unit.
3. You cannot extend the refrigerant piping exceeding the limit shown in the above table.
95
Capacity Tables
EDSG281001

3D067382
96
EDSG281001
Operation Limits
10. Operation Limits
3D054069G
4D050467J
4D054070J
97
Operation Limits
EDSG281001

4D066510
98
EDSG281001
Fan Performance
11. Fan Performance
11.1 FBQ-B
FBQ50BV1A
3D053085
50Hz
(mmH2O)(Pa)
150
15
(mmH2O)
15
HIGH (HIGH ESP)
10
100
L P)
NA ES
ER GH
T
I
EX (H
F E
O R
IT SU
M S
LI E
R PR
PE IC
P
T
U TA
S
10
LOW
HIGH (LOW ESP)
5
50
NAL
TER ESP)
F EX
IT O E (HIGH
IM
L
R
ER
SU
LOW IC PRES
T
STA
NOTE) 1. THE REMOTE CONTROLLER CAN BE USED TO SWITCH

BETWEEN "HIGH" AND "LOW" .
2. THE AIR FLOW IS SET TO "STANDARD" BEFORE LEAVING THE FACTORY.
IT IS POSSIBLE TO SWITCH BETWEEN "STANDARD ESP" AND "HIGH ESP"
BY FIELD SETUP OF REMOTE CONTROLLER.
HIGH (STANDARD ESP)

0
0
14
(mmH2O) (Pa)
16
AIR FLOW (m3/min)
18
20
21
(mmH2O)
3D053086A
99
Fan Performance
EDSG281001
11.2 FBQ-D
FBQ71DV1
3D060745A
FBQ100DV1
3D060746A
100
EDSG281001
Fan Performance
FBQ125DV1 / FBQ140DV1
3D060747A
101
Air Velocity and Temperature Distributions
EDSG281001
12. Air Velocity and Temperature Distributions

12.1 FFQ
FFQ25BV1B (Cooling)
FFQ35BV1B (Cooling)
102
EDSG281001
FFQ50BV1B (Cooling)
FFQ60BV1B (Cooling)
103
EDSG281001
12.2 FHQ
FHQ35BVV1B / FHQ50BVV1B (Cooling)
FHQ60BVV1B / FHQ71BVV1B (Cooling)
104
EDSG281001
FHQ100BVV1B (Cooling)
FHQ125BVV1B (Cooling)
105
Sound Level
EDSG281001
13. Sound Level

13.1 Overall Sound Level
13.1.1 Indoor Unit
dB(A)
Model
220-240V, 50Hz
H
FCQ71KVEA
35
28
FCQ100KVEA
43
32
FCQ125KVEA
44
34
FCQ140KVEA
44
36
Measuring location
4D058461
Model
230V, 50Hz
H
FFQ25BV1B
29.5
24.5
FFQ35BV1B
32
25
FFQ50BV1B
36
27
FFQ60BV1B
41
32
FHQ35BVV1B
37
32
FHQ50BVV1B
38
33
FHQ60BVV1B
39
33
FHQ71BVV1B
39
35
Measuring location
4D040176A
4D028281B
FHQ100BVV1B
42
37
FHQ125BVV1B
44
39
FBQ50BV1A
33
29
FBQ60BV1A
34
30
FBQ71BV1A
34
30
Model
220-240V, 50Hz
H
FBQ71DV1
37
32
FBQ100DV1
38
33
FBQ125DV1
40
36
4D053092A
Measuring location
4D067285
FBQ140DV1
Note:
106
40
36
Operation sound is measured in an anechoic chamber.

Sound level will vary depending on a range of factors such as the construction (acoustic absorption
coefficient) of the particular room in which the equipments installed.
EDSG281001
Sound Level
13.1.2 Outdoor Unit
dB(A)
Model
RXS50FAVMA
220-240V, 50Hz/
220-230V, 60Hz
Cooling
Heating
47
48
Measuring location
1m
RXS60FVMA
49
49
RXS71FVMA
52
52
Model
220-240V, 50Hz/
220-230V, 60Hz
3D054590D
Measuring location
Cooling
RKS25AVMG
46
RKS35AVMG
47
RKS50AVMG
47
1m
4D047727H
RKS60AVMG
Model
RZR71KUV1
49
220-240V, 50Hz
Cooling
Measuring location
48
4D066602
RZR100KUV1
49
RZR125KUV1
50
RZR140KUV1
50
Model
Note:
380-415V, 50Hz
Cooling
RZR100HUY1
49
RZR125HUY1
50
RZR140HUY1
50
4D066603
Measuring Location
4D066604
Operation sound is measured in an anechoic chamber.

Sound level will vary depending on a range of factors such as the construction (acoustic absorption
coefficient) of the particular room in which the equipments installed.
107
Sound Level
EDSG281001
13.2 Octave Band Level

13.2.1 Indoor Unit
FCQ71KVEA
FCQ100KVEA
70
NC-50
HI
50
NC-40
40
NC-30
LOW
30
NC-20
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63
125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
OCTAVE BAND CENTER FREQUENCY (Hz)
8000
NC-60
60
NC-50
50
HI
NC-40
40
NC-30
LOW
30
NC-20
20
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63
125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
8000
NC-60
60
NC-50
FFQ25BV1B
HI
50
NC-40
40
NC-30
LOW
30
NC-20
20
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63
125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
8000
4D058463
4D058462
4D058461
FCQ140KVEA
OCTAVE BAND SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL

dB (0dB=0.0002 bar)
NC-60
60
20
FCQ125KVEA
70

dB (0dB=0.0002 bar)

dB (0dB=0.0002 bar)
70
FFQ35BV1B

dB (0dB=0.0002 bar)
70
NC-60
60
NC-50
HI
50
NC-40
40
NC-30
LOW
30
NC-20
20
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63
125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
8000
4D058464
FFQ50BV1B
4D040176A
FFQ60BV1B
4D040178A
FHQ50BVV1B
108
FHQ35BVV1B
4D040179A
FHQ60BVV1B
4D028281B
4D040177A
4D028280B
FHQ71BVV1B
4D037997A
4D028355B
EDSG281001
Sound Level
FHQ125BVV1B
FHQ100BVV1B
NC-50
50
NC-40
HI
40
LOW
NC-30
30
NC-20
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63
125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
8000

dB (0dB=0.0002 bar)

dB (0dB=0.0002 bar)
NC-60
60
20
FBQ50BV1A
70
70
NC-60
60
NC-50
50
HI
NC-40
40
LOW
NC-30
30
NC-20
20
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63
125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
8000
4D028284B
4D028283B
FBQ71DV1
4D053091
FBQ100DV1
4D067285
4D053092A
4D067286
FBQ125DV1 / FBQ140DV1
4D067287
13.2.2 Outdoor Unit

RXS50FAVMA (Cooling)
RXS50FAVMA (Heating)
3D027645R
RXS60FVMA (Cooling)
3D027645R
3D035059J
109
Sound Level
EDSG281001
RXS71FVMA (Cooling)
RXS60FVMA (Heating)
3D035059J
3D054590D
RKS35AVMG
RKS25AVMG
RZR125KUV1
4D027648G
RZR100KUV1
4D066603
4D066602
4D040949H
RZR140KUV1
RZR100HUY1
70
60
50
40
30
20
63
250
500
1000 2000 4000
125
8000
4D066789
70

dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)

dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)
70

dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)
RKS50AVMG
RZR71KUV1
RKS60AVMG
3D054590D
4D047728H
4D047727H
110
RXS71FVMA (Heating)
60
50
40
30
20
63
250
500
1000 2000 4000
125
8000
4D066790
60
50
40
30
20
63
125
250
500
1000 2000 4000
8000
4D066604
EDSG281001
Sound Level
RZR125HUY1
RZR140HUY1

dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)
70
60
50
40
30
20
63
125
250
500
1000 2000 4000
8000
4D066791
4D066792
111
Sound Level
112
EDSG281001
EDSG281001
Part 2
Installation of
Indoor / Outdoor Unit
1. Centre of Gravity .................................................................................114
2. Installation of Indoor Unit ....................................................................117
2.1 FCQ71KVEA / FCQ100KVEA / FCQ125KVEA / FCQ140KVEA..........117
2.2 FFQ25BV1B / FFQ35BV1B / FFQ50BV1B / FFQ60BV1B...................142
2.3 FHQ35BVV1B / FHQ50BVV1B / FHQ60BVV1B / FHQ71BVV1B /
FHQ100BVV1B / FHQ125BVV1B ........................................................165
2.4 FBQ50BV1A / FBQ60BV1A / FBQ71BV1A..........................................190
2.5 FBQ71DV1 / FBQ100DV1 / FBQ125DV1 / FBQ140DV1.....................211
3. Installation of Outdoor Unit..................................................................238

3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Installation of Indoor / Outdoor Unit
RKS25AVMG / RKS35AVMG ..............................................................238

RXS50FAVMA / RXS60FVMA / RKS50AVMG / RKS60AVMG ..........246
RXS71FVMA ........................................................................................254
RZR100HUY1 / RZR125HUY1 / RZR140HUY1 ..................................262
113
Centre of Gravity
EDSG281001
1. Centre of Gravity
Unit (mm)
4D056351N
Unit (mm)
4D051638P
114
EDSG281001
Centre of Gravity
RXS71FVMA
Unit (mm)
4D053630D
RZR71KUV1
Unit (mm)
4D064948
115
Centre of Gravity
EDSG281001

Unit (mm)
4D058487B

Unit (mm)
4D061670A
116
EDSG281001
Installation of Indoor Unit
2. Installation of Indoor Unit

2.1
FCQ71KVEA / FCQ100KVEA / FCQ125KVEA / FCQ140KVEA
2.1.1
Names and Functions of Parts
2
j
m
c
g
f
h
b
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
Remote controller
Depending on the system configuration, the remote
controller is not provided.
Inlet air
Discharge air
Air outlet
Air flow flap (at air outlet)
Refrigerant piping, connection electric wire
Drain pipe
Model name (model name plate)
(Inside of suction grille)
Drain pumping out device(built-in)
Condensate removed from the room during cooling.
Air filter (suction grille)
3P177429-3F
117
2.1.2
EDSG281001
Installation
FCQ71KVEA
FCQ100KVEA
FCQ125KVEA
FCQ140KVEA
SPLIT SYSTEM
Air Conditioners
Installation manual
CONTENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS ........................................................................................1

BEFORE INSTALLATION ..............................................................................................3
SELECTING INSTALLATION SITE................................................................................5
PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION .................................................................7
INDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION .....................................................................................8
REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK ..................................................................................10
DRAIN PIPING WORK .................................................................................................12
ELECTRIC WIRING WORK .........................................................................................15
WIRING EXAMPLE ......................................................................................................17
INSTALLATION OF THE DECORATION PANEL .......................................................... 19
FIELD SETTING...........................................................................................................19
TEST OPERATION ......................................................................................................21
1. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
Please read these SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS carefully before installing air conditioning equipment and
be sure to install it correctly. After completing installation, conduct a trial operation to check for faults and
explain to the customer how to operate the air conditioner and take care of it with the aid of the operation manual. Ask the customer to store the installation manual along with the operation manual for future reference.
This air conditioner is classified under appliances not accessible to the general public.
Meaning of WARNING and CAUTION notices.
WARNING .........Failure to follow these instructions properly may result in personal injury or loss of life.
CAUTION ..........Failure to observe these instructions properly may result in property damage or personal injury, which may be serious depending on the circumstances.
WARNING
Ask your dealer or qualified personnel to carry out installation work.
Do not attempt to install the air conditioner yourself. Improper installation may result in water leakage,
electric shocks or fire.
Install the air conditioner in accordance with the instructions in this installation manual.
Improper installation may result in water leakage, electric shocks or fire.
Be sure to use only the specified accessories and parts for installation work.
Failure to use the specified parts may result in the unit falling, water leakage, electric shocks or fire.
Install the air conditioner on a foundation strong enough to withstand the weight of the unit.
A foundation of insufficient strength may result in the equipment falling and causing injury.
Carry out the specified installation work after taking into account strong winds, typhoons or earthquakes.
Failure to do so during installation work may result in the unit falling and causing accidents.
1
C : 3P177351-2D
118
EDSG281001
Make sure that a separate power supply circuit is provided for this unit and that all electrical work is carried
out by qualified personnel according to local laws and regulations and this installation manual.
An insufficient power supply capacity or improper electrical construction may lead to electric shocks or fire.
Make sure that all wiring is secured, the specified wires are used, and that there is no strain on the terminal
connections or wires.
Improper connections or securing of wires may result in abnormal heat build-up or fire.
When wiring the power supply and connecting the wiring between the indoor and outdoor units, position the
wires so that the terminal box lid can be securely fastened.
Improper positioning of the terminal box lid may result in electric shocks, fire or overheating terminals.
If refrigerant gas leaks during installation, ventilate the area immediately.
Toxic gas may be produced if the refrigerant comes into contact with fire.
After completing installation, check for refrigerant gas leakage.
Toxic gas may be produced if the refrigerant gas leaks into the room and comes into contact with a source
of fire, such as a fan heater, stove or cooker.
Be sure to switch off the unit before touching any electrical parts.
Be sure to earth the air conditioner.
Do not earth the unit to a utility pipe, lightning conductor or telephone earth lead.
Imperfect earthing may result in electric shocks.
Be sure to install an earth leakage breaker.
Failure to install an earth leakage breaker may result in electric shocks or fire.
CAUTION
While following the instructions in this installation manual, install drain piping to ensure proper drainage and
insulate piping to prevent condensation.
Improper drain piping may result in indoor water leakage and property damage.
Install the indoor and outdoor units, power cord and connecting wires at least 1 meter away from televisions
or radios to prevent picture interference and noise.
(Depending on the incoming signal strength, a distance of 1 meter may not be sufficient to eliminate noise.)
Remote controller (wireless kit) transmitting distance can be shorter than expected in rooms with electronic
fluorescent lamps (inverter or rapid start types).
Install the indoor unit as far away from fluorescent lamps as possible.
Do not install the air conditioner in the following locations:
1. Where there is a high concentration of mineral oil spray or vapour (e.g. a kitchen).
Plastic parts will deteriorate, parts may fall off and water leakage could result.
2. Where corrosive gas, such as sulphurous acid gas, is produced.
Corroding of copper pipes or soldered parts may result in refrigerant leakage.
3. Near machinery emitting electromagnetic radiation.
Electromagnetic radiation may disturb the operation of the control system and result in a malfunction of
the unit.
4. Where flammable gas may leak, where there is carbon fibre or ignitable dust suspensions in the air, or
where volatile flammables such as paint thinner or gasoline are handled.
Operating the unit in such conditions may result in fire.
2
3P177351-2D
119
EDSG281001
2. BEFORE INSTALLATION
Do not exert pressure on the resin parts when opening the unit or when moving it after opening
Be sure to check the type of R410A refrigerant to be used before doing any work. (Using an incorrect
refrigerant will prevent normal operation of the unit.)
When opening the unit or moving it after opening, be sure to lift it by holding on to the lifting lugs without
exerting any pressure on other parts, especially, drain piping, and other resin parts.
Decide upon a line of transport.
Leave the unit inside its packaging while moving, until reaching the installation site. Use a sling of soft material, where unpacking is unavoidable or protective plates together with a rope when lifting, to avoid damage
or scratches to the unit.
Refer to the installation manual of the outdoor unit for items not described in this manual.
Do not dispose of any parts necessary for installation until the installation is complete.
1. PRECAUTIONS
Be sure to read this manual before installing the indoor unit.

When selecting installation site, refer to the paper pattern.
This unit is suitable for installation in a household, commercial and light industrial environment.
Do not install or operate the unit in rooms mentioned below.
Laden with mineral oil, or filled with oil vapor or spray like in kitchens. (Plastic parts may deteriorate.)
Where corrosive gas like sulfurous gas exists. (Copper tubing and brazed spots may corrode.)
Where volatile flammable gas like thinner or gasoline is used.
Where machines can generate electromagnetic waves. (Control system may malfunction.)
Where the air contains high levels of salt such as that near the ocean and where voltage fluctuates
greatly such as that in factories. Also in vehicles or vessels.
2. ACCESSORIES
Check the following accessories are included with your unit.
Name
(1) Drain hose
(2) Metal clamp
Quantity
1 pc.
1 pc.
(3) Washer for

hanger
bracket
8 pcs.
(4) Clamp
(5) Paper pattern for

installation
(6) Screw (M4)
6 pcs.
1 pc.
4 pcs.
Also used as pack- For paper pattern

for installation
ing material
Shape
Name
Quantity
(7) Washer
fixing plate
4 pcs.
Insulation for
fitting
1 each
Sealing pad
1 each
1 pc.
Installation guide
1 pc.
1 pc.
(Other)
(10) Large
(8) for gas
pipe
(13) Small
(11) Medium-1
Shape
(14)
(15)
Installation
manual
Operation
manual
(9) for liquid

pipe
(12) Medium-2
3
3P177351-2D
120
EDSG281001
3. OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
The optional decoration panel and remote controller are required for this indoor unit. (Refer to Table 1, 2)
(However, the remote controller is not required for the slave unit of a simultaneous operation system.)
Table 1
Unit model
Optional decoration panel

BYCP125K-W1
Color : Fresh White
FCQ71100125140KVEA
These are two types of remote controllers: wired and wireless. Select a remote controller from Table 2
according to customer request and install in an appropriate place.
Table 2
Remote controller
Wired type
Wireless type
BRC1C61 / BRC1D61
BRC7F632F
NOTE
If you wish to use a remote controller that is not listed in Table 2 on page 4, select a suitable remote controller after consulting catalogs and technical materials.
FOR THE FOLLOWING ITEMS, TAKE SPECIAL CARE DURING CONSTRUCTION AND
CHECK AFTER INSTALLATION IS FINISHED.
1. Items to be checked after completion of work
Items to be checked
Are the indoor unit and outdoor unit fixed
firmly?
Is the outdoor unit fully installed?
Is the gas leak test finished?
Is the unit fully insulated?
Does drainage flow smoothly?
Does the power supply voltage correspond
to that shown on the name plate?
Are wiring and piping correct?
Is the unit safely grounded?
Is wiring size according to specifications?
Is something blocking the air outlet or inlet
of either the indoor or outdoor units?
Are refrigerant piping length and additional
refrigerant charge noted down?
If not properly done, what is likely to occur
Check
The unit may drop, vibrate or make noise.

The unit may malfunction or the components burn out.
It may result in insufficient cooling.
Condensate water may drip.
It may result in electric shock.
The refrigerant charge in the system is not
clear.
2. Items to be checked at time of delivery

* Also review the 1. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
Items to be checked
Check
Are the terminal box lid, air filter, suction grille attached?
Did you explain about operations while showing the instruction manual to your customer?
Did you hand the instruction manual over to your customer?
4
C : 3P177351-2D
121
EDSG281001
Points for explanation about operations

The items with
WARNING and
CAUTION marks in the instruction manual are the items pertaining to possibilities for bodily injury and material damage in addition to the general usage of
the product. Accordingly, it is necessary that you make a full explanation about the described contents and also ask your customers to read the instruction manual.
4. NOTE TO THE INSTALLER

Be sure to instruct customers how to properly operate the unit (especially cleaning filters, operating different
functions, and adjusting the temperature) by having them carry out operations themselves while looking at the
manual.
3. SELECTING INSTALLATION SITE

Hold the unit by the 4 lifting lugs when opening the box and moving it, and do not exert pressure on to any
other part piping (refrigerant, drain, etc.) or plastic parts.
If the temperature or humidity inside the ceiling might rise above 30C or RH 80%, respectively, use the highhumidity kit (sold separately) or add extra insulation to the main unit body.
Use glass wool or polyethylene foam as insulation and make sure it is at least 10mm thick and fits inside the
ceiling opening.
The direction this product blows can be selected. However, a separately sold shut-off material kit is
needed in order to make the unit blow in two, three, or four (corner shut-off) directions.
(1) Select an installation location with the customers approval which matches the following conditions.
A location from which cool (warm) air will reach the whole room.
A location with no objects blocking the air passage.
A location where drainage can be done with no problem.
A location strong enough to support the weight of the indoor unit.
Locations where the wall is not significantly tilted.
A location which leaves enough room for installation and service work.
A location where there is no risk of flammable gas leaking.
A location where the length of the indoor-outdoor piping is no longer than the tolerated length (see the
installation manual that came with the outdoor unit for details).
[Space required for installation]
*1500
*1500
Air
discharge
At least 1800mm
from the floor.
Air Air
inlet discharge
1500
1500
*1500
Floor surface
Fig. 1
Model
FCQ71KVEA
FCQ100125140KVEA
*1500
Fig. 2
H
256
298
5
C : 3P177351-2D
122
EDSG281001
CAUTION
The indoor and outdoor units and the power supply wiring and remote controller cord must be installed
at least 1m away from any televisions or radios. This is to prevent interference with picture and sound
reception. (Interference may occur even at 1m away depending on the reception quality.)
If installing the wireless kit, the distance of the signal sent from the remote controller might be shorter if
there are fluorescent lights which are electrically started (such as with inverters, rapid starters, etc.) in
the room. The indoor unit should be installed as far away from fluorescent lights as possible.
(2) Ceiling height

This product can be installed in ceilings up to 3.5m high (4.2m high for the 100, 125, and 140).
If the ceiling height is 2.7m (3.2m for the 100,125, and 140) or more, field settings will have to be made with
the remote controller. See 11. FIELD SETTING for details.
(3) Air direction
The air direction shown in Fig. 3 is an example.
Select the appropriate number of directions according to the shape of the room and the location of the unit.
(Field settings have to be made using the remote controller and the outlet vents have to be shut off if two,
three, or four (corner shut-off) directions are selected. See the shut-off materials (sold separately) installation manual for details.)
(4) Use eyebolts for installation. Check if the location for the installation is strong enough to support the weight
of the unit, reinforce it if necessary, and install using eyebolts. (The spacing of the installation is shown on
the paper pattern for installation (5).)
All-round air
Pipes
Pipes
Pipes
Pipes
[Air direction]
Four air direction Three air direction Two air direction

Fig. 3
6
3P177351-2D
123
EDSG281001
4. PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION

Refrigerant
piping
Hanger
bracket
Suspension
bolt (4)
False
ceiling
710(Suspension bolt pitch)

840 (Indoor unit)
860 910 (Ceiling opening)
950 (Decoration panel)
View as seen from A

Fig. 5
125 130
860 910 (Ceiling opening)

840 (Indoor unit)
780 (Suspension bolt pitch)
(1) Relation of ceiling opening to unit and suspension bolt position.
A
Fig. 4
910
(Dimension inside frame)
840
Installation is possible when ceiling opening dimensions is as follows

When installing the unit within the frame for fixing false ceiling.
860
(Opening dimension inside
the flame for ceiling)
Frame
False
ceiling
20
840
910
(Dimension inside frame)
20
860 *910
(Ceiling opening dimension) (Ceiling-panel
overlapping dimension)
Fig. 7
Fig. 6
NOTE
Installation is possible with a ceiling dimension of 910mm (marked with *). However, to achieve a ceilingpanel overlapping dimension of 20mm, the spacing between the ceiling and the unit should be 35mm or
less. If the spacing between ceiling and the unit is over 35mm, attach ceiling material to
part or recover
the ceiling.
Ceiling material
35
35
Fig. 8
7
3P177351-2D
124
EDSG281001
(2) Make the ceiling opening needed for installation where applicable. (For existing ceilings)
Refer to the paper pattern for installation (5) for ceiling opening dimensions.
Create the ceiling opening required for installation. From the side of the opening to the casing outlet,
implement the refrigerant and drain piping and wiring for remote controller (unnecessary for wireless
type) and indoor-outdoor unit casing outlet. Refer to 6. REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK, 7. DRAIN
PIPING WORK and 8. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK.
After making an opening in the ceiling, it may be necessary to reinforce ceiling beams to keep the ceiling
level and to prevent it from vibrating. Consult the builder for details.
<installation example>
Ceiling slab
Anchor
Long nut or turn-buckle
Suspension bolt
50 100
(3) Install the suspension bolts.

(Use either a M8~M10 size bolt)
Use a hole-in anchor for existing ceilings, and
a sunken insert, sunken anchor or other field
supplied parts for new ceilings to reinforce
the ceiling to bear the weight of the unit.
Adjust clearance (50 100mm) from the
ceiling before proceeding further.
False ceiling
Fig. 9
NOTE
All the above parts are field supplied.
5. INDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION

Installing optional accessories (except for the decoration panel) before installing the indoor unit is
easier. However, for existing ceilings, install fresh air inlet component kit and branch duct before
installing the unit.
As for the parts to be used for installation work, be sure to use the provided accessories and specified parts
designated by our company.
(1) For new ceilings
(1-1)Install the indoor unit temporarily.
Attach the hanger bracket to the suspension bolt. Be sure to fix it securely by using a nut and
washer (3) from the upper and lower sides of the hanger bracket.
The washer fixing plate (7) will prevent the washer from falling.
Field supply
Washer (3) (accessory)
Insert
Hanger bracket
Tighten
(double nuts)
[Securing the hanger bracket]
Fig. 10
Washer fixing plate (7)

(accessory)
[Securing the washer]
Fig. 11
(1-2)Refer to the paper pattern for installation (5) for ceiling opening dimension.
Consult the builder or carpenter for details.
The center of the ceiling opening is indicated on the paper pattern for installation.
The center of the unit is indicated on the triangular mark to the unit bottom and on the paper pattern for
installation.
Fix the paper pattern to the unit with screws (6) (4).
Ceiling height is shown on the side of the paper pattern for installation (5). Adjust the height of the unit
according to this indication.
8
3P177351-2D
125
EDSG281001
Please perform one of the following, as the shape of the paper pattern for installation differs according to the model.
Center of
ceiling opening
Center of main unit

Center mark of
main unit
Paper pattern for

installation (5)
Screw (6)
(accessory)
Screw (6)
(accessory)
Fig. 12
[Installation of paper pattern for installation]

<Ceiling work>
(1-3)Adjust the unit to the right position for installation.
(Refer to 4. PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION-(1).)
Using the Installation guide (15) allows you to check the positions from the underside of the unit to the
lower ceiling surface.
Apply the short

side of the
cut-out section.
Lower ceiling
surface
Underside of
the unit
Installation guide (15)

(accessory)
(1-4)Check the unit is horizontally level.
The indoor unit is equipped with a built-in drain pump and float
switch. Verify that it is level by using a level or a water-filled
vinyl tube.
CAUTION
If the unit is tilted against condensate flow, the float switch may
malfunction and cause water to drip.
(1-5)Remove the washer fixing plate (7) used for preventing the
washer from falling and tighten the upper nut.
(1-6)Remove the paper pattern for installation (5).
Level
Vinyl tube
[Maintaining horizontality]
Fig. 13
(2) For existing ceilings
(2-1)Install the indoor unit temporarily.
Perform step (1-1) in (1) For new ceilings.
(2-2)Adjust the height and position of the unit.
(Refer to 4. PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION-(1) and (1-3) in (1) For new ceilings.)
(2-3)Perform steps (1-4), (1-5) in (1) For new ceilings.
9
3P177351-2D
126
EDSG281001
6. REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK

For refrigerant piping of outdoor units, see the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit.
Execute heat insulation work completely on both sides of the gas piping and the liquid piping. Otherwise, a
water leakage can result sometimes.
(When using a heat pump, the temperature of the gas piping can reach up to approximately 120C, so use
insulation which is sufficiently resistant.)
Also, in cases where the temperature and humidity of the refrigerant piping sections might exceed 30C or
RH80%, reinforce the refrigerant insulation. (20mm or thicker) Condensate may form on the surface of the
insulating material.
Be sure to check the type of R410A refrigerant to be used before doing any work. (Using an incorrect refrigerant will prevent normal operation of the unit.)
CAUTION
Use a pipe cutter and flare suitable for the type of refrigerant.
Apply ester oil or ether oil around the flare section before connecting.
To prevent dust, moisture or other foreign matter from infiltrating the tube, either pinch the end or cover
it with tape.
Do not allow anything other than the designated refrigerant to get mixed into the refrigerant circuit, such
as air, etc. If any refrigerant gas leaks while working on the unit, ventilate the room thoroughly right away.
Do not mix air or other gas with the specified refrigerant in the refrigeration cycle.
Ventilate the room if refrigerant gas leaks during the work.
The outdoor unit is charged with refrigerant.
Be sure to use both a spanner and torque wrench together, as shown in the
drawing, when connecting or disconnecting pipes to/from the unit.
(Refer to Fig. 14)
Refer to Table 3 for the dimensions of flare nut spaces.
Torque wrench
Spanner
Pipe union
Flare nut
Fig. 14
When connecting the flare nut, apply ester oil or ether oil to the flare
section (only inside), and spin 3-4 times before screwing in.
(Refer to Fig. 15)
Keep all the screw mounting resin parts (e.g., piping presser
plates) away from oil.
If oil adheres, the strength of the screw mounting resin parts may
drop.
Coat the flare section (only inside)

with ester or ether oil.
Fig. 15
CAUTION
Over-tightening the flare nut may break it and/or cause the
refrigerant to leak.
NOTE
Use the flare nut included with the unit main body.
Table 3
9.5 (3/8)
32.7 39.9 Nm
12.8 13.2
15.9 (5/8)
61.8 75.4 Nm
19.3 19.7
Flare
452
Flare dimensions
A (mm)
R0.4-0.8
Tightening torque
902
Pipe size
Refer to Table 3 to determine the proper tightening torque.
10
C : 3P177351-2D
127
EDSG281001
Not recommendable but in case of emergency

You must use a torque wrench but if you are obliged to install the unit without a torque wrench, you may
follow the installation method mentioned below.
When you keep on tightening the flare nut with a spanner, there is a point where the tightening torque
suddenly increases. From that position, further tighten the flare nut the angle shown below:
Pipe size
9.5 (3/8)
15.9 (5/8)
Further tightening angle

60 to 90 degrees
30 to 60 degrees
Recommended arm length of tool

Approx. 200mm
Approx. 300mm
After the work is finished, make sure to check that there is no gas leak.
Make absolutely sure to execute heat insulation works on the pipe-connecting section after checking gas
leakage by thoroughly studying the following figure and using the attached heat insulating materials for
fitting (8) and (9). (Fasten both ends with the clamps (4).) (Refer to Fig. 16)
Wrap the sealing pad (11) only around the insulation for the joints on the gas piping side. (Refer to Fig. 16)
Gas Piping Insulation Procedure

Insulation for fitting (8)
(accessory)
Flare nut connection
Piping insulation
material (main unit)
Wrap over from the

base of the unit to
the top of the flare
nut connection.
Attach to base
Turn seams up
Main unit
Piping insulation
material
(Field supply)
Clamp (4) (accessory)

Tighten the part other
than the piping insulation
material.
Sealing pad
medium-1 (11)
(accessory)
Liquid Piping Insulation Procedure

Insulation for fitting (9)
(accessory)
Turn seams up
Piping insulation
material (main unit)
Wrap the
insulator around
the part from the
root.
Attach to base
Liquid piping
Main unit
Piping insulation
material
(Field supply)

Tighten the part other
than the piping insulation
material.
Gas piping
Sealing pad
medium-2 (12)
(accessory)
Screw mounting part

of piping presser plate
(2 locations)
Fig. 16
CAUTION
For local insulation, be sure to insulate local piping all the way into the pipe connections inside the machine.
Exposed piping may cause condensation or burns on contact.
CAUTION
CAUTION TO BE TAKEN WHEN BRAZING REFRIGERANT PIPING
Do not use flux when brazing refrigerant piping. Therefore, use the phosphor copper brazing filler metal
(BCuP-2: JIS Z 3264/B-Cu93P-710/795: ISO 3677) which does not require flux.
(Flux has extremely harmful influence on refrigerant piping systems. For instance, if the chlorine based
flux is used, it will cause pipe corrosion or, in particular, if the flux contains fluorine, it will damage the
refrigerant oil.)
11
3P177351-2D
128
EDSG281001
Before brazing local refrigerant piping, nitrogen gas shall be blown through the piping to expel air from the piping.
If you brazing is done without nitrogen gas blowing, a large amount of oxide film develops inside the piping, and
could cause system malfunction.
When brazing the refrigerant piping, only begin brazing after having carried out nitrogen substitution or
while inserting nitrogen into the refrigerant piping. Once this is done, connect the indoor unit with a flared
or a flanged connection.
Nitrogen should be set to 0.02MPa with a pressure-reducing valve if brazing while inserting nitrogen into
the piping. (Refer to Fig. 17)
Pressure-reducing valve
Refrigerant piping
Taping
Part to be
Hands valve
brazed
Nitrogen
Nitrogen
Fig. 17
7. DRAIN PIPING WORK

(1) Rig drain piping
As for drain work, perform piping in such a manner that water can be drained properly.
Employ a pipe with either the same diameter or with the diameter larger (excluding the raising section) than
that of the connecting pipe (PVC pipe, nominal diameter 25mm, outside diameter 32mm).
Keep the drain pipe short and sloping downwards at a gradient of at least 1/100 to prevent air pockets from
forming.
If the drain pipe cannot be sufficiently set on a slope, execute the drain raising piping.
To keep the drain pipe from sagging, space hanging wires every 1 to 1.5m.
Hanger bracket
11.5m 1/100 gradient or more
GOOD
WRONG
Fig. 18-1
Fig. 18-2
CAUTION
Water pooling in the drainage piping can cause the drain to clog.
Use the attached drain hose (1) and Metal clamp (2).
Insert the drain hose into the drain socket up to the base, and tighten the Metal clamp securely within the
portion of a white tape of the hose-inserted tip. Tighten the Metal clamp until the screw head is less than
4mm from the hose.
Wrap the attached sealing pad (10) over the Metal clamp and drain hose to insulate.
Make sure that heat insulation work is executed on the following 2 spots to prevent any possible water leakage due to dew condensation.
Indoor drain pipe
Drain socket
Metal
clamp (2)
Metal
clamp (2)
(accessory)
Large sealing pad (10)

(accessory)
Drain hose (1)

Tape (White)
Fig. 19
Fig. 20
4mm
12
3P177351-2D
129
EDSG281001
<PRECAUTIONS FOR DRAIN RAISING PIPING>

Install the drain raising pipes at a height of less than 675mm.
The drain pump of this unit has a high delivery flow rate. Therefore, the higher the drain raising height is, the
lower the sound of draining will be. For this reason, a minimum drain raising height of 300mm is recommended.
Install the drain raising pipes at a right angle to the indoor unit and no more than 300mm from the unit.
To prevent air bubbles in the

drain hose part, keep it level or
slightly tilted up. Any bubbles in
the hose might cause the unit
to make noise due to backflow
when the drain pump stops.
Drain raising pipe
850
Level or
tilted
slightly up
Hanger bracket
175
Ceiling slab
300mm
1 1.5m
Drain hose (1)

(accessory)
Adjustable
( 675)
Raising section
Drain hose (accessory) (1)
Metal clamp
(accessory) (2)
Fig. 21
NOTE
To ensure no excessive pressure is applied to the included drain hose (1), do not bend or twist when installing. (This may cause leakage.)
If converging multiple drain pipes, install according to the procedure shown below.
0 675mm
Central drain pipe

The drain pipe should have a downward
slope of at least 1/100 to prevent
air pockets from forming.
Fig. 22
Water accumulating in the drain

piping can cause the drain to clog.
Select converging drain pipes whose gauge is suitable for the operating capacity of the unit.
(2) After piping work is finished, check if drainage flows smoothly.
WHEN ELECTRIC WIRING WORK IS FINISHED
Add approximately 1000cc of water slowly from the air outlet and check drainage flow.
Check drainage flow during COOL running, explained under 12. TEST OPERATION.
Refer to the figure on the following after checking the draining of water, and mount the thermal insulation
material for drainage (14) and thermal insulate the drain socket.
Thermal insulation
material for drainage (14)
(accessory)
Thermal insulation
material for drainage (14)
(accessory)
Sealing pad (Large) (10)

Be sure to lay the sealing
material on (14).
Make sure that there

is no clearance.
WHEN ELECTRIC WIRING WORK IS NOT FINISHED

CAUTION
Electrical wiring work should be done by a certified electrician.
If someone who does not have the proper qualifications performs the work, perform the following after the
test run is complete.
13
3P177351-2D
130
EDSG281001
Remove the terminal box lid. Connect the single phase power supply (SINGLE PHASE 50Hz 240V) to connections No.1 and No.2 on the terminal block for wiring the units. Do not connect to No.3 of the terminal
block for wiring the units. (The drain pump will not operate.) Connect the ground wire firmly. When carrying
out wiring work around the terminal box, make sure none of the connectors come undone. Be sure to attach
the terminal box lid before turning on the power.
Put approximately 1000cc of water into the drain pan through the blow-off mouth on the left-hand side of the
drain socket. Make sure not to pour water over the drain pump or any electric parts including those of the
drain pump.
When the power is turned on, the drain pump will operate and you can check the draining of water through
the transparent part of the drain socket. (The drain pump will stop automatically in 10 minutes.)
After checking the draining of water, mount the thermal insulation material for drainage (14) and thermal
insulate the drain socket.
After confirming drainage (Fig.23, Fig.24), turn off the power and remove the power supply.
Attach the terminal box lid as before.
Drain sockets
At least
100mm
(Check the
drainage now.)
Plastic watering can

(Tube should be
about 100mm long.)
Drain pump
location
Service drain outlet (with rubber plug)

(Use this outlet to drain water from
the drain pan.)
<Adding water through air discharge outlet>

[Method of adding water]
Fig. 23
Inter-unit wiring
terminal block
Power supply
single phase 240V
Ground
3 2 1
wire
1
Terminal box lid
Fig. 24
14
3P177351-2D
131
EDSG281001
CAUTION
Drain piping connections
Do not connect the drain piping directly to sewage pipes that smell of ammonia. The ammonia in the sewage might enter the indoor unit through the drain pipes and corrode the heat exchanger.
8. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK
All field supplied parts and materials and electric works must conform to local codes.
Use copper wire only.
For electric wiring work, refer to also WIRING DIAGRAM attached to the unit body.
For remote controller wiring details, refer to the installation manual attached to the remote controller.
All wiring must be performed by an authorized electrician.
A circuit breaker capable of shutting down power supply to the entire system must be installed.
Refer to the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit for the size of power supply electric wire connected to the outdoor unit, the capacity of the circuit breaker and switch, and wiring instructions.
Be sure to ground the air conditioner.
Do not connect the ground wire to gas pipes, plumbing pipes, lightning rods, or telephone ground wires.
Gas pipes: might cause explosions or fire if gas leaks.
Plumbing: no grounding effect if hard vinyl piping is used.
Telephone ground wires or lightning rods: might cause abnormally high electric potential in the ground
during lighting storms.
Specifications for field wire
The remote control cord should be procured locally. Refer to the Table 4 when preparing one.
Table 4
Wire
Wiring the units
Remote controller cord
H05VV U4G (NOTE 1)

Vinyl cord with sheath or cable NOTE 2 (2 wire)
Size (mm )
2.5
0.75 1.25
Length
Max. 500m *
*This will be the total extended length in the system when doing group control.
NOTE
1. Shows only in case of protected pipes. Use H07RN-F in case of no protection.
2. Vinyl cord with sheath or cable (Insulated thickness : 1mm or more)
Connection of wiring between units, ground wire and for the remote controller cord (Refer to Fig. 25)
Wiring the units and ground wire
Remove the terminal box lid and connect wires of matching number to the terminal block for wiring the units
(4 P) inside. And connect the ground wire to the ground terminal. In doing this, pull the wires inside through
the hole and fix the wires securely with the included clamp (4).
Remote controller cords (not neccessary for slave unit of simultaneous operation system)
Remove the terminal box lid and pull the wires inside through the hole and connect to the terminal block for
remote controller (4 P). (no polarity) Securely fix the remote controller cord with the included clamp (4).
After connection, attach sealing pad (13).
Be sure to attach it to prevent the infiltration of water from the outside.
15
3P177351-2D
132
EDSG281001
Wiring
through-holes
Inter-unit wiring
Ground wire

(weak electric)
Remote
controller
Transmission
wiring
P1 P2 F1 F2
Approximately Sheaths
7mm
Peel back
the sheath
on the power 70 90mm
line and twist. Length of
sheath to
peel back
Inter-unit wiring
terminal block (4P)
10 15mm
Clamp (4)
Cut off any excess
material after
tightening.
Remote
controller
wiring
Wiring
through-holes
Clamping position
(Length of sheath to peel back)

10~15mm
Cut off any

excess
material after
tightening the
inter-unit wiring
and ground
Ground terminal wire together.
3 2 1
3
80~100mm
Remote
controller
wiring terminal
block
(P1 P2)
Terminal box lid
Clamp (4)
Ground
wire
Secure the ground wire

and inter-unit wiring with
both edges aligned.
Ground wire
Inter-unit
wiring sheath
<<Inter-unit wiring (strong electric) / ground wire>>
Electrical Wiring
Diagram Nameplate
(Inside of terminal box lid)
Fig. 25
Observe the notes mentioned below when wiring to the terminal block for wiring the units.
CAUTION
When clamping wiring, use the included clamping material to prevent outside pressure being exerted on the
wiring connections and clamp firmly. When doing the wiring, make sure the wiring is neat and does not
cause the terminal box lid to stick up, then close the cover firmly.
When attaching the terminal box lid, make sure you do not pinch any wires.
After all the wiring connections are done, fill in any gaps in the through holes with putty or insulation (procured locally) to prevent small animals and insects from entering the unit from outside. (If any do get in, they
could cause short circuits in the terminal box.)
Outside the machine, separate the weak wiring (remote controller cord) and strong wiring (interunit,
ground, and other power wiring) at least 50 mm so that they do not pass through the same place together.
Proximity may cause electrical interference, malfunctions, and breakage.
16
C : 3P177351-2D
133
EDSG281001
Processing method of wiring through-holes

Inter-unit wiring,
ground wire, or remote
controller cord
Wiring through-holes
Sealing pad (Small) (13)

Putty or thermal
insulation material
(procured locally)
Use a round crimp-style terminal with insulation sleeve for connection to the terminal block for wiring the
units.
Attach insulation sleeve
Round crimp-style terminal

Fig. 26
Electric wire
When none are available, follow the instructions below.

Do not connect wires of different gauge to the same power supply terminal.
Connect wires of the

same gauge to both
side.
Do not connect wires

of the same gauge to
one side.

of different gauges.
Fig. 27
(Looseness in the connection may cause overheating.)
In wiring, make certain that prescribed wires are used, carry out complete connections, and fix the wires so
that outside forces are not applied to the terminals.
Use the correct screwdriver for tightening the terminal screws. If the blade of screwdriver is too small, the
head of the screw might be damaged, and the screw will not be properly tightened.
If the terminal screw are tightened too hard, screws might be damaged.
Refer to the table below for the tightening torque of the terminal screws.
Tightening torque (Nm)
Terminal block for remote controller
0.79 to 0.97
Terminal block for wiring the units
1.18 to 1.44
9. WIRING EXAMPLE
For the wiring of outdoor units, refer to the installation manual attached to the outdoor units.
Confirm the system type.
Pair type: 1 remote controller controls 1 indoor unit. (standard system) (Refer to Fig. 28)
Group control: 1 remote controller controls up to 16 indoor units. (All indoor units operate according to the
remote controller) (Refer to Fig. 29)
2 remote controllers control: 2 remote controllers control 1 indoor unit. (Refer to Fig. 30)
17
3P177351-2D
134
EDSG281001
Pair type
Group control
Main power supply
Main power supply
Main switch
Fuse
Main power supply
Main power supply
Main switch
Fuse
Main switch
Fuse
Main switch
Fuse
Outdoor unit
Outdoor unit
Outdoor unit
Outdoor unit
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
P1 P2
Indoor unit
Indoor unit
Remote controller
(Optional accessory)
Fig. 28
1 2 3
P1 P2
Indoor unit
P1 P 2
P1 P2
1 2 3
1 2 3
P1 P2
P1 P2
Indoor unit
Remote controller
Fig. 29
2 remote controllers control

Main power supply
Main switch
Fuse
Outdoor unit
1 2 3
1 2 3
P1 P2
Indoor unit
P1 P2
P1 P2
Remote
controller
Remote
controller
(Slave)
(Optional accessories) Fig. 30
NOTE
1. All transmission wiring except for the remote controller wires is polarized and must match the terminal symbol.
2. In case of group control, perform the remote controller wiring to the master unit when connecting to the
simultaneous operation system. (wiring to the slave unit is unnecessary)
3. For group control remote controller, choose the remote controller that suits the indoor unit which has the
most functions (as attached swing flap)
18
C : 3P177351-2D
135
EDSG281001
10. INSTALLATION OF THE DECORATION PANEL

Caution:
With a wireless remote controller, field setting and test operation cannot be performed without attaching the decoration panel.
<If performing a test run without attaching the decoration panel, read 11. FIELD SETTING and 12. TEST
OPERATION first.>
Refer to the installation manual attached to the decoration panel.
After installing the decoration panel, ensure that there is no space between the unit body and decoration
panel.
11. FIELD SETTING

CAUTION
When performing field setting or test operation without attaching the decoration panel, do not
touch the drain pump. This may cause electric shock.
Check that the outdoor unit has been wired properly.
Make sure the terminal box lids are closed on the indoor and outdoor units.
Field setting must be made from the remote controller and in accordance with installation conditions.
Setting can be made by changing the Mode No., FIRST CODE NO. and SECOND CODE NO..
For setting procedures and instructions, see Field settings provided with the remote controller.
11-1 Setting ceiling height

Select the SECOND CODE NO. that corresponds to the ceiling height Table 5.
(SECOND CODE NO. is factory set to 01.)
Table 5
FCQ - KVEA
100125
71 type
140 type
Standard All
Ceiling round outlet
height (m) High ceiling 1
High ceiling 2
2.7
3.2
2.7 - 3
3 - 3.5
3.2 - 3.6
3.6 - 4.2
Mode No.
Note) 1
FIRST
CODE NO.
SECOND
CODE NO.
01
13 (23)
02
03
Note:
1. Mode No. setting is done in a batch for the group. To make or confirm settings for an individual unit, set
the internal mode number in parentheses.
2. The figure of the ceiling height is for the all round outlet. For the settings for four-direction (part of corner
closed off), three-direction and two-direction outlets, see the installation manual and technical guide supplied with the separately sold closure material kit.
11-2 Setting of air direction

See the installation manual included with the sealing material of air discharge outlet kit, sold separately and
technical guide, for ceiling height settings for two and three-direction air discharge. (The SECOND CODE
NO. is factory set to 01 (all round outlet) before shipping.)
11-3 Settings for Mounting Options

When installing an option sold separately, refer to the installation manual provided to the option.
19
C : 3P177351-2D
136
EDSG281001
11-4 Setting air filter sign

Remote controllers are equipped with liquid crystal display air filter signs to display the time to clean air filters.
Change the SECOND CODE NO. according to Table 6 depending on the amount of dirt or dust in the
room.
(SECOND CODE NO. is factory set to 01 for filter contamination-light.)
Table 6
Spacing time of display air filter
sign (long life type)
Setting
Air filter contaminationlight
Air filter contaminationheavy
No Display
Mode No.
FIRST CODE
NO.
Approx. 2500 hrs
SECOND
CODE NO.
01
10 (20)
Approx. 1250 hrs
0
02
3
Note:
1. Mode No. setting is done in a batch for the group. To make or confirm settings for an individual unit, set
the internal mode number in parentheses.
2. Make settings for No Display in cases where no cleaning display is required, e.g., at the time of regular
maintenance servicing.
The air conditioner is provided with a long life filter as a standard accessory. Explain to the customer the
necessity of cleaning the filter periodically along with the set time for filter cleaning for the prevention of
clogging.
When using wireless remote controllers
When using wireless remote controllers, wireless remote controller address setting is necessary. Refer to
the installation manual attached to the wireless remote controller for setting instructions.
11-5 When implementing group control

When using as a pair unit, you may start/stop (group) control up to 16 unit with the remote controller.
In this case, all the indoor units in the group will operate in accordance with the group control remote controller.
Select a remote controller which matches as many of the functions (swing flap, etc) in the group as possible.
Outdoor unit 1
Indoor unit 1
Outdoor unit 2
Indoor unit 2
Outdoor unit 3
Indoor unit 3
Group control remote controller

Fig. 31
Wiring Method
(1) Remove the terminal box lid. (See 8. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK.)
(2) Cross-wire the terminal block for remote controller (P1, P2) inside the terminal box. (There is no
polarity.) (Refer to Fig. 29 and Table 4)
11-6 Control by 2 Remote Controllers (Controlling 1 indoor unit by 2 remote controllers)

When using 2 remote controllers, one must be set to MAIN and the other to SUB.
MAIN/SUB CHANGEOVER
(1) Insert a
screwdriver into the recess between the upper and lower part of remote controller and, working from the 2 positions, pry off the upper part. (The remote controller PC board is attached to the upper
part of remote controller.) (Refer to Fig. 32)
(2) Turn the main/sub changeover switch on one of the two remote controller PC boards to S. (Leave the
switch of the other remote controller set to M.) (Refer to Fig. 33)
20
3P177351-2D
137
EDSG281001
Upper part of
remote controller
Lower part of
remote controller
Insert the screwdriver here

and gently work off the
upper part of remote controller.
Fig. 32
S
M
(Factory setting)
(Only one remote
controller needs
to be changed if
factory settings
have remained
untoched.)
Remote
controller
PC board
S
M
Fig. 33
Wiring Method (See 8. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK.)

(3) Remove the terminal box lid.
(4) Add remote controller 2 (slave) to the terminal block for remote controller (P1, P2) in the terminal
box. (There is no polarity.) (Refer to Fig. 30 and Table 4)
12. TEST OPERATION

CAUTION
Refer to the section of FOR THE FOLLOWING ITEMS, TAKE SPECIAL CARE DURING CONSTRUCTION AND CHECK AFTER INSTALLATION IS FINISHED. .
After finishing the construction of refrigerant piping, drain piping, and electric wiring, conduct test operation
accordingly to protect the unit.
Check that the outdoor unit has been wired properly.
Check that the terminal box lid of the indoor unit is closed and that the outer plate and piping cover of the
outdoor unit are closed as well.
Clean the decoration panel and interior of the indoor unit on completion of refrigerant piping, drain piping,
and electric wiring work.
Refer to the installation manual provided to the outdoor unit, and perform the test operation of the air conditioner.
If the decoration panel is mounted at the time of test operation, check the operation of the swing flap of the
decoration panel.
If the interior finishing work has been still on the way on completion of test operation, explain to the customer not to operate the air conditioner for the protection of the indoor unit until the interior finishing work
is completed.
If the air conditioner is operated, substances generated from the paint and glue of the interior finishing will
contaminate the indoor unit, thus resulting in water splashing or leakage.
If an error occurs and the air conditioner does not operate, refer to the following troubleshooting information.
On completion of test operation, press the INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button to set the air conditioner to
mode and check that the error code is set to 00 (=normal).
If the error code is other than 00, refer to the following troubleshooting information.
The air conditioner will return to normal run mode if the INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button is pressed
four times.
Perform the trial operation of the air conditioner after mounting the decoration panel if the wireless remote
controller is used.
Mode change
Normal operation
Once
(4 s min.)
Once
Field settings
Four times
Once
On
ce
Fo
ur
tim
es
Test run
Inspection
21
3P177351-2D
138
EDSG281001
PRECAUTIONS
1. Refer to the diagnoses below if the unit does not operate properly.
2. After completing the test run, press the INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button once to put the unit in
inspection mode, and make sure the malfunction code is 00. (=normal)
If the code reads anything other than 00, refer to the malfunction diagnoses below.
NOTE
If a malfunction is preventing operation, refer to the malfunction diagnoses below.
12-1 Cautions for servicing

With the power on. Troubles can be monitored on the remote controller.
If the air conditioner does not operate normally after installing the air conditioner.
a malfunction shown in the table below may happened.
Remote controller display
No display
88*
88 flashing
Malfunction
Power supply trouble or Open phase connection
Wrong wiring between indoor and outdoor unit
Indoor PC board faulty
Wrong remote controller conection wiring
Remote controller faulty
Fuse faulty
*After turning on the power, the maximum is 90 seconds, although it will only display 88. This is not a
problem, and it will be set for 90 seconds.
Trouble shooting with the display on the liquid crystal display remote controller.
1. With the wired remote controller. (NOTE 1)
When the operation stops due to trouble, operation lamp flashed, and
and the Malfunction code are
indicated on the liquid crystal display. In such a case, diagnose the fault contents by referring to the table
on the Malfunction code list it case of group control, the unit No. is displayed so that the indoor unit no with
the trouble can be recognized. (NOTE 2)
2. With the wireless remote controller.
(Refer also to the operation manual attached to the wireless remote controller)
When the operation stops due to trouble. the display on the indoor unit flashes. In such a case, diagnose
the fault contents with the table on the Malfunction code list looking for the Malfunction code which can be
found by following procedures. (NOTE 2)
(1) Press the INSPECTION /TEST OPERATION button,
is displayed and 0 flashes.
(2) Press the PROGRAMMING TIME button and find the unit No. which stopped due to trouble.
Number of beeps 3 short beeps Perform all the following operations
1 short beep
Perform (3) and (6)
1 long beep
No trouble
(3) Press the OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button and upper figure of the Malfunction code flashes.
(4) Continue pressing the PROGRAMMING TIME button unit it makes 2 short beeps and find the upper code.
(5) Press the OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button and lower figure of the Malfunction code flashes.
(6) Continue pressing the PROGRAMMING TIME button unit it makes a long beep and find the lower code.
A long beep indicate the Malfunction code.
NOTE
1. In case wired remote controller. Press the INSPECTION /TEST OPERATION button on remote controller,
starts flashing and changes the inspection mode.

2. Keep down the ON/OFF button for 5 seconds or longer in the inspection mode and the above trouble history disappears, after the trouble code goes on and off twice, followed by the code 00(normal).
The display changes from the inspection mode to the normal mode.
Caution:
Check the items in 2. Items to be checked at time of delivery on page 4 after a test operation.
22
3P177351-2D
139
EDSG281001
12-2 Malfunction code list

For places where the Malfunction code is left blank, the
indication is not displayed. Though the system
continues operating, be sure to inspect the system and make repairs as necessary.
Depending on the type of indoor or outdoor unit, the Malfunction code may or may not be displayed.
Code
A0
A1
A3
A6
AF
AH
AJ
C4
C9
CC
CJ
E0
E1
E3
E4
E5
E7
E9
F3
H3
H4
H7
H9
JA
JC
J1
J2
J3
J5
J6
J7
J8
J9
Malfunction/Remarks
Safety device operates
Indoor units PC board faulty
Drain water level abnormal
Indoor fan motor overloaded, overcurrent or locked
Humidifier faulty
Air cleaner faulty
Only the air cleaner does not function.
Type set improper
Capacity data is wrongly preset. Or there is nothing programmed in the data hold IC.
Sensor for heat exchanger temperature is fault
Sensor for suction air temperature is fault
Humidity sensor abnormal
Sensor for remote controller is fault
The remote controller thermistor does not function, but the system thermo run is
possible.
Action of safety device (outdoor unit)
Outdoor units PC board faulty
High pressure abnormal (outdoor unit)
Low pressure abnormal (outdoor unit)
Compressor motor lock malfunction
Outdoor fan motor lock malfunction
Outdoor fan instantaneous overcurrent malfunction
Electronic expansion valve faulty (outdoor unit)
Discharge pipe temperature abnormal (outdoor unit)
High pressure switch faulty (outdoor unit)
Low pressure switch faulty (outdoor unit)
Outdoor motor position signal malfunction
Outdoor air thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)
Equipment operation in response to errors will vary according to model.
Discharge pipe pressure sensor faulty (outdoor unit)
Suction pipe pressure sensor faulty (outdoor unit)
Pressure sensor system error (batch) (outdoor unit)
Power sensor system error (outdoor unit)
Discharge pipe thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)
Suction pipe thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)
Heat exchanger thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)
Liquid piping temperature sensor system error (outdoor unit)
Intake temperature sensor error (outdoor unit)
23
3P177351-2D
140
EDSG281001
L1
L4
L5
L8
L9
LC
P1
P3
P4
PJ
U0
U1
U2
U4
UF
U5
U8
UA
UC
UJ
Inverter system error (outdoor unit)

Overheated heat-radiating fin (outdoor unit)
Inverter cooling defect.
Instantaneous overcurrent (outdoor unit)
Possible earth fault or short circuit in the compressor motor.
Electric thermal (outdoor unit)
Possible electrical overload in the compressor or cut line in the compressor motor.
Stall prevention (outdoor unit)
Compressor possibly locked.
Transmission malfunction between the outdoor control units inverters (outdoor unit)
Open-phase (outdoor unit)
P-board temperature sensor malfunction (outdoor unit)
Heat-radiating fin temperature sensor malfunction (outdoor unit)
Type set improper (outdoor unit)
Suction pipe temperature abnormal
Reverse phase
Reverse two phase of the L1,L2and L3 leads.
Power source voltage malfunction (outdoor unit)
Includes the defect in 52C.
Transmission error (indoor unit outdoor unit)
Wrong wiring between indoor and outdoor units or malfunction of the PC board
mounted on the indoor and the outdoor units.
Transmission error (indoor unit remote controller)
Transmission is improper between the indoor unit and the remote controller.
Malfunction in transmission between main and sub remote controls.
(Malfunction in sub remote controller.)
Miss setting for multi system
Setting is wrong for selector switch of multi-system. (see switch SS2 on the main
units PC board)
Central control address overlapping
Peripheral equipment transmission fault
24
3P177351-2D
141
EDSG281001
2.2
2.2.1
e
d
h
f
g
b
d
c
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
The external appearance of the outdoor
unit varies depending on its capacity
class. The outdoor unit shown in the figure is for reference to indicate features.
Contact your Daikin Dealer and verify
which outdoor unit you have.
Remote controller
Depending on the system configuration,
the remote controller is not provided.
Inlet air
Discharged air
Air outlet
Drain pipe
Air inlet
The built-in air filter removes dust and dirt.
Drain pumping out device (built-in)
Drains water removed from the room during cooling.
Ground wire
Wire to ground from the outdoor unit to prevent electrical shocks.
3P184442-4D
142
EDSG281001
2.2.2
Installation
FFQ25BV1B
FFQ35BV1B
FFQ50BV1B
FFQ60BV1B
SPLIT SYSTEM Air Conditioners
Installation manual
2
CONTENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .......................................................................................... 1

BEFORE INSTALLATION ........................................................................................... 2
SELECTING INSTALLATION SITE ............................................................................ 5
PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION.............................................................. 6
INDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION .................................................................................. 7
REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK ................................................................................. 9
DRAIN PIPING WORK.............................................................................................. 11
WIRING EXAMPLE ................................................................................................... 14
ELECTRIC WIRING WORK ...................................................................................... 15
INSTALLATION OF THE DECORATION PANEL..................................................... 17
FIELD SETTINGS ..................................................................................................... 18
TEST OPERATION ................................................................................................... 19
1. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please read these SAFETY PRECAUTIONS carefully before installing air conditioning equipment and be
sure to install it correctly.
After completing installation, conduct a trial operation to check for faults and explain to the customer how to
operate the air conditioner and take care of it with the aid of the operation manual. Ask the customer to store
the installation manual along with the operation manual for future reference.
This air conditioner comes under the term appliances not accessible to the general public.
WARNING ........ Failure to follow these instructions properly may result in personal injury or loss of life.
CAUTION ......... Failure to observe these instructions properly may result in property damage or personal injury, which may be serious depending on the circumstances.
WARNING
Make sure that all wiring is secured, the specified wires are used, and that there is no strain on the terminal connections or wires.
English
1
3P184443-4D
143
EDSG281001
When wiring the power supply and connecting the wiring between the indoor and outdoor units, position
the wires so that the control box lid can be securely fastened.
Improper positioning of the control box lid may result in electric shocks, fire or overheating terminals.
Imperfect earthing may result in electric shocks or fire.
A high surge current from lightning or other sources may cause damage to the air conditioner.
CAUTION
Install the indoor and outdoor units, power cord and connecting wires at least 1 meter away from televisions or radios to prevent picture interference and noise.
(Depending on the incoming signal strength, a distance of 1 meter may not be sufficient to eliminate
noise.)
Remote controller (wireless kit) transmitting distance can be shorter than expected in rooms with electronic fluorescent lamps (inverter or rapid start types).
the unit.
The air conditioner is not intended for use in a potentially explosive atmosphere.
Do not exert pressure on the resin parts when opening the unit or when moving it after opening
Be sure to check the type of R410A refrigerant to be used before doing any work. (Using an incorrect
When opening the unit or moving it after opening, be sure to lift it by holding on to the lifting lugs without
exerting any pressure on other parts, especially, drain piping, and other resin parts.
Leave the unit inside its packaging while moving, until reaching the installation site. Use a sling of soft
material, where unpacking is unavoidable or protective plates together with a rope when lifting, to avoid
damage or scratches to the unit.
Especially, do not unfasten packing case(top) guarding the control box until suspending the unit.
Refer to the installation manual of the outdoor unit for items not described in this manual.
Do not dispose of any parts necessary for installation until the installation is complete.
English
3P184443-4D
144
EDSG281001
2-1
PRECAUTIONS
2-2

ACCESSORIES
Name
(1)Drain hose
(2)Metal clamp
(3)Washer for
hanger bracket
Quantity
1 pc.
1 pc.
8 pcs.
(4)Clamp
(Big)
6 pcs.
(5)Paper pattern
for installation
(Small)
1 pc.
1 pc.
Also used as
packing material
Shape
Name
(6)Screws
(M5)
Quantity
4 pcs.
(7)Washer
Insulation for fitting
fixing plate
4 pcs.
For paper pattern

for installation
Sealing pad
1 each.
1 each.
(8)For gas pipe
(12)Sealing
material
2 pcs.
(10)Large
Operation
manual
Installation
manual
Shape
(11)Small
(9)For liquid pipe
2-3
(Other)
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
The optional decoration panel and remote controller are required for this indoor unit.(Refer to Table 1, 2)
Table 1
Unit model
Optional decoration panel

BYFQ60BW1
Color : White
FFQ25355060BV1B
These are two types of remote controllers: wired and wireless. Select a remote controller from Table 2
according to customer request and install in an appropriate place.
Table 2
Remote controller type
Wired type
Wireless type
Cooling only type
Heat Pump type

BRC1C61
BRC7E531W
BRC7E530W
NOTE
If you wish to use a remote controller that is not listed in Table 2 on page 3, select a suitable remote controller after consulting catalogs and technical materials .
English
3
3P184443-4D
145
EDSG281001
a. Items to be checked after completion of work
Items to be checked
Are the indoor and outdoor unit fixed firmly? The units may drop, vibrate or make noise.
The unit may malfunction or the compoIs the outdoor unit fully installed?
nents burn out.
Does the power supply voltage correspond The unit may malfunction or the compoto that shown on the name plate?
nents burn out.
The unit may malfunction or the compoAre wiring and piping correct?
nents burn out.
Dangerous at electric leakage.
The unit may malfunction or the compoIs wiring size according to specifications?
nents burn out.
Are refrigerant piping length and additional The refrigerant charge in the system is not
clear.
Check
b. Items to be checked at time of delivery
Also review the SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Items to be checked
Are the control box lid, air filter, suction grille attached?
Check
c. Points for explanation about operations

The items with
WARNING and
CAUTION marks in the instruction manual are the items pertaining to possibilities for bodily injury and material damage in addition to the general usage of
the product. Accordingly, it is necessary that you make a full explanation about the described contents
and also ask your customers to read the instruction manual.
2-4
NOTE TO THE INSTALLER
Be sure to instruct customers how to properly operate the unit (especially cleaning filters, operating different functions, and adjusting the temperature) by having them carry out operations themselves while looking at the manual.
English
3P184443-4D
146
EDSG281001

Hold the unit by the 4 lifting lugs when opening the box and moving it, and do not exert pressure on to any
other part piping (refrigerant, drain, etc.) or plastic parts.
If the temperature or humidity inside the ceiling might rise above 30C or RH 80%, respectively, use the
high-humidity kit (sold separately) or add extra insulation to the main unit body.
Use glass wool or polyethylene foam as insulation and make sure it is at least 10mm thick and fits inside the
ceiling opening.
The direction this product blows can be selected. However, a separately sold shut-off material kit is
needed in order to make the unit blow in two, three, or four (corner shut-off) directions.
(1) Select an installation location with the customers approval which matches the following conditions.
A location from which cool (warm) air will reach the whole room.
A location with no objects blocking the air passage.
A location where drainage can be done with no problem.
A location strong enough to support the weight of the indoor unit.
Locations where the wall is not significantly tilted.
A location which leaves enough room for installation and service work.
A location where there is no risk of flammable gas leaking.
A location where the length of the indoor-outdoor piping is no longer than the tolerated length (see the
installation manual that came with the outdoor unit for details).
[Space required for installation] (mm)

>
>
* 1500
Air
outlet
* 1500
1500
2500
>
>
>
For installation
in high places
* 1500
Air
Air outlet
inlet
>
* 1500
>
* 1500
Fig. 1
>
* 1500
Fig. 2
NOTE
Leave 200 mm or more space where marked with the *, on sides where the air outlet is closed.
Model
FFQ25355060
285 (Confirm the space of 295 or more)
CAUTION
Install the indoor and outdoor units, power cord and connecting wires at least 1 meter away from televisions or radios in order to prevent image interference or noise.
(Depending on the radio waves, a distance of 1 meter may not be sufficient enough to eliminate the
noise.)
(2) Air flow direction
The air direction shown is an example.
Select the appropriate number of directions according to the shape of the room and the location of the
unit. (Field settings have to be made using the remote controller and the outlet vents have to be shut off if
two, three, or four (corner shut-off) directions are selected. See the shut-off materials (sold separately)
installation manual for details.)
English
5
3P184443-4D
147
EDSG281001
[Air flow direction] (Example)

Piping
Piping
Air outlet in
4 directions
Piping
Air outlet in
3 directions
Air outlet in
2 directions
(3) Use suspension bolts for installation. Check whether the ceiling is strong enough to support the
weight of the unit or not. If there is a risk, reinforce the ceiling before installing the unit.
(Installation pitch is maked on the paper pattern for installation. Refer to it to check for points requiring
reinforcing.)

(1) Relation of ceiling opening to unit and suspension bolt position.
Suspension
bolt ( 4)

575 (indoor unit)
585-660 (Ceiling opening)
(Ceiling opening dimension)

585 *660
Hanger
bracket
False
ceiling
20
20
(Ceiling-panel overlapping dimension)

View as seen from A
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
(180)

585-660 (Ceiling opening)
575 (indoor unit)
Refrigerant
piping
(mm)
A
NOTE
Installation is possible with a ceiling dimension of 660 mm (marked with *). However, to achieve a ceilingpanel overlapping dimension of 20 mm, the spacing between the ceiling and the unit should be 45 mm or
less. If the spacing between ceiling and the unit is over 45 mm, attach ceiling material to
part or
recover the ceiling.
False
ceiling
False
ceiling
Ceiling material
< 45
< 45
(mm)
Fig. 5
(2) Make the ceiling opening needed for installation where applicable. (For existing ceilings)
Refer to the paper pattern for installation (5) for ceiling opening dimensions.
Create the ceiling opening required for installation. From the side of the opening to the casing outlet,implement the refrigerant and drain piping and wiring for remote controller (unnecessary for wireless type) and wiring between units. Refer to each PIPING or WIRING section.
After making an opening in the ceiling, it may be necessary to reinforce ceiling beams to keep the ceiling level and to prevent it from vibrating. Consult the builder for details.
English
3P184443-4D
148
EDSG281001
(3) Install the suspension bolts.

(Use either a M8 ~ M10 size bolt)
Use a hole-in anchor for existing ceilings, and
a sunken insert, sunken anchor or other field
supplied parts for new ceilings to reinforce
the ceiling to bear the weight of the unit.
Adjust clearance (50 100 mm) from the
ceiling before proceeding further.
<installation example>
Ceiling slab
Anchor
Suspension bolt
False ceiling
NOTE
(mm)
Fig. 6

Installing optional accessories (except for the decoration panel) before installing the indoor unit is
easier. However, for existing ceilings, install fresh air inlet component kit and branch duct before
(1) For new ceilings
(1-1) Install the indoor unit temporarily.
washer (3) from the upper and lower sides of the hanger bracket.
The washer fixing plate (7) will prevent the washer from falling.

Hanger bracket
Insert
Tighten
(double nuts)
Nut
(Field supplied)

(accessory)
Fig. 7
Fig. 8
(1-2) Refer to the paper pattern for installation (5) for ceilling opening dimension.
Consult the builder or carpenter for details.
The center of the ceiling opening is indicated on the paper pattern for installation.
The center of the unit is indicated on the paper pattern for installation.
Fix the paper pattern to the unit with screws (6) (4).
Ceiling height is shown on the side of the paper pattern for installation (5). Adjust the height of the
unit according to this indication.
Please perform one of the following, as the shape of the paper pattern for installation differs
according to the model.
Paper pattern for installation (5)
(accessory)
Screws (6)
(accessory)
Screws (6)
(accessory) [Installation of paper pattern for installation]
Fig. 9
English
7
3P184443-4D
149
EDSG281001
<Ceiling work>
(1-3) Adjust the unit to the right position for installation.
(Refer to 4.PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION-(1).)
(1-4) Check the unit is horizontally level.
The indoor unit is equipped with a built-in drain pump and float switch. Verify that it is level by using
a water level or a waterfilled vinyl tube.
CAUTION
If the unit is tilted against condensate flow, the float
switch may malfunction and cause water to drip.
(1-5) Remove the washer fixing plate (7) used for preventing the washer from falling and tighten the
upper nut.
(1-6) Remove the paper pattern for installation (5).
Water level
Vinyl tube
[Maintaining horizontality]
(2) For existing ceilings
Fig. 10
(2-1) Install the indoor unit temporarily.
washer (3) from the upper and lower sides of hanger bracket. The washer fixing plate (7) will prevent the washer from falling.

Hanger bracket
Insert
Nut
(Field supplied)
Tighten
(double nuts)
Fig. 11

(accessory)
Fig. 12
(2-2) Adjust the height and position of the unit.

(Refer to 4.PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION-(1).)
(2-3) Perform steps (1-4), (1-5) in (1) For new ceilings.
English
3P184443-4D
150
EDSG281001

<For refrigerant piping of outdoor units, see the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit.>
<Execute heat insulation work completely on both sides of the gas piping and the liquid piping.
Otherwise, a water leakage can result sometimes.>
(When using a heat pump, the temperature of the gas piping can reach up to approximately 120 C, so use
<Also, in cases where the temperature and humidity of the refrigerant piping sections might exceed
30 C or RH80%, reinforce the refrigerant insulation. (20 mm or thicker) Condensation may form on
the surface of the insulating material.>
<Before refrigerant piping work, check which type of refrigerant is used. Proper operation is not possible if the types of refrigerant are not the same.>
CAUTION
Apply ester oil or ether oil around the flare portions before connectiong.
To prevent dust, moisture or other foreign matter from infiltrating the tube, either pinch the end
or cover it with tape.
Do not allow anything other than the designated refrigerant to get mixed into the refrigerant
circuit, such as air, etc. If any refrigerant gas leaks while working on the unit, ventilate the room
thoroughly right away.
Be sure to use both a spanner and torque wrench together, as
shown in the drawing, when connecting or disconnecting pipes to/
from the unit. (Refer to Fig. 13)
When connecting the flare nut, coat the flare section (only inside)
with ester oil or ether oil, rotate three or four times first,
then screw in. (Refer to Fig. 14)
Torque wrench
Spanner
Piping union
CAUTION
Flare nut
Over-tightening may damage the flare and cause a

refrigerant leakage.
Apply ester oil or

ether oil only inside
NOTE
Table 3
Pipe size
Tightening torque
6.4(1/4")
14.2 - 17.2 Nm
(144 - 175 kgfcm)
32.7 - 39.9 Nm
(333 - 407 kgfcm)
9.5(3/8")
12.7(1/2")
49.5 - 60.3 Nm
(505 - 615 kgfcm)
Fig. 13
Fig. 14
Flare dimensions
A (mm)
Flare
8.7-9.1
12.8-13.2
16.2 - 16.6
English
9
C : 3P184443-4D
151
EDSG281001

You must use a torque wrench but if you are obliged to install the unit without a torque wrench, you may follow the installation method mentioned below.
When you keep on tightening the flare nut with a spanner, there is a point where the tightening torque suddenly increases. From that position, further tighten the flare nut the angle shown below:
Pipe size
6.4 (1/4")
9.5 (3/8")
12.7 (1/2")

60 90 degrees
60 90 degrees
30 60 degrees

Approx. 150mm
Approx. 200mm
Approx. 250mm
CAUTION
(Flux has extremely harmful influence on refrigerant piping systems. For instance, if the chlorine based
flux is used, it will cause pipe corrosion or, in particular, if the flux contains fluorine, it will damage the
refrigerant oil.)
Before brazing local refrigerant piping, nitrogen gas shall be blown through the piping to expel air from the
piping.
If your brazing is done without nitrogen gas blowing, a large amount of oxide film develops inside the piping, and could cause system malfunction.
Nitrogen should be set to 0.02 MPa (0.2 kg/cm2) with a pressure-reducing valve if brazing while inserting
nitrogen into the piping. (Refer to Fig.15)
Taping
Refrigerant piping
Part to be
brazed
hands valve
Nitrogen
Nitrogen
Fig. 15
leakage by thoroughly studying the following figure and using the attached heat insulating materials for fitting (8) and (9). (Fasten both ends with the clamps (4).)
(Refer to Fig. 16)
Wrap the sealing pad (11) only around the insulation for the joints on the gas piping side.
(Refer to Fig. 16)
10
English
3P184443-4D
152
EDSG281001
Small sealing pad

(accessory) (11)
(Wrap the piping union
with the sealing pad.)
Clamp (4)
(Big 4)
(accessory)
Liquid piping

(accessory) (9)
(for liquid pipe)
Insulation for fitting (accessory) (8)
(for gas pipe)
Gas piping
Fig. 16
CAUTION
Be sure to insulate any field piping all the way to the piping connection inside the unit. Any exposed piping
may cause condensation or burns if touched.

(1) Carry out the drain piping
Lay pipes so as to ensure that drainage can occur with problems.
Employ a pipe with either the same diameter or with the diameter larger (excluding the raising section)
than that of the connecting pipe (PVC pipe, nominal diameter 20 mm, outside diameter 26 mm).
keep the drain pipe short and sloping downwards at a gradient of at least 1/100 to prevent air pockets from
forming.
If the drain hose cannot be sufficiently set on a slope, refer to PRECAUTIONS FOR DRAIN RAISING PIPING on page 12.
To keep the drain hose from sagging, space hanger bracket every 1 to 1.5 m.
Hanger bracket
GOOD
1/100
gradient or more
WRONG
WRONG
Fig. 17
Fig. 18
CAUTION
Use the attached drain hose (1) and metal clamp (2).
Insert the drain hose into the drain socket up to the base, and tighten the clamp securely within the portion
of a gray tape of the hose-inserted tip. Tighten the clamp until the screw head is less than 4 mm from the
hose.
Make sure that heat insulation work is executed on the following 2 spots to prevent any possible water
leakage due to dew condensation.
Indoor drain pipe
Drain socket
Wrap the attached sealing pad (10) over the metal clamp (2) and drain hose to insulate.
English
11
3P184443-4D
153
EDSG281001
Metal clamp (2)

(accessory)
Metal clamp (2)

(accessory)

(accessory)
Drain hose (1)

(accessory)
Tape (Gray)
4mm
Fig. 19
Fig. 20

Install the drain raising pipes at a height of less than 545 mm.
Install the drain raising pipes at a right angle to the indoor unit and no more than 300 mm from the unit.
Drain hose (1)

(accessory)
300
Drain hose (accessory)(1)
Adjustable
( 545)
1-1.5m
Metal clamp (2)

(accessory)
750
To prevent air bubbles in the

drain hose part, keep it level or
slightly tilted up. Any bubbles in
the hose might cause the unit to
make noise due to backflow
when the drain pump stops.
Hanger bracket
Ceiling slab
205
Level or
tilted
slightly up
(mm)
Drain raising pipe

Raising section
Fig. 21
NOTE
To ensure no excessive pressure is applied to the included drain hose (1), do not bend or twist when
installing. (This may cause leakage.)
0 545mm
Central drain pipe

The drain pipe should have a downward
slope of at least 1/100 to prevent
air pockets from forming.
Fig. 22
Water accumulating in the drain

piping can cause the drain to clog.
(2) After piping work is finished, check if drainage flows smoothly.
Add approximately 1000 cc of water slowly from the air outlet and check drainage flow.
Check drainage flow during cooling operation, explained in HOW TO TEST OPERATION on page 19.
CAUTION
If someone who does not have the proper qualifications performs the work, perform the following after the
Remove the control box lid. Connect the single phase power supply (SINGLE PHASE 50Hz 220-240V) to connections No.1 and No.2 on the power supply terminal block. Do not connect to No.3 of the power supply terminal block. (The drain pump will not operate.) When carrying out wiring work around the control box, make sure
none of the connectors come undone. Be sure to attach the control box lid before turning on the power.
After confirming drainage (Fig.23, Fig.24), turn off the power and remove the power supply.
Attach the control box lid as before.
12
English
3P184443-4D
154
EDSG281001
Drain sockets
(Check the drainage now.)
Drain pump
location
2
100
(mm)
Plastic container
for pouring
(Tube should be
about 100 mm long.)
Service drain outlet (with rubber plug)

(Use this outlet to drain water from
the drain pan)
<Adding water through air outlet>
[Method of adding water]
Fig. 23
Control
box lid
Remove the
control box lid
(take off 2 screws)
Power supply
terminal block
No.3
No.1 No.2
Ground
Single phase
power supply
(50Hz 220-240V)
Fig. 24
CAUTION
Do not connect the drain piping directly to sewage pipes that smell of ammonia. The ammonia in the sewage
might enter the indoor unit through the drain pipes and corrode the heat exchanger.
Keep in mind that it will become the cause of getting drain pipe blocked if water collects on drain pipe.
English
13
3P184443-4D
155
EDSG281001
8. WIRING EXAMPLE
Pair type: 1 remote controller controls 1 indoor unit. (standard system) (Refer to Fig. 25)
Group control: 1 remote controller controls up to 16 indoor units. (All indoor units operate according to
the remote controller) (Refer to Fig. 27)
Pair type
Main power supply
Main switch
Fuse
Outdoor unit
1 2 3
1 2 3
P1 P2
Indoor unit
P1 P2
Remote controller
(Optional accessories)
Fig. 25
Group control
Main power supply
Main power supply
Main power supply
Main power supply
Main switch
Fuse
Main switch
Fuse
Main switch
Fuse
Main switch
Fuse
Outdoor unit
Outdoor unit
Outdoor unit
Outdoor unit
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
P1 P2
1 2 3
P1 P2
Indoor unit
Indoor unit
P1 P2
Remote controller
Fig. 27
1 2 3
P1 P2
Indoor unit
P1 P2
Indoor unit
Remote
controller 1 P P
(Optional
accessories)
1
P1 P2
Fig. 28
Remote
controller 2
(Optional
accessories)
NOTE
1. All transmission wiring except for the remote controller wires is polarized and must match the terminal
symbol.
2. In case a shielding wire is to be used, connect a shielded portion with the
of a remote controller terminal board.(Also, connect the ground for the remote control to a grounded metal part.)
14
English
C : 3P184443-4D
156
EDSG281001
For electric wiring work, refer to also Wiring diagram label attached to the Control box lid.
Do not connect the ground wire to gas and water pipes, lightning rods, or telephone ground wires.
Gas pipes : might cause explosions or fire if gas leaks.
Water pipes : no grounding effect if hard vinyl piping is used.
Telephone ground wires or lightning rods : might cause abnormally high electric potential in the ground

The remote controller cord should be procured locally. Refer to the Table 4 when preparing one.
Table 4
Wire
Wiring between units
Size(mm2)
Length(m)
2.5
0.75-1.25
Max.500 *
2.0
H05VV-U4G(NOTE 1)
Vinyl cord with sheath or cable (2 wire) (NOTE 2)
Wiring to ground terminal
Ground wire conform to local codes
*This will be the total extended length in the system when doing group control.
NOTE
2. Asian market : Vinyl cord with sheath or cable (Insulated thickness : 1mm or more)
For Australian regular : Shield wire (Insulated thickness : 1mm or more)
CAUTION
Arrange the wires and fix a lid firmly so that the lid does not float during wiring work.
Do not clamp remote controller cords together with wiring between units together. Doing so may cause
malfunction.
Remote controller cords and wiring between units should be located at least 50 mm from other electric
wires. Not following this guideline may result in malfunction due to electrical noise.
Connection of wiring between units, ground wire and for the remote control cord (Refer to Fig. 29)
Wiring between units and ground wire
Remove the control box lid and connect wires of matching number to the power supply terminal block
(4P)inside. And connect the ground wire to the terminal block. In doing this, pull the wires inside through
the hole and fix the wires securely with the included clamp (4).
Give enough slack to the wires between the clamp (4) and power supply terminal block. (Use Fig. 30 as a
guide and allow at least 80mm for removing the sheath.)
Remove the control box lid and pull the wires inside through the hole and connect to the terminal block for
remote controller (6P). (no polarity) Securely fix the remote controller cord with the included clamp (4).
Give enough slack to the wires between the clamp (4) and the terminal block for the remote controller.
After connection, attach sealing material (12)
Be sure to attach it to prevent the infiltration of water as well as any insects and other small creatures from
the outside. Otherwise a short circuit may occur inside the control box.
English
15
3P184443-4D
157
EDSG281001
Wiring Remote controller cord
Ground the shield part of shielded wire.

Refer to Note 2 in "8. WIRING EXAMPLE"
Note
Terminal block for

remote controller (6P)
15
10~
mm
control box lid
After clamping
Clamp(4)(small)
(accessory)
to wire sheath,
Clamp(4)
clamp the wire
(accessory) sheath with
(Big)
Clamp(4) Clamp(4)(Big)
(Small)
to clamp
material.
Be sure to clamp
wire sheath.
After securing the
Clamp
clamp (4) to clamp
material
material, cut off
any extra material
Wiring diagram label

(Back side of control box lid)
Remove the
control box lid
(take off 2
screws)

Outdoor
unit
Note
Indoor
unit
(Wiring between units)

How to connect power
supply terminal block
(4P) with ground wire
10~15mm
Wiring between
units
Clamp(4)
(Big)
Power supply
terminal block
(accessory) Be sure to clamp
Clamp
material
wire sheath.
After securing the
clamp (4) to clamp material,
cut off any extra material
Fig. 29
Note)
Be sure to attach it to prevent the infiltration of water
as well as any insects and other small creatures from
the outside. Otherwise a short circuit may occur
inside the control box.
(accessory)
Sealing material (12)
Sealing
material(12)
Attach completely to
hole of wiring without
leaving any space
(accessory)
Wiring
(Outside)
Wiring to
outside
(Inside)
[How to attach sealing materials]
Observe the notes mentioned below when wiring to the power supply terminal block.
Tightening torque for the terminal blocks.
If the terminal screws are tightened too hard, screws might be damaged.
Terminal block for remote controller (6P)
Power supply terminal block (4P)
16

0.79 - 0.97
1.18 - 1.44
English
3P184443-4D
158
EDSG281001
Precautions to be taken for power supply wiring

Use a round crimp-style terminal for connection to the power supply terminal block. In case it cannot be
used due to unavoidable reasons, be sure to observe the following instructions.
Be sure to peel off the sheath of wiring between units more than 80 mm.
(Refer to Fig. 30)
In wiring, make certain that prescribed wires are used, carry out complete connections, and fix the wires
so that external forces are not applied to the terminals.

e
or
mm
80
Fig. 30
m
or
When none are available, follow the instructions below.

Do not connect wires of different gauge to the same power supply terminal.

same gauge to both
side.

one side.

(Looseness in the connection may cause overheating.)

CAUTION
cause the control box lid to stick up, then close the cover firmly.
When attaching the control box lid, make sure you do not pinch any wires.
After all the wiring connections are done, fill in any gaps in the through holes with putty or insulation (procured locally) to prevent small animals and insects from entering the unit from outside. (If any do get in,
they could cause short circuits in the control box.)
10. INSTALLATION OF THE DECORATION PANEL

Caution:
With a wireless remote controller, field setting and test operation cannot be performed without
attaching the decoration panel.
<Read 12. TEST OPERATION before making a test run without attaching the decorated panels.>
After installing the decoration panel, ensure that there is no space between the unit body and decoration panel.
English
17
3P184443-4D
159
EDSG281001
11. FIELD SETTINGS

CAUTION
(1) Make sure the control box lids are closed on the indoor and outdoor units.
(2) Field settings must be made from the remote controller and in accordance with installation conditions.
The Field Settings included with the remote control lists the order of the settings and method of operation.
11-1 Setting air outlet direction

For changing air outlet direction (2 or 3 directions), refer to the optional installation manual of the sealing
member of air discharge outlet kit or the service manual.
(SECOND CODE NO. is factory set to 01 for air outlet in 4 directions.)
11-2 Setting for options

For settings for options, see the installation instructions provided with the option.

Remote controllers are equiped with liquid crystal display air filer signs to display the time to clean air filters.
Change the SECOND CODE NO. according to Table 5 depending on the amount of dirt or dust in the
room.
(SECOND CODE NO. is factory set to 01 for air filter contamination-light.)
Table5
Setting
Air filter contamination-light
Air filter contamination-heavy
Spacing time of display air

filter sign (long life type)
Approx. 2500 hrs
Approx. 1250 hrs
Mode No.
FIRST CODE
NO.
10 (20)
SECOND
CODE NO.
01
02
When using wireless remote controllers

When using wireless remote controllers, wireless remote controller address setting is necessary. Refer to
the installation manual attached to the wireless remote controller for setting instructions.

When using as a pair unit, you may control up to 16 unit with the remote controller.
Select a remote controller which matches as many of the functions (swing flap, etc) in the group as possible.
Outdoor unit 1
Indoor unit 1
Outdoor unit 2
Indoor unit 2
Outdoor unit 3
Indoor unit 3
Wiring Method (See 9. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK on page 15.)

(1) Remove the control box lid.
(2) Cross-wire the remote control terminal block (P1 P2) inside the control box. (There is no polarity.)
(Refer to Fig. 27 on page 14 and Table 4 on page 15)
11-5 Two remote Controllers (Controlling 1 indoor unit by 2 remote controllers)

18
English
3P184443-4D
160
EDSG281001
MAIN/SUB CHANGEOVER
(1) Insert a
Fig. 31
Upper part of
remote controller
Insert the screwdriver

here and gently work
off the upper part of
remote controller.
Fig. 32
Lower part of
remote controller
(Factory setting)
S
M
(Only one remote

controller needs S
to be changed if M
factory settings
have remained
untouched.)
Remote
controller
PC board
Wiring Method (See 9. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK on page15. )

(4) Add remote controller 2 to the remote control terminal block (P1, P2) in the control box.
(There is no polarity.) (Refer to Fig. 28 on page 14 and Table 4 on page 15)
12. TEST OPERATION

CAUTION
Refer to the section of FOR THE FOLLOWING ITEMS, TAKE SPECIAL CARE DURING CONSTRUCTION AND CHECK AFTER INSTALLATION IS FINISHED on page 4.
After finishing the construction of refrigerant piping, drain piping, and electric wiring, conduct test operation accordingly to protect the unit.
12-1 HOW TO TEST OPERATION

1. Open the gas side stop valve.
2. Open the liquid side stop valve.
3. Electrify for 6 hours.
4. Set to cooling operation with the remote controller and start operation by pressing ON/OFF button (
).
5. Press INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button (
) 4 times (2 times for wireless remote controller) and
operate at Test Operation mode for 3 minutes.
6. Press AIR FLOW DIRECTION ADJUST button (
) to make sure the unit is in operation.
) and operate normally.
8. Confirm function of unit according to the operation manual.
9. If the decoration panel has not been installed, turn off the power after the test operation.
PRECAUTIONS
1. Refer to 12-2 HOW TO DIAGNOSE FOR MALFUNCTION if the unit does not operate properly.
2. After completing the test run, press the INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button once to put the unit in
inspection mode, and make sure the malfunction code is 00. (=normal)
If the code reads anything other than 00, refer to 12-2 HOW TO DIAGNOSE FOR MALFUNCTION.
NOTE
English
19
3P184443-4D
161
EDSG281001
12-2 HOW TO DIAGNOSE FOR MALFUNCTION

If the air conditioner does not operate normally after installing the air conditioner, a malfunction shown in
the table below may happen.
Remote control display
No display
88*
88 flashing
Malfunction
Power supply PCB assy faulty
Wrong remote control connection wiring
Remote control faulty
Fuse faulty
*After turning on the power, the maximun is 90 seconds, although it will only display 88. This is not a problem, and it will be set for 90 seconds.
Diagnose with the display on the liquid crystal display remote controller.
1. With the wired remote controller. (Note 1)
When the operation stops due to trouble, operation lamp flashes, and
and the malfunction code
are indicated on the liquid crystal display. In such a case, diagnose the fault contents by referring to the
table on the malfunction code list in case of group control, the unit No. is displayed so that the indoor unit
No. with the trouble can be recognized. (Note 2)
the fault contents with the table on the Error code list looking for the error code which can be found by following procedures. (NOTE 2)
(1)Press the INSPECTION /TEST OPERATION button,
(2)Press the PROGRAMMING TIME button and find the unit No. which stopped due to trouble.
Number of beeps 3 short beeps ............................. Perform all the following operations
1 short beep............................... Perform (3) and (6)
1 long beep ................................ No trouble
(3)Press the OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button and upper figure of the error code flashes.
(4)Continue pressing the PROGRAMMING TIME button unit it makes 2 short beeps and find the upper code.
(5)Press the OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button and lower figure of the error code flashes.
(6)Continue pressing the PROGRAMMING TIME button unit it makes a long beep and find the lower code.
A long beep indicate the error code.
NOTE
1.In case wired remote controller. Press the INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button on remote controller,

2.Keep down the ON/OFF button for 5 seconds or longer in the inspection mode and the above trouble
history disappears, after the trouble code goes on and off twice, followed by the code 00(normal).
Caution:
Check the items in b. Items to be checked at time of delivery on page 4 after a test operation.
12-3 Malfunction code list
For places where the Malfunction code is left blank, the
indication is not displayed. Though the system continues operating, be sure to inspect the system and make repairs as necessary.
Depending on the type of indoor or outdoor unit, the Malfunction code may or may not be displayed.
Code
A0
A1
A3
A6
AF
20
Malfunction/Remarks
Safety device operates
Humidifier faulty
English
3P184443-4D
162
EDSG281001
AH
AJ
C4
C9
CC
CJ
E0
E1
E3
E4
E5
E7
E9
F3
H3
H4
H7
H9
JA
JC
J1
J2
J3
J5
J6
J7
J8
J9
L1
L4
L5
L8
L9
LC
Air cleaner faulty

Type set improper
Sensor for heat exchanger temperature is fault
Humidity sensor abnormal
The remote controller thermistor does not function, but the system thermo run is
possible.
Outdoor fan instantaneous overcurrent malfunction
Discharge pipe pressure sensor faulty
Suction pipe pressure sensor faulty
Power sensor system error (outdoor unit)
Intake temperature sensor error (outdoor unit)
English
21
3P184443-4D
163
P1
P3
P4
PJ
U0
U1
U2
U4
UF
U5
U8
UA
UC
UJ
22
EDSG281001

P-board temperature sensor malfunction (outdoor unit)
Reverse phase
Reverse two phase of the L1,L2and L3 leads.
Wrong wiring between indoor and outdoor units or malfunction of the PC board
units PC board)
Peripheral equipment transmission fault
English
3P184443-4D
164
EDSG281001
2.3
FHQ35BVV1B / FHQ50BVV1B / FHQ60BVV1B / FHQ71BVV1B / FHQ100BVV1B

/ FHQ125BVV1B
2.3.1
2
f
e
i
g
h
d
j
b
d
c
e
f
k
a
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
The external appearance of the outdoor unit varies
depending on its capacity class.
The outdoor unit shown in the figure is for reference to indicate features.
Contact your Daikin Dealer and verify which outdoor unit you have.
Remote controller
Inlet air
Discharged air
Air outlet
Drain pipe
Suction grille
The built-in air filter removes dust and dirt.
Ground wire
Wire to ground from the outdoor unit to prevent electrical shocks.
3PN07753-3E
3PN07753-4E
165
2.3.2
EDSG281001
Installation
FHQ35BVV1B
FHQ50BVV1B
FHQ60BVV1B
FHQ71BVV1B
FHQ100BVV1B
FHQ125BVV1B
SPLIT SYSTEM
Air Conditioner
Installation manual
CONTENTS
1. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS...............................................................................................1
2. BEFORE INSTALLATION ..............................................................................................3
3. SELECTING INSTALLATION SITE................................................................................5
4. PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION .................................................................6
5. INDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION .....................................................................................8
6. REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK ....................................................................................9
7. DRAIN PIPING WORK .................................................................................................13
8. WIRING EXAMPLE ......................................................................................................15
9. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK .........................................................................................16
10. FIELD SETTINGS ........................................................................................................19
11. TEST OPERATION ......................................................................................................21
Please read these SAFETY PRECAUTIONS carefully before installing air conditioning equipment and be
sure to install it correctly.
This air conditioner comes under the term appliances not accesible to the general public.
CAUTION ..........Failure to observe these instructions properly may result in property damage or personal injury, which may be serious depending on the circumstances.
WARNING
English
1
C : 3PN06588-3H
166
EDSG281001
wires so that the control box lid can be securely fastened.
Imperfect earthing may result in electric shocks or fire.
CAUTION
the unit.
The air conditioner is not intended for use in a potentially explosive atmosphere.
English
3PN06588-3H
167
EDSG281001
When moving the unit while removing it from the carton box, be sure to lift it by holding on to the
four lifting lugs without exerting any pressure on other parts, especially swing flap, the refrigerant
piping, drain piping, and other resin parts.
Be sure to check the type of refrigerant to be used before installing the unit. (Using an incorrect refrigerant
will prevent normal operation of the unit.)
The accessories needed for installation must be retained in your custody until the installation work is completed. Do not discard them!
Leave the unit inside its packaging while moving, until reaching the installation site. Where unpacking is
unavoidable, use a sling of soft material or protective plates together with a rope when lifting, to avoid damage or scratches to the unit.
For the installation of an outdoor unit, refer to the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit.
Do not use the unit in locations with high salt content in the air such as beachfront property, locations where
the voltage fluctuates such as factories, or in automobiles or marine vessels.
2-1 ACCESSORIES
Name
1) Drain hose
2) Clamp
3) Washer for
hanger bracket
4) Clamp
5) Paper pattern
for installation
Quantity
1 pc.
1 pc.
8 pcs.
6 pcs.
1 pc.
Shape
Name Insulation for fitting

Quan1 each.
tity
6) For gas pipe
Shape
Sealing pad
1 each.
(Other)
8) Large
Operation manual
Installation manual
7) For liquid pipe
9) Small
2-2 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES

The remote controller are required for this indoor unit Table 1 on page 3.
(However, the remote controller is not required for the slave unit of a simultaneous operation system.)
These are two types of remote controllers: wired and wireless. Select a remote controller from
Table 1 on page 3 according to customer request and install in an appropriate place.
Table 1
Remote controller type
Wired type
Wireless type
English
Cooling only type

Heat pump type
BRC1C517, BRC1D527, BRC1D528, BRC1C61
BRC7E66, BRC7EA66
BRC7E63W, BRC7EA63W
3
3PN06588-3H
168
EDSG281001
NOTE
If you wish to use a remote controller that is not listed in Table 1 on page 3, select a suitable remote controller after consulting catalogs and technical materials.

Items to be checked
Are the indoor and outdoor unit fixed firmly?

The units may drop, vibrate or make noise.
Dangerous at electric leakage.
Check

clear.

Also review the SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Items to be checked
Check
The items with
WARNING and
CAUTION marks in the instruction manual are the items pertaining
to possibillties for bodily injury and material damage in addition to the general usage of the product.
Accordingly, it is necessary that you make a full explanation about the described contents and also ask
your customers to read the instruction manual.
2-3 NOTE TO THE INSTALLER

Be sure to instruct customers how to properly operate the unit (especially cleaning filters, operating different
functions, and adjusting the temperature) by having them carry out operations themselves while looking at the
manual.
English
3PN06588-3H
169
EDSG281001
30
30
Air outlet
Required service
space
Air inlet
Obstruction
Floor
300
(1) Select an installation site where the following conditions are fulfilled and that meets your customers approval.
Where optimum air distribution can be ensured.
Where nothing blocks air passage.
Where condensate can be properly drained.
Where the ceiling is strong enough to bear the indoor unit weight.
Where the false ceiling is not noticeably on an incline.
Where there is no risk of flammable gas leakage.
Where sufficient clearance for maintenance and service can be ensured.
NOTE
If there is space left over in the section, opening it up 200 mm will make servicing easier.
2500 or higher
from the floor
For installation
in high places
(Length : mm)
Where piping between indoor and outdoor units is possible within the allowable limit. (Refer to the installation manual for the outdoor unit.)
Install the indoor and outdoor units, power cord and connecting wires at least 1 meter away from televisions or radios in order to prevent image interference or noise.
(Depending on the radio waves, a distance of 1 meter may not be sufficient enough to eliminate the
noise.)
(2) Use suspension bolts for installation. Check whether the ceiling is strong enough to support the
weight of the unit or not. If there is a risk, reinforce the ceiling before installing the unit.
(Installation pitch is marked on the paper pattern for installation. Refer to it to check for points requiring
reinforcing.)
(3) This product may be installed on ceilings up to 3.5 m in height. However, if the ceiling is higher
than 2.7 m, the remote control will have to be set locally. (Refer to 10. FIELD SETTINGS on page
19)
English
5
3PN06588-3H
170
EDSG281001

(1) Relation of holes for indoor unit, suspension bolt position, piping and wiring.
A
B
Left side piping hole
85
160
185
210
680
Front view
False ceiling view
260
160
135
C
D
E
Top side drain

piping hole
Rear side piping hole
Air outlet
Top gas piping hole

Suspension
bolt (4)
Top liquid piping hole
(Length : mm)
Model
Type 35, 45, 50
Type 60, 71
Type 100
Type 125
A
960
1160
1400
1590
B
920
1120
1360
1550
C
390
490
610
705
D
375
475
595
690
E
310
410
530
625
F
400
500
620
715
G
375
475
595
690
(2) Make holes for suspension bolts, refrigerant and drain piping, and wiring.
Refer to the paper pattern for installation.
Select the location for each of holes and open the holes in the ceiling.
(3) Remove the parts from the indoor unit.
(3-1)Detach the suction grille.
Slide the locking knobs (2) on the suction grille inward (direction of arrows) and lift upwards.
(Refer to Fig. 1)
With the suction grille open, remove the suction grille forward, holding on to the rear tabs on the suction
grille. (Refer to Fig. 2)
Fig. 1
(3-2)Remove the dressing boards (left and right).

After removing the securing screws for the
dressing boards (one each), pull them forward
(in the direction of the arrow) and remove
them. (Refer to Fig. 3)
Take out the accessories.
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Accessories
Dressing board securing

screw (M4)
Dressing board
6
English
3PN06588-3H
171
EDSG281001
(3-3)Remove the hanger brackets.

Loosen the 2 bolts (M8) used to attach the hanger brackets which are on each side (4 places left and
right) to within 10 mm. (Refer to Fig. 4. 5)
After removing the securing screws (M5) for the hanger brackets which are on the rear side, pull the
hanger brackets back (in the direction of the arrow), and remove them. (Refer to Fig. 5)
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
Hanger bracket
fixing screw (M5)
Length of loosening
should be less than
10 mm
10
Indoor unit
Hanger bracket
setting bolt (M8)
Hanger bracket
Hanger bracket
(4) Attach the suspension bolts. (Use suspension bolts which are W3/8 or M8-M10 in size.)
Adjust the distance of the suspension bolts from the ceiling in advance. (Refer to Fig. 6)
NOTE
Use a hole-in anchor for existing ceilings, and a sunken insert, sunken anchor or other field supplied parts
for new ceilings to reinforce the ceiling to bear the weight of the unit. Adjust clearance from the ceiling
before proceeding further.
Fig. 6
Ceiling slab
25-55
Anchor
Suspension bolt
False ceiling
(Length : mm)
English
7
3PN06588-3H
172
EDSG281001

It may be easier to attach accessory parts before installing the indoor unit. Therefore, please also
read the instruction manuals which are provided with the accessory parts.
(1) Secure the hanger brackets to the suspension bolts. (Refer to Fig. 7)
NOTE
To ensure they are safely secured, use the included washers, and secure them with double nuts to make sure.
(2) Lift the indoor units main body, insert the bolts (M8) for the hanger brackets into the attachment
part on the hanger brackets, while sliding the main body from the front. (Refer to Fig. 8)
(3) Fasten the bolts for the hanger brackets (M8) securely in 4 places, left and right. (Refer to Fig. 8)
(4) Replace the screws for the hanger brackets which had been removed (M5) securely in 2 places left
and right. This is necessary to prevent any forward and back slide in the main body of the indoor
unit. (Refer to Fig. 8)
Fig. 7
Fig. 8
Hanger bracket
Nut (Field supplied)

Washer (3) (attached)
Attachment
part
Hanger bracket
setting bolt (M8)
Double nuts (Field supplied)

Hanger bracket
Hanger bracket
fixing screw (M5)
(5) When hanging the indoor unit main body, be sure to use a level or a plastic tube with water in it to
make sure the drain piping is set either level or slightly tilted, in order to ensure proper drainage.
(Refer to Fig. 9)
Fig. 9
A.B
1
B
1
A.When the drain piping is tilted to the right, or to the right and back.
Place it level, or tilt it slightly to the right or the back. (Within 1.)
B.When the drain piping is tilted to the left, or to the left and back.
Place it level, or tilt it slightly to the left or the back. (Within 1.)
CAUTION
Setting the unit at an angle opposite to the drain piping might cause a water leakage.
English
3PN06588-3H
173
EDSG281001

For refrigerant piping of outdoor units, see the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit.
Execute heat insulation work completely on both sides of the gas piping and the liquid piping.
Otherwise, a water leakage can result sometimes.
Also, in cases where the temperature and humidity of the refrigerant piping sections might exceed
30C or RH80 %, reinforce the refrigerant insulation. (20 mm or thicker) Condensation may form on the
surface of the insulating material.
Before refrigerant piping work, check which type of refrigerant is used. Proper operation is not possible if the types of refrigerant are not the same.
CAUTION
To prevent dust, moisuture or other foreign matter from infiltrating the tube, either pinch the end
or cover it with tape.
Do not allow anything other than the designated refrigerant to get mixed into the refrigerant
circuit, such as air, etc. If any refrigerant gas leaks while working on the unit, ventilate the room
thoroughly right away.
Use copper alloy seamless pipes (ISO 1337).
Be sure to use both a spanner and torque wrench together, as
shown in the drawing, when connecting or disconnecting pipes
to/from the unit. (Refer to Fig. 10)
When connecting the flare nut, coat the flare section (only
inside) with ester oil or ether oil, rotate three or four times first,
then screw in. (Refer to Fig. 11)
Fig. 10
Torque wrench
Piping union
Flare nut
Spanner
NOTE
Fig. 11
CAUTION
Do not let oil get on the screw holders on the dressing board.
Oil can weaken the screw holders.

with ester oil or ether oil.
Table 2
Flare dimensions A (mm)
R410A
14.2-17.2 N m
8.7 9.1
6.4(1/4)
Pipe size Tightening torque
Flare
FHQ
45 2
Type of refrigerant
Applicable model
32.7-39.9 N m
12.8 13.2
49.5-60.3 N m
16.2 16.6
15.9(5/8)
61.8-75.4 N m
19.3 19.7
19.1(3/4)
97.2-118.8 N m
R0.4-0.8
A
90 0.5
9.5(3/8)
12.7(1/2)

CAUTION
Overtightening may damage the flare and cause a refrigerant leakage.
English
9
C : 3PN06588-3H
174
EDSG281001

follow the installation method mentioned below.
When you keep on tightening the flare nut with a spanner, there is a point where the tightening torque
suddenly increases. From that position, further tighten the flare nut the angle shown below:
Pipe size
6.4 (1/4)
9.5 (3/8)
12.7 (1/2)
15.9 (5/8)
19.1 (3/4)

60 to 90 degrees
60 to 90 degrees
30 to 60 degrees
30 to 60 degrees
20 to 35 degrees

Approx. 150mm
Approx. 200mm
Approx. 250mm
Approx. 300mm
Approx. 450mm
CAUTION
(Flux has extremely harmful influence on refrigerant piping systems. For instance, if the chlorine based flux is
used, it will cause pipe corrosion or, in particular, if the flux contains fluorine, it will damage the refrigerant oil.)
piping.
If you brazing is done without nitrogen gas blowing, a large amount of oxide film develops inside the piping,
and could cause system malfunction.
Nitrogen should be set to 0.02 MPa with a pressure-reducing valve if brazing while inserting nitrogen into
the piping. (Refer to Fig. 12)
Refrigerant piping
Part to be
brazed
Taping
hands valve
Nitrogen
Nitrogen
Fig. 12
10
English
3PN06588-3H
175
EDSG281001
leakage by thoroughly studying the following figure and using the attached heat insulating materials for fitting (6) and (7). (Fasten both ends with the clamps (4).)
(Refer to Fig. 13)
Wrap the sealing pad (9) only around the insulation for the joints on the gas piping side.
(Refer to Fig. 13)
CAUTION
Be sure to insulate any field piping all the way to the piping connection inside the unit. Any exposed piping
may cause condensation or burns if touched.
Fig. 13
Procedure for thermal insulation of gas-side piping

Insulating material for joints (6)
(accessory)
Piping insulation
material
(main unit)
Orient so that the end of
the wrapped insulation
Attach to base
material is facing up
Wind around the

pipe, beginning at
the base.
Small seal material
(9) (accessory)
Main unit
Piping insulation material
(Locally procured)
Clamp (4)
(accessory)
Insulation for gas pipe (6) (attached)

Gas piping
Liquid piping
Insulation for liquid pipe (7) (attached)
Clamp (4) (attached) ( 4)
Attach to the bottom
(For both gas piping and liquid piping)
Procedure for thermal insulation of liquid-side piping
Insulating material for
joints (7)(accessory)
Orient so that the end of
the wrapped insulation
material is facing up
Piping insulation material (main unit)

Attach to base
Main unit
Piping insulation material

(Locally procured)
English
11
3PN06588-3H
176
EDSG281001
(1) For piping facing back.

Remove the rear penetration lid and set the piping. (Refer to Fig. 14.16)
(2) For piping facing up.
When setting the piping to face up, the L-shaped branch piping kit sold separately is required.
Removing the top penetration lid and use the L-shaped branch piping kit sold separately to set the piping.
(Refer to Fig. 14.15)
(3) For piping facing right.

Cut out a slit hole on the dressing board (right) and set the piping. (Refer to Fig. 16)
Fig. 14
Fig. 15
Top plate
Cut out
Upward-facing
refrigerant piping
L-shaped branch piping
kit (Optional accessories)
Rear
penetration lid
Top penetration lid
Cut out
Fig. 17
Fig. 16
Thermistor lead line
Right-facing
refrigerant
piping
Rear-facing
refrigerant piping
Top penetration
lid clamp section
Swing motor
lead line
Rear right-facing
drain piping
Right-facing drain piping
Dressing board (right)
removable part
If only setting the drain piping to
face right, cut this section only.
When piping is complete, cut the removed penetration lid into the shape of the piping using scissors and attach.
As when before removing the top penetration lid, secure the lead lines for the swing motor and thermistor
by passing them through the clamp section on the top penetration lid. (Refer to Fig. 14.17)
When doing this, block any gaps between the piping penetration lid and the pipes using putty to prevent
dust from entering the indoor unit.
12
English
3PN06588-3H
177
EDSG281001

(1) Carry out the drain piping.
Make sure piping provides proper drainage.
You can select whether to bring the drain piping our from the rear right, right, rear left, or left. For rear rightfacing and right-facing situations, refer to 6. REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK on page 9 for rear left-facing
and left-facing situations. (Refer to Fig. 18)
Fig. 18
Rear side (metal plate)

removable part
Rear left-facing drain piping

Left dressing board removable part
Left-facing drain piping

When setting piping facing left, move the rubber stopper and insulation which are attached to the drain pipe
connection hole on the left side of the indoor unit to the right-side drain pipe connection hole.
When doing this, insert the rubber stopper all the way in to prevent a water leakage.
Make sure the pipe diameter is the same or bigger than the branch piping. (vinyl-chloride piping, nominal
diameter 20 mm, external diameter 26 mm)
Make sure the piping is short, has at least a 1/100 slope, and can prevent air pockets from forming.
(Refer to Fig. 19)
Fig. 19
Wrong
Good
Do not lift
Tilt down
Make sure there

is no slack
Make sure it is
not in the water
CAUTION
Water accumulating in the drain piping can cause the drain to clog.
Be sure to use the included drain hose (1) and clamp (2).
Also, insert the drain hose completely into the drain socket, and securely attach the clamp bracket inside
the gray tape area on the inserted tip of the drain hose. (Refer to Fig. 20)
Screw the screws on the clamp bracket until there is 4 mm left. (Pay attention to the direction of the attachment to prevent the clamp bracket from coming into contact with the suction grille.)
(Refer to Fig. 21)
English
13
3PN06588-3H
178
EDSG281001
Fig. 20
Fig. 22
Clamp (2) (attached)
Drain hose (1) (attached)
Taping area (Gray)
Clamp (2)
(attached)
Wrong
Fig. 21
Sealing pad (8)

(attached)
4
Sealing
pad (8)
(attached) Clamp (2)
(attached)
(Length : mm)
< Facing rear right or right >
< Facing rear left or left >
Insulate the clamp bracket and drain hose from the bottom using the included sealing pad (8).
(Refer to Fig. 21)
Be sure to insulate all drain piping running indoors.
Do not allow any slack to gather in the drain hose inside the indoor unit. (Refer to Fig. 22)
(Slack in the drain hose can cause the suction grille to break.)
(2) Check to make sure the drain flows smoothly after piping is complete.
Slowly pour 600 ml of drain-checking water into the drain pan through the air outlet.
Plastic container
for pouring
Air outlet
100 mm
or more
Make sure not to splash the water.
Set a downward slope of 1/100 or

greater to ensure that air does
not accumulate.
Central drain pipe
Water accumulating in the drain piping can

cause the drain to clog.
CAUTION
Do not connect the drain piping directly to sewage pipes that smell of ammonia. The ammonia in the sewage might enter the indoor unit through the drain pipes and corrode the heat exchanger.
14
English
3PN06588-3H
179
EDSG281001
8. WIRING EXAMPLE
Pair or Multi system: 1 remote controller controls 1 indoor unit. (standard system) (Refer to Fig. 23)
remote controller) (Refer to Fig. 25)
Two remote controllers control: 2 remote controllers control 1 indoor unit. (Refer to Fig. 26)
Fig. 23
Pair or Multi system

Main power supply
Main switch
Fuse
Outdoor unit
1 2 3
1 2 3
P1 P2
Indoor unit
P1 P2
Remote controller
Fig. 25
Fig. 26
Group control
Two remote controllers control
Main power supply
Main power supply
Main power supply
Main switch
Fuse
Main switch
Fuse
Main switch
Fuse
Outdoor unit
Outdoor unit
Outdoor unit
Main power supply

Main switch
Fuse
Outdoor unit
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
P1 P2
P1 P2
Indoor unit
P1 P2
Indoor unit
P1 P2
P1 P2
Indoor unit
Remote controller (Optional accessories)
Indoor unit
P1 P 2
Remote
controller 1
(Optional
accessories)
English
P1 P2
Remote
controller 2
(Optional
accessories)
15
C : 3PN06588-3H
180
EDSG281001
NOTE
2. In case of group control, perform the remote controller wiring to the master unit when connecting to the
simultaneous operation system. (wiring to the slave unit is unnecessary)
For electric wiring work, refer to also 8. WIRING EXAMPLE on page 15 attached to the unit body.
Do not connect the ground wire to gas pipes, water pipes, lightning rods, or telephone ground wires.
Water pipes: no grounding effect if hard vinyl piping is used.
Table 3
Wire
H05VV - U4G
(NOTE 1, 3)
Vinyl cord with sheath or cable
(2 wires) (NOTE 2)
Size (mm )
Length
2.5
0.75 - 1.25
Max. 500 m
(NOTE 3)
NOTE
1. Shows only in case of protected pipes. Use H07RN-F in case of no protection. (Sheath thickness: 1mm or more)
2. Use double insulated wire for remote controller (Sheath thickness: 1mm or more) or run wires through a
wall or conduit so that the user cannot come in contact with them.
3. This length shall be the total extended length in the system of the group control.
CAUTION
Even if the top or rear penetration lid is removed, pull the remote controller cord and the wiring between
units inside the unit using conduits for each, so that the wiring does not come into contact with the opening
section of the metal casing.
Pass conduits through the wall and secure along with the refrigerant piping in order to prevent external
pressure being applied to the remote controller cord and wiring between units.
Prevent dust from entering into the unit by filling the gap between the conduits and the penetration lid (top
or rear) with corking or putty.
Arrange the wires and fix a lid firmly so that the lid does not float during wiring work.
Do not clamp remote controller cord together with wiring between units together. Doing so may cause malfunction.
Remote controller cord and wiring between units should be located at least 50 mm from other electric wires.
Not following this guideline may result in malfunction due to electrical noise.
16
English
C : 3PN06588-3H
181
EDSG281001
Connection of wiring between units and for the remote control cord (Refer to Fig. 27)
Holding the control box lid, loosen the two securing screws, remove the control box lid, match up the phases
on the power source terminal block inside (3P), and make the connections.
After this is done, use the attached clamp (4) to bind wiring between units to the anchor point.
(Refer to Fig. 28)
Remote controller cord: The simultaneous operation multi sub-unit is not required. (Refer to Fig. 27.29)
Connect to the remote control terminal block (2P). (There is no polarity.) After this is done, use the attached
clamp (4) to bind remote controller cord to the anchor point. (Refer to Fig. 28)
Attaching the suction grille and the dressing boards
Once wiring is complete, firmly attach the dressing side board by reversing the steps taken to remove the
suction grille.
Fig. 27
Remote control terminal block (2P)

Control box
Ground terminal
Fig. 28
Conduits
Rear penetration lid

Seal with caulking
material or putty
Liquid pipe
Gas pipe
Drain hose
Control box lid fixation

screw
Clamp (4) (attached)
Fastener
Wiring between
units
Clamp (4)
(attached)
Fastener
English
Wiring between units (If wiring the slave

unit, connect to master unit)
How to connect power supply terminal
block (3P)
Fig. 29
After securing the

clamp material
to the bracket,
cut off any extra
material.
P1 P2
Fig. 28
Remote control
terminal block (2P)
17
3PN06588-3H
182
EDSG281001
Observe the notes mentioned below when wiring to the terminals.

Tightening torque for the terminal screws.
If the terminal screws are tightened too hard, screws might be damaged.
Terminal
Remote controller terminal block (2P)
Ground terminal
Size
M3.5
M4
M4
Tightening torque
0.79 - 0.97 Nm
1.18 - 1.44 Nm
1.18 - 1.44 Nm
Precautions to be taken for power supply wiring

Use a round crimp-style terminal for connection to the power supply terminal block.
In case it cannot be used due to unavoidable reasons, be sure to observe the following instructions.
(Refer to Fig. 30)
Do not connect wires of different gauge to the same power supply terminal. (Looseness in the connection
may cause overheating.) (Refer to Fig. 31)
When connecting wires of the same gauge, connect them according to. (Refer to Fig. 31)
that external forces are not applied to the terminals.
Fig. 30

Electric wire
Fig. 31

same gauge to both
side. (GOOD)
Good
18

one side. (WRONG)
Wrong

(WRONG)
Wrong
English
3PN06588-3H
183
EDSG281001
10. FIELD SETTINGS

(2) Field settings must be made from the remote controller and in accordance with installation conditions.
Settings can be made by changing the Mode No., FIRST CODE NO. and SECOND CODE NO..
The Field Settings included with the remote control lists the order of the settings and method of operation.
10-1 Setting ceiling height

Select the SECOND CODE NO. that corresponds to the ceiling height Table 4.
(SECOND CODE NO. is factory set to 01 for a ceiling height of less than 2.7m .)
Table 4
Ceiling height (m)
Less than 2.7 m
2.7 to 3.5
Mode No.
FIRST CODE NO.
13 (23)
SECOND CODE NO.

01
02
10-2 Settings for options

For settings for options, see the installation instructions provided with the option.

Remote controllers are equiped with liquid crystal display air filer signs to display the time to clean air filters.
Change the SECOND CODE NO. according to Table 5 depending on the amount of dirt or dust in the room.
(SECOND CODE NO. is factory set to 01 for air filter contamination-light.)
Table 5
Setting
Air filter contaminationlight
Air filter contaminationheavy
English

Mode No.
FIRST CODE
NO.
10 (20)
Approx. 2500 hrs

Approx. 1250 hrs
SECOND
CODE NO.
01
02
19
C : 3PN06588-3H
184
EDSG281001

When using as a pair unit or as a master unit for simultaneous operation multi, you may simultaneous start/
stop (group) control up to 16 unit with the remote controller.
Select a remote controller which matches as many of the functions (swing flap, etc.) in the group as possible.
Outdoor unit 1
Indoor unit 1
Outdoor unit 2
Indoor unit 2
Outdoor unit 3
Indoor unit 3

Wiring Method (See 9. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK on page 16.)
(2) Cross-wire the remote control terminal block (P1 P2) inside the control box. (There is no polarity.)
(Refer to Fig. 25 on page 15 and Table 3 on page 16)
NOTE
When combining with a simultaneous operation multi-type, be sure only to connect the wiring to the master
unit.
20
English
C : 3PN06588-3H
185
EDSG281001
10-5 Two remote controllers control (Controlling 1 indoor unit by 2 remote controllers)
MAIN/SUB CHANGEOVER
(1) Insert a
Fig. 32
Fig. 33
Upper part of
remote controller
(Factory setting)
Insert the screwdriver

here and gently work
off the upper part of
remote controller.
(Only one remote

controller needs
to be changed if
factory settings
have remained
untouched.)
Lower part of
remote controller
S
M
S
M
Remote
controller
PC board
Wiring Method (See 9.ELECTRIC WIRING WORK on page16.)

(3) Remove the control box lid
(4) Add remote controller 2 to the remote control terminal block (P1, P2) in the control box.
(There is no polarity.) (Refer to Fig. 26 on page 15 and Table 3 on page 16)
NOTE
When combining with a simultaneous operation multi-type, be sure only to connect the wiring to the master
unit.
11. TEST OPERATION

(2) Refer to the section of FOR THE FOLLOWING ITEMS, TAKE SPECIAL CARE DURING CONSTRUCTION AND CHECK AFTER INSTALLATION IS FINISHED. on page 4.
11-1 TEST OPERATION

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Open the gas side stop valve.

Open the liquid side stop valve.
Electrify crank case heater for 6 hours. (Not required in case of a unit exclusively designed for cooling only)
Set to cooling operation with the remote controller and start operation by pushing ON/OFF button (
).
Press INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button 4 times (
) (2 times for wireless remote controller) and
operate at Test Operation mode for 3 minutes.
6. Push AIR FLOW DIRECTION ADJUST button (
) to make sure the unit is in operation.
TEST
TEST
English
21
3PN06588-3H
186
EDSG281001
PRECAUTIONS
1. Refer to 11-2 HOW TO DIAGNOSE FOR MALFUNCTION if the unit does not operate properly.
2. After completing the test run, press the INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION run button once to put the unit
in inspection mode, and make sure the malfunction code is 00. (=normal)
If the code reads anything other than 00, refer to 11-2 HOW TO DIAGNOSE FOR MALFUNCTION.
NOTE
11-2 HOW TO DIAGNOSE FOR MALFUNCTION

With the power on, it is possible to monitor the type of malfunction by looking at the malfunction code
displayed in the remote controller.
If nothing is displayed in the remote controller, check the following items before attempting a diagnosis based
on the malfunction code, as they might be a cause.
Disconnected or incorrect wiring (between power supply and the outdoor unit, between the outdoor and
indoor units, and between the indoor unit and the remote controller)
Burnt out indoor or outdoor unit fuse
88 will be displayed for a few seconds on the remote controller immediately after the power is turned on.
This display indicates that the remote controller is being checked to see whether it is ok or not, and does
not indicate a malfunction.
Diagnose with the display on the liquid crystal display remote controller.
1. With the wired remote controller. (NOTE 1)
and the malfunction code are
indicated on the liquid crystal display. In such a case, diagnose the fault contents by referning to the table
on the malfunction code list it case of group control, the unit No. is displayed so that the indoor unit No. with
the trouble can be recognized. (NOTE 2)
the fault contents with the table on the malfunction code list looking for the malfunction code which can be
found by following procedures. (NOTE 2)
(1) Press the INSPECTION /TEST OPERATION button,
(2) Press the PROGRAMMING TIME button and find the unit No. which stopped due to trouble.
Number of beeps3 short beeps .............. Perform all the following operations
1 short beep ................ Perform (3) and (6)
1 long beep ................. No trouble
(3) Press the OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button and upper figure of the malfunction code flashes.
(4) Continue pressing the PROGRAMMING TIME button unit it makes 2 short beeps and find the upper code.
(5) Press the OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button and lower figure of the malfunction code flashes.
(6) Continue pressing the PROGRAMMING TIME button unit it makes a long beep and find the lower code.
A long beep indicate the malfunction code.
NOTE
starts flashing.
2. Keep down the ON/OFF button for 5 seconds or longer in the inspection mode and the above trouble history disappears, after the trouble code goes on and off twice, followed by the code 00(normal).
22
English
3PN06588-3H
187
EDSG281001
11-3 Malfunciton code

For places where the malfunction code is left blank, the
Depending on the type of indoor or outdoor unit, the malfunction code may or may not be displayed.
Code
A1
A3
A5
A6
AF
AH
AJ
C4
C5
C9
CJ
E0
E1
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
EA
F3
H3
H4
H6
H7
H8
H9
J3
J5
J6
J8
J9
L4
L5
L8
L9
English
Malfunction/Remarks
Freeze-up protector or stopped by high pressure control
Humidifier faulty
Air cleaner faulty
Type set improper
Capacity data is wrongly proset. Or there is nothing programmed in the data hold IC.
Sensor (R2T) for heat exchanger temperature is fault
The remote controller thermistor does not function, but the system thermo run is possible.
High pressure abnormal(outdoor unit)
Compressor motor lock by over current (outdoor)
Outdoor fan instantneous overcurrent malfunction
Input overcurrent (outdoor unit)
Cooling/heating switch malfunction (outdoor)
Faulty position detection sensor (outdoor unit)
CT abnormality (outdoor unit)
Liquid piping thermistor malfunction (heating) (outdoor)
Gas piping thermistor malfunction (cooling) (outdoor)
Overheated heat-radiating fin (outdoor)
Instantaneous overcurrent (outdoor)
Electric thermal (outdoor)
Stall prevention (outdoor)
23
3PN06588-3H
188
EDSG281001
LC
P1
P3
P4
PJ
U0
U1
U2
U4
UF
U5
U8
UA
UC
Transmission malfunction between the outdoor control units inverters (outdoor)

Open-phase or main circuit low voltage (outdoor)
PC-board temperature sensor malfunction (outdoor)
Heat-radiating fin temperature sensor malfunction (outdoor)
Suction pipe temperature abnormal or refrigerant shortage
Reverse phase
Reverse two of the L1,L2and L3 leads.
Power source voltage malfunction
Incorrect wiring between indoor and outdoor units or malfunction of the PC board
If UF is shown, the wiring between the indoor and outdoor units is not properly
wired. Therefore, immediately disconnect the power supply and correct the wiring.
(The compressor and the fan mounted on the outdoor unit may start operation independent of the remote controller operation.)
(Malfunction in sub remote control.)
units PC board)
Incorrect combination with indoor unit and outdoor unit
24
English
C : 3PN06588-3H
189
EDSG281001
2.4
2.4.1
g
d
c
b
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
Indoor unit
Remote controller
Inlet air
Discharge air
Drain pipe
Inlet grille
Drain pumping out device (built-in)
Drains water removed from the room during cooling.
3P156215-7K
190
EDSG281001
2.4.2
Installation
FBQ50BV1A
FBQ60BV1A
FBQ71BV1A
SPLIT SYSTEM Air Conditioner
Installation manual
2
CONTENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS .........................................................................................1

BEFORE INSTALLATION ...............................................................................................2
SELECTING INSTALLATION SITE.................................................................................5
PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION ..................................................................6
INDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION ......................................................................................6
REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK .....................................................................................7
DRAIN PIPING WORK ..................................................................................................10
INSTALLING THE DUCT ..............................................................................................12
ELECTRIC WIRING WORK ..........................................................................................12
WIRING EXAMPLE .......................................................................................................15
FIELD SETTING............................................................................................................16
TEST OPERATION .......................................................................................................17
1. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
Please read these SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS carefully before installing air conditioning equipment and
be sure to install it correctly. After completing the installation, make sure that the unit operates properly during
the start-up operation. Please instruct the customer on how to operate the unit and keep it maintained.
Also, inform customers that they should store this installation manual along with the operation manual for
future reference.
Meaning of warning and caution symbols.
WARNING .........Failure to observe a warning may result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION ..........Failure to observe a caution may result in injury or damage to the equipment.
WARNING
Ask your dealer or qualified personnel to carry out installation work. Do not try to install the air conditioner
yourself.
Perform installation work in accordance with this installation manual.
Failure to use the specified parts may result in water leakage, electric shocks, fire or the unit falling.
A foundation of insufficient strength may result in the equipment falling and causing injuries.
Carry out the specified installation work after considering strong winds, typhoons or earthquakes.
Improper installation work may result in the equipment falling and causing accidents.
1
3P156215-8K
191
EDSG281001
Make sure that all wiring is secured, the specified wires and used, and no external forces act on the terminal
Improper connections or installation may result in fire.
Improper positioning of the control box lid may result in electric shocks, fire or the terminals overheating.
If the refrigerant gas leaks during installation, ventilate the area immediately.
Toxic gas may be produced if the refrigerant gas comes into contact with fire.
After completing the installation work, check that the refrigerant gas does not leak.
Before touching electrical parts, turn off the unit.
Be sure to establish an earth.
Do not earth the unit to a utility pipe, arrester, or telephone earth.
Incomplete earth may cause electrical shock, or fire.
Failure to install an earth leakage breaker may result in electric shocks, or fire.
Do not directly touch the refrigerant that leaks from the refrigerant piping connection.
CAUTION
While following the instructions in this installation manual, install drain piping in order to ensure proper
drainage and insulate piping in order to prevent condensate.
Improper drain piping may result in water leakage and property damage.
Install the indoor and outdoor units, power supply wiring and connecting wiring at least 1 m away from televisions or radios in order to prevent image interference or noise.
(Depending on the radio waves, a distance of 1 m may not be sufficient enough to eliminate the noise.)
Remote controller (wireless kit) transmitting distance can result shorter than expected in rooms with electronic fluorescent lamps (inverter or rapid start types).
(a)where a mineral oil mist or an oil spray or vapor is produced, for example in a kitchen
Plastic parts may deteriorate and fall off or result in water leakage.
(b)where corrosive gas, such as sulfurous acid gas, is produced
Corroding copper pipes or soldered parts may result in refrigerant leakage.
(c) near machinery emitting electromagnetic waves
Electromagnetic waves may disturb the operation of the control system and result in a malfunction of the
equipment.
(d)where flammable gases may leak, where there are carbon fiber or ignitable dust suspensions in the air,
or where volatile flammables such as thinner or gasoline are handled.
Do not exert pressure on the resin parts when opening the unit or when moving it after opening.
Be sure to check the type of refrigerant to be used before installing the unit. (Using an incorrect refrigerant
will prevent normal operation of the unit.)
The accessories needed for installation must be retained in your custody until the installation work is completed. Do not discard them!
unavoidable, use a sling of soft material or protective plates together with a rope when lifting, to avoid damage or scratches to the unit.
For the installation of an outdoor unit, refer to the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit.
2
3P156215-8K
192
EDSG281001
Do not use the unit in locations with high salt content in the air such as beachfront property, locations where
the voltage fluctuates such as factories, or in automobiles or marine vessels.
1. Precautions
The unit should be installed at least 2.5m from the floor.
2. Accessories
Check if the following accessories are included with your unit.
Name
(1) Metal clamp
(2) Chain
(3) Drain hose
Insulation for
fitting
Sealing pad
Quantity
1 pc.
1 set
1 pc.
1 each
1 each
(4) For gas pipe
(6) Large
(5) For liquid pipe
(7) Middle
Shape
FBQ50BV1A
2 pcs.
FBQ60 71BV1A 3 pcs.
Name
(8) Washer for

hanger
bracket
Quantity
8 pcs.
Clamp
4 pcs.
(9) Large
2 pcs.
(11) Screw for chains
(12) Duct companion flange connection screw
1 set
1 set
(10) Small
Shape
FBQ50BV1A
4 pcs.
FBQ50BV1A
8 pcs.
FBQ60 71BV1A 6 pcs. FBQ60 71BV1A 12 pcs.
Name
Quantity
(13) Small sealing

pad
2 pcs.
(Other)
Operation manual
Installation manual
Shape
3
3P156215-8K
193
EDSG281001
3. Optional accessories
For this indoor unit, the optional remote controller is necessary.
Remote controller
Remote controller
BRC1C61
NOTE
If the customer wishes to use a remote controller that is not listed on the table, select a suitable remote
controller after consulting catalogs and technical materials.
FOR THE FOLLOWING ITEMS, TAKE SPECIAL CARE DURING CONSTRUCTION AND CHECK AFTER
INSTALLATION IS FINISHED.
Items to be checked
Are the indoor unit and outdoor unit fixed

firmly?
The unit may drop, vibrate or make noise.

It may result in electric shock.



clear.
Check

Also review the 1. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
Items to be checked
Check
Did you explain about operations while showing the operation manual to your customer?
Did you hand the operation manual over to your customer?
The items with
WARNING and
CAUTION marks in the operation manual are the items pertaining
to possibilities for bodily injury and material damage in addition to the general usage of the product.
your customers to read the operation manual.
4. Note to the installer

Be sure to instruct customers how to properly operate the unit (especially cleaning filters <field supplied
parts>, operating different functions, and adjusting the temperature) by having them carry out operations themselves while looking at the manual.
4
3P156215-8K
194
EDSG281001

Please attach additional thermal insulation material to the unit body when it is believed that the relative humidity in the ceiling exceeds 80%. Use glass wool, polyethylene foam, or similar with a thickness of 10 mm or
more as thermal insulation material. (After attaching additional thermal insulation material, manufactures
label should appear.)
1. Select an installation site where the following conditions are fulfilled and that meets
your customers approval.
In the upper space (including the back of the ceiling) of the indoor unit where there is no possible
dripping of water from the refrigerant pipe, drain pipe, water pipe, etc.
Where optimum air distribution can be ensured.
Where nothing blocks air passage.
Where the ceiling is strong enough to bear the indoor unit weight.
Where sufficient clearance for maintenance and service can be ensured.
Where piping between indoor and outdoor units is possible within the allowable limit. (Refer to the
installation manual for the outdoor unit.)
CAUTION
Keep indoor unit, outdoor unit, power supply wiring and transmission wiring at least 1 m away from televisions and radios. This is to prevent image interference and noise in those electrical appliances.
(Noise may be generated depending on the conditions under which the electric wave is generated, even if
1 m is kept.)
Drain pipe
Power supply
wiring port
Maintenance
space (*)
300
or more
2500 or more
Liquid pipe
300
or more
Maintenance
space
Gas pipe
Transmission wiring port

Maintenance drain hose
Floor surface
(*) If the ceiling is removable, this maintenance space don't need.
(Length : mm)
2. Use suspension bolts for installation. Check whether the ceiling is strong enough to
support the weight of the unit or not. If there is a risk, reinforce the ceiling before
(Installation pitch is marked on the paper pattern for installation. Refer to it to check for points requiring
reinforcement.)
5
3P156215-8K
195
EDSG281001

1. Relation of ceiling opening to unit and suspension bolt position. (Refer to Fig. 1)
A
B
Suspension bolt pitch
Install the inspection opening on the control

box side where maintenance and inspection
of the control box.
Install the inspection opening also in the
lower part of the unit.
(Length : mm)
Model
FBQ50BV1A
700
Indoor unit
750 400400
FBQ60 71BV1A 1000 1050 600600
145
Pipe
Inspection opening
size C
Control box
630
Suspension
bolt pitch
Suspension bolt (4)
800
Fig. 1
2. The fan speed for this indoor unit is preset to provide standard external static pressure.
If higher or lower external static pressure is required, reset the external static pressure by changing
the initial setting from the remote controller. Refer to the section entitled 11. FIELD SETTING.
3. Install the suspension bolts. (Refer to Fig. 2)

(Use M10 size bolt for the suspension bolt)
Use anchors for existing ceilings, and a sunken insert,
sunken anchor or other field supplied parts for new ceilings to reinforce the ceiling to bear the weight of the unit.
NOTE
<Installation example>
Ceiling slab
Anchor
Long nut or
turn-buckle
Suspension bolt
Indoor unit
Fig. 2

<When installing optional accessories, read also the installation manual for optional accessories.
Depending on the field conditions, it may be easier to install optional accessories before the indoor
unit is installed.>
Be sure to use the furnished accessories or ones that match the specifications when installing.
1. Install the indoor unit temporarily.

Attach the hanger bracket to the suspension bolt. Be sure to
fix it securely by using a nut and washer (8) from the upper
and lower sides of the hanger bracket. (Refer to Fig. 3)
Field supply
(8)Washer for hanger
bracket (attached)
Tighten (double nuts)

Fig. 3
[PRECAUTION]
Since the unit uses a plastic drain pan, prevent welding spatter and other foreign substances from
entering the outlet hole during installation.
6
3P156215-8K
196
EDSG281001
2. Check the unit is horizontally level. (Refer to Fig. 4)
Level
Fig. 4
Vinyl tube
CAUTION
The indoor unit is equipped with a built-in drain pump and float switch. Verify that it is level by using a level
or a water-filled vinyl tube.
(If the unit is tilted against condensate flow, the float switch may malfunction and cause water to drip.)
3. Tighten the upper nut.

4. Fix the attached chains.
Make sure to install the chains as shown
below.
Bottom plate
(2) Chain (attached)

Bottom frame
Fig. 5
(11) Screw for chains

(attached)
CAUTION
Otherwise, the bottom plate may fall off.
5. Setting up the attached chains.

Fix the chains with the machine screws at the hole position of the bottom plate and the bottom frame.
(2 or 3 positions)

For refrigerant piping of outdoor unit, see the installation manuals attached to the outdoor unit.
Execute heat insulation work completely on both sides of the gas piping and the liquid piping. Otherwise, a
water leakage can result sometimes.
Also, in cases where the temperature and humidity of the refrigerant piping sections might exceed 30C or
RH80%, reinforce the refrigerant insulation. (20 mm or thicker) Condensate may form on the surface of the
insulating material.
Be sure to check the type of refrigerant to be used before doing any work. (Using an incorrect refrigerant will
prevent normal operation of the unit.)
7
3P156215-8K
197
EDSG281001
CAUTION
To prevent dust, moisture or other foreign matter from infiltrating the tube, either pinch the end or cover it
with tape.
Do not allow anything other than the designated refrigerant to get mixed into the refrigerant circuit, such as
air, etc. If any refrigerant gas leaks while working on the unit, ventilate the room thoroughly right away.
Be sure to use both a spanner and torque wrench together, as shown
in the drawing, when connecting or disconnecting pipes to/from the
unit. (Refer to Fig. 6)
When connecting the flare nut, apply ester oil or ether oil to the flare
section (only inside), and spin 3-4 times before screwing in.
(Refer to Fig. 7)
Torque wrench
Spanner
Pipe union
Flare nut
NOTE
Fig. 6

with ester oil or ether oil.
Fig. 7
Table 1
Tightening torque
6.4
14.2 17.2N m
8.7 9.1
12.7
49.5 60.3N m
16.2 16.6
15.9
61.8 75.4N m
19.3 19.7
Flare
R0.4-0.8
A
90 2
45 2
Pipe size

CAUTION
Over-tightening the flare nut may break it and/or cause the refrigerant to leak.
follow the installation method mentioned below
When you keep on tightening the flare nut with a spanner, there is a point where the tightening torque suddenly increases. From that position, further tighten the flare nut the angle shown below:
Pipe size
6.4 (1/4)
60 to 90 degrees
Approx. 150mm
12.7 (1/2)
30 to 60 degrees
Approx. 250mm
15.9 (5/8)
30 to 60 degrees
Approx. 300mm
8
C : 3P156215-8K
198
EDSG281001
leakage by thoroughly studying the following figure and using the attached heat insulating materials for fitting (4) and (5). (Fasten both ends with the clamps (9).) (Refer to Fig. 8)
Wrap the sealing pad (7) only around the insulation for the joints on the gas piping side. (Refer to Fig. 8)
(7) Middle sealing pad (attached)

(Wrap from the bottom up)
(4) Insulation for fitting (attached)
(for gas line)
Gas pipe
Liquid pipe
(5)Insulation for fitting (attached)
(for liquid line)
Attach to the bottom

(For both gas piping
and liquid piping)
(9) Clamp (attached) (4)

Fig. 8
CAUTION
For local insulation, be sure to insulate local piping all the way into the pipe connections inside the machine.
Exposed piping may cause condensation or burns on contact.
CAUTION
(Flux has extremely harmful influence on refrigerant piping systems. For instance, if the chlorine based flux is
used, it will cause pipe corrosion or, in particular, if the flux contains fluorine, it will damage the refrigerant oil.)
piping.
If you brazing is done without nitrogen gas blowing, a large amount of oxide film develops inside the piping,
and could cause system malfunction.
2
Nitrogen should be set to 0.02 MPa (0.2 kg/cm ) with a pressure-reducing valve if brazing while inserting
nitrogen into the piping. (Refer to Fig. 9)
Refrigerant piping
Part to be
brazed
Nitrogen
Taping
hands valve
Nitrogen
Fig. 9
9
3P156215-8K
199
EDSG281001

1. Rig drain piping (Refer to Fig. 10, Fig. 11)
As for drain work, perform piping in such a manner that water can be drained properly.
As for drain piping, the connection can be made from three different directions.
Employ a pipe with either the same diameter or with the diameter larger (excluding the raising section)
than that of the connecting pipe (PVC pipe, nominal diameter 25 mm, outside diameter 32 mm).
Keep the drain pipe short and sloping downwards at a gradient of at least 1/100 to prevent air pockets
from forming.
If the drain pipe cannot be sufficiently set on a slope, execute the drain raising piping.
To keep the drain pipe from sagging, space hanging wires every 1 to 1.5 m.
Hanger bracket
1~1.5 m
1/100 gradient or more
Fig. 11
Fig. 10
CAUTION
Use the attached drain hose (3) and Metal clamp (1).
Insert the drain hose into the drain socket up to the base, and tighten the Metal clamp securely within
the portion of a white tape of the hose-inserted tip. Tighten the Metal clamp until the screw head is less
than 4 mm from the hose.
Wrap the attached sealing pad (6) over the Metal clamp and drain hose to insulate.
Make sure that heat insulation work is executed on the following 2 spots to prevent any possible water
leakage due to dew condensation.
Indoor drain pipe
Drain socket
Metal clamp (1)
(attached)
Metal clamp (1)

(attached)

(attached)
Bring the seam

of the sealer to
the top
Drain hose (3)

Tape (White)
4 mm
Fig. 13
Fig. 12

Install the drain raising pipes at a height of less than 250 mm.
Install the drain raising pipes at a right angle to the indoor unit and no more than 300 mm from the unit.
Ceiling slab
Less 300 mm
1~1.5 m
Hanging bar
(1) Clamp (Attached with unit)

Adjustable range
(0~250 mm)
Drain raising pipe
(Part to be product in the field)
Drain hose
(3) Drain hose (Attached with unit)
Horizontal or up-grade
The drain hose must be horizontally positioned or have a slight up-grade.
Fig. 14
If the air accumulates inside the hose and the drain pump is at a
standstill, the drain may flow back and generate an abnormal sound.
10
3P156215-8K
200
EDSG281001
NOTE
To ensure no excessive pressure is applied to the included drain hose (3), do not bend or twist when
installing. (This may cause leakage.)
0~250 mm
Multiple drain piping
Keep the drain pipe short and sloping

downwards at a gradient of at least 1/100
to prevent air pockets from forming.
Water pooling in the drain piping
can cause the drain to clog.
Fig. 15
2. After piping work is finished, check if drainage flows smoothly.

Open the water inlet lid, add approximately 1 L of water gradually and check drainage flow.
(Refer to Fig. 16)
Water inlet
Portable pump
Water inlet lid
Refrigerant pipes
Drain outlet for maintenance
(with rubber plug)
Fig. 16
Bucket
Close
Open
NOTE
Use the drain outlet for maintenance to drain water from the drain pan.
Check drainage flow during cool running, explained in the section entitled. 12. TEST OPERATION
CAUTION
If someone who does not have the proper qualifications performs the work, perform the following after
Remove the control box lid. Connect the single phase power supply (Single plase 50 Hz 220-240V) to
connections No.1 and No.2 on the terminal block for wiring the units. Do not connect to No.3 of the terminal block for wiring the units. (The drain pump will not operate.) Connect the ground wire firmly.
When carrying out wiring work around the control box, make sure none of the connectors come
undone. Be sure to attach the control box before turning on the power.
After confirming drainage (Fig. 16, Fig. 17), turn off the power and remove the power supply.
Attach the control box lid as before.
Terminal block for wiring
1 2 3
Control box
Fig. 17
Single phase power supply
11
3P156215-8K
201
EDSG281001
8. INSTALLING THE DUCT

Connect the duct supplied in the field.
Air inlet side
Attach the duct and intake-side flange.
Wrap the intake-side flange and duct connection area with aluminum tape or something similar to prevent
air escaping.
CAUTION
Be sure to attach an air filter <field supply> inside the air passage on the intake side. (Use an air filter
whose dust collecting efficiency is at least 50% in a gravimetric technique.)
Flange
Main unit
Flange
Insulation material
(Field supply)
Aluminum tape
(Field supply)
Aluminum tape
(Field supply)
Air inlet side
Air outlet side
Air outlet side

Connect the duct according to the air inside of the outlet-side flange.
Wrap the outlet-side flange and the duct connection area with aluminum tape or something similar to prevent air escaping.
CAUTION
Be sure to insulate the duct to prevent condensation from forming. (Material: glass wool or polyethylene
foam, 25 mm thick)
Use electric insulation between the duct and the wall when using metal ducts to pass metal laths of the net
or fence shape or metal plating into wooden buildings.
For electric wiring work, see also the wiring diagram attached to the control box lid.
Be sure to ground the air conditioner
Do not connect the ground wire to gas pipes, plumbing pipes, lightning rods, or telephone ground wires.
Plumbing: no grounding effect if hard vinyl piping is used.
Install a wiring interrupter or ground-fault circuit interrupter for the power wiring.
Make sure the earth resistance is no greater than 100 .

The remote controller cord should be procured locally. Refer to the Table 2 when preparing one.
12
3P156215-8K
202
EDSG281001
Table 2
2
Wire
Wiring the units
H05VV - U4G (NOTE 1, 2)
Shield wire (2 wires) (NOTE 3)
Size (mm )
Length
2.5
0.75 - 1.25 Max. 300 m (NOTE. 4)
2
NOTE
2. Run transmission wiring between the indoor and outdoor units through a conduit to protect against external forces, and feed the conduit through the wall together with refrigerant piping.
3. Use double insulation wire for remote controller (sheath thickness: 1 mm) or run wires through a wall or
conduit so that the user can not come in contact with them.
4. This length shall be the total extended length in the system of the group control.
PRECAUTION
Connection of wiring units, ground wire and remote controller cord. (Refer to Fig. 18 and 19)
Wiring the units and ground for the wire
Remove the control box lid and pull out the control box. (Refer to Fig. 18)
Next, pull the wires inside through the rubber bush A and connect them to their respective terminals on the
terminal block for wiring the units (4P) inside. Also, connect the ground wire to the ground terminal. In doing
this, pull the wiring through the rubber bush A and fix it in place with the clamp.
Connect the cord to the terminal block for remote controller (2P) (no polarity). In doing this, pull the wiring
through the rubber bush B and fix it in place with the clamp.
Rubber bush A
*Wiring the units
Rubber bush B
After wiring, adhere the attached

small sealing pad (13) around the
wires as shown below.
(Be sure to adhere it to avoid
water from outside unit.)
*Do not clamp remote

controller cords together with
wires connecting the units.
Doing so may cause
malfunction.
*Remote controller cord
CAUTION
Note) No gap are allowed.

(Between rubber bush
and sealing material.)
Rubber bush
Wire
Control box
Inside unit
WIRING DIAGRAM
Outside unit
Small sealing pad (13)
(Adhere it around the wire)
Control box lid

Fig. 18
[ How to adhere it ]
Note) In case of two wires or more,
adhere sealing material to
each wire separately.
13
3P156215-8K
203
EDSG281001
Terminal block for

wiring the units
Control box Motor lead wire

Clamp material
Grounding terminal for

the remote controller
Wiring the
units
123
Ground the shield

part of shield wire.
Refer to NOTE of
10. WIRING EXAMPLE
Grounding
terminal
Shield part
C-cup
washer
Ground
wire
(10) Clamp (attached)
Clamp material
Remote
controller
cord
P1 P2
(10) Clamp (attached)

Indoor PC board Terminal block for remote controller
Arrow view A
Fig. 19
Observe the notes mentioned below when wiring to the terminal block for wiring the units.
CAUTION
cause the control box lid to stick up, then close the cover firmly.
When attaching the control box lid, make sure you do not pinch any wires.
After all the wiring connections are done, fill in any gaps in the through holes with putty or insulation (procured locally) to prevent small animals and insects from entering the unit from outside. (If any do get in, they
could cause short circuits in the control box.)
Do not connect wires of different gauge to the same power supply terminal. (Looseness in the connection
may cause overheating.) (Refer to Fig. 20)
Observe the notes when wiring to the terminal block for wiring the units.
(Use a round crimp-style terminal with insulation sleeve for connection to the terminal block for wiring the
units. In case it cannot be used due to unavoidable reasons, connect wires of the same gauge to the both
side as shown in Fig. 20.)
Round crimp-style
terminal
Attach insulation
sleeve

same gauge to both
side. (GOOD)

one side. (WRONG)
Do not connect
wires of different
gauges. (WRONG)
Electric wire
Fig. 20
Follow the instructions below if the wiring gets very hot due to slack in the power wiring.
that outside forces are not applied to the terminals.
If the terminal screw are tightened too hard, screws might be damaged.
14
3P156215-8K
204
EDSG281001
Tightening torque (N m)
Terminal block for remote controller
0.79 to 0.97
Terminal block for wiring the units
1.18 to 1.44
Ground terminal
1.44 to 1.94
2
10. WIRING EXAMPLE
For the wiring of outdoor unit, refer to the installation manuals attached to the outdoor unit.
1 remote controller control: 1 remote controller controls 1 indoor unit (standard system). (Refer to Fig. 21)
Group control: 1 remote controller controls up to 16 indoor units.
(All indoor units operate according to the remote controller.) (Refer to Fig. 22)
Fig. 21
1 remote controller control
Outdoor unit
1 2 3
Indoor unit
1 2 3
P1 P2
(NOTE. 2)
Remote controller
(NOTE. 2)
P1 P2
Fig. 23
Fig. 22
Group control
Outdoor unit
Outdoor unit
1 2 3
Outdoor unit
1 2 3
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
1 2 3
1 2 3
Indoor unit
Indoor unit
Indoor unit
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
P1 P2
P 1 P2
P1 P2
(NOTE. 2)
(NOTE. 2)
(NOTE. 2)
P1 P2
P 1 P2
(NOTE. 2) (NOTE. 2)
Remote controller
(NOTE. 2)
(NOTE. 2)
(NOTE. 2)
(NOTE. 2)
P1 P2
P1 P2
(NOTE. 2)
Remote controllers
NOTE
2. Connect a shielded portion with the grounding terminal for remote controller inside the control box. (Also,
connect the ground for the remote control to a grounded metal part.)
15
3P156215-8K
205
EDSG281001
11. FIELD SETTING

<Field setting must be made from the remote controller in accordance with the installation condition.>
For setting procedures and instructions, refer to the FIELD SETTING in the installation manual of the
remote controller.
1. Setting external static pressure

Change the SECOND CODE No. according to Table 3 depending on the resistance of the connecting duct.
(SECOND CODE NO. is factory set to 01 normal.)
Table 3
External static pressure
Mode No.
FIRST CODE NO.
SECOND CODE NO.
Normal: 49Pa (5 mmH2O)
01
High static pressure:

88 Pa (9 mmH2O)
13 (23)
02
Low static pressure: 20Pa

(2 mmH2O)
03
2. Setting with installing optional accessories

Refer to the installation manual of the optional accessories for the optional accessories installation.
3. Setting air filter sign <Filter : Field supplied parts>

Remote controllers are equipped with liquid crystal display air filer signs to display the time to clean air
filters.
Change the SECOND CODE No. according to Table 4 depending on the amount of dirt or dust in the room.
(SECOND CODE NO. is factory set to 01 for filter contamination-light)
Table 4
Setting

Air filter
contamination-light
Approx. 2500 hrs
Air filter
contamination-heavy
Approx. 1250 hrs
Mode No.
FIRST CODE
NO.
10 (20)
SECOND
CODE NO.
01
02
4. When implementing group control

When using as a pair unit or as a parent unit for simultaneous operation multi, you may simultaneous
start/stop (group) control up to 16 units with the remote controller.
In this case, all the indoor units in the group will operate in accordance with the group control remote
controller.
Select a remote controller which matches as many of the functions (swing flap, etc) in the group as
possible.
Indoor unit 1
Indoor unit 2
Indoor unit 3
Group control remote control
Fig. 24
Wiring Method
(1)Remove the control box lids. (See 9. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK.)
(2)Cross-wire the terminal block for remote controller (P1, P2) inside the control box. (There is no
polarity.) (Refer to Fig. 22 on page 15 and Table 2 on page 13)
5. Control by 2 remote controllers (Controlling 1 indoor unit by 2 remote controllers)

16
3P156215-8K
206
EDSG281001
MAIN/SUB CHANGEOVER
(1)Insert a
screwdriver into the recess between the upper and lower part of remote controller and,
working from the 2 positions, pry off the upper part. (The remote controller PC board is attached to
the upper part of remote controller.) (Refer to Fig. 25)
(2)Turn the MAIN/SUB changeover switch on one of the two remote controller PC board to S.
(Leave the switch of the other remote controller set to M.) (Refer to Fig. 26)
Upper part of remote controller
S
M
(Factory setting)
S
M
Lower part of
remote
controller
Insert the screwdriver here and gently
work off the upper part of remote controller.
Fig. 25
Remote controller
PC board
(Only one remote controller

needs to be changed
if factory settings have
remained untouched.)
Fig. 26
Wiring Method (See 9. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK on page 12)

(3)Remove the control box lids.
(4)Add remote control 2 (slave) to the terminal block for remote controller (P1, P2) in the control
box. (There is no polarity.) (Refer to Fig. 23 on page 15 and Table 2 on page 13)
12. TEST OPERATION

Refer to the section of FOR THE FOLLOWING ITEMS, TAKE SPECIAL CARE DURING CONSTRUCTION AND CHECK AFTER INSTALLATION IS FINISHED .
1. How to test operation

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Open the gas side stop valve.

Open the liquid side stop valve.
Electrify crank case heater for 6 hours (Not required in case of a unit exclusively designed for cooling only).
Set to cooling operation with the remote controller and start operation by pushing ON/OFF button (
).
Press INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button (
) 4 times (2 times for wireless remote controller)
and operate at Test Operation mode for 3 minutes.
TEST
TEST
PRECAUTIONS
Refer to the diagnoses below if the unit does not operate properly.
After completing the test run, press the INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button once to put the
unit in inspection mode, and make sure the Malfunction code is 00 (=normal).
NOTE
2. Cautions for servicing

If the air conditioner does not operate normally after installing the air conditioner, a malfunction shown
in the table below may happened.
17
3P156215-8K
207
EDSG281001
Remote control display
No display
88*
88 flashing
Malfunction

Wrong remote control connection wiring
Remote control faulty
Fuse faulty
* After turning on the power, the maximum is 90 seconds, although it will only display 88. This is not
a problem, and it will be set for 90 seconds.
With the wired remote controller. (NOTE 1)
and the Malfunction
code are indicated on the liquid crystal display. In such a case, diagnose the fault contents by refering
to the table on the Malfunction code list it case of group control, the unit No. is displayed so that the
indoor unit no with the trouble can be recognized. (NOTE 2)
NOTE
2. Keep pressing the ON/OFF button for 5 seconds or longer in the inspection mode and the above trouble history disappears, after the Malfunction code goes on and off twice, followed by the code
00(normal). The display changes from the inspection mode to the normal mode.
CAUTION
If the interior finish work is not completed yet at the time when the commissioning of the system is
finished, instruct the user not to operate the unit until the interior finish work is completed for protection of the indoor unit. If the unit is operated before the interior finish work is completed, the indoor
unit may be contaminated by substances generated from paint and adhesives used during the interior finish work and cause a splash or a water leak.
3. Malfunction code
For places where the malfunction code is left blank, the
indication is not displayed. Though the
system continues operating, be sure to inspect the system and make repairs as necessary.
Code
Malfunction/Remarks
A1
A3
A5
Freeze-up protector or stopped by high pressure control
A6
AF
Humidifier faulty
AH
AJ
Air cleaner faulty

Type set improper
C4
C5
C9
18
3P156215-8K
208
EDSG281001
CJ
E0

E1
E3
High pressure abnormal(outdoor unit)
E4
E5
E6
Compressor motor lock by over current (outdoor)
E7

Outdoor fan instantneous overcurrent malfunction
E8
Input overcurrent (outdoor unit)
E9
EA
Cooling/heating switch malfunction (outdoor)
F3
F6
High pressure control (in cooling)
H3
H4
H6
Faulty position detection sensor (outdoor unit)
H7
H8
CT abnormality (outdoor unit)
H9
J3
J5
J6
J8
Liquid piping thermistor malfunction (heating) (outdoor)
J9
Gas piping thermistor malfunction (cooling) (outdoor)
L3
Electrical parts heat fault
L4
L5
L8
L9
Overheated heat-radiating fin (outdoor)

Instantaneous overcurrent (outdoor)
Electric thermal (outdoor)
Stall prevention (outdoor)
LC
Transmission malfunction between the outdoor control units inverters (outdoor)
P1
Open-phase or main circuit low voltage (outdoor)
P3
PC-board temperature sensor malfunction (outdoor)
P4
Heat-radiating fin temperature sensor malfunction (outdoor)
PJ
U0
U1

Suction pipe temperature abnormal or refrigerant shortage
Reverse phase
Reverse two of the L1,L2and L3 leads.
19
3P156215-8K
209
U2
EDSG281001
Power source voltage malfunction

U4
UF
U5
U8
Incorrect wiring between indoor and outdoor units or malfunction of the PC board
If UF is shown, the wiring between the indoor and outdoor units is not properly wired.
Therefore, immediately disconnect the power supply and correct the wiring. (The compressor and the fan mounted on the outdoor unit may start operation independent of
the remote controller operation.)
(Malfunction in sub remote control.)
UA
Setting is wrong for selector switch of multi-system. (see switch SS2 on the main units
PC board)
Incorrect combination with indoor unit and outdoor unit
UC
20
3P156215-8K
210
EDSG281001
2.5
FBQ71DV1 / FBQ100DV1 / FBQ125DV1 / FBQ140DV1
2.5.1
j k l
2
RZR100 125 140
f e
nd
RZR71
b
d
h
e
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
p
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
Remote controller
Depending on the system configuration, the remote
controller is not provided.
Inlet air
Discharge air
Air outlet (Field supply)
Exhaust duct (Field supply)
Drain pipe
Model name (model name plate)
Air filter (Sold separately)
Suction filter chamber (Sold separately)
Suction duct (Field supply)
Suction grille (Field supply)
Ground wire
The line passes electricity from the inside unit to the
ground to prevent accidental electrical shock.
C : 3PN11586-1
211
2.5.2
EDSG281001
Installation
FBQ71DV1
FBQ100DV1
FBQ125DV1
FBQ140DV1
SPLIT SYSTEM Air Conditioner
Installation manual
CONTENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS................................................................................................1
BEFORE INSTALLATION ...............................................................................................3
SELECTING INSTALLATION SITE.................................................................................6
PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION ..................................................................7
INDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION ......................................................................................9
REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK .....................................................................................9
DRAIN PIPING WORK ..................................................................................................12
DUCT WORK ................................................................................................................14
ELECTRIC WIRING WORK ..........................................................................................15
WIRING EXAMPLE AND HOW TO SET THE REMOTE CONTROLLER.....................16
FIELD SETTING............................................................................................................20
TEST OPERATION .......................................................................................................23
WIRING DIAGRAM .....................................................................................................27
Please read the these " SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS" carefully before installing air conditioning unit and be
sure to install it correctly. After completing the installation, make sure that the unit operates properly during the
start-up operation.
Please instruct the customer on how to operate the unit and keep it maintained.
CAUTION ..........Failure to observe these instructions properly may result in property damage or
personal injury, which may be serious depending on the circumstances.
WARNING
Consult your local dealer regarding what to do in case of refrigerant leakage, when the air coditioner is to
be installed in a small room, it is necessary to take proper measures so that the amount of any leaked
refrigerant does not exceed the concentration limit in the event to leakage. Otherwise, this may lead to an
accident due to oxygen depletion.
3PN11585-1
212
EDSG281001
Do not earth the unit to a utility pipe, lightning conductor or telephone earth lead. Imperfect earthing may
result in electric shocks or fire.
Do not directly touch refrigerant that has leaked from refrigerant pipes or other areas, as there is a danger
of frostbite.
After completing installation, check for refrigerant gas leakage. Toxic gas may be produced if the refrigerant
gas leaks into the room and comes into contract with a source of fire, such as a fan heater, stove or cooker.
Do not allow children to climb on the outdoor unit and avoid placing objects on the unit.
Injury may result if the unit becomes loose and falls.
CAUTION
Install the receiver as far away from fluorescent lamps as possible.
In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be
required to take adequate measures.
Electromagnetic radiation may disturb the operation of the control system and result in a malfunction of the unit.
Make sure to provide for adequate measure in order to prevent that the outdoor unit be used as a shelter
by small animals.
3PN11585-1
213
EDSG281001
Small animals making contact with electrical parts can cause malfunctions, smoke or fire. Please instruct
the customer to keep the area around the unit clean
Install in a machine room that is free of moisture. The unit is designed for indoor use.
Disposal requirements Dismantling of the unit, treatment of the refrigerant, of the oil and of other parts must
be done in accordance with relevant local and national legislation.
1-2 SPECIAL NOTICE OF PRODUCT

Refrigerant
The refrigerant R410A requires that strict Precautions be observed for keeping the system clean, dry
and tightly sealed
A. Clean and Dry
Strict measure must be taken to keep impurities (including SUNISO oil and other mineral oils as well
as moisture) out of the system
B. Tightly
R410A will contribute only slightly to the greenhouse effect if released into the atmosphere.
Therefore, sealing tightness is particularly important in installation. Carefully read the chapter
REFRIGERANT PIPING and strictly observe the correct procedures.
Since design pressure is 4.0MPa or 40 bar the thickness of pipes must be greater than previously.
Since R410A is a mixed refrigerant, the required additional refrigerant must be changed its liquid state.
(If the system is charged with refrigerant in its gaseous state, due to composition change, the system will
not function normally)
The indoor units are designed for R410A use. See the catalogue for indoor unit models that can be
connected (Normal operation is not possible when connecting units that are originally designed for other
refrigerants)
Hold the hanging brackets in the case of moving the indoor and outdoor units at the time of and
after opening the packages. Do not impose undue force on other parts, such as the refrigerant
piping, drain piping, or flanges, in particular.
Be sure to check the type of R410A refrigerant to be used before installing the unit. (Using an incorrect
The accessories needed for installation must be retained in your custody until the installation work is
completed. Do not discard them!
unavoidable, use a sling of soft material or protective plates together with a rope when lifting, to avoid
damage or scratches to the unit.
When moving the unit or affter opening, hold the unit by the hanger brackets ( 4). Do not apply force to the
refrigerant piping, drain piping, flanges or plastic parts.
For the installation of outdoor unit, refer to the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit.
Laden with mineral oil, or filled with oil vapor or spray like in kitchens. (Plastic parts may
deteriorate which could eventually cause the unit to fall out of place, or could lead to leaks.)
Where corrosive gas like sulfurous gas exists. (Copper tubing and brazed spots may corrode
which could eventually lead to refrigerant leaks.)
Where exposed to combustible gases and where volatile flammable gas like thinner or gasoline
is used. (Gas in the vicinity of the unit could ignite.)
Where the air contains high levels of salt such as that near the ocean and where voltage
fluctuates greatly such as that in factories.
Also in vehicles or vessels.
This unit, both indoor and outdoor, is suitable for installation in a commercial and light industrial environment.
If installed as a household appliance it could cause electromagnetic interference.
3PN11585-1
214
EDSG281001
2-1 PRECAUTIONS
Entrust installation to the place of purchase or a qualified serviceman. Improper installation could lead to
leaks and, in worse cases, electric shock of fire.
Use only parts provided with the unit or parts satisfying required specifications. Unspecified parts could
cause the unit to fall out of place, or could lead to leaks and, in worse cases, electric shock or fire.
Be sure to mount an air filter (part to be procured in the field) in the suction air passage in order to prevent
water leaking, etc.
2-2 ACCESSORIES
Check that the following accessories are provided and that each accessory is correct in amount.
Refer to the Fig. 1 of this sheet.
[PRECAUTION]
The accessories are required for the installation of the air conditioner. Be sure to keep them until the
installation work is completed.
(1) - (13)
Operation manual
Installation manual
Fig. 1
Name
Metal clamp (1)
Drain hose (2)
Quantity
1 pc.
1 pc.
Screws for duct

flanges (3)
As described in table
below
M516
Shape
71 type
100 125
140 type
Name
Sealing pad
Clamp (8)
Quantity
9 pcs.
Shape
1 pc.
Large (Dark gray) (6)
18
26
Washer fixing plate

(9)
4 pcs.

1 each
Thin
for liquid pipe (4)
Thick
for gas pipe (5)
Wire sealing material
(10)
2 pcs.
Small (Gray)
2 pcs.
Middle (Dark gray) (7)
3PN11585-1
215
EDSG281001
Name
Washer (11)
Quantity
8 pcs.
Wire fixing bracket

(12)
2 pcs.
Wire fixing screw

(13)
2 pcs.
M48
Shape
(Other)
Operation manual
Installation manual
2-3 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES

These are two types of remote controllers: wired and wireless. Select a remote controller according to
customer request and install in an appropriate place.
Table 1
Remote controller
Wired type
Wireless type
BRC1C61
BRC4C62
NOTE
If you wish to use a remote controller that is not listed in Table 1, select a suitable remote controller
after consulting catalogs and technical materials.
FOR THE FOLLOWING ITEMS, TAKE SPECIAL CARE DURING CONSTRUCTION AND CHECK AFTER
INSTALLATION IS FINISHED.
Items to be checked
Are the indoor and outdoor unit fixed firmly?
Was the installation of the outdoor unit
completed?
Is the unit fully insulated? (Refrigerant
piping, drain piping, and duct)
Dose drainage flow smoothly?
Does the power supply voltage conform to
the indication on the name plate?
Is the air conditioner properly grounded?
Is something blocking the air outlet or inlet of
either the indoor or outdoor units?
Did you set the external static pressure?
Did you check that no wiring connection
screws were loose?
If not properly done, what is likely to occur.

The units may drop, vibrate or make noise.
The unit may malfunction or the components
burn out.
No cooling or heating.
Check

burn out.
burn out.
Dangerous in case of current leakage.
burn out.
clear.
Electric shock or fire.
Also review the SAFETY PRECAUTIONS.
3PN11585-1
216
EDSG281001

Items to be checked
Are you sure the control box lid, air filter, air inlet grille, and air outlet grille are mounted?
Did you explain about operations while showing the operation manual to your customer?
Did you deliver the operation manual along with the installation manual to the customer?
Did you explain the customer the handling and cleaning methods of the field supplies
(e.g., the air filter, air inlet grilles, and air outlet grille)?
Did you deliver instruction manual, if any, for the field supplies to the customer?
Check

The items with WARNING and CAUTION marks in the operation manual are the items pertaining to
possibilities for bodily injury and material damage in addition to the general usage of the product.
your customers to read the operation manual.
2-4 NOTE TO INSTALLER

Be sure to instruct customers how to properly operate the unit (especially cleaning filters, operating
different functions, and adjusting the temperature) by having them carry out operations themselves
while looking at the manual.

Hold the hanging brackets in the case of moving the indoor and outdoor units at the time of and
after opening the packages. Do not impose undue force on other parts, such as the refrigerant
piping, drain piping, or flanges, in particular.
Add heat insulation material to the indoor unit if the temperature above the ceiling is likely to
exceed 30C and a relative humidity of 80%.
Make sure that the insulation material is made of glass wool or polyethylene foam, has a minimum
thickness of 10 mm, and can be accommodated in the opening on the ceiling.
1)Select an installation site where the following conditions are fulfilled and that meets with your customers
approval.
A place where cool (warm) air is delivered to the entire room.
Where nothing blocks the air passage.
If supporting structural members are not strong enough to take the units weight, the unit could fall out
of place and cause serious injury.
Where sufficient clearance for maintenance and service can be ensured. (Refer to Fig. 2-1)
Where piping between indoor and outdoor units is possible within the allowable limit. (Refer to the
installation manual of the outdoor unit.)
CAUTION
Install the indoor and outdoor units, power supply wiring and connecting wires at least 1 meter away from
televisions or radios in order to prevent image interference or noise.
(Depending on the radio waves, a distance of 1 meter may not be sufficient enough to eliminate the noise.)
In the case of the installation of a wireless remote controller, the transmission distance of the wireless
remote controller may be shortened if the room has a fluorescent light of electronic lighting type
(i.e., an inverter or rapid-start fluorescent light).
Keep the distance between the receiver and the fluorescent light as far as possible.
3PN11585-1
217
EDSG281001
Min. 450
*H2=Min. 620
(length: mm)
Min. 2500
(If no ceiling board is provided.)
Ceiling
Min. 300 *H1=300
Min. 20
2)Use hanging bolts to install the indoor unit. Check that the place of installation withstands the weight of
the indoor unit. Secure the hanging bolts with proper beams if necessary.
Floor surface
* The H1 dimension indicates the height of the

product.
* Determine the H2 dimension by maintaining
a downward slope of at least 1/100 as
specified in 7. DRAIN PIPING WORK.
Min. 700 (service space)
[Required installation place]

The dimensions indicate the
minimum required space of
installation.
Fig. 2-1

1. Check the positional relationship between the ceiling opening hole and the hanging bolt of the unit.
For the maintenance, inspection, and other servicing purposes of the control box and drain pump,
prepare one of the following service spaces.
1)Inspection hatch 1 (450 450) for the control box and a minimum space of 300 mm for the lower part
of the product. (Refer to Fig. 2-2)
2)Inspection hatch 1 (450 450) for the control box and inspection hatch 2 for the lower part of the
product (see axial direction view A-1). (Refer to Fig. 2-3)
3)Inspection hatch 3 for the lower part of the product and the lower part of the control box (see axial
direction view A-2). (Refer to Fig. 2-3)
Control box
700
631
(Hanging bolt pitch)
*H3=Min. 300
Air outlet
Bottom of unit
Air inlet
Fig. 2-2
(Hanging bolt pitch)
Ceiling
Control box
Inspection hatch
Inspection hatch 1
(450450)
Case 1
Hanging bolt ( 4)
3PN11585-1
218
EDSG281001
Case 2, 3
Min. 200
Control box
Control box
B
Inspection hatch
Ceiling
Control box
Min. D=B+300
*H3=Min. 20
Inspection hatch
(Ceiling opening)
Inspection hatch 3
(Same as the indoor
unit size +300 or more)
Inspection hatch 1
(450450)
700
700
Inspection hatch 2
(Same as the indoor
unit size or more)
* Determine the H3 dimension by
maintaining a downward slope
of at least 1/100 as specified in
7. DRAIN PIPING WORK.
Axial direction view A-1
Axial direction view A-2

Fig. 2-3
Model
B
C
D
71 type
1000 1038 1300
100 125 140 type 1400 1438 1700
(length: mm)
2. Mount the canvas ducts to the air outlet and inlet so that the vibration of the air conditioner will not be
transmitted to the duct or ceiling. Apply a sound-absorbing material (insulation material) to the inner wall
of the duct and vibration insulation rubber to the hanging bolts (refer to 8. DUCT WORK).
3.Open installation holes (if the ceiling already exists).
Open the installation holes on the ceiling. Lay the refrigerant piping, drain piping, power line,
transmission wiring, and remote controller wiring for the piping and wiring connection port of the unit.
In the case of the installation of a wireless remote controller, refer to the installation manual provided
with the wireless remote controller.
Refer to 6. REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK, 7. DRAIN PIPING WORK, and 10. WIRING EXAMPLE
AND HOW TO SET THE REMOTE CONTROLLER.
The ceiling framework may need reinforcement in order to keep the ceiling horizontal and prevent the
vibration of the ceiling after the installation holes are opened. For details, consult your construction or
interior contractor.
4. Install the hanging bolts. Make sure that the hanging bolts are M10 in size.
Use hole-in anchors if the hanging bolts
Installation example
already exist; otherwise use embedded
inserts and embedded foundation bolts so that
Ceiling slab
they will withstand the weight of the unit.
Anchor
Adjust the distance to the ceiling surface in
advance.
Hanging bolt
Indoor unit
NOTE
3PN11585-1
219
EDSG281001

It may be easier to install accessories (sold separately) before installing the indoor unit. Refer to the
installation manuals provided to the accessories as well.
Be sure to use the accessories and specified parts for installation work.
1) Temporally install the indoor unit.
Connect the hanging brackets to the hanging bolts. Be sure to use and tighten the nut and washer (11) for
each hanging bracket from both upper and lower sides of the hanging bracket. (Refer to Fig. 3) At that time,
the fall of the washer (11) for the hanging bracket can be prevented if the washing fixing plate (9) is used.
[Fixing hanging brackets]

Part to be procured in the field
[Fixing method of washers]

Nut on the upper side

Insert
Tighten from above and below

(Double nut)
Fig. 3

(accessory)
CAUTION
During the installation work, perform the curing of the air outlet and protect the resin drain pan of
the indoor unit from the intrusion of foreign substances, such as welding spatters.
Otherwise, water leakage may occur as a result of damage, such as hole damage, to the resin drain pan.
2) Make adjustments so that the unit will be in the right position.
3) Check the level of the unit.
4) Remove the washer fixing plates for
the falling prevention of the washers
for the hanging brackets, tighten the
nuts on the upper side, and securely
fix the unit.
Hanging bracket
Bottom of product
Level
Vinyl tube
CAUTION
Use the level and check that the unit is installed horizontally. (4-directions)
In the case of using a vinyl tube in place of the level, put the both edges of the vinyl tube in close contact
with the bottom of the product to make levelness adjustment.
If the unit is installed at a slant with the drain pipe side set high, in particular, the float switch will not operate
normally and water leakage may result.

As for the refrigerant piping of the outdoor unit, refer to the installation manual provided to the
outdoor unit.
Perform heat insulation work on both gas piping and liquid piping, or otherwise water leakage may
result.
Use the insulation material that withstands a temperature of 120C.
3PN11585-1
220
EDSG281001
Reinforce the insulation material for the refrigerant piping if the ambient temperature is high, or
otherwise dew condensation may result on the surface of the insulation material.
Make sure that the refrigerant is R410A before refrigerant piping work. If the refrigerant is different,
the air conditioner will not operate normally.
CAUTION
This product uses new refrigerant (R410A) only. Be sure to keep the items on the right-hand side and
conduct the installation work.
Use a dedicated pipe cutter and flare tool for R410A.
When connecting the flare, apply ether oil or ester oil to the flare.
Be sure to use the flare nut provided with the unit. (Do not use a different flare nut (such as a
type-1 flare nut), or otherwise refrigerant leakage may result.)
Perform the curing of the piping with pinching or taping of the piping in order to prevent the
intrusion of dirt, dust, and moisture into the piping.
CAUTION
Be sure to use the specified type of refrigerant for the refrigeration cycle and do not contaminate
the refrigerant with air.
Ventilate the room in case of refrigerant leakage during installation work.
1) Connect the piping.
The outdoor unit is filled with refrigerant.
When connecting or disconnecting piping to or
from the unit, be sure to use two spanners and
two torque wrenches. (Refer to Fig. 4)
Refer to Table 2 for the processing dimensions of
the flare.
Use the flare nut provided with the unit.
Torque wrench
Spanner
Flare nut
Piping union
Apply ether oil or ester oil to both inner and

outer sides of the flare and screw in the flare
nut three to four turns first by hand at the time of
connecting the flare nut. (Refer to Fig. 5)
Refer to Table 2 for the corresponding tightening
torque.
Fig. 4
Ester oil or ether oil.
Fig. 5
Table 2
6.4
14.2 17.2Nm
8.7 9.1
9.5
32.7 39.9Nm
12.8 13.2
12.7
49.5 60.3Nm
16.2 16.6
15.9
61.8 75.4Nm
19.3 19.7
Flare shape
452
R0.4-0.8
A
Tightening torque
902
Pipe size (mm)
CAUTION
Do not excessively tighten the flare nut.
Doing so will break the flare nut and refrigerant leakage may result.
Make sure that all parts around the flare are free of oil.
The drain pan and the resin part may be deteriorated if oil is attached.
If no torque wrenches are available, refer to Table 3 as a standard.
When the flare nut is tightened with the spanner, the tightening torque should increase suddenly.
Tighten the flare nut further for the corresponding angle shown in Table 3.
10
3PN11585-1
221
EDSG281001
Table 3
Pipe size (mm)
6.4
9.5
12.7
15.9

60 to 90 degrees
60 to 90 degrees
30 to 60 degrees
30 to 60 degrees

Approx. 150mm
Approx. 200mm
Approx. 250mm
Approx. 300mm
2) On completion of installation work, check that there is no gas leakage.

3) Refer to the illustration on the right-hand side and be sure to perform heat insulation work on the piping
joints after gas leakage checks. (Refer to Fig. 6)
Heat insulation procedure for liquid piping

Insulation for fitting (4) (accessory)
Flare nut joint
Insulation material for piping

(on unit side)
Make sure that the seam faces upward.
Attached to the surface.
Middle sealing pad (7) (accessory)
Main unit
Wrap the insulation material around the
portion from the surface of the main unit
to the upper part of the flare nut joint.
Insulation material for piping (field supply)
Liquid pipe
Gas pipe
Fig. 6
Heat insulation procedure for gas piping
Insulation for fitting (5) (accessory)
Insulation material for piping
(on unit side)
Attached to the surface.
Flare nut joint

Make sure that the seam faces upward.
Middle sealing pad (7) (accessory)
Insulation material for piping (field supply)
Wrap the insulation material around the

portion from the surface of the main unit
to the upper part of the flare nut joint.
Use the insulation for fitting (4) and (5) provided to the liquid piping and gas piping, respectively, and
conduct heat insulation work.
(Tighten both edges of the insulation for fitting (4) and (5) for each joint with the clamp (8).)
11
3PN11585-1
222
EDSG281001
Make sure that the joint of the insulation for fitting (4) and (5) for the joint on the liquid piping and gas
piping side faces upward.
Wrap the middle sealing material (7) around the insulation for fitting (4) and (5) for the joint (flare nut part).
CAUTION
Be sure to perform the heat insulation of the local piping up to the piping joint.
If the piping is exposed, dew condensation may result. Furthermore, a burn may be caused if a human body
comes in contact with the piping.
Perform nitrogen substituent or apply nitrogen into the refrigerant piping (see NOTE
1) in the case
of refrigerant piping blazing (see NOTE
2). Then perform the flare connection of the indoor unit.
(Refer to Fig. 7)
Refrigerant
piping
Pressurereducing valve
Part to be
brazed
Taping
hands
valve
Nitrogen
Fig. 7
Nitrogen
CAUTION
Do not use any antioxidant at the time of piping blazing.
The piping may be clogged with a residual antioxidant and parts may malfunction.
NOTE
1. At the time of blazing, set the pressure of nitrogen to approximately 0.02 MPa (close to the pressure of
a breeze coming in contact with the cheek) with a decompression valve.
2. Do not use flux at the time of blazing and connecting the refrigerant piping. Use a copper phosphorus
brazing alloy (BCuP-2: JIS Z 3264/BCu 93P-710/795: ISO3677), which does not require flux, for blazing.
(Flux has a bad influence on the refrigerant piping. Chlorine-based flux will cause piping corrosion.
Furthermore, if it contains fluorine, the flux will deteriorate refrigerant oil.)
As for the branching of the refrigerant piping or refrigerant, refer to the installation manual provided with the
outdoor unit.

1) Remove the drain socket cover. (for transportation)
2) Conduct drain piping work.
Check that the piping ensures proper draining.
Make sure that the diameter of the piping excluding the rising
part is the same as or larger than the diameter of the
connecting pipe (vinyl chloride pipe with an outer diameter of
32 mm and a nominal inner diameter of 25 mm).
Make sure that the piping is short enough with a downward
slope of at least 1/100 and that there is no air bank formed.
No drain trap is required.
Refrigerant
piping
Screw (4 portions)
Drain socket
Drain socket cover
(for transportation)
CAUTION
The drain piping will be clogged with water and water leakage may result if the water is accumulated in the
drain piping.
12
3PN11585-1
223
EDSG281001
Conduct drain-up piping work if the gradient is insufficient.

Attach a support bracket at 1 to 1.5 m intervals for the prevention of piping deflection.
Support bracket
1 - 1.5 m
Downward slope of at least 1/100

Be sure to use the drain hose (2) and metal clamp (1).
Insert the drain hose (2) deep into the base of the drain
socket, and securely fasten the metal clamp (1) within the
taped part on the insertion front end of the hose.
Be sure to fasten the screw of the metal clamp (1) until the
Tape
margin of the screw thread decreases to 4 mm or less.
Metal clamp (1)

(accessory)
Drain hose (2)

(accessory)
Min. 100 mm
NOTE
Be sure to follow the instructions as below.
Do not connect the drain piping directly to a sewer that smells of ammonia.
The ammonia in the sewer may reach through the drain piping and corrode the heat exchanger of the
indoor unit.
Do not bend or twist the provided drain hose (2) in order not to impose excessive force on the hose.
(Doing so may result in water leakage.)
Take the procedure shown in the following illustration to perform concentrated drain piping.
Concentrated drain piping

Maintain a downward slope of at least
1/100 so that no air bank will be formed.
The drain piping will be clogged with
water and water leakage may result if the
water is accumulated in the drain piping.
Select the diameter of the concentrated drain piping to suit the capacity of equipment connecting to the
concentrated drain piping (see the equipment design sheet).
Ceiling slab
1 - 1.5 m
Support bracket
Metal clamp (1) (accessory)

Drain hose (2) (accessory)
3) Check the smooth draining of the piping on completion of the installation of the piping.
Provide approximately one liter of water gradually into the drain pan through the water inlet on the
bottom of the drain socket or the outlet.
13
3PN11585-1
224
EDSG281001
4) Be sure to conduct heat insulation work on the following portions, or otherwise water leakage may
occur as a result of dew condensation.
Drain piping indoors
Water inlet
Drain socket
Drain pan
Refrigerant piping
Air outlet
Water inlet lid

Screw
Drain socket
Plastic water
container
On completion of the drainage check, refer to the following illustration, and use the provided large
sealing pad (6) and heat insulate the metal clamp (1) and drain hose (2).
Make sure that the

seam faces upward.

(accessory)
Metal clamp (1)
(accessory)
4 mm max.
8. DUCT WORK
Pay the utmost attention to the following items and conduct the duct work.
Check that the duct will not be in excess of the setting range of external static pressure for the unit.
(Refer to the technical datasheet for the setting range.)
Attach a canvas duct each to the air outlet and air inlet so that the vibration of the equipment will not be
transmitted to the duct or ceiling.
Use a sound-absorbing material (insulation material) for the lining of the duct and apply vibration insulation
rubber to the hanging bolts.
At the time of duct welding, perform the curing of the duct so that the sputter will not come in contact with
the drain pan for the filter.
If the metal duct pass through a metal lath, wire lath, or metal plate of a wooden structure, separate the duct
and wall electrically.
Be sure to heat insulate the duct for the prevention of dew condensation. (Material: Glass wool or styrene
foam; Thickness: 25 mm)
Be sure to attach the field supply air filter to the air inlet of the unit or field supply inlet in the air passage on
the air suction side. (Be sure to select an air filter with a duct collection efficiency of 50 weight percent.)
Explain the operation and washing methods of the locally procured components (i.e., the air filter, air inlet
grille, and air outlet grille) to the customer.
Locate the air outlet grille on the indoor side for the prevention of drafts in a position where indirect contact
with people.
14
3PN11585-1
225
EDSG281001
The air conditioner incorporates a function to adjust the fan to rated speed automatically. (11. FIELD SETTING)
Therefore, do not use booster fans midway in the duct.
Connection method of ducts on air inlet and outlet sides.
Connect the field supply duct in alignment with the inner side of the flange.
Connect the flange and unit with the flange connection screw (3).
Wrap aluminum tape around the flange and duct joint in order to prevent air leakage.
Flange on air inlet side

(provided with the unit)
Flange on air outlet side

(provided with the unit)
Insulation material
(field supply)
Screws for duct

flanges (3)
(accessory)
Air inlet
Insulation material
(field supply)
Unit
Air outlet
Canvas duct
(field supply)
Screws
for duct
flanges (3)
(accessory)
CAUTION
Connect the flange and unit with the flange connection screw (3) regardless of whether the duct is
connected to the air inlet side.
For electric wiring work, refer to also Wiring diagram attached to the control box lid.
Install a wiring interrupter or ground-fault circuit interrupter for the power wiring.
Make sure the earth resistance is no greater than 100 .
Refer to the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit for the size of power supply wiring connected
to the outdoor unit, the capacity of the circuit breaker and switch, and wiring instructions.
Do not connect the ground wire to gas and water pipes, lightning rods, or telephone ground wires.
Gas pipes : might cause explosions or fire if gas leaks.
Water pipes : no grounding effect if hard vinyl piping is used.
Telephone ground wires or lightning rods : might cause abnormally high electric potential in the ground
Field fuses
Wiring the units

Power supply wiring
(for Fan)
(In case of installing the
control panel separately)
Wire
Size (mm )
Length
H05VV-U4G
( NOTE
1)
2.5
15A
H05VV-U2
2.5
Vinyl cord with sheath or

cable (2 wire)( NOTE
2)
0.75 - 1.25
Max. 500m
NOTE
2. Insulated thickness : 1mm or more.
15
3PN11585-1
226
EDSG281001
10. WIRING EXAMPLE AND HOW TO SET THE REMOTE CONTROLLER

10-1 CONNECTING WIRING THE UNITS, POWER SUPPLY, GROUND, AND REMOTE
CONTROLLER WIRING
(Remove the control box lid as shown below and connect each wire.)
1) Remove the control box lid.
Screw
(3 portions)
2) Lay the wires in the control box

through the wire inlet on the side of
the control box.
Low-voltage wiring inlet

Remote controller wiring
(Low voltage)
High-voltage wiring inlet

Wiring the units (High voltage)
Power supply wiring (High voltage)
Ground wiring (High voltage)
CAUTION
Do not lay the remote controller wiring along with the wiring the units, power supply wiring or other electric
wiring in the same route. Separate the remote controller wiring at least 50 mm from the wiring the units,
power supply wiring or other electric wiring, or otherwise malfunctions or failures may be caused by
external electric noise that may interfere with the remote controller wiring.
For the installation and wiring of the remote controller, refer to the remote controller installation manual
provided with the remote controller.
For wiring the units, power supply wiring, refer to the wiring diagram as well.
Be sure to connect the remote controller wiring correctly to the right terminal block.
16
3PN11585-1
227
EDSG281001
3) Follow the instructions below, and lay the wires in the control box.
Fix the wires with

clamp (8) to the wire
fixing bracket
provided to the
control box.
Wiring the units
(High voltage)
Power supply wiring
(High voltage)
Ground wiring
(High voltage)
Remote controller
wiring (Low voltage)
Insert the cord

into the wire clips
provided with the
control box.
PROHIBITED
Never connect wiring the units
and the power supply wiring.
P1 P2 F1 F2
Power supply terminals (X1M)
Ground 1 2 3 L N
Power supply
Wiring
the units wiring
Connection method of
power supply terminals
Remote controller
wiring (No polarity)
Twist and fix the upper part so
that the wires will not drop out.
Fix the cord with the
clamp (8) to the wire
fixing bracket provided
to the control box.
Connection method of remote

controller terminals (X2M)
If stranded wires are used,
do not solder the front end
of the wires.
WARNING
Trim and lay the wiring neatly and attach the control box lid securely.
An electric shock or fire may result if the control box lid catches any wiring or the wires push up the lid.
4) Put the control box lid, and wrap the wire sealing
material (Small) (10) around the wires so as to
block the wire through holes.
Wire through holes
CAUTION
After all the wiring connections are done, fill in any gaps in the through holes with putty or insulation
(procured locally) to prevent small animals and insects from entering the unit from outside. (If any do get in,
they could cause short circuits in the control box.)
17
3PN11585-1
228
EDSG281001
5) Mount the provided wire fixing bracket (12) with

the wire fixing screw (13). Fix each wire with the
provided clamp (8).
Remote controller
wiring
Wiring the units
Power supply wiring
Ground wiring
Fixing use Clamp (8) (accessory)
Wire fixing bracket (12) (accessory)

Wire fixing screw (13) (accessory)
[Precautions for Wiring the Units and power
supply wiring]
Connect round crimp-style terminals provided with
insulation sleeves to the terminal block for power
supply.
Be sure to follow the instructions provided below if
the specified terminals cannot be used.
Otherwise, abnormal heat may be generated as
a result of the loosening of the wires.
Connect the wires

evenly.
Do not connect a
wire to the single
side only.
Electric wire
Do not connect
wires different
from each other in
diameter.
If stranded wires are used, do not solder the front end of the wires.
Connect proper wires securely and fix the wires so that external force will not be imposed on the terminals.
Use an appropriate screwdriver to tighten the terminal screws. The screw heads may be damaged if the
screwdriver is too small and the terminal screws will not be tightened properly.
Do not tighten the terminal screws excessively, or otherwise the screw heads may be damaged.
Refer to the table below for the required tightening torque values of the terminal screws.
Terminal block for remote controller and transmission wires
Terminal block for power supply, and wiring the units

0.80 - 0.96
1.18 - 1.44
10-2 WIRING EXAMPLE

WARNING
Install an earth leakage breaker.
The installation of an earth leakage breaker is imperative for the prevention of electric shocks and fire
accidents.
18
3PN11585-1
229
EDSG281001
(For the wiring of outdoor units, refer to the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit.)
Pair type: 1 remote controller controls 1 indoor unit. (standard system)
2 remote controllers control: 2 remote controllers control 1 indoor unit.
remote controller)
Pair type
Main power supply

Main switch
Fuse
Main switch
Fuse
Main power supply
Outdoor unit
Outdoor unit
1 2 3
1 2 3
Indoor unit
P1
P2
(NOTE
P1
P2
Remote controller
Remote controller
Power supply
1
2
3
L
N
L
N
Power supply
Indoor unit
220-240V
50Hz
2)
P1
P2
P1
P2
P1
P2
1
2
3
L
N
L
N
Remote controller
(Slave)
Indoor unit
220-240V
50Hz
Group control
Main power supply
Main power supply
Main switch
Fuse
Main switch
Fuse
Main switch
Fuse
Outdoor unit
Outdoor unit
Outdoor unit
1 2 3
1 2 3
P1 P2
Power supply
220-240V
L
50Hz N
Main power supply
P1 P2
Remote
controller
(Optional
accessory)
1 2 3
P1 P2
Power supply
1
2
3
L
N
Indoor unit
220-240V
L
50Hz N
P1 P2
Remote
controller
(Optional
accessory)
P1 P2
Power supply
1
2
3
L
N
Indoor unit
220-240V
L
50Hz N
1
2
3
L
N
P1 P2
Remote
controller
(Optional
accessory)
Indoor unit
NOTE
1. All transmission wiring except for the remote controller wires must match the terminal symbol.
2. If the unit is under 2 remote controller control, perform additional wiring of the remote controller to the
remote controller terminal board.
3. If the unit is under group control, detach the remote controller cord connecting the remote controller
terminal board and the remote controller.
19
3PN11585-1
230
EDSG281001
10-3 CONTROL BY 2 REMOTE CONTROLLERS (Controlling 1 indoor unit by 2 remote

controllers)
Set one of the remote controllers to main and the other to sub in the case of remote control with two remote
controllers.
Switching Main/Sub
1) Insert a
screwdriver into the clearance between the grooves of the lower casing and the upper casing
to remove the upper casing. (2 grooves) (The remote controller PCB is attached to the upper casing.)
2) Set the main/sub switch on one of the remote controller PCBs to sub. (Keep the switch of the other remote
controller PCB set to main.)
Upper part of
remote controller
(Factory setting)
S
M
Remote controller
PC board
Lower part of
remote controller
Insert the screwdriver here and gently work
off the upper part of remote controller.
Only one remote

controller needs to be
changed if factory
settings have
remained untouched.
S
M
11. FIELD SETTING

NOTE
Before 12. TEST OPERATION, be sure to make the following field settings as explained in 11. FIELD
SETTING.
Make sure the control box lids are closed on the indoor and outdoor units.
Field setting must be made from the remote controller in accordance with the installation condition.
Setting can be made by changing the MODE NO., FIRST CODE NO., and SECOND CODE NO..
For setting and operation, refer to the FIELD SETTING in the installation manual of the remote controller.
SECOND
CODE NO.
MODE NO.
FIRST
CODE NO.
SETTING
FIELD SET
MODE
Set the remote controller to the FIELD SET MODE. For details, refer to the HOW TO SET IN THE
FIELD, in the remote controller manual.
20
3PN11585-1
231
EDSG281001
With Wireless Remote Controller Used

Set the wireless remote controller address before using the wireless remote controller.
For the setting method of the address, refer to the operation manual provided with the wireless remote
controller.
NOTE
A MODE NO. is set on a group basis. To make a mode setting on a room unit basis or check the setting
made, however, set the corresponding mode number in the parentheses.
1. Settings for Optional Accessories
In the case of connecting optional accessories, refer to the operation manuals provided with the optional
accessories and make necessary settings.
2. External Static Pressure Settings
Make settings in either method (a) or method (b) as explained below.
(a) Use the airflow auto adjustment function to make settings.
Airflow auto adjustment: The volume of blow-off air is automatically adjusted to the rated quantity.
NOTE
Be sure to check that the external static pressure is within the rated range before making the settings.
If the external static pressure is beyond the rated range, no automatic adjustments will be made and an
airflow rate insufficiency or water leakage may result. (Refer to the relevant technical datasheet for the
rated range of the external static pressure.)
1) Check that power supply wiring and wiring the units to the air conditioner is completed along with
duct installation. If a closing damper is installed in the air-conditioning system, make sure that the
closing damper is opened. Furthermore, check that the air filter as a field supply is attached to the
air passage on the suction side.
2) If there are a number of air outlets and inlets, adjust the throttles so that the airflow rate of each air
outlet and inlet will coincide with the designed airflow rate. At that time, operate the air conditioner
in fan operation mode. To change the airflow rate, press and set the airflow adjustment button of
the remote controller to H, or L.
3) Make settings for airflow automatic adjustment. After setting the air conditioner to fan operation
mode, stop the air conditioner, go to FIELD SET MODE, select MODE NO. 21 (11 in the case
of group settings), set the setting FIRST CODE NO. to 7, and set the setting SECOND CODE
NO. to 03.
Return to normal mode after these settings, and press the ON/OFF OPERATION button. Then the
operation lamp will be lit and the air conditioner will go into fan operation for airflow automatic
adjustment. Do not adjust the throttles of the air outlets or inlets during automatic adjustment of the
air conditioner. After the air conditioner runs approximately one to eight minutes, the air conditioner
will finish airflow adjustment automatically, the operation lamp will be turned OFF, and the air
conditioner will come to a stop.
Table 4
MODE NO.
11 (21)
01
OFF
FIRST CODE NO.

7
SECOND CODE NO.
02
Completion of airflow adjustment
Setting contents
Airflow adjustment
03
Start of airflow adjustment
4) After the air conditioner stops operating, check with MODE NO. 21 on an indoor unit basis that 02
is set for the SECOND CODE NO. in Table 4. If the air conditioner does not stop operating
automatically or the SECOND CODE NO. is not 02, repeat steps from 3). If error is displayed,
check the defective point.
21
3PN11585-1
232
EDSG281001
CAUTION
If there is any change after airflow adjustment in the ventilation paths (e.g., the duct and air outlet), be sure
to make airflow auto adjustment again.
Consult your Daikin representative if there is any change in the ventilation paths (e.g., the duct and air
outlet) after the test operation is finished or the air conditioner is moved to another place.
(b) Select External Static Pressure with Remote Controller

Check that 01 (OFF) is set for the SECOND CODE NO. in MODE NO. 21 for airflow adjustment on
an indoor unit basis in Table 4. The SECOND CODE NO. is set to 01 (OFF) at factory set. Change
the SECOND CODE NO. as shown in Table 5 according to the external static pressure of the duct to
be connected.
1) The SECOND CODE NO. is set to 01 (an external static pressure of 50 Pa) at factory set.
Table 5
External Static Pressure
50Pa
60Pa
70Pa
80Pa
90Pa
100Pa
110Pa
120Pa
130Pa
140Pa
150Pa
160Pa
180Pa
200Pa
MODE NO.
FIRST CODE NO.
13 (23)
06
SECOND CODE NO.

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
CAUTION
Keep in mind that a shortage of airflow quantity or water leakage will result because the air conditioner will
be operated outside the rated range of airflow quantity if the external static pressure is wrongly set.
3. Filter Sign Settings
The remote controller is provided with an LCD that tells the time of air filter cleaning.
If the air conditioner is used in places with excessive dust, change the SECOND CODE NO. as shown
in Table 6. The SECOND CODE NO. is set to 01 (standard) at factory set.
Table 6
Dirt
Time for display
Approximately
2500 hours
Approximately
Excessive dust
1250 hours
No display (*)
MODE NO.
FIRST CODE NO.
Standard
SECOND CODE
NO.
01
10 (20)
0
02
3
* Select No display under conditions in which the cleaning display is not required, such as the time of regular
maintenance.
22
3PN11585-1
233
EDSG281001
12. TEST OPERATION

Refer to the section of FOR THE FOLLOWING ITEMS, TAKE SPECIAL CARE DURING
CONSTRUCTION AND CHECK AFTER INSTALLATION IS FINISHED .
1. HOW TO TEST OPERATION

1) Open the gas side stop valve.
2) Open the liquid side stop valve.
3) Electrify crank case heater for 6 hours (Not required in case of a unit exclusively designed for cooling
only).
4) Set to cooling operation with control panel and start operation by pushing ON/OFF button (
).
5) Press INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button (
) 4 times (2 times for wireless remote controller)
and operate at Test Operation mode for 3 minutes.
6) Press INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button (
7) Confirm function of unit according to the operation manual.
TEST
TEST
PRECAUTIONS
Refer to the diagnoses below if the unit does not operate properly.
After completing the test run, press the INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button once to put the unit in
inspection mode, and make sure the malfunction code is 00 (=normal).
2. HOW TO DIAGNOSE FOR PROBLEMS

If the air conditioner does not operate normally after installing the air conditioner.
a malfunction shown in the table below may happened.
No display
88*
88 flashing
Malfunction
Wrong remote controller conection wiring
Remote controller faulty
Fuse faulty
*After turning on the power, the maximum is 90 seconds, although it will only display 88. This is not a
problem, and it will be set for 90 seconds.
1. With the remote controller. ( NOTE
1)
and the error code are
indicated on the liquid crystal display . In such a case, diagnose the fault contents by referring to
the table on the Error code list it case of group control, the unit No. is displayed so that the indoor
unit no with the trouble can be recognized.( NOTE
2)
When the operation stops due to trouble. the display on the indoor unit flashes. In such a case,
diagnose the fault contents with the table on the Error code list looking for the error code which
can be found by following procedures.( NOTE
2)
23
3PN11585-1
234
EDSG281001
1) Press the INSPECTION /TEST OPERATION button,

2) Press the PROGRAMMING TIME button and find the unit No. which stopped due to trouble.
Number of beeps
3 short beeps...............Perform all the following operations
1 short beep ................Perform 3) and 6)
1 long beep..................No trouble
3) Press the OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button and upper figure of the error code flashes.
4) Continue pressing the PROGRAMMING TIME button unit it makes 2 short beeps and find the
upper code.
5) Press the OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button and lower figure of the error code flashes.
6) Continue pressing the PROGRAMMING TIME button unit it makes a long beep and find the lower
code.
A long beep indicate the error code.
NOTE
1. Press the INSPECTION /TEST OPERATION button on remote controller,
starts flashing and
changes the inspection mode.
2. Keep down the ON/OFF button for 5 seconds or longer in the inspection mode and the above trouble
history disappears, after the trouble code goes on and off twice, followed by the code 00(normal).
3. Malfunction code
For places where the error code is left blank, the
Code
A1
A3
A6
A7
A8
AF
AH
AJ
C1
C4
C6
C9
CC
CJ
E0
E1
E3
E4
E5
E7
E9
Malfunction/Remarks
Swing flap motor locked
Indoor unit power supply voltage abnormal
Humidifier faulty
Air cleaner faulty
Type set improper
Indoor unit fan driver PCB
Indoor control PCB transmission abnormal
Power source malfunction (indoor unit)
Sensor for heat exchanger lamp is fault
Indoor unit fan driver PCB combination failure, control PCB type-wise setting failure
Sensor for suction air lamp is fault
Temperature sensor system faulty

Outdoor units PC board faulty (outdoor unit)
Compressor motor lock malfunction (outdoor unit)
Outdoor fan instantaneous overcurrent malfunction (outdoor unit)
24
3PN11585-1
235
F3
H3
H7
H9
J1
J2
J3
J5
J6
J7
J8
J9
JA
JC
L1
L4
L5
L8
L9
LC
P1
P3
P4
PJ
U0
U1
U2
U4
UF
EDSG281001

Outdoor motor position signal malfunction (outdoor unit)
The air conditioner comes to a stop due to an error depending on the model or operating
conditions.
Current sensor faulty
conditions.
conditions.
Suction temperature sensor faulty (outdoor unit)
Pressure sensor for discharge pipe faulty (outdoor unit)
Pressure sensor for suction pipe faulty (outdoor unit)
PC board temperature sensor malfunction (outdoor unit)
The quantity of refrigerant may be insufficient.
Reverse phase
Reverse two of the L1,L2 and L3 leads.
Inverter phase loss or a failure in the main circuit capacitor may be resulting.
Wrong wiring between indoor and outdoor units or malfunction of the PC board mounted
on the indoor and the outdoor units.
If UF is shown, the wiring between the indoor and outdoor units is not properly wired. Therefore,
immediately disconnect the power supply and correct the wiring. (The compressor and the fan
mounted on the outdoor unit may start operation independent of the remote controller operation.)
25
3PN11585-1
236
EDSG281001
U5
U8
UA
UC
UJ

Malfunction in transmission between main and sub remote controllers.
Error in multi-system settings for simultaneous ON/OFF operation.

Transmission failure in accessory equipment
CAUTION
If interior finish work is continuing on completion of the test operation of the air conditioner, explain the customer not to operate the air conditioner until the interior finish work is completed for the protection of the
air conditioner.
Otherwise, substances that will be generated from interior finish work materials, such as paint and
adhesive agents, may contaminate the air conditioner.
26
3PN11585-1
237
Installation of Outdoor Unit
EDSG281001
3. Installation of Outdoor Unit

3.1
3.1.1
Installation
3P208365-6C M07B057A
DAIKIN AIR CONDITIONER

Two-dimensional bar code
is a code for manufacturing.
Safety Precautions
Read these Safety Precautions carefully to ensure correct installation.
This manual classifies the precautions into WARNING and CAUTION.
Be sure to follow all the precautions below: they are all important for ensuring safety.
WARNING Failure to follow any of WARNING is likely to result in such grave consequences as death or serious injury.
CAUTION
Failure to follow any of CAUTION may result in grave consequences in some cases.
The following safety symbols are used throughout this manual:

Be sure to observe this instruction.
Be sure to establish an earth connection.
Never attempt.
After completing installation, test the unit to check for installation errors. Give the user adequate instructions
concerning the use and cleaning of the unit according to the Operation Manual.
WARNING
Installation should be left to the dealer or another professional. Improper installation may cause water leakage, electrical shock, or fire.
Install the air conditioner according to the instructions given in this manual. Incomplete installation may cause water leakage, electrical shock, or fire.
Be sure to use the supplied or specified installation parts. Use of other parts may cause the unit to come to lose, water leakage, electrical shock, or fire.
Install the air conditioner on a solid base that can support the weight of the unit. An inadequate base or incomplete installation may cause injury in the event the unit falls off the base.
Electrical work should be carried out in accordance with the installation manual and the national electrical wiring
rules or code of practice. Insufficient capacity or incomplete electrical work may cause electrical shock or fire.
Be sure to use a dedicated power circuit. Never use a power supply shared by another appliance.
For wiring, use a cable length enough to cover the entire distance with no connection. Do not use an extension cord. Do not
put other loads on the power supply, use a dedicated power circuit.(Failure to do so may cause abnormal heat, electric shock or fire.)
Use the specified types of wires for electrical connections between the indoor and outdoor units.
Firmly clamp the interconnecting wires so their terminals receive no external stresses. Incomplete connections or clamping may cause terminal overheating or fire.
After connecting interconnecting and supply wiring be sure to shape the cables so that they do not put undue force on the
electrical covers or panels. Install covers over the wires. Incomplete cover installation may cause terminal overheating, electrical shock, or fire.
When installing or relocating the system, be sure to keep the refrigerant circuit free from substances other than the specified
refrigerant (R410A), such as air. (Any presence of air or other foreign substance in the refrigerant circuit causes an abnormal pressure rise or rupture, resulting in injury.)
If any refrigerant has leaked out during the installation work, ventilate the room.
(The refrigerant produces a toxic gas if exposed to flames.)
After all installation is complete, check to make sure that no refrigerant is leaking out.
During pump-down, stop the compressor before removing the refrigerant piping. If the compressor is still running and the stop valve is open during
pump-down, air will be sucked in when the refrigerant piping is removed, causing abnormal pressure in the freezer cycle which will lead to breakage and even injury.
During installation, attach the refrigerant piping securely before running the compressor.
If the compressor is not attached and the stop valve is open during pump-down, air will be sucked in when the compressor is run, causing
abnormal pressure in the freezer cycle which will lead to breakage and even injury.
Be sure to establish an earth. Do not earth the unit to a utility pipe, arrester, or telephone earth.
Incomplete earth may cause electrical shock, or fire.
Be sure to install an earth leakage breaker. Failure to install an earth leakage breaker may result in electric shocks, or fire.
CAUTION
Do not install the air conditioner in a place where there is danger of exposure to inflammable gas leakage.
If the gas leaks and builds up around the unit, it may catch fire.
Establish drain piping according to the instructions of this manual. Inadequate piping may cause flooding.
Tighten the flare nut according to the specified method such as with a torque wrench.
If the flare nut is tightened too hard, the flare nut may crack after a long time and cause refrigerant leakage.
Make sure to provide for adequate measures in order to prevent that the outdoor unit be used as a shelter by small animals.
Small animals making contact with electrical parts can cause malfunctions, smoke or fire. Please instruct the customer to keep the area around the unit clean.
3P208365-6C
238
EDSG281001
Accessories
Accessories supplied with the outdoor unit:
(B) Drain plug (Heat pump-Models)
(A) Installation manual
2
1
There is on the bottom packing case.
Precautions for Selecting the Location

1) Choose a place solid enough to bear the weight and vibration of the unit, where the operation noise will
not be amplified.
2) Choose a location where the hot air discharged from the unit or the operation noise will not cause a
nuisance to the neighbors of the user.
3) Avoid places near a bedroom and the like, so that the operation noise will cause no trouble.
4) There must be sufficient spaces for carrying the unit into and out of the site.
5) There must be sufficient space for air passage and no obstructions around the air inlet and the air outlet.
6) The site must be free from the possibility of flammable gas leakage in a nearby place.
7) Install units, power cords and inter-unit cables at least 3 meter away from television and radio sets. This is
to prevent interference to images and sounds. (Noises may be heard even if they are more than 3 meter
away depending on radio wave conditions.)
8) In coastal areas or other places with salty atmosphere of sulfate gas, corrosion may shorten the life of the
air conditioner.
9) Since drain flows out of the outdoor unit, do not place under the unit anything which must be kept away
from moisture.
NOTE
Cannot be installed hanging from ceiling or stacked.
CAUTION
When operating the air conditioner in a low outdoor ambient
temperature, be sure to follow the instructions described
below.
1) To prevent exposure to wind, install the outdoor unit with its
suction side facing the wall.
2) Never install the outdoor unit at a site where the suction
side may be exposed directly to wind.
3) To prevent exposure to wind, it is recommended to install a
baffle plate on the air discharge side of the outdoor unit.
4) In heavy snowfall areas, select an installation site where the
snow will not affect the unit.
Construct a large canopy.

Construct a pedestal.
Install the unit high enough off

the ground to prevent burying in
snow.
Precautions on Installation
20
Check the strength and level of the installation ground so that the unit will not cause any operating vibration
or noise after installed.
In accordance with the foundation drawing, fix the unit securely by means of the foundation bolts. (Prepare
four sets of M8 or M10 foundation bolts, nuts and washers each which are available on the market.)
It is best to screw in the foundation bolts until their
length are 20mm from the foundation surface.
3P208365-6C
239
EDSG281001
Outdoor Unit Installation Drawings

Wrap the insulation pipe with
the finishing tape from bottom
to top.
Max. allowable length
Max. allowable height
20m
15m
Additional refrigerant
required for refrigerant
pipe exceeding
10m in length.
20g/m
Gas pipe
Liquid pipe
O.D. 9.5mm
O.D. 6.4mm
* Be sure to add the proper amount of additional refrigerant.
Failure to do so may result in reduced performance.
** When connecting the FVXS indoor unit, the shortest piping
length should be no less than around 2.5m.
Stop valve cover

How to remove the stop valve cover.
Remove the screw on the
stop valve cover.
Slide the lid downward
to remove it.
250mm from wa
ll
3
Foo 11
cen t bolt
tres -hole
How to attach the stop valve cover.

Insert the upper part of the
stop valve cover into the
outdoor unit to install.
Tighten the screws.
In sites with poor drainage, use

block bases for outdoor unit.
Adjust foot height until the unit
is leveled. Otherwise, water
leakage or pooling of water may
occur.
574
lt-hole
centre
s)
(Foot b
o
Allow space for piping

and electrical servicing.
105.5
(From
u
nits s
ide)
Where there is a danger of the unit

falling, use foot bolts, or wires.
Unit: mm
Installation Guidelines
Where a wall or other obstacle is in the path of outdoor units intake or exhaust airflow, follow the
installation guidelines below.
For any of the below installation patterns, the wall height on the exhaust side should be 1200mm or less.
Wall facing one side
More than 50
Walls facing two sides
Walls facing three sides
More than 100
1200
or less
More than 50
More than 50
Side view
More than 150
More than 150

More
than 100
More than 50
Top view
More than 300

Top view
Unit: mm
3P208365-6C
240
EDSG281001
Outdoor Unit Installation (1)

1.
Installing outdoor unit.

1) When installing the outdoor unit, refer to Precautions for Selecting the Location and the Outdoor
Unit Installation Drawings.
2) If drain work is necessary, follow the procedures below.
2.
Drain work (Heat pump-models).

1) Use drain plug for drainage.
2) If the drain port is covered by a mounting base or floor surface, place
additional foot bases of at least 30mm in height under the outdoor units feet.
3) In cold areas, do not use a drain hose with the outdoor unit.
(Otherwise, drain water may freeze, impairing heating performance.)
3.
Drain-water hole
Bottom frame
Drain plug
Hose (available commercially,
inner dia. 16mm)
Flaring the pipe end.

(Cut exactly at
right angles.)
1) Cut the pipe end with a pipe cutter.

2) Remove burrs with the cut surface
facing downward so that the chips do
not enter the pipe.
3) Put the flare nut on the pipe.
4) Flare the pipe.
5) Check that the flaring is properly made.
Remove burrs
Flaring
Set exactly at the position shown below.
A
Die
Flare tool for R410A
Conventional flare tool
Clutch-type
Clutch-type (Rigid-type) Wing-nut type (Imperial-type)
0-0.5mm
1.0-1.5mm
1.5-2.0mm
Check
Flares inner
surface must
be flaw-free.
The pipe end must

be evenly flared in
a perfect circle.
Make sure that the
flare nut is fitted.
WARNING
1) Do not use mineral oil on flared part.
2) Prevent mineral oil from getting into the system as this would reduce the lifetime of the units.
3) Never use piping which has been used for previous installations. Only use parts which are delivered with the unit.
4) Do never install a drier to this R410A unit in order to guarantee its lifetime.
5) The drying material may dissolve and damage the system.
6) Incomplete flaring may cause refrigerant gas leakage.
4.
Refrigerant piping.
CAUTION
1) Use the flare nut fixed to the main unit. (To prevent cracking of the flare nut by aged deterioration.)
2) To prevent gas leakage, apply refrigeration oil only to the inner surface of the flare. (Use refrigeration oil
for R410A.)
3) Use torque wrenches when tightening the flare nuts to prevent damage to the flare nuts and gas leakage.
Align the centres of both flares and tighten the flare nuts 3 or 4 turns by hand. Then tighten them fully
with the torque wrenches.
[Apply oil]
Do not apply refrigeration
oil to the outer surface.
[Tighten]
Apply refrigeration oil to the
Torque wrench
inner surface of the flare.
Flare nut
Spanner
Piping union
Do not apply refrigeration oil to the flare
Flare nut
nut avoid tightening with over torque.
Flare nut tightening torque

Gas side
Liquid side
3/8 inch
1/4 inch
32.7-39.9N m
14.2-17.2N m
(330-407kgf cm)
(144-175kgf cm)
Valve cap tightening torque

Gas side
Liquid side
3/8 inch
1/4 inch
21.6-27.4N m
21.6-27.4N m
(220-280kgf cm)
(220-280kgf cm)
Service port cap
tightening torque
10.8-14.7N m
(110-150kgf cm)
3P208365-6C
241
EDSG281001

5.
Purging air and checking gas leakage.

When piping work is completed, it is necessary to purge the air and check for gas leakage.
WARNING
1) Do not mix any substance other than the specified refrigerant (R410A) into the refrigeration cycle.
2) When refrigerant gas leaks occur, ventilate the room as soon and as much as possible.
3) R410A, as well as other refrigerants, should always be recovered and never be released directly into the
environment.
4) Use a vacuum pump for R410A exclusively. Using the same vacuum pump for different refrigerants
may damage the vacuum pump or the unit.
If using additional refrigerant, perform air purging from the refrigerant
pipes and indoor unit using a vacuum pump, then charge additional
refrigerant.
Use a hexagonal wrench (4mm) to operate the stop valve rod.
All refrigerant pipe joints should be tightened with a torque wrench at
the specified tightening torque.
Compound
Pressure
pressure gauge meter
Gauge
manifold
Low-pressure
valve
Highpressure
valve
Valve caps
Liquid
stop
valve
Charging
hoses
Vacuum pump Service port
Gas stop valve
1) Connect projection side of charging hose (which comes from gauge manifold) to gas stop valves service port.
2) Fully open gauge manifolds low-pressure valve (Lo) and completely close its high-pressure valve (Hi).
(High-pressure valve subsequently requires no operation.)
3) Do vacuum pumping and make sure that the compound pressure gauge reads 0.1MPa ( 76cmHg)*1.
4) Close gauge manifolds low-pressure valve (Lo) and stop vacuum pump.
(Keep this state for a few minutes to make sure that the compound pressure gauge pointer does not swing back.)*2.
5) Remove covers from liquid stop valve and gas stop valve.
6) Turn the liquid stop valves rod 90 degrees counterclockwise with a hexagonal wrench to open valve.
Close it after 5 seconds, and check for gas leakage.
Using soapy water, check for gas leakage from indoor units flare and outdoor units flare and valve rods.
After the check is complete, wipe all soapy water off.
7) Disconnect charging hose from gas stop valves service port, then fully open liquid and gas stop valves.
(Do not attempt to turn valve rod beyond its stop.)
8) Tighten valve caps and service port caps for the liquid and gas stop valves with a torque wrench at the specified torques.
*1. Pipe length vs. vacuum pump run time

Pipe length
Up to 15 metres
More than 15 metres
Run time
Not less than 10 min.
*2. If the compound pressure gauge pointer swings back, refrigerant may have water content or a loose pipe
joint may exists. Check all pipe joints and retighten nuts as needed, then repeat steps 2) through 4).
3P208365-6C
242
EDSG281001

6.
Refilling the refrigerant.
Filling a cylinder with an
Filling other cylinders
Check the type of refrigerant to be used on the machine

attached siphon
Turn the cylinder
Stand the cylinder upright when filling.
nameplate.
upside-down when
There is a siphon pipe inside,
filling.
Precautions when adding R410A
so the cylinder need not be
Fill from the liquid pipe in liquid form.
upside-down to fill with liquid.
It is a mixed refrigerant, so adding it in gas form may cause the
refrigerant composition to change, preventing normal operation.
1) Before filling, check whether the cylinder has a siphon attached or not. (It should have something like liquid
filling siphon attached displayed on it.)
Be sure to use the R410A tools to ensure pressure and to prevent foreign objects entering.
7.
Refrigerant piping work.
7-1 Cautions on pipe handling.

1) Protect the open end of the pipe against dust and moisture.
2) All pipe bends should be as gentle as possible. Use a pipe bender for bending.
7-2
Wall
Be sure to
place a cap.
Rain
Selection of copper and heat insulation materials.
If no flare cap is
available, cover the
flare mouth with
tape to keep dirt or
water out.
When using commercial copper pipes and fittings, observe the following:
1) Insulation material: Polyethylene foam
Heat transfer rate: 0.041 to 0.052W/mK (0.035 to 0.045kcal/(mh C))
Refrigerant gas pipes surface temperature reaches 110C max.
Choose heat insulation materials that will withstand this temperature.
2) Be sure to insulate both the gas and liquid piping and to provide insulation dimensions as below.
Gas side
Liquid side
Gas pipe
thermal insulation
Liquid pipe
thermal insulation
O.D. 9.5mm
O.D. 6.4mm
I.D. 12-15mm
I.D. 8-10mm
Minimum bend radius
Inter-unit wiring
Gas pipe
Liquid pipe
Thickness 10mm Min.
30mm or more
Thickness 0.8mm (C1220T-O)
3) Use separate thermal insulation pipes for gas and liquid refrigerant pipes.
Gas pipe
insulation
Liquid pipe
insulation
Finishing tape
Drain hose
Pump Down Operation

In order to protect the environment, be sure to pump down when relocating or disposing of the unit.
1)
2)
3)
4)
Remove the valve cap from liquid stop valve and gas stop valve.
Carry out forced cooling operation.
After five to ten minutes, close the liquid stop valve with a hexagonal wrench.
After two to three minutes, close the gas stop valve and stop forced cooling operation.
Liquid stop
valve
Hexagonal
wrench
Close
Gas stop
valve
Valve cap
How to force cooling operation mode
Using the indoor unit operation/stop button

Press the indoor unit operation/stop button for at least five seconds. (Operation will start.)
Forced cooling operation will stop automatically after around 15 minutes.
To force a test run to stop, press the indoor unit operation/stop button.
n Using the main units remote controller
1) Press the operation/stop button. (Operation will start.)
2) Press the temperature
button and the operation select button at the same time.
3) Press the operation select button twice. ( will be displayed and the unit will enter test run mode.)
4) Press the operation select button to return the operation mode to cooling.
Test run mode will stop automatically after around 30 minutes. To force a test run to stop, press the operation/stop button.
CAUTION
1) When pressing the switch, do not touch the terminal block. It has a high voltage, so doing so may cause electric shock.
2) After closing the liquid stop valve, close the gas stop valve within three minutes, then stop the forced operation.
3P208365-6C
243
EDSG281001
Wiring
WARNING
1) Do not use tapped wires, stranded wires, extensioncords, or starburst connections, as they may cause
overheating, electrical shock, or fire.
2) Do not use locally purchased electrical parts inside the product. (Do not branch the power for the drain
pump, etc., from the terminal block.) Doing so may cause electric shock or fire.
3) Be sure to install an earth leakage breaker. (One that can handle higher harmonics.)
(This unit uses an inverter, which means that it must be used an earth leakage breaker capable
handling harmonics in order to prevent malfunctioning of the earth leakage breaker itself.)
4) Use an all-pole disconnection type breaker with at least 3mm between the contact point gaps.
Do not turn ON the safety breaker until all work is completed.
Firmly fix the wires with
1) Strip the insulation from the wire (20mm).
the terminal screws.
2) Connect the connection wires between the
indoor and outdoor units so that the terminal
numbers match. Tighten the terminal screws
securely. We recommend a flathead
screwdriver be used to tighten the screws.
Outdoor unit
1 23
When wire length exceeds 10m,

use 2.0mm diameter wires.
Indoor
unit
Use 2.0mm diameter wires.
1
2
3
Safety
breaker
1
1
LN
Earth leakage
circuit breaker
H05VV
Power supply
50Hz 220V-240V
60Hz 220V-230V
Safety breaker
RX(K)S
10A
RYN
15A
RXG
Earth
Power supply
terminal block
Shape wires so
that the service
lid and stop
valve cover fit
securely.
Use the specified wire type and

connect it securely.
Firmly secure wire retainer so

wire terminations will not receive
external stress.
Observe the notes mentioned below when wiring to the power

supply terminal board.
Round crimp-style
Precautions to be taken for power supply wiring.
Use a round crimp-style terminal for connection to the power terminal
supply terminal board. In case it cannot be used due to
unavoidable reasons, be sure to observe the following instruction.
Stranded Wire
CAUTION
When connecting the connection wires to the terminal board using a single core wire, be sure to perform curling.
Problems with the work may cause heat and fires.
Strip wire end

to this point.
Good
Excessive strip length

may cause electrical
shock or leakage.
Wrong
Stripping wire at terminal block
3) Pull the wire and make sure that it does not disconnect. Then fix the wire in place with a wire stop.
3P208365-6C
244
EDSG281001
Test Run and Final Check

1.
Trial operation and testing.

1-1 Measure the supply voltage and make sure that it falls in the specified range.
1-2 Trial operation should be carried out in eitr cooling or heating mode.
For heat pump

In cooling mode, select the lowest programmable temperature; in heating mode, select the highest
programmable temperature.
1) Trial operation may be disabled in either mode depending on the room temperature.
2) After trial operation is complete, set the temperature to a normal level (26C to 28C in cooling mode,
20C to 24C in heating mode).
3) For protection, the unit disables restart operation for 3 minutes after it is turned off.
For cooling only
Select the lowest programmable temperature.

1) Trial operation in cooling mode may be disabled depending on the room temperature.
2) After trial operation is complete, set the temperature to a normal level (26C to 28C).
1-3 Carry out the test operation in accordance with the operation manual to ensure that all functions and
parts, such as louver movement, are working properly.
The air conditioner requires a small amount of power in its standby mode. If the system is not to be used for
some time after installation, shut off the circuit breaker to eliminate unnecessary power consumption.
If the circuit breaker trips to shut off the power to the air conditioner, the system will restore the original
operation mode when the circuit breaker is opened again.
2.
Test items.
Test items
Symptom
(diagnostic display on RC)
Indoor and outdoor units are installed properly on

solid bases.
Fall, vibration, noise
No refrigerant gas leaks.
Incomplete cooling/heating function
Refrigerant gas and liquid pipes and indoor drain

hose extension are thermally insulated.
Water leakage
Draining line is properly installed.
Water leakage
System is properly earthed.
Electrical leakage
The specified wires are used for interconnecting

wire connections.
Inoperative or burn damage
Indoor or outdoor units air intake or exhaust has

clear path of air.
Stop valves are opened.
Indoor unit properly receives remote controller

commands.
Inoperative
Check
3P208365-6C
245
EDSG281001
3.2
RXS50FAVMA / RXS60FVMA / RKS50AVMG / RKS60AVMG
3.2.1
Installation
3P192027-7D M06B260C

Safety Precautions
WARNING
Failure to follow any of WARNING is likely to result in such grave consequences as death or serious injury.
CAUTION

Never attempt.
WARNING
For wiring, use a cable length enough to cover the entire distance with no connection. Do not use an extension cord.
Do not put other loads on the power supply, use a dedicated power circuit. (Failure to do so may cause abnormal heat, electric shock or fire.)
Use the specified types of wires for electrical connections between the indoor and outdoor units. When installing
wiring for the outdoor unit, after cutting the wires for each connection point, a length of 3mm or longer is required.
After connecting interconnecting and supply wiring be sure to shape the cables so that they do not put undue force on the electrical covers or panels.
Install covers over the wires. Incomplete cover installation may cause terminal overheating, electrical shock, or fire. When electrical appliances are connected in Y formation,
if the power supply is damaged in some way, to avoid danger the power supply must be replaced by the maker or by someone with an equivalent certification.
During installation, attach the refrigerant piping securely before running the compressor. If the compressor is not attached and the stop valve is
open during pump-down, air will be sucked in when the compressor is run, causing abnormal pressure in the freezer cycle which will lead to breakage and even injury.
Incomplete earth may cause electrical shock, or fire. A high surge current from lightning or other sources may cause damage to the air conditioner.
CAUTION
Tighten the flare nut according to the specified method such as with a torque wrench. If the flare nut is tightened too hard, the flare nut may crack after a long time and cause refrigerant leakage.
3P192027-7D
246
EDSG281001
Accessories
(B) Drain plug (Heat pump-Models)
2
1
There is on the bottom packing case.

not be amplified.
air conditioner.
from moisture.
NOTE
CAUTION
temperature, be sure to follow the instructions described below.
2) Never install the outdoor unit at a site where the suction side
may be exposed directly to wind.

Install the unit high enough off the

ground to prevent burying in snow.
20
It is best to screw in the foundation bolts until their length are 20mm from the foundation surface.
3P192027-7D
247
EDSG281001

Wrap the insulation
pipe with the finishing
tape from bottom to top.
Model
50/60 class
30m
Min. allowable length
1.5m
20m
pipe exceeding 10m
in length.
20g/m
Gas pipe
O.D. 12.7mm
Liquid pipe
O.D. 6.4mm
CAUTION
Set the piping length
from 1.5m to 30m.
Service lid
Stop valve cover
250m
m from
In sites with poor drainage,

use block bases for outdoor
unit.
Adjust foot height until the
unit is leveled. Otherwise,
water leakage or pooling of
water may occur.
0m
-h
olt
tb )
oo tres
F
( en
c
33
580m
m
(Foot
bolt-ho
120mm
le cen
tres)
(From
units
side)
ole
wall

Where there is a danger of

the unit falling, use foot bolts,
or wires.
More than 100

More than 350
More than 350
More
than 100
1200
or less
More than 50
More than 50
Top view
Side view

More than
100
More than 50
More
than 350
Top view
Unit: mm
C : 3P192027-7D
248
EDSG281001

1.

2.
Drain work.
1) Use drain plug for drainage.
2) If the drain port is covered by a mounting base or floor surface, place
additional foot bases of at least 30mm in height under the outdoor units feet.
3) In cold areas, do not use a drain hose with the outdoor unit.
(Otherwise, drain water may freeze, impairing heating performance.)
3.
Drain-water hole
Bottom frame
Drain plug
Hose (available commercially,
inner dia. 16mm)

2) Remove burrs with the cut surface
facing downward so that the chips do
not enter the pipe.
4) Flare the pipe.
(Cut exactly at
right angles.)
Remove burrs
Flaring
A
Die
Clutch-type
0-0.5mm
1.0-1.5mm
1.5-2.0mm
Check
Flares inner
surface must
be flaw-free.
The pipe end must

be evenly flared in
a perfect circle.
Make sure that the
WARNING
4.
Refrigerant piping.
CAUTION
2) To prevent gas leakage, apply refrigeration oil only to the inner surface of the flare. (Use refrigeration oil
for R410A.)
Align the centres of both flares and tighten the flare nuts 3 or 4 turns by hand. Then tighten them fully
with the torque wrenches.
[Apply oil]

[Tighten]
Apply refrigeration oil to the

inner surface of the flare.
Torque wrench
Flare nut
Spanner
Piping union
Flare nut

Gas side
1/2 inch
Liquid side
5/8 inch
49.5-60.3N m 61.8-75.4N m
(505-615kgf cm) (630-770kgf cm)
1/4 inch
14.2-17.2N m
(144-175kgf cm)
Gas side
1/2 inch
Liquid side
5/8 inch
48.1-59.7N m 44.1-53.9N m
(490-610kgf cm) (450-550kgf cm)
Service port cap tightening torque
1/4 inch
21.6-27.4N m
(220-280kgf cm)
10.8-14.7N m
(110-150kgf cm)
3P192027-7D
249
EDSG281001

5.
WARNING
1)
2)
3)
4)
Do not mix any substance other than the specified refrigerant (R410A) into the refrigeration cycle.
When refrigerant gas leaks occur, ventilate the room as soon and as much as possible.
R410A, as well as other refrigerants, should always be recovered and never be released directly into the environment.
Use a vacuum pump for R410A exclusively. Using the same vacuum pump for different refrigerants
may damage the vacuum pump or the unit.
If using additional refrigerant, perform air purging from the refrigerant

pipes and indoor unit using a vacuum pump, then charge additional
refrigerant.
All refrigerant pipe joints should be tightened with a torque wrench at
the specified tightening torque.
Compound
Pressure meter
pressure gauge
Gauge
manifold
High-pressure
valve Valve caps
Low-pressure
valve
Charging
hoses
Liquid
stop
valve
Gas
stop
Vacuum pump Service port valve
3) Do vacuum pumping and make sure that the compound pressure gauge reads 0.1MPa ( 76cmHg)*1.
5) Remove valve caps from liquid stop valve and gas stop valve.
8) Tighten valve caps and service port cap for the liquid and gas stop valves with a torque wrench at the specified torques.

Pipe length
Up to 15 metres
More than 15 metres
Run time
3P192027-7D
250
EDSG281001

6.

Check the type of refrigerant to be used on the machine nameplate.
1) Before filling, check whether the cylinder has a siphon attached or not.
(It should have something like liquid filling siphon attached displayed on it.)

attached siphon
Stand the cylinder upright

when filling.
Turn the cylinder

upside-down when filling.
There is a siphon pipe

inside, so the cylinder
need not be upsidedown to fill with liquid.
7.

7-2
Wall
Be sure to
place a cap.

Rain
Selection of copper and heat insulation materials.
If no flare cap is
flare mouth with
water out.
Heat transfer rate: 0.041 to 0.052W/mK (0.035 to 0.045kcal/mhC)
Gas side
Gas pipe thermal insulation
Liquid side
50/60 class
O.D. 12.7mm
O.D. 6.4mm
50/60 class
I.D. 14-16mm
I.D. 8-10mm
Gas pipe
Liquid pipe
Thickness 10mm Min.
Minimum bend radius

40mm or more 50mm or more
Thickness
Thickness
1.0mm
0.8mm
(C1220T-O) (C1220T-O)
Inter-unit wiring
Liquid pipe
thermal insulation
30mm or more
Gas pipe
insulation
Thickness 0.8mm
(C1220T-O)
Liquid pipe
insulation
Finishing tape
Drain hose
Pump Down Operation

1) Remove the valve caps from liquid stop valve and gas stop valve.
Hexagonal wrench
2) Carry out forced cooling operation.

3) After five to ten minutes, close the liquid stop valve with a
hexagonal wrench.
4) After two to three minutes, close the gas stop valve and
stop forced cooling operation.
Close
Liquid stop valve
Forced cooling operation

1) Press the Forced Operation switch (SW1) to begin forced cooling.
Press the Forced Operation switch (SW1) again to stop forced cooling.
Gas stop valve
Valve cap
Service port
S102
S2
ON
A B CD
LED-A
SW4
Forced
operation
switch
SW1
C : 3P192027-7D
251
EDSG281001
Wiring
WARNING
3) Be sure to install an earth leak detector. (One that can handle higher harmonics.)
(This unit uses an inverter, which means that it must be used an earth leak detector capable handling
harmonics in order to prevent malfunctioning of the earth leak detector itself.)
fix the wires with
Do not turn ON the safety breaker until all work is completed. Firmly
2) Connect the connection wires between
the indoor and outdoor units so that the

terminal numbers match. Tighten the
terminal screws securely. We recommend
a flathead screwdriver be used to tighten
the screws.
Indoor
unit
Outdoor unit
1 23
LN
1
2
3
Safety
breaker
20A
Firmly fix the wires with 60245 IEC57
(H05RN)
Earth leakage
circuit breaker
Power supply
FVM
50Hz 220V-240V :
F(A)VMA
60Hz 220V-230V
FBVMA
50Hz 220V-240V : FV1A
Earth
Power supply terminal block
Use the specified wire type

and connect it securely.
Firmly secure wire retainer

so wire terminations will not
receive external stress.
Shape wires so that the

service lid and stop
valve cover fit securely.
Observe the notes mentioned below when wiring to the power supply terminal board.
Round
Use a round crimp-style terminal for connection to the power
crimp-style
supply terminal board. In case it cannot be used due to
terminal
unavoidable reasons, be sure to observe the following instruction.
Place the round crimp-style terminals on the wires up to the
covered part and secure in place.
Ground terminal installation
Use the following method when installing the round
crimp-style terminal.
Screw
Screw
Round crimpstyle terminal
Flat washer
Flat washer
Good
Electric
Wire
Wrong
CAUTION
When connecting the connection wires to the terminal
board using a single core wire, be sure to perform curling.
3P192027-7D
252
EDSG281001

1.
Trial operation and testing.

1-2 Trial operation should be carried out in either cooling or heating mode.
For Heat pump

2) After trial operation is complete, set the temperature to a normal level (26C to 28C in cooling mode,
20C to 24C in heating mode).
For Cooling only

1-3 Carry out the test operation in accordance with the operation manual to ensure that all functions and
parts, are working properly.
If the circuit breaker trips to shut off the power to the air conditioner, the system will restore the
original operation mode when the circuit breaker is opened again.
2.
Test Items.
Test Items
Symptom

solid bases.

Water leakage
Water leakage
Electrical leakage
The specified wires are used for inter-unit wiring

connections.

clear path of air.

commands.
Inoperative
Check
3P192027-7D
253
3.3
RXS71FVMA
3.3.1
Installation
EDSG281001
3P182980-1E M06B009C

Safety Precautions
WARNING
Failure to follow any of WARNING is likely to result in such grave consequences as death or serious injury.
CAUTION

Never attempt.
WARNING
For wiring, use a cable length enough to cover the entire distance with no connection. Do not use an extension cord.
Do not put other loads on the power supply, use a dedicated power circuit. (Failure to do so may cause abnormal heat, electric shock or fire.)
Use the specified types of wires for electrical connections between the indoor and outdoor units.
After connecting interconnecting and supply wiring be sure to shape the cables so that they do not put undue force on the
electrical covers or panels. Install covers over the wires. Incomplete cover installation may cause terminal overheating, electrical shock, or fire.
During installation, attach the refrigerant piping securely before running the compressor. If the compressor is not attached and the stop valve is
open during pump-down, air will be sucked in when the compressor is run, causing abnormal pressure in the freezer cycle which will lead to breakage and even injury.
Incomplete earth may cause electrical shock, or fire. A high surge current from lightning or other sources may cause damage to the air conditioner.
CAUTION
Note for installing the outdoor unit. (For heat pump model only.) In cold area where the outside air temperature keep below or around freezing-point
for a few days, the outdoor units drain may freeze. If so, it is recommended to install an electric heater in order to protect drain from freezing.
Tighten the flare nut according to the specified method such as with a torque wrench. If the flare nut is tightened too hard, the flare nut may crack after a long time and cause refrigerant leakage.
3P182980-1E
254
EDSG281001
Accessories
(B) Drain socket assy
(HEAT PUMP ONLY)

not be amplified.
air conditioner.
from moisture.
NOTE
CAUTION
temperature, be sure to follow the instructions described below.
2) Never install the outdoor unit at a site where the suction side
may be exposed directly to wind.

Install the unit high enough off the

ground to prevent burying in snow.
20
It is best to screw in the foundation bolts until their length are 20mm from the foundation surface.
3P182980-1E
255
EDSG281001

Model
71/80/90 class
30m
Min. allowable length
1.5m
20m
pipe exceeding 10m
in length.
20g/m
Gas pipe
O.D. 15.9mm
Liquid pipe
O.D. 6.4mm
Wrap the insulation

pipe with the finishing
tape from bottom to top.
CAUTION
* Be sure to add the proper amount of additional refrigerant.

Failure to do so may result in reduced performance.
Allow 30cm of work

space below the
ceiling surface.
Set the piping length

from 1.5m to 30m.

25cm from wa
ll
If there is the danger of the unit falling

or overturning, fix the unit with
foundation bolts, or with wire or other
means.
If the location does not have good
drainage, place the unit on a level
mounting base (or a plastic pedestal).
Install the outdoor unit in a level
position. Failure to do so may result in
water leakage or accumulation.
Right side plate
cm
le
ho
ltbo s)
t
oo re
(F ent
c
35
(Foot
bo
lt-hole
62cm
centre
s
Also insulate the connection on the outdoor unit.

Clamping material
Level mounting base

(available separately)
Insulation tube
Tape
Service lid
Use tape or insulating material on all connections

to prevent air from getting in between the copper
piping and the insulation tube.
Be sure to do this if the outdoor unit is installed
above.

More than 100
More than 350

More than 350
1200
or less
More than 50
More than 50
Side view
More than 100
More
than 100
Top view
More than 50
More than 350

Top view
Unit: mm
3P182980-1E
256
EDSG281001

1.

2.
Drain work.
Use drain plug for drainage.
If the drain port is covered by a mounting base or floor surface, place additional foot bases of at least
100mm in height under the outdoor units feet.
In cold areas, do not use a drain hose with the outdoor unit. (Otherwise, drain water may freeze,
impairing heating performance.)
1) Insert drain receiver (C) onto drain socket (A) and drain cap (B) beyond
4 projections around drain socket and drain cap.
2) Insert drain socket and drain caps into their matching drain hole ; Drain
socket (A) into drain hole I and drain caps (B) into drain hole II and III.
After insertion, turn them about 40 clockwise.
II
(A) Drain socket

Projections
(B) Drain cap

Projections
(Be sure not to insert them into wrong drain

holes, or there causes water leakage.)
I
III
(View from bottom)

(C) Drain receiver
NOTE
Check that the drain receiver (C) is correctly engaged with the projections of the drain socket (A) and
drain cap (B). Otherwise, water leakage may result.
Projections
(4 points)
Projections
(4 points)
3) Connect vinyl hose on the market (internal diameter of 25mm) to drain socket (A).
(If the hose is too long and hangs down, fix it carefully to prevent the kinks.)
4) Make sure that there is no water leakage from portion I, II, or III.
NOTE
If the drain holes of the outdoor unit are covered with the mounting bracket or the floor, raise the unit to
provide the space of more than 100mm under the leg of the outdoor unit.
3.

2) Remove burrs with the cut surface facing
downward so that the chips do not enter the pipe.
4) Flare the pipe.
Flaring
A
Die
Clutch-type
0-0.5mm
1.0-1.5mm
1.5-2.0mm
Check
(Cut exactly at
right angles.)
Flares inner
surface must
be flaw-free.
Remove burrs
The pipe end must

be evenly flared in
a perfect circle.
Make sure that the
WARNING
3P182980-1E
257
EDSG281001

4.
Refrigerant piping.
CAUTION
2) To prevent gas leakage, apply refrigeration oil only to the inner surface of the flare. (Use refrigeration oil for R410A.)
Align the centres of both flares and tighten the flare nuts 3 or 4 turns by hand. Then tighten them fully with the torque wrenches.
[Apply oil]
[Tighten]
Apply refrigeration
oil to the inner
surface of the flare.
Torque wrench
Flare nut
Spanner

5.
Piping
union

Gas side
Liquid side
5/8 inch
1/4 inch
61.8-75.4N m
14.2-17.2N m
(630-770kgf cm) (144-175kgf cm)

Gas side
Liquid side
5/8 inch
1/4 inch
48.1-59.7N m
21.6-27.4N m
(490-610kgf cm) (220-280kgf cm)
Service port cap tightening torque
10.8-14.7N m (110-150kgf cm)
Flare nut

WARNING
1)
2)
3)
4)
Do not mix any substance other than the specified refrigerant (R410A) into the refrigeration cycle.
To prevent air pollution, a vacuum pump should be used for air purging wherever possible.
Refrigerant gas leaks during air purging, ventilate the room as soon as possible.
Use a vacuum pump for R410A exclusively. Using the same vacuum pump for different refrigerants may
damage the vacuum pump or the unit.
If using additional refrigerant, perform air purging from the refrigerant pipes and indoor unit using a
vacuum pump, then charge additional refrigerant.
All refrigerant pipe joints should be tightened with a torque wrench at the specified tightening torque.
3) Do vacuum pumping and make sure that the compound pressure gauge reads 0.1MPa (76cmHg)*1.
5) Remove covers from liquid stop valve and gas stop valve.
8) Tighten valve caps and service port caps for the liquid and gas stop valves with a torque wrench at the specified torques.

Pipe length
Run time
Up to 15 metres
More than 15 metres

3P182980-1E
258
EDSG281001

6.

Check the type of refrigerant to be used on the machine nameplate.
1) Before filling, check whether the cylinder has a siphon attached or not.
(It should have something like liquid filling siphon attached displayed on it.)
7.

attached siphon
Stand the cylinder upright

when filling.
Turn the cylinder

upside-down when filling.
There is a siphon pipe

inside, so the cylinder
need not be upsidedown to fill with liquid.
Wall
Be sure to
place a cap.
Rain
If no flare cap is
flare mouth with
water out.
7-2 Selection of copper and heat insulation materials.

Heat transfer rate: 0.041 to 0.052W/mK (0.035 to 0.045kcal/mhC)
Gas side
Liquid side
Gas pipe thermal insulation
Liquid pipe thermal insulation
O.D. 15.9mm
O.D. 6.4mm
I.D. 16-20mm
I.D. 8-10mm
Minimum bend radius
Inter-unit wiring
Gas pipe
Liquid pipe
Thickness 10mm Min.
50mm or more
30mm or more
Thickness 1.0mm
(C1220T-O)
Thickness 0.8mm
(C1220T-O)
Gas pipe
insulation
Liquid pipe
insulation
Finishing tape
Drain hose
Pump Down Operation

1) Remove the valve cap from liquid stop valve and gas stop valve.
2) Carry out forced cooling operation.
3) After five to ten minutes, close the liquid stop valve with a
hexagonal wrench.
4) After two to three minutes, close the gas stop valve and stop
forced cooling operation.
Service port
Hexagonal
wrench
Close
Gas stop valve

Liquid stop valve
valve cap
Forced cooling operation
1) Press the Forced Operation switch (SW1) to begin forced cooling. Press the Forced Operation switch (SW1) again
to stop forced cooling.
S102
S2
ON
A B CD
LED-A
SW4
SW1
Forced
operation
switch
3P182980-1E
259
EDSG281001
Wiring
WARNING
3) Be sure to install an earth leak detector. (One that can handle higher harmonics.)
(This unit uses an inverter, which means that it must be used an earth leak detector capable handling
harmonics in order to prevent malfunctioning of the earth leak detector itself.)
Do not turn ON the safety breaker until all
work is completed.
2) Connect the connection wires between
the indoor and outdoor units so that the
terminal numbers match. Tighten the
terminal screws securely. We recommend
a flathead screwdriver be used to tighten
the screws.

Outdoor unit
1 23

Indoor
unit
LN
1
2
3
Safety
breaker
20A
Earth leakage
circuit breaker
H05VV
Power supply
50Hz 220-240V
: FVMA
60Hz 220-230V
50Hz 220-240V : FV1A
Earth
Power supply terminal block
Use the specified wire type

and connect it securely.
Firmly secure wire retainer

so wire terminations will not
receive external stress.
Shape wires so that the

service lid and stop
valve cover fit securely.
Observe the notes mentioned below when wiring to the power supply terminal board.
Use a round crimp-style terminal for connection to the power supply terminal board.
In case it cannot be used due to unavoidable reasons, be sure to observe the
following instruction.
Place the round crimp-style terminals on the wires up to the covered part and secure in place.
Ground terminal installation
Use the following method when installing
the round crimp-style terminal.
Round crimp-style
terminal
Electric Wire
Screw
Screw
Flat washer
Flat washer
Good
Wrong
CAUTION
When connecting the connection wires to the terminal board using a single
core wire, be sure to perform curling.
3P182980-1E
260
EDSG281001

1.
Trial Operation and Testing.

1-2 Trial operation should be carried out in cooling or heating mode.
For Heat pump

2) After trial operation is complete, set the temperature to a normal level (26C to 28C in cooling mode, 20C
to 24C in heating mode).
For Cooling only

1-3 Carry out the test operation in accordance with the Operation Manual to ensure that all functions
and parts, such as louver movement, are working properly.
If the circuit breaker trips to shut off the power to the air conditioner, the system will restore the
original operation mode when the circuit breaker is opened again.
2.
Test Items.
Test items
Symptom

solid bases.

Water leakage
Water leakage
Electrical leakage
The specified wires are used for interconnecting

wire connections.

clear path of air.

commands.
Inoperative
Check
3P182980-1E
261
EDSG281001
3.4

3.4.1
Installation
1PN11569A
262
EDSG281001
1PN11569A
263
EDSG281001
1PN11569A
264
EDSG281001
1PN11569A
265
EDSG281001
1PN11569A
266
EDSG281001
1PN11569A
267
EDSG281001
1PN11569A
268
EDSG281001
1PN11569A
269
EDSG281001
1PN11571A
270
EDSG281001
1PN11571A
271
EDSG281001
1PN11571A
272
EDSG281001
1PN11571A
273
EDSG281001
1PN11571A
274
EDSG281001
1PN11571A
275
EDSG281001
1PN11571A
276
EDSG281001
1PN11571A
277
278
EDSG281001
EDSG281001
Part 3
Detail Information
of Options
3
1. Accessories.........................................................................................281
1.1 Indoor Unit............................................................................................281
1.2 Outdoor Unit .........................................................................................284
2. Remote Controller ...............................................................................285

2.1 BRC1C61 Wired Remote Controller ................................................285
2.2 BRC1D61 Wired Remote Controller with
Weekly Schedule Timer .......................................................................289
2.3 BRC1E61 Navigation Remote Controller (Wired Type)...................297
2.4 Wireless Remote Controller .................................................................336
3. FCQ.....................................................................................................338
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
3.16
BYCP125K-W1 Decoration Panel ...................................................338

KDBH55K160F Sealing Member of Air Discharge Outlet................343
KDBP55H160FA Panel Spacer .......................................................347
KDDP55K160(K) Fresh Air Intake Kit (Chamber Type)...................350
KDDP55X160 Fresh Air Intake Kit (Direct Installation Type)...........355
High Efficiency Filter (Including Chamber) ......................................358
Replacement High Efficiency Filter..................................................361
KDDFP55H160 High Efficiency Filter Chamber ..............................362
KAFP551K160 Replacement Long-life Filter ...................................365
KAFP55H160 Ultra Long-life Filter Unit (Including Chamber) .........366
KAFP55H160H Replacement Ultra Long-life Filter..........................369
KKSJ55K160 Chamber Connection Kit ...........................................370
KDJP55H80 / KDJP55H160 Branch Duct Chamber........................371
KDTP55K80 / KDTP55K160 Insulation Kit for High Humidity..........374
KRP1H98 Installation Box for Adaptor PCB ....................................376
4. FFQ .....................................................................................................385
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
BYFQ60B8W1 Decoration Panel.....................................................385

KDBH44BA60 Sealing Member of Air Discharge Outlet..................388
KDBQ44BA60A Panel Spacer.........................................................390
KAFQ441BA60 Replacement Long-life Filter ..................................393
KDDQ44XA60 Fresh Air Intake Kit (Direct Installation Type) ..........394
DTA112BA51 Interface Adaptor for SkyAir Series ..........................396
KRP1BA101 Installation Box for Adaptor PCB ................................398
5. FHQ.....................................................................................................407
5.1 KDU50N60VE / KDU50N125VE Drain-up Kit..................................407
Detail Information of Options
279
EDSG281001
5.2 KAF501DA56 / KAF501DA80 / KAF501DA112 / KAF501DA160

Replacement Long-life Filter............................................................412
5.3 KHFP5MA35 / KHFP5MA63 / KHFP5MA160
L-type Piping Kit (for Upward Direction) ..........................................413
5.4 KRP1CA93 Installation Box for Adaptor PCB..................................414
5.7 KJB212AA / KJB311AA Electrical Box with Earth Terminal ............422
6. FBQ.....................................................................................................424
6.1 KTBJ25K56W / KTBJ25K80W (T) (F) / KTBJ25K160W(T) (F)
Service Access Panel ......................................................................424
6.2 KDAJ25K56A / KDAJ25K71A / KDAJ25K140A
Air Discharge Adaptor......................................................................427
6.3 KAF372AA80 / KAF372AA160 / KAF373AA80 / KAF373AA160
High Efficiency Filter ........................................................................429
6.4 KDDF37AA80 / KDDF37AA160 High Efficiency Filter Chamber .....430
6.5 KAF371AA80 / KAF371AA160 Long Life Filter ...............................433
6.6 KAF375AA80 / KAF375AA160 Long Life Filter Chamber Kit ..........434
6.7 KRP4A96 Mounting Plate for Adaptor PCB.....................................437
7. Outdoor Unit........................................................................................446
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
280

KKP937A4 Drain Plug .....................................................................448
KKP945A4 Drain Plug .....................................................................449
KKPJ5F180 Central Drain Plug .......................................................450
K-KYZP15C Wire Fixture for Preventing Overturning......................451
KPT-60B160 Fixture for Preventing Overturning .............................453
KRP58M51 Demand Adaptor ..........................................................455
EDSG281001
Accessories
1. Accessories
1.1
Indoor Unit
1.1.1
FCQ
Optional
accessories
Name of option
Remark
Decoration panel
Sealing member of air discharge outlet
Panel spacer
Without T-joint
pipe and fan
Chamber type
With T-joint pipe,
without fan
Direct installation type
Chamber connection kit *2

Insulation kit for high humidity
High-efficiency filter
Replacement high-efficiency
Filter
(Colorimetric method 65%)

High-efficiency filter chamber

Replacement long-life filter
Ultra long-life filter
Replacement ultra long-life filter
Branch duct chamber
Wired type *1
Remote controller
Wireless type
Wired remote controller with weekly schedule timer *1
Navigation remote controller Wired type *1
Central remote controller *3
Unified ON/OFF controller *3
Schedule timer *3
intelligent Touch Controller *3
Adaptor for wiring *4
Group control adaptor *4
Installation box for adaptor PCB
Remote sensor (for indoor temperature)
Kit name
FCQ100 FCQ125 FCQ140
FCQ71KVEA
KVEA
KVEA
KVEA
BYCP125K-W1
KDBH55K160F
KDBP55H160FA
KDDP55K160
KDDP55K160K
KDDP55X160
KKSJ55K160
KDTP55K80
KDTP55K160
KAFP556H80
KAFP556H160
KAFP557H80
KAFP557H160
KAFP552H80
KAFP552H160
KAFP553H80
KAFP553H160
KDDFP55H160
KAFP551K160
KAFP55H160
KAFP55H160H
KDJP55H80
KDJP55H160
BRC1C61
BRC7F632F
BRC1D61
BRC1E61
DCS302CA61
DCS301BA61
DST301BA61
DCS601C51
KRP1C63
KRP4AA53
KRP1H98
KRCS01-4B
C : 3D058465A
Notes:
*1. Wiring for wired remote controller to be procured locally.

*2. Required for installing high-efficiency filter of ultra long-Llife filter.
*3. The indoor unit is equipped standardly with the Interface for SkyAir series and an option is unnecessary.
*4. Installation box for adaptor PCB (KRP1H98) is necessary.
281
Accessories
1.1.2
EDSG281001
FFQ
Optional
accessories
Name of option
Remark
Kit name
FFQ35BV1B FFQ50BV1B
BYFQ60B8W1
BRC1C61
BRC7E531W
BRC1D61
BRC1E61
KRP1BA57
KRP4AA53
KRCS01-1B
KRP1BA101
DCS302CA61
DCS301BA61
DST301BA61
DCS601C51
DTA112BA51
KAFQ441BA60
KDDQ44XA60
KDBH44BA60
KDBQ44BA60A
FFQ25BV1B
Decoration panel
Remote controller
Wired type *1
Wireless type

Navigation remote controller Wired type *1
Adaptor for wiring *2
Schedule timer *3
Interface adaptor for SkyAir series
Replacement long-life filter
Direct installation type
Sealing member of air discharge outlet
Panel spacer
FFQ60BV1B
C : 3D038936A
Notes:
1.1.3

*2. Installation box for adaptor PCB (KRP1BA101) is necessary.
*3. This optional accessory requires DTA112BA51.
FHQ
Optional
accessories
Kit name
Name of option
Long-life filter
Remark
Resin net
Drain-up kit
FHQ50
BVV1B
KAF501DA56
KHFP5
MA35
KAF501 KAF501
DA112 DA160
KDU50N125VE
BRC1C61
Wireless type
BRC7EA66
KHFP5MA160
BRC1D61
Wired type *1
BRC1E61
DCS302CA61
DCS301BA61
Schedule timer *2
DST301BA61
DCS601C51
Adaptor for wiring
KRP1BA54
KRP4AA52
DTA112BA51
282
KAF501DA80
Wired type *1
Notes:
FHQ71 FHQ100 FHQ125

BVV1B BVV1B BVV1B
KHFP5MA63

Navigation remote controller
FHQ60
BVV1B
KDU50N60VE
L-type piping kit (for upward direction)

Remote controller
FHQ35
BVV1B
KRP1CA93
KRCS01-1B
Electrical box with earth terminal (3 blocks)
KJB311AA
Electrical box with earth terminal (2 blocks)
KJB212AA
C : 3D038056A
C : 3D044485B

*3. Installation box for adaptor PCB (KRP1CA93) is necessary.
EDSG281001
1.1.4
Accessories
FBQ-B
Optional
accessories
Name of option
Remark
Service access panel
KTBJ25K56W
Air discharge adaptor

Remote controller
Kit name
FBQ50BV1A
KDAJ25K56A
FBQ60BV1A
KDAJ25K71A
Wired type *1
BRC1C61
Wireless type
BRC4C62
BRC1D61
BRC1E61
Wired type *1
FBQ71BV1A
KTBJ25K80W
Adaptor for wiring (interlock for fresh air intake fan)
KRP1BA54
Group control adaptor
KRP4AA51
DTA112BA51
DCS302CA61
DCS301BA61
Schedule timer *2
DST301BA61
DCS601C51
C : 4D053094A
Notes:
1.1.5

FBQ-D
Optional
accessories
Name of option
Remark
Kit name
FBQ71DV1
FBQ100DV1 FBQ125DV1 FBQ140DV1
65%
KAF372AA80
KAF372AA160
90%
KAF373AA80
KAF373AA160
Filter chamber
KDDF37AA80
KDDF37AA160
Long life replacement filter
KAF371AA80
KAF371AA160
Long life filter chamber kit
KAF375AA80
KAF375AA160
KTBJ25K80W
KTBJ25K160W
KTBJ25K80F
KTBJ25K160F
High efficiency filter
Service access panel

Remote controller
KTBJ25K160T
KDAJ25K71A
KDAJ25K140A
Wired type *2
BRC1C61
Wireless type
BRC4C62

KTBJ25K80T
Wired type *2
Adaptor for wiring
BRC1D61
BRC1E61
*KRP1C64
Wiring adaptor for electrical appendices (2)
*KRP4AA51
KRCS01-4B
Mounting plate for adaptor PCB **
KRP4A96 *5 *6
DTA112BA51
DCS302CA61
DCS301BA61
Schedule timer *3
DST301BA61
3D066072
3D066074
Notes:
*1. If installing a high efficiency filter on the unit, an assembly chamber for either bottom or rear suction is
required.
*4. Mounting plate ** is necessary for each adaptor marked*.
*5. Up to 2 adaptors can be fixed for each mounting plate.
*6. Only one mounting plate can be installed for each indoor unit.
283
Accessories
EDSG281001
1.2
Outdoor Unit
1.2.1
RXS
Optional
accessories
Name of option
Remark
Kit name
RXS50FAVMA
RXS60FVMA
Air direction adjustment grille

One set includes 5
pieces for 5 units
Drain plug
1.2.2
KKP937A4
KKP945A4
RKS
Optional
accessories
Name of option
Remark
Kit name
RKS25AVMG
Air direction adjustment grille
RKS35AVMG
RKS50AVMG
KPW937A4
One set includes 5

pieces for 5 units
Drain plug
1.2.3
RXS71FVMA
KPW945A4
RKS60AVMG
KPW945A4
KKP937A4
RZR
Optional
accessories
Kit name
Name of option
RZR71
KUV1
RZR100 RZR125 RZR140 RZR100 RZR125 RZR140

KUV1
KUV1
KUV1
HUY1
HUY1
HUY1
Central drain plug
KKPJ5F180
Wire fixture for preventing overturning
K-KYZP15C
Fixture for preventing overturning
KPT-60B160
Demand adaptor
KRP58M51
4D046721F
284
EDSG281001
Remote Controller
2. Remote Controller
2.1
BRC1C61 Wired Remote Controller
Names and functions of parts

5 12
3
7
hr
6
8
hr
NOT
AVAILABLE
TEST
L H
14
9
11
10
13
21
20
TEST
16
1
2
19
15
17
ON/OFF BUTTON
Press the button and the system will start.
Press the button again and the system will stop.
OPERATION LAMP (RED)
The lamp lights up during operation.
DISPLAY
(UNDER CENTRALIZED
CONTROL)
When this display shows, the system is UNDER
CENTRALIZED CONTROL.
DISPLAY

(VENTILATION/AIR CLEANING)
This display shows that the total heat exchange
and the air cleaning unit are in operation
(These are optional accessories).
DISPLAY
(OPERATION MODE)
This display shows the current OPERATION
MODE. For cooling only type,
(Auto)
and (Heating) are not installed.
DISPLAY
TEST (INSPECTION/TEST
OPERATION)
When the INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION
BUTTON is pressed, the display shows the
system mode is in.
hr
DISPLAY
(PROGRAMMED TIME)
18
22
12
DISPLAY
(DEFROST)
NON-FUNCTIONING DISPLAY
If that particular function is not available, pressing
the button may display the words NOT
AVAILABLE for a few seconds.
When running multiple units simultaneously the
13 NOT AVAILABLE message will only be appear
if none of the indoor units is equipped with the
function. If even one unit is equipped with the
function, the display will not appear.
14
15
TIMER MODE START/STOP BUTTON

TIMER ON/OFF BUTTON
INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION BUTTON

16 This button is used only by qualified service
persons for maintenance purposes.
PROGRAMMING TIME BUTTON
17 Use this button for programming START and/or
STOP time.
TEMPERATURE SETTING BUTTON
18
Use this button for SETTING TEMPERATURE.
FILTER SIGN RESET BUTTON
19
hr
This display shows the PROGRAMMED TIME

of the system start or stop.
DISPLAY
(SET TEMPERATURE)
This display shows the set temperature.
DISPLAY
(FAN SPEED)
This display shows the set fan speed.
10
11
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
(AIR FLOW FLAP)

(TIME TO CLEAN AIR FILTER)
FAN SPEED CONTROL BUTTON

20 Press this button to select the fan speed,
HIGH or LOW, of your choice.
OPERATION MODE SELECTOR BUTTON
21
Press this button to select OPERATION MODE.
AIR FLOW DIRECTION ADJUST BUTTON
22
NOTE
For the sake of explanation, all indications are shown
on the display in the above figure contrary to actual
running situations.
3PA59583-16Z
285
Remote Controller
EDSG281001
Installation
286
EDSG281001
Remote Controller
287
Remote Controller
Notes:
EDSG281001
1. Setting is carried out in the group mode, however, set the mode number inside the ( ) for individual setting of
the each indoor unit or confirmation after setting.
2. The SECOND CODE number is set to 01 when shipped from the factory.
However for the following cases it is set to 02.
Air flow direction range setting.
3. Do not make any settings not given in the table above.
4. Not displayed if the indoor unit is not equipped with that function.
5. When returning to the normal mode, 88 may be displayed in the LCD in order for the remote controller to
initialize itself.
2P068938
288
EDSG281001
2.2
Remote Controller
BRC1D61 Wired Remote Controller with Weekly Schedule Timer

Adds new, advanced functions to those of the wired remote controller.
Includes ventilation mode and airflow rate switching, the main
functions of HRV series.

24-hour clock function (1-hour backup for power failures).
Programming function for each day of week.
Scheduling possible of start/stop and temperature limit
(5 settings/day).
Programming can be enabled or disabled.
Copy function for programmed schedules.
Features and functions

The BRC1D61 is a state of the art remote controller that offers full control over your installation.
1
BASIC REMOTE CONTROLLER
The basic remote controller functions are:
ON/OFF,
operation mode change-over,
temperature, adjustment,
air volume adjustment
air flow direction adjustment.

2
CLOCK FUNCTION
The clock functions are:
24 hours real time clock,
day of the veek indicator.

3
SCHEDULE TIMER FUNCTION
The schedule timer functions are:
a maximum of 5 actions can be programmed for each day of the week (totalling 35 actions),
schedule timer can be enabled/disabled at any time,
linked to a set temperature or a LIMIT operation or an OFF operation,
"last command" overrules previous command until next scheduled command.

4
LIMIT OPERATION
Limit operation provides thermostat control within the range of the set minimum and maximum temperature.
The minimum temperature setting will trigger heating, the maximum temperature setting will trigger cooling.
5
LEAVE HOME
The leave home function prevents the room temperature from dropping when the occupants are out for a longer
period. If the room temperature drops below 10C, heating is started automatically. As soon as 15C is reached, the
controller returns to its original status.
6
BUTTON PERMISSION LEVEL
Three hierarchical permission levels can be set to limit the user action.
3P107422-3D
289
Remote Controller
EDSG281001
Names and functions
3P107422-3D
290
EDSG281001
Remote Controller
Name and function of switches and icons (refer to figure 1)
3P107422-3D
291
Remote Controller
EDSG281001
3P107422-3D
292
EDSG281001
Remote Controller
Installation
3P107422-4D
293
Remote Controller
EDSG281001
3P107422-4D
294
EDSG281001
Remote Controller
3P107422-4D
295
Remote Controller
EDSG281001
3P107422-4D
296
EDSG281001
Remote Controller
2.3
BRC1E61 Navigation Remote Controller (Wired Type)
2.3.1
Features
3
BRC1E61
Clear Display Equipped with backlight and large sized character display and buttons.
Stylish Basic tone is white and arrow keys are located at the center.
Simple Operation Simple operation used with arrow keys and menu-driven method.
Multilingual Display Available for selection of 10 languages to display arbitrarily
Other Features Wide variety of functions to meet customer needs such as schedule setting
and contact address display.
2.3.2
Dimensions
Unit (mm)
3D064037
297
298
3P243520-1B
Useful Information
Maintenance
Manipulating the Main Menu Screen ..................... 26
Menu Manipulation
Failure to observe these instructions properly may result in property

damage or personal injury, which may be serious depending on the
circumstances.
Failure to follow these instructions properly may result in personal

injury or loss of life.
Absolutely keep wet hands away.
Be sure to ground the unit.
WARNING
5/15/2009 10:20:58 AM
English
Do not clean the product with organic solvents such as paint thinner.
The use of organic solvents may cause crack damage to the product, electric shocks, or
re.
Do not use ammable materials (e.g., hairspray or insecticide) near the

product.
Improper installation may result in electric shocks or re.

Consult your Daikin dealer.
Do not relocate or reinstall the remote controller by yourself.
This may result in electric shocks or re.

Do not modify or repair the remote controller.
Improper installation may result in electric shocks or re.

Do not install the remote controller by yourself.
About Remote Controller
Absolutely keep water and moisture

away.
Always follow the instructions given.
Never do.
The following pictograms are used in this manual.
CAUTION
WARNING
The precautions described herein are classified as WARNING and CAUTION.

They both contain important information regarding safety. Be sure to observe all precautions
without fail.
Read the safety precautions attentively for the correct use of the product.
5/15/2009 10:20:58
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd
AM
2
After-sale Service ................................................... 54
Error code Display ................................................. 53
Maintenance of Unit and LCD ................................ 52
Filter Sign Resetting ............................................... 51
Language changeover ........................................... 50
Clock Setting .......................................................... 48
Setting Status List .................................................. 48
Convenient Functions ............................................ 45
Service Contact/Model Information ........................ 44
Timer Settings ........................................................ 34
Ventilation .............................................................. 32
Quick Cooling/Heating On/Off ................................ 31
Airow Direction Setting ......................................... 28
Set temp mode changeover ................................... 27
Main Menu Items ................................................... 24
Ease of Cellular-like Function Settings
Key Lock ............................................................... 23
Eligibility ................................................................. 21
Setting Method of the Cooling/Heating Selection
Ventilation Operation .............................................. 20
Quick Reference of
Main Menu Items
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd 1
English
(Use of Direct Buttons)
Home Leave ........................................................... 19
Program Dry Operation .......................................... 17
Basic Operation Method
Simple Settings in Direct Buttons for

Basic Operation Items
Names and Functions ............................................... 8
Safety Precautions Items to be Strictly Observed ......... 2
Safety Precautions
2.3.3
Cool/Heat/Auto/Fan Operation .............................. 14
Notices
Contents
Remote Controller
EDSG281001
Operation Manual
Safety precautions
3P243520-1B
299
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd 3
English
Using the product in such places may cause re or product failures.
5/15/2009 10:20:59 AM
English
The use of any other power supply may cause heat generation, re, or product failures.
Be sure to use a dedicated power supply for the air conditioner.
Do not operate the air conditioner in that case, or otherwise a malfunction, electric
shock, or re may result.
Consult the dealer if the air conditioner submerges owing to a natural

disaster, such as a ood or typhoon.
Failure to install an earth leakage breaker may result in electric shocks or re.
When the air conditioner is to be installed in a small room, it is necessary to take proper
measures so that the amount of any leaked refrigerant does not exceed the
concentration limit in the event of a leakage.
Otherwise, this may lead to an accident due to oxygen depletion.
Consult your local dealer regarding what to do in case of refrigerant

leakage.
Continued operation under such circumstances may result in a failure, electric shocks or
re hazards.
When the air conditioner is malfunctioning (giving off a burning odour, etc.)
turn off power to the unit and contact your local dealer.
Do not earth the unit to a utility pipe, lightning conductor or telephone earth lead. Imperfect
earthing may result in electric shocks or re. A high surge current from lightning or other
sources may cause damage to the air conditioner.
Be sure to earth the unit.
Otherwise, re or water leakage may result.

Furthermore, the fan will rotate abruptly if power failure compensation is enabled, which
may result in injury.
Do not start or stop operating the air conditioner with the power supply
breaker turned ON or OFF.
Use of an ordinary conductive wire may cause malfunctions or re.
In the case of using a load breaker provided with a fuse, make sure that
the capacity of the fuse is correct.
If the air conditioner is not operating correctly, i.e. not generating cool or warm air,
refrigerant leakage could be the cause. Consult your dealer for assistance. The
refrigerant within the air conditioner is safe and normally does not leak. However, in the
event of a leakage, contact with a naked burner, heater or cooker may result in generation
of noxious gas. Do not longer use the air conditioner until a qualied service person
conrms that the leakage has been repaired.
Beware of re in case of refrigerant leakage.
WARNING
Safety Precautions
5/15/2009 10:20:58
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd
AM
4
Do not use the product in places with excessive oily smoke, such as
cooking rooms, or in places with ammable gas, corrosive gas, or metal
dust.
Oil vapor may cause crack damage, electric shocks, or re.
Do not use the product in the atmosphere contaminated with oil vapor,
such as cooking oil or machine oil vapor.
If a defect results from your own workmanship, it may result in water leaks, electric
shock or re.
Contact professional personnel about attachment of accessories and be

sure to use only accessories specied by the manufacturer.
Injury may result due to contact with the air conditioners highspeed fan blades.
Be aware that prolonged, direct exposure to cool or warm air from the air
conditioner, or to air that is too cool or too warm can be harmful to your
physical condition and health.
Do not place objects, including rods, your ngers, etc., in the air inlet or
outlet.
WARNING
Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit
If water gets into the remote controller there is a risk of electrical leakage and damage to
electronic components.
Do not leave the remote controller wherever there is a risk of wetting.
Doing so may cause electric leakage and result in electric shocks or re.
Do not wash the remote controller.
To avoid electric shocks, do not operate with wet hands.
Touching the interior parts may result in electric shocks or re.

Consult your Daikin dealer or authorized contractor for internal inspections and
adjustments.
Never disassemble the remote controller.
Accidental operation by a child may result in impairment of bodily functions and harm
health.
Do not play with the unit or its remote controller.
CAUTION
Items to be Strictly Observed
EDSG281001
Remote Controller
300
3P243520-1B
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd 5
English
5/15/2009 10:21:00 AM
English
If proper drainage from the outdoor drain pipe does not occur during air conditioner
operation, there could be a blockage due to dirt and debris build-up in the pipe.
This may result in a water leakage from the indoor unit. Under these circumstances,
stop air conditioner operation and consult your dealer for assistance.
Arrange the drain to ensure complete drainage.
If the units are not mounted securely, the units may fall or topple and injury may result.
Fix the units securely.
Leaves are a hotbed for small animals which can enter the unit. Once in the unit, such
animals can cause malfunctions, smoke or re when making contact with electrical
parts.
Do not place objects in direct proximity of the outdoor unit and do not let
leaves and other debris accumulate around the unit.
The use of an incorrect washing method or incorrect detergent may damage the resin
parts of the indoor unit or cause water leakage.
Moreover, malfunctions, smoke generation, or ignition may result if the electric parts or
motor in the indoor unit is wet with detergent.
Do not wash the interior of the indoor and outdoor units by yourself.
Always consult your Daikin dealer.
Failure to do so may result in an electric shock or injury.
Always stop the operation of the air conditioner and turn OFF the
breaker at the time of cleaning.
Be careful when using the air conditioner with other heating equipment.
Insufcient ventilation may result in oxygen deciency.
Perform ventilation from time to time.
Do not wash the air conditioner with water, as this may result in electric
shocks or re.
The motor in operation is at high temperatures and a burn may result.
Do not touch the motor at the time of lter replacement.
The base may topple down and injury may result.
Do not sit or stand on any unstable base at the time of operating or

maintaining the air conditioner.
CAUTION
Safety Precautions
5/15/2009 10:21:00
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd
AM
6
In the event of a gas leakage, build-up of gas near the air conditioner may result in re
hazards.
Do not install the air conditioner at any place where there is a danger of
ammable gas leakage.
The containers may explode because the warm air output of the indoor or outdoor unit
will affect them.
Do not put ammable containers, such as spray cans, within 1m from the
blow-off mouth.
Be sure that children, plants or animals are not exposed directly to

airow from the unit, as adverse effects may ensue.
Do not place heaters directly below the unit, as resulting heat can cause
deformation.
Do not place appliances that produce naked ames in places exposed to

the air ow from the unit as this may impair combustion of the burner.
Do not use the air conditioner for cooling precision instruments, food, plants, animals or
works of art as this may adversely affect the performance, quality and/or longevity of the
object concerned.
Do not use the air conditioner for purposes other than those for which it
is intended.
Do not place water containers (ower vases, etc.) on the unit, as this
may result in electric shocks or re.
Under certain conditions, condensation on the main unit or refrigerant pipes, air lter dirt
or drain blockage may cause dripping, resulting in fouling or failure of the object
concerned.
Do not place objects that are susceptible to moisture directly beneath

the indoor or outdoor units.
The guard protects against the units high speed fan, which may cause injury.
Do not remove the outdoor units fan guard.
To avoid injury, do not touch the air inlet or aluminium ns of the unit.
Impaired air ow may result in insufcient performance or trouble.
Do not block air inlets nor outlets.
Falling or tumbling may result in injury.
Do not allow a child to mount on the outdoor unit or avoid placing any
object on it.
If left in a damaged condition, the unit may fall and cause injury.
After prolonged use, check the unit stand and its mounts for damage.
CAUTION
Items to be Strictly Observed
Remote Controller
EDSG281001
3P243520-1B
301
English
Used to highlight the next items on the

right-hand side.
Each screen is scrolled in the right-hand
direction.
Home leave settings are enabled with this
button kept pressed for at least four
seconds. (See page 19.)
6. Right button (Be sure to press

the part with the symbol )
Used to lower the set temperature.

The next items on the lower side will be
highlighted.
(The highlighted items will be scrolled
continuously when the button is kept
pressed.)
Used to change the item selected.
5. Down button (Be sure to press

Used to raise the set temperature.

The next items on the upper side will be
highlighted.
pressed.)
4. Up button (Be sure to press the

part with the symbol )
Used to indicate the main menu.

(See page 24 for the menu items.)
Used to enter the setting item selected.
3. Menu/Enter button
Press this button to select the fan speed of

your preference. (See page 15.)
* Available fan speed vary with the
connecting model.
2. Fan speed control button
Press this button to select the operation

mode of your preference. (See page 14.)
* Available modes vary with the connecting
model.
1. Operation mode selector button
5/15/2009 10:21:01
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd
AM
9
English
Do not install the remote controller in places exposed to direct sunlight.

Otherwise, the LCD may become discolored and nothing may be displayed.
Do not pull or twist the remote controller cord.
Otherwise, the remote controller may error.
Do not press the buttons on the remote controller with objects with sharp ends.
Otherwise, the remote controller may receive damage or error.
NOTE
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd 8
2. Fan speed control

button
10. Cancel button
3. Menu/Enter button
8. On/Off button
9. Operation lamp
4. Up button
5. Down button
6. Right button
7. Left button
11. LCD (with backlight)
1. Operation mode
selector button
Functions other than basic operation items (i.e., On/Off, Operation

mode selector, Fan speed control, and temperature settings) are set
from the menu screen.
Names and Functions
5/15/2009 10:21:01 AM
The backlight will be light for approximately

30 seconds by pressing any operation
button. Operate buttons excluding the On/
Off button while the backlight is lit.
If two remote controllers are used to control
a single indoor unit, the backlight of the
remote controller operated earlier than the
other one will be lit.
11. LCD (with backlight)
Used to return to the previous screen.
10.Cancel button
This lamp lights up during operation.

This lamp blinks if a error occurs.
9. Operation lamp (Green)
Press this button and system will start.

Press this button again and system will
stop.
8. On/Off button

left-hand side.
Each screen is scrolled in the left-hand
direction.
Home leave settings are enabled with this
button kept pressed for at least four
seconds. (See page 19.)
7. Left button (Be sure to press

EDSG281001
Remote Controller
Names and functions
302
<Standard display example>
This function not available
20C
Set temperature
) display
6.Message
4.Set temperature
display
5.Defrost/Hot start
8.(
12.Home Leave
9.( ) display
3P243520-1B
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd 10
10
(with no airflow direction

settings)
Airflow direction
display
(with no fan speed

control function)
3.Fan speed display
(Displayed only when

the air conditioner is in
operation.)
13.Airflow direction
12:05
Setting
20C
20C
Set temp Room
--:--
Setting
20C
Set temp
<Detailed display example 2>
Return
Heat
Auto
<Detailed display example 1>
Return
Heat
Auto
) display
English
Displayed for a few seconds when an

operation button is pressed if the indoor
unit is not provided with the corresponding
function.
If a number of indoor units are in operation,
the message will appear only if none of the
indoor units is provided with the
corresponding function, i.e., the message
will not appear if at least one of the indoor
units is provided with the corresponding
function.
The following messages are displayed.

This function not available.
6. Message
If Ventilating operation
is displayed:
Displayed when a total heat exchanger
unit, such as the Ventiair, is connected.
For details, refer to the Operation Manual
of the Ventiair.
(See page 16.)
5. Defrost/Hot start
Used to display the temperature set for the

air conditioner.
4. Set temperature display
Used to display the fan speed that is set for

the air conditioner.
The fan speed will not be displayed if the
air conditioner does not have fan speed
control function.
3. Fan speed
Used to display the present automatic

operation mode (Cool or Heat).
2. Automatic operation mode
Used to display the present operation

mode Cool, Heat, Vent, Fan, Dry or Auto
mode.
1. Operation mode
5/15/2009 10:21:01
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd
AM
11
English
(with no detailed items

selected)
Detailed selection
16. (
(with no clock settings)
Clock display
(with room
temperature settings)
15.Detailed selection
14.Clock (24 hours

real time clock)
The airow direction, clock, and detailed selection items appear

on the detailed display screen in addition to the items appearing
on the standard display.
Detailed display
7.Ventilation
3.Fan speed
2.Automatic
operation mode
Heat
11. Changeover under control

10.Under centralized
control
1.Operation mode
Auto
Standard display
Two types of liquid crystal display (LCD) are available. The standard display is by
default set.
To go to the detailed display, select the detailed display in the main menu. (See page 46.)
The displayed contents of the screen vary with the operation mode of the equipment
interlocked. (The following display will appear when the air conditioner is in automatic
heating operation.)
Liquid Crystal Display
Names and Functions
display (See page 23.)
Displayed if the schedule timer or OFF

reminder timer is enabled.
display (See page 34.)
Displayed when the key lock is set.
11
5/15/2009 10:21:02 AM
Displayed on the remote controller if the

remote controller has no cooling/heating
selection eligibility mode (see page 21).
(VRV only)
11. Changeover under control
Displayed if the system is under the

management of central control equipment
(optional accessories) and the operation of
the system through the remote controller is
prohibited.
10.Under Centralized control
9.
8.
Displayed when a total heat exchanger

unit, such as the Ventiair, is connected.
Ventilation mode icon.
These icons indicate the current ventilation

mode (HRV only) (AUTOMATIC, HEAT
EXCHANGE, BYPASS).
AIR Purifying ICON

This icon indicates that the air cleaning unit
(option) is operational.
7. Ventilation / Purifying
Clean the lter.

Clean the element.
Clean the lter and element.
Displayed when the time to clean the lter
or element has come (see page 51).
Quick Cool/Heat (SkyAir only)

Displayed if the quick cooling/heating
function is turned ON (see page 31).
Error: Press Menu Button.

Warning: Press Menu Button.
Displayed if the error or warning is detected
(see page 53).
Remote Controller
EDSG281001
(See page 19.)
3P243520-1B
303
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd 12
12
display
Displayed to inform that the clock needs

setting again.
The schedule timer function will not work
unless the clock is set again.
16.
Displayed if the detailed display items are

selected (see page 47).
No detailed items are by default selected.
15.Detailed selection
Displayed if the clock is set (see page 48).

If the clock is not set, -- : -- will be
displayed.
14.Clock (24 hours real time clock)
Displayed when the airow direction and

swing are set (see page 28).
This item is not displayed if the system is
not provided with a function to set airow
directions.
Home Leave is disabled
OFF
13.Airow direction
Home Leave is active
FLASHING
The home leave icon shows the status of

the home leave function.
ON
Home leave is enabled
12.Home leave
Names and Functions
English
5/15/2009 10:21:03
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd
AM
13
English
5/15/2009 10:21:03 AM
13
EDSG281001
Remote Controller
304
3P243520-1B
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd 14
Return
Cool
Return
Setting
28C
Set temperature
Operation Method
14
Setting
Setting
Schedule timer
Off reminder timer
Timer setting
Return
Set temp mode changeover

Airflow Direction
Quick Cool/Heat On/Off
Ventilation
Timer setting
Service Contact/Model info
MainMenu
Disable
Disable
2/2
1/2
buttons to select
* Items presently enabled or disabled are

displayed.
screen.
Press Menu/Enter button to display
the timer settings screen.
Timer setting on the main menu
Press
(See page 26.)
Displays the main menu screen.
Explains a button operation

procedure for the remote controller.
Operate the buttons according to
the procedure.
Displays the positions of
buttons to be operated.
English
Low
Return
Cool
Return
Cool
Middle
Setting
28C
Set temperature
Setting
28C
Set temperature
High
5/15/2009 10:21:03
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd
AM
15
English
Note
Before making a mode change, make sure that Changeover
under control is not displayed on the remote controller.
The cooling or heating mode cannot be selected if the above is
displayed on the remote controller. See page 21 if Changeover
under control display blinks.
* Unavailable operation modes are not displayed.

* Only the Cooling or Fan mode can be selected if the air
conditioner is a cooling-only model.
* The Auto mode can be set in the case of the VRV cooling/
heating simultaneous operation system.
* Changeover under control will appear on each remote controller,
but only the Cooling or Fan mode can be set in the case of the
VRV cooling-only system.
Press Operation Mode Selector button

several times until the desired mode
Cooling, Heating, Fan, or Auto mode is
selected.
For mechanical protection purposes, turn ON the system at least six hours before starting the
operation of the system.
Do not turn OFF the system in season in order to ensure the smooth starting of the system.
Preparation
Describes screens that

will be displayed on the
remote controller in
operation.
Operation screen
display
Operation Method
Remote Controller Functions
Operation button
display
(SkyAir and VRV)
Operation procedure
Cool/Heat/Auto/Fan Operation
Basic Operation Method (Use of Direct Buttons)
15
5/15/2009 10:21:03 AM
* The airow direction of the system cannot be changed unless

the system is provided with a function to allow airow direction
changes.
Make airow direction settings from the main menu

(see page 28).
* Two fan speed adjustment levels Low, High may be available

depending on the type of indoor unit.
* The system may be in automatic fan speed control for
mechanical protection purposes.
* The system may be in automatic fan speed control according to
the room temperature.
The fan may stop operating, which, however, is not a failure.
* The completion of fan speed selection may take time, which,
however, is not a failure.
To make fan speed control, press Fan

speed control button and select the
desired fan speed from Low, Middle or
High.
* No temperature settings are possible while in fan mode.
The set temperature will increase by

1C when button is pressed and
decrease by 1C when button is
pressed.
Press On/Off button.

The Operation lamp (green) will be lit
and the system will start operating.
Remote Controller
EDSG281001
Basic operation method (Use of direct buttons)
Note
Do not turn power OFF soon after the system stops operating.
Be sure to wait for at least ve minutes so that the drain
discharging device will nish discharging the residual drain.
Otherwise, water leakage or failures may result.
* While the system is in heating operation, the

system will be in fan operation for approximately
one minute in order to eliminate the heat in the
indoor unit after the heating operation comes to a
stop.
The system in heating operation generally requires a long time to

attain the set temperature compared with the system in cooling
operation.
It is recommended to start operating the system in advance by utilizing
the timer.
3P243520-1B
305
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd 16
The heating capability of the system will drop with a decrease in

outdoor temperature.
If that happens, use the system along with another heating appliance.
(In the above case, be sure to ventilate the room as frequently as
possible.)
Do not use the heating appliance in places where the heating
appliance is exposed to the wind from the system.
The system is of hot air circulation type. Therefore, it takes some time
for the room to become warm after the system starts operating.
The indoor fan will automatically go into breezing operation until the
inner temperature of the system rises to a certain level.
If the hot air stays around the ceiling and your feet feel cold, the use of
a circulator is recommended.
For details, consult your Daikin dealer.
English
1
Return
Dry
Setting
28C
Set temperature
Operation Method
5/15/2009 10:21:04 AM
17
* The dry operation may not be available depending on the type of

indoor unit.

several times until the Dry operation is
selected.
The dry mode may not be selected if the remote controller has no right to select cooling/
heating mode (see page 22 for details).
Preparation
Program Dry Operation
Outdoor
temperature and
heating capability
5/15/2009 10:21:04
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd
AM
17
English
When the system goes into heating operation, the wind will stop in
order to prevent cold air from blowing out of the system in defrosting
operation.
(Defrost/Hot start) will be displayed on the
(In that case,
remote controller.)
Hot start
(VRV only)
16
The heating capability of the system will drop if the outdoor unit frosts
up. Therefore, the system will go into defrosting operation
automatically.
(Defrost/Hot
The system will stop blowing out hot air, and
start) will be displayed on the remote controller.
The system will return to normal operation with an elapse of
approximately six to eight minutes (but not more than 10 minutes).
Defrosting
operation
Perform the following operation of the system in order to prevent the

degradation of the heating capability or cold winds from blowing out.
Starting operation
Characteristics of Heating Operation
The Operation lamp will be turned OFF

and the system will stop operating when
On/Off button is pressed again.
EDSG281001
Remote Controller
306
3P243520-1B
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd 18
18
English
1
Return
Cool
Return
Cool
28C
Setting
28C
Set temperature
Setting
Home leave is disabled
To cancel the home leave mode, continue

pressing or button for at least
four seconds. (During backlight lit)
Home leave is active

OFF
Home leave is enabled

FLASHING
ON
The Home Leave icon shows the status

of the home leave function.
Press and hold the or button

for at least four seconds. (During
backlight lit)
The Home Leave icon displays and
function is enabled.
5/15/2009 10:21:05 AM
19
The home leave can not be enabled when a centralized control is connected.
Set temperature
Operation Method
Note
This function will switch on heating if the installation is switched off.
Home Leave is a feature that enables to keep the room temperature above 10C when the
occupants are out.
Home Leave
The microcomputer is in automatic temperature and fan speed control. Therefore, temperature or
fan speed settings cannot be made or changed while the air conditioner is in operation.
Program Dry Operation
The Program dry function of the system repeats the weak cooling
operation of the system intermittently to dehumidify the room without
dropping the room temperature as much as possible for the
prevention of excessive cooling.
Program Dry
Operation Contents
5/15/2009 10:21:05
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd
AM
19
English
Note
Do not turn power OFF soon after the system stops operating.
Be sure to wait for at least ve minutes so that the drain
discharging device will nish discharging the residual drain.
Otherwise, water leakage or failures may result.

* The airow direction of the system cannot be changed unless the

system is provided with a function to allow airow direction
changes.
Make airow direction settings from the main menu

(see page 28).
* The microcomputer is in automatic temperature and fan speed

control. Therefore, temperature or fan speed settings cannot be
made or changed while the air conditioner is in operation.

Remote Controller
EDSG281001
3P243520-1B
307
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd 20
Return
Vent
Setting
20C
Set temperature
Operation Method
20
When Air Conditioner Interlocked with Total Heat Exchanger


* Ventilation rate: Low or High
English
Return
Cool
Return
Cool
English
Return
Cool
Return
Cool
28C
Setting
28C
Set temperature
Setting
28C
Set temperature
The display
Setting
28C
Set temperature
Setting

of the remote controller for which the
selection eligibility to be set.
Then the cooling/heating selection
eligibility will be set and the display
(Changeover under control) will

disappear.
The display
(Changeover under
control) will appear on the other remote
controllers.
5/15/2009 10:21:06 AM
21
(Changeover under control) will blink when the power is turned ON for the first time.
Set a cooling/heating selection eligibility as

explained below.
* Vent mode setting changes are possible regardless of the

cooling/heating selection eligibility.
* If a cooling/heating selection eligibility is set in the cooling/
heating selection remote controller ( ), all the remote controllers
will display
(Changeover under control). In this case, no
cooling/heating selection eligibility can be set in the remote
controllers.
Refer to the operation manual provided to the outdoor unit for the
details of the cooling/heating selection remote controller.
Continue pressing Operation Mode

Selector button of the remote controller for
at least four seconds. (During backlight lit)
A remote controller will not display
(Changeover under control) if a

cooling/heating selection eligibility is
granted to the remote controller.
The display
(Changeover under control) on
each remote controller connected to the same
outdoor unit or BS unit will start blinking.
See page 22 for an explanation of the cooling/heating selection eligibility.
Set temperature
Selection Settings
Setting Changes
(VRV only)
Setting Method of the Cooling/Heating Selection Eligibility
5/15/2009 10:21:05
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd
AM
21
To change the ventilation rate, make necessary

settings from the main menu (see page 32).
* Ventilation mode: Automatic, Heat exchange, and Bypass
To change the ventilation mode setting, make

necessary settings from the main menu (see page 33).
Set the Operation mode selector button

to Ventilation in the case of operating
the total heat exchanger without the
system between seasons.
Preparation
Ventilation Operation
EDSG281001
Remote Controller
308
Return
Cool
Setting
28C
Set temperature
Press the remote controller that has the

cooling/heating selection eligibility (or
the remote controller without the display
(Changeover under control))

several times until the desired mode is
selected. The display will change to
Fan, Dry, Auto, Cool, Heat each
time the button is pressed.
The display Auto will appear for the
heating/cooling simultaneous operation
system only.
At that time, the other remote controllers
with no selection right will follow suit and
change the display automatically.
3P243520-1B
The remote controller with

the selection eligibility
(without
(Changeover under
control) displayed)
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd 22
22
2.
1.
The remote controller with

the selection eligibility
(without
(Changeover under
control) displayed)
Set to Fan mode.
Set to Cool, Heat,

Dry, Auto mode.
Precautions for Setting Cooling/Heating Selection Eligibility
English
1
Setting
28C
Set temperature
Return
Cool
Setting
28C
Set temperature
Basic screen
Return
Cool
Operation Method
will appear.
All buttons are disabled when the keys
are locked.
To cancel the key lock mode, continue
pressing Menu/Enter button for at least
four seconds. (During backlight lit)
Continue pressing Menu/Enter button for

at least four seconds. (During backlight lit)
Make settings and cancel settings in the basic screen.
23
5/15/2009 10:21:08 AM
Set the cooling/heating/auto/fan selection

eligibility in one of the remote controllers.
Set the cooling/heating/fan selection

eligibility in one of the remote controllers.
Key Lock
A single BS unit is connected to a

number of indoor units.
Indoor unit
BS unit:
The BS unit is used for cooling or
heating mode selection.
(Cooling/Heating simultaneous operation system)
A number of indoor units are

connected to a single outdoor unit.
Indoor unit
(Cooling/Heating selected operation system)
The cooling/heating selection eligibility needs to be set for a single remote controller in the
following case.
5/15/2009 10:21:07
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd
AM
23
English
The system cannot be set to other

modes except fan mode.
(with
(Changeover under
control) displayed)
Other remote controllers
The system will go into the mode set in

the remote controller. No other modes
are available.
The system, however, can be switched
to fan mode or from Cool to Dry.
(with
(Changeover under
control) displayed)
Other remote controllers
The Cool, Heat, Auto can be set for only the remote controller for which the cooling/heating
selection eligibility is set.
(The display Auto will appear for the heating/cooling simultaneous operation system only.)
Cool/Heat Selection Eligibility
Operation Selection
Remote Controller
EDSG281001
Ventilation mode
Ventilation rate
3P243520-1B
309
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd 24
24
Service Contact/Model
Information
Off reminder timer
Timer setting Schedule timer
Ventilation
operation
settings for total
heat exchanger
Ventilation
(SkyAir only)
Used to display the service contact and model

information.
Possible to set in 10 minute units from 30 to

180 minutes.
Used to set each operation period of the system.
* Clock settings are necessary.

* The system goes into schedule timer operation in
the previous mode set for the system.
English

Schedule timer
Off reminder timer
Home leave
If two remote controllers are in control of a single indoor

unit, the following menu items are not set in the sub remote
controller. Set them in the main remote controller.
Menu Items of Sub Remote Controller
Outdoor unit
5/15/2009 10:21:12 AM
25
Two remote
controllers in control
50
48
48
46
45
Reference page
Indoor unit
The displayed language can be selected from

the following language. (English/Deutsch/
Franais/Espaol/Italiano/E/
Nederlands/Portugues/Pycc/rke)
The clock is in 24 hours real time clock.

The accuracy of the clock is within
30 seconds per month.
If there is a power failure for a period not
exceeding 48 hours, the clock will continue
working with the built-in backup power
supply. The clock needs settings again if the
power failure period exceeds 48 hours.
Used to make date and time settings and

corrections.
Used to display a list of current settings for

available items.
Display
Standard or detailed display
Detailed display settings
Selectable from the display room
temperature, outdoor temperature, system, or
without any display items.
Note: Available setting items vary with the model connected.

Only the available setting items appear in the menu.
Language changeover
Clock setting
Setting status list
Standard or detailed
display
Used to set to standard or detailed display

mode.
Display changeover
Description
Used to make LCD contrast adjustment.
Contrast adjustment
Setting and display items
Convenient
functions
5/15/2009 10:21:11
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd
AM
25
English
44
42
35
33
Used to set Automatic, Heat exchange, and

Bypass.
Operation start time and stop time can be

set according to the day of the week.
Either one of the following operation modes
can be selected.
Operation at set temperature: Normal
operation
Operation within set temperature range
(between max. and min. temperatures):
Limit operation
Up to 5 actions can be set for each day.
Convenient holiday settings and temporary
closure settings are possible.
32
31
Used to set to Low High
Used to set the room to a conformable

temperature quickly (unless the system is
not in program dry or fan operation).
The maximum quick cooling/heating
operation period is 30 minutes.
* This function is not available to all models.
Used to make airow direction settings.

The airow direction blade are automatically
operated up and down (left and right).
The xed airow directions are set to ve
positions.
Quick Cooling/Heating On/Off
27
Select normal set temperature or limit control.
Airow direction setting

28
Reference page
Description
Setting and display items
The main menu has the following items.
Quick Reference of Main Menu Items
EDSG281001
Remote Controller
Quick reference of main menu items
310
3P243520-1B
Setting
1/2
Main menu screen
Return

Airflow Direction
Ventilation
Timer setting
Service Contact/Model Info
MainMenu
To go back to the basic screen from the

main menu screen, press the Cancel
button.
2. Press Menu/Enter button to display the

selected settings screen.
1. Press
buttons to select the desired
item to be set.
Selecting items from the main menu.
Instructions for manipulating the

buttons will appear.
The main menu screen will appear.
English
1
28 C
20 C
min
28 C
20 C
min
28 C
20 C
Set temperature
max
Return
Press the menu button
Fan
Return
min
Set temperature
max
Basic screen
Fan
1/2
Pressing
buttons switches the
variable set temperature between
max. and min.
27
5/15/2009 10:21:13 AM
Note
The difference between the maximum and minimum
temperatures cannot be set to less than 6C.
(* Maximum temperature Minimum temperature 6C)
To change the set temperature,

buttons.
press
The set temperature is highlighted
and ready to be changed.
The set temperature will increase by
1C when the button is pressed
and decrease by 1C when the
button is pressed.
* To return to the normal set temperature

screen, use Set temp mode changeover in
the Main Menu again.
Press
buttons to select Set
temp mode changeover on the
main menu screen.
Pressing Menu/Enter button takes
you back to the basic screen, and
the set temperature is displayed in
max C min C. (Limit Operation)
(See page 26.)
Display the main menu screen.
The limit operation can not be enabled when a centralized control is connected.
Set temperature
max
Setting
Return
Fan
Return

Airflow Direction
Ventilation
Timer setting
MainMenu
Operation Method
5/15/2009 10:21:12
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd
AM
27
English
While setting items, if a button is not pressed for 5 minutes, the screen will automatically go
back to the basic screen.
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd 26
26
Setting
28C
Set temperature
Basic screen
Return
Caution
Press Menu/Enter button.
Operation Method
Cool
Limit Operation
Limit operation provides thermostat control within the range of the set minimum and maximum temperature.
The minimum temperature setting will trigger heating. The maximum temperature setting will trigger cooling.
Display Method for Main Menu
Manipulating the Main Menu Screen
Menu Manipulation
Remote Controller
EDSG281001
Menu manipulation
3P243520-1B
311
Setting
Setting
1/2
Setting
Airow direction
setting (left/right)
Return
Swing
Airflow Direction
Airow direction
setting (up/down)
Return
Swing
Airflow Direction
Return

Airflow Direction
Ventilation
Timer setting
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd 28
28
MainMenu
Operation Method
3 4
Up/down direction
0
1
1
2
Left/right direction
0
1
2
3
4
English
0
1
2
3
4
English
3
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Return
Position 2
Airflow Direction
Up/down direction
Return
Position 2
Airflow Direction
Return
Swing
Airflow Direction
Up/down direction
Return
Swing
Airflow Direction
5/15/2009 10:21:13
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd
AM
29
: Position
: Position
: Position
: Position
: Position
Note
Airow direction appears on the screen as below.
The airow direction setting screen will

appear.
(For models with no airow direction

adjustment, Airow Direction will not be
displayed on the main menu screen.)
Press
buttons to select
Airow Direction on the main menu
screen and press the Menu/Enter
button.
(See page 26.)
Manipulating Airow Direction Setting
Airow Direction Setting
Menu Manipulation
Press
buttons to select the
desired airow direction.
Press Menu/Enter button to return
to the basic screen.
* The illustration is a display when position 2

is selected.
When you select one of positions 0

to 4, the airow direction blades
stay in a xed position.
Selecting Swing will cause the

airow direction blades to swing
back and forth.
For the swing setting only, all
positions will be displayed.
Pressing
buttons changes the
setting to (in order) Swing ,
Position 0 ,
Position 1 ,
Position 2 ,
Position 3 , and
Position 4 .
5/15/2009 10:21:14 AM
29
EDSG281001
Remote Controller
312
(Automatic)
3P243520-1B
(Desired position)
(Desired position)
Heating mode includes automatic operation.
Operation
condition
1/2
28C
Set temperature
Setting
Quick Cool/Heat
Cool
Return

Airflow Direction
Ventilation
Timer setting
MainMenu
While operating in Cooling, Heating, or

Auto mode, display the main menu
screen (see page 26).
Press
buttons to select
Quick Cool/Heat On/Off on the main
menu screen.
Press Menu/Enter button to return to the
basic screen.
Quick Cooling/Heating will appear on
the basic screen.
Quick Cooling/Heating is now on.
English
2
Return
Cool
Return
1/2
Setting
28C
Set temperature
Setting

Airflow Direction
Ventilation
Timer setting
MainMenu
Operation Method
While Quick Cooling/Heating is

displayed on the basic screen, display
the main menu screen (see page 26).
Press
buttons to select
Quick Cool/Heat On/Off on the main
menu screen.
Press Menu/Enter button to return to the
basic screen.
Quick Cooling/Heating will no longer
appear on the basic screen.
Quick Cooling/Heating is now off.
Quick Cooling/Heating Off
Operation Method
Quick Cooling/Heating On
Quick Cooling/Heating On/Off
5/15/2009 10:21:15
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd
AM
31
English
Room temperature is higher than the remote controllers set temperature

(in heating mode).
When defrosting (in heating mode).
(The airow is blowing horizontally so that people in the room are not in
direct line of the cold air.)
Under continuous operation with the airow blowing horizontally.
Under the operation conditions shown below, airow direction is controlled automatically. Actual
operation may thus be different than what is displayed on the remote controller.
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd 30
30
Airow direction
You can select from one of ve xed
directions. (This has no relation to the
angle of the louvers.)
Indoor unit
Movement of airow direction blades
(Automatic)
Indoor unit
The airow direction blades automatically

swing up and down.
Airow direction swing
There are two types of airow direction setting.
Operational Details and Functions
Menu Manipulation
5/15/2009 10:21:15 AM
31
Remote Controller
EDSG281001
Return
Ventilation rate
Ventilation mode
Ventilation
Return
Setting
Setting

Airflow Direction
Ventilation
Timer setting
MainMenu
2/2
1/2
Press Menu/Enter button to display the

ventilation settings screen.
(For models with no ventilation function,

Ventilation will not be displayed on the main
menu screen.)
Press
buttons to select Ventilation
on the main menu screen.
(See page 26.)
3P243520-1B
313
Return
Ventilation rate
Ventilation mode
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd 32
32
Ventilation
Setting
Operation Method
2/2
Bring up the ventilation settings screen

(see above).
Press
buttons to select
Ventilation rate on the ventilation
settings screen.
ventilation rate settings screen.
Changing the ventilation rate
Operation Method
English
Low
Return
Setting
High
Ventilation rate
Ventilation
High
(Pressing Cancel button takes you back to the

previous screen without changing the ventilation
rate.)
Selecting the desired ventilation rate

and pressing Menu/Enter button selects
the setting and takes you back to the
basic screen.
* Only modes that can be set are displayed.
Pressing
buttons changes the
setting to in order Low and High .
English
Return
Setting
Setting
Bypass
Ventilation mode
Ventilation
Return
Ventilation rate
Ventilation mode
Ventilation
Operation Method
2/2
2/2
Heat exchange
Automatic
* Only modes that can be set are displayed.
Bypass
Pressing
buttons changes the
settings in order as shown below.
Press
buttons to select
Ventilation mode on the ventilation
settings screen.
ventilation mode settings screen.
(See page 32.)
Display the ventilation settings screen.
Changing ventilation mode
5/15/2009 10:21:16
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd
AM
33
Display method for ventilation settings screen
Ventilation
Fan speed display goes off and fan speed can no longer be switched.
Cannot be set when in fan and dry modes.
Quick Cooling/Heating mode will run for a maximum of 30 minutes before the unit automatically
returns to normal operation.
Activating mode selector will return the air conditioner to normal operation.
In heating mode, fan speed may increase and the wind temperature may decrease.
Adjust the operation as desired.
outdoor unit and quickly bringing the room to a comfortable temperature.
Quick Cooling/Heating The indoor unit is automatically controlled, increasing the power of the
Quick Cooling/Heating
Menu Manipulation
5/15/2009 10:21:16 AM
33
EDSG281001
Remote Controller
314
Return
Cool
Setting
28C
Set temperature
3P243520-1B
Setting
Return
Cool
Return
Disable
Disable
2/2
1/2
Setting
28C
Set temperature
Setting
Schedule timer
Off reminder timer
Timer setting
Return
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd 34
34

Airflow Direction
Ventilation
Timer setting
MainMenu
Operation Method
English
1
Setting
Yes
No
Setting
Setting
Return
Setting
Enable/Disable setting
Condition setting
Holiday setting
Schedule timer
Return
00:00
Year 2008
Month 01
Day
01
Tuesday
Clock setting
Return
Clock setting is not carried

out. Do you want to set?
Schedule timer
Return
Schedule timer
Off reminder timer
Timer setting
Operation Method
Disable
Disable
2/2
Press
setting items on the schedule timer
settings screen and press Menu/Enter
button.
(See clock settings on page 48.)
Before setting the schedule timer, the

clock must be set.
If the clock has not been set, a screen
like the one on the left will appear.
Press
buttons to select Yes and
press Menu/Enter button.
Set the current year, month, day, and
time.
Press
Schedule timer on the timer settings
screen.
schedule timer settings screen.
(See page 34.)
Bring up the timer settings screen.
5/15/2009 10:21:18 AM
35
The schedule timer can not be enabled when a centralized control is connected.
Setting the schedule timer

Display method for the schedule timer settings
screen
5/15/2009 10:21:17
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd
AM
35
English
When either schedule timer or off reminder timer is

enabled, appears on the basic screen.
* Currently enabled/disabled is displayed.
Press
buttons to select
Timer setting on the main menu
screen.
timer settings screen.
(See page 26.)
Display method for timer settings screen
Timer Settings
Outside air undergoes Heat exchange and is supplied to inside the room.
Heat exchange mode

Bypass mode
Outside air is supplied to inside the room without undergoing heat exchange.
Using information from the air conditioner (cooling, heating, fan,

and set temperature) and the total heat exchanger unit (indoor and
outdoor temperatures), mode is automatically changed between
Heat exchanger and Bypass.
(Pressing the Cancel button takes you back to the

previous screen without changing the ventilation
mode. )
Automatic mode
Ventilation Mode
Selecting the desired ventilation mode

and pressing Menu/Enter button enters
the settings and takes you back to the
basic screen.
Menu Manipulation
Remote Controller
EDSG281001
3P243520-1B
315
Return
Monday
Operation
Operation
Setting
Time
06:00
:
:
:
:
Setting
Time
06:00
:
:
:
:
Schedule timer
Return
Monday
Setting
Operation
Setting
Time
:
:
:
:
:
Schedule timer
Return
Sunday
Schedule timer
Return
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd 36
36
Condition setting
Holiday setting
Schedule timer
Operation Method
2/2
Press
buttons to move the
highlighted item and press
buttons
to input the desired operation start time.
Each press of
buttons moves the
numbers by 1 hour or 1 minute.
Holding down the button causes the
number to change continuously.
The schedule timer can accept a maximum of

5 operations per day.
Press
buttons to select the day to
be set on the condition setting screen.
Input the program for the selected day
next.
Display the schedule timer settings

screen. (See page 35.)
Press
buttons to select
Condition setting on the schedule timer
settings screen.
condition setting screen.
Schedule timer
Condition setting
Menu Manipulation
English
Return
Monday
Operation
28C
Operation
28C
Setting
Time
06:00
:
:
:
:
Setting
Time
06:00
:
:
:
:
Schedule timer
Return
Monday
Operation
22C
Setting
Time
06:00
:
:
:
:
Schedule timer
Return
Monday
Operation
22C
Setting
Time
06:00
:
:
:
:
Schedule timer
Return
Monday
Schedule timer
5/15/2009 10:21:19
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd
AM
37
English
*1
*2
20C-26C
*3
OFF
To change the set temperature, press

the Menu/Enter button so that the set
temperature will be highlighted and
ready to be changed.
Press
buttons to change the set
temperature.
The set temperature will increase by 1C
when the button is pressed and
decrease by 1C when the button is
pressed.
Pressing Menu/Enter button enters the
set temperature change.
To make an operation change at set

temperature, press
buttons to move
the highlighted item and press
buttons to set the operation to 22C .
22C
The display changes in sequence as shown below

when
buttons are pressed.
The following three types of operations are

available.
*1. switch on the installation at a scheduled time,
in combination with a set point (exact
temperature control)
*2. switch on the installation at a scheduled time,
in limit operation
*3. switch off the installation (end of control)
* The status remain unchanged in the case of .
Press
buttons to move the
buttons
to select the desired operation.
5/15/2009 10:21:20 AM
37
EDSG281001
Remote Controller
316
3P243520-1B
Return
Monday
Operation
28C
20C 28C
Operation
28C
22C 28C
Setting
Time
06:00
12:30
:
:
:
Setting
Time
06:00
12:30
:
:
:
Schedule timer
Return
Monday
Operation
28C
20C 26C
Setting
Time
06:00
12:30
:
:
:
Schedule timer
Return
Monday
Operation
28C
20C26C
Setting
Time
06:00
12:30
:
:
:
Schedule timer
Return
Monday
Operation
28C
20C26C
Setting
Time
06:00
12:30
:
:
:
Schedule timer
Return
Monday
Schedule timer
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd 38
38

set temperature change.
English
English
Operation
28C
22C 28C
OFF
Return
Yes
Setting
No
Is it settled by setting?
Setting
Time
06:00
12:30
15:00
:
:
Schedule timer
Return
Monday
Operation
28C
22C 28C
OFF
Setting
Time
06:00
12:30
15:00
:
:
Schedule timer
Return
Monday
Schedule timer
5/15/2009 10:21:21
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd
AM
39
Note
The difference between the maximum and minimum
temperatures cannot be set to less than 6C.
(* Maximum temperature Minimum temperature 6C)
Press
buttons to change the set
temperature.
The set temperature will increase by 1C
when the button is pressed and
decrease by 1C when the button is
pressed.
Press
temperature to be changed.
To change the maximum and minimum

temperatures, press the Menu/Enter
button so that the temperatures will be
ready to be changed.
To make limit operation settings, press

buttons to move the highlighted
item and press
buttons to input the
desired set time.
Press
buttons to move the
buttons
to set the operation to 20C - 26C .
Menu Manipulation
Press
button to select Yes on the
settings conrmation screen.
schedule timer settings and takes you
When the entire day settings are

completed, highlight the items other than
the operation and press the Menu/Enter
button.
The settings conrmation screen will
appear.
* To copy the settings for the previous day, select

the operation mode selector button so that the
settings will be copied as they are.
Example: The contents for Monday are copied by
pressing the operation mode selector
button after selecting Tuesday.
To set a different day of the week, press

buttons to highlight the day
presently set.
Press
buttons to change the day
and input the program in the same
manner.
To make operation stop settings, press

buttons to move the highlighted
item and press
buttons to input the
desired operation stop time.
Press
buttons to move the
buttons
to turn OFF the operation.
5/15/2009 10:21:22 AM
39
Remote Controller
EDSG281001
3P243520-1B
317
Setting
Setting
Setting
Return
Yes
Setting
No
Schedule timer
Return
Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat
Holiday setting
Multi selection possible
Schedule timer
Return
Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat
Holiday setting
Multi selection possible
Schedule timer
Return
Condition setting
Holiday setting
Schedule timer
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd 40
40
Operation Method
Press
holiday settings and takes you back to
the schedule timer settings screen.
To complete the holiday settings, press

Menu/Enter button.
appear.
Note: To able the schedule timer for the day

selected as a holiday, the holiday setting
must be released.
Press
day.
Press
buttons to display to
make the holiday settings.
Pressing
buttons switches the
setting between set and release.
Multiple days can be selected as
holidays.
Bring up the schedule timer settings

Press
buttons to select
Holiday setting on the schedule timer
settings screen.
holiday settings screen.
Operation
Setting
Time
:
:
:
:
:
English
Setting
Setting
Return
Yes
Setting
No
Schedule timer
Return
Disable
Schedule timer
Return
Condition setting
Holiday setting
Schedule timer
Operation Method
Holiday that are set will be displayed on

the condition settings screen.
Press
enable/disable settings for the schedule
timer and takes you back to the basic
screen.
Press
buttons to select Enable or
Disable on the enable/disable settings
screen.
Press Menu/Enter button after selecting
the item. Then the settings conrmation
screen will appear.
Bring up the schedule timer settings

Press
buttons to select
Enable/Disable setting on the schedule
enable/disable settings screen.
Enabling or disabling the schedule timer without

changing the set day or time
Return
Sunday
Holiday
Schedule timer
5/15/2009 10:21:22
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd
AM
41
English
(The schedule timer will be disabled for days that have been set as holiday.)
Holiday setting
Menu Manipulation
5/15/2009 10:21:23 AM
41
EDSG281001
Remote Controller
318
3P243520-1B
Setting
Setting
Setting
Return
Yes
Setting
No
Off reminder Timer
Return
minutes.
60
Each time after pressing

the operation button,
automatically stops after
Off reminder Timer
Return
Enable/ Disable setting

Condition setting
Off reminder Timer
Return
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd 42
42
Schedule timer
Off reminder Timer
Timer setting
Operation Method
Disable
Disable
Press
off reminder timer settings and takes
you back to the basic screen.
Use
buttons to set the time from
operation start until the unit
automatically stops.
Selections can be made in increments of
10 minutes from 30 to 180 minutes.
Select the desired time and press Menu/
Enter button.
appear.
Press
buttons to select
Condition setting on the off reminder
condition settings screen.
Press
Off reminder timer on the timer settings
screen.
off reminder timer settings screen.
(See page 34.)
Bring up the timer settings screen.
English
1
Setting
Setting
Return
Yes
Setting
No
Off reminder Timer
Return
Disable
Off reminder Timer
Return

Condition setting
Off reminder Timer
Operation Method
Press
enable/disable settings for the off
reminder timer settings and takes you
Press
buttons to select Enable or
Disable on the enable/disable settings
screen.
Press Menu/Enter button after selecting
the item. Then the settings conrmation
screen will appear.
Bring up the off reminder timer settings

Press
buttons to select
Enable/Disable setting on the off
reminder timer settings screen.
enable/disable settings screen.
43
5/15/2009 10:21:25 AM
Enabling or disabling the off reminder timer without

changing the set time
5/15/2009 10:21:24
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd
AM
43
English
Making and checking the off reminder timer settings
Menu Manipulation
Remote Controller
EDSG281001
3P243520-1B
319
Setting
Return
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
Setting
/000
/000
Contact address
01234567890
Return
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd 44
44

Airflow Direction
Ventilation
Timer setting
MainMenu
Operation Method
1/2
* The error code record may also appear.

If it is not blinking, the unit is working properly.
The error code record will disappear if you press
On/Off button for more than 4 seconds.
* The model name will not appear if you have had

the circuit board replaced.
(For some models the product code may appear. )
The model information of the indoor and

outdoor units of your product will appear
on the bottom of the screen.
(If you have not yet registered your product, it will

not appear. )
The phone number for the contact

address will appear at the top of the
screen.
Press
buttons to select
Service Contact/Model Info on the
main menu screen and press Menu/
Enter button.
(See page 26.)
Display method for service contact and model

information
Service Contact/Model Information
Menu Manipulation
English
Setting
Setting
Return
Adjusts contrast
Setting
Light
Dark
Contrast adjustment
Return
Contrast adjustment
Display changeover
Convenient functions
Return
Setting status list
Clock setting
Language changeover
MainMenu
5/15/2009 10:21:26
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd
AM
45
English
Operation Method
2/2
On the contrast adjustment settings

screen press
buttons until you reach
the desired contrast.
After setting, press Menu/Enter button
and return to the basic screen.
Bring up the convenient functions

settings screen.
Press
buttons to select
Contrast adjustment on the convenient
functions settings screen.
contrast adjustment settings screen.
Press
buttons to select
Convenient functions on the main
menu screen.
convenient functions settings screen.
(See page 26.)
Contrast Adjustment
Convenient Functions
5/15/2009 10:21:26 AM
45
EDSG281001
Remote Controller
320
3P243520-1B
Setting
Setting
Return
Display
Setting
Standard
Display changeover
Return
Display
Desired disp select
Display changeover
Return
Contrast adjustment
Display changeover
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd 46
46
Operation Method
Standard
None
* Refer to Setting the detailed display selection

to change detailed display selection.
(See page 47.)
Press
buttons to select Standard
or Details on the display settings
screen.
Then, press Menu/Enter button to
conrm settings and return to the basic
screen.
Press
buttons to select Display on
the convenient functions settings
screen.
display settings screen.
Bring up the convenient functions

settings screen. (See page 45.)
Press
buttons to select
Display chageover on the convenient
display selection settings screen.
Display chageover
Display selection
Menu Manipulation
English
Setting
Return
Setting
None
Desired disp select
Display changeover
Return
Display
Desired disp select
Display changeover
5/15/2009 10:21:27
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd
AM
47
English
Operation Method
Standard
None
buttons displays the following.
After setting, press Menu/Enter button

to conrm settings and return to the
basic screen.
5/15/2009 10:21:28 AM
47
Outdoor temperature
.......... An estimate of the temperature near
the outdoor unit.
The temperature that is detected may
be affected by factors such as the
location of the unit (if it is in direct
sunlight, for e.g.) and unit operation
during defrosting.
Room temperature
.......... An estimate of the temperature near
the remote controller.
The temperature that is detected may
be affected by the location of the unit.
Be sure to read the following notes regarding display

of room temperature and outdoor temperature.
* Some models may not display these items even if they are selected.
Room temperature
* Outdoor temperature
* System
None
Pressing
Bring up the display selection settings

Press
buttons to select
Desired disp select on the convenient
detailed display selection screen.
Setting the detailed display selection
Remote Controller
EDSG281001
Return
Setting
1/2
Swing
Low
Auto
Disable
Disable
Standard
Airflow Direction
Ventilation rate
Ventilation mode
Schedule timer
Off reminder Timer
Display changeover
Setting
Setting status list
Return
Setting status list
Clock setting
Language changeover
2/2
3P243520-1B
321
Return
Setting
Setting status list
Clock setting
Language changeover
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd 48
48
MainMenu
Operation Method
2/2
Off reminder timer

Quick Cool/Heat
Display changeover
Desired disp select
* Display items may differ depending on the model.

Only the items that can be set are displayed.
Airow direction
Ventilation rate
Ventilation mode
Schedule timer
Display items
A list showing the current setting status

will appear.
Press
buttons to go to the next item.
Pressing Cancel button takes you back
to the main menu screen.
Press
buttons to select
Setting status list on the main menu
screen and press Menu/Enter button.
(See page 26.)
Display the main menu screen. (See page 26.)

Press
buttons to select
Clock setting on the main menu
screen.
clock settings screen.
Setting the clock
Clock Setting
MainMenu
Operation Method
Manipulating the setting status list
Setting Status List
Menu Manipulation
English
Return
12:21
Year 2008
Month 10
Day
07
Tuesday
Clock setting
Return
12:00
Year 2008
Month 10
Day
07
Tuesday
Clock setting
Return
00:00
Year 2008
Month 10
Day
07
Tuesday
Clock setting
Return
00:00
Year 2008
Month 10
Day
01
Tuesday
Clock setting
Return
00:00
Year 2008
Month 01
Day
01
Tuesday
Clock setting
5/15/2009 10:21:28
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd
AM
49
English
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
The date can be set between

January 1, 2008 and December 31, 2099.
Note:
Select Minute with

buttons.
buttons.
Input the minute with
appear.
Select Hour with

buttons.
Input the hour with
buttons.
Select Day with

buttons.
buttons.
Input the day with
Days of the week change automatically.
Select Month with

buttons.
Input the month with
buttons.
Select Year with

buttons.
Input the year with
buttons.
5/15/2009 10:21:29 AM
49
EDSG281001
Remote Controller
322
Return
Yes
Setting
No
* When setting schedule timer, the display return to

the settings screens.
Press
Press Menu/Enter button to set the clock
and return to the basic screen.
3P243520-1B
Setting
Return
Setting
English
Selectable languages
Language changeover
Return
Convinient functions
Setting status list
Clock setting
Language changeover
MainMenu
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd 50
50
Operation Method
2/2
Press
buttons to select Language
on the language changeover screen.
English/Deutsch/Franais/Espaol/
Italiano/E/Nederlands/
Portugues/Pycc/rke
Pressing Menu/Enter button to conrm
settings and return to the basic screen.
Press
buttons to select
Language changeover on the main
menu screen and press the Menu/Enter
button.
(See page 26.)
Language changeover
Clock setting
Menu Manipulation
English
Return
Cool
Return
1/2
Clean the filter
28C
Set temperature
Setting
Filter Sign Reset

Airflow Direction
Ventilation
Timer setting
MainMenu
28C
Set temperature
Clean the filter
Cool
5/15/2009 10:21:30
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd
AM
51
English
Operation Method
The display shown in 1 will disappear

from the basic screen when the lter
sign is reset.
Press
buttons to select
Filter Sign Reset on the main menu
screen and press Menu/Enter button.
Reset the lter sign when the lter or

element is washed, cleaned, or replaced.
The main menu screen will appear.
Wash, clean, or replace the lter or

element.
For details, refer to the operation
manual of the indoor unit.
5/15/2009 10:21:31 AM
51
When the time to clean the lter or element has

come, one of the following messages will appear on
the bottom of the basic screen.
Clean the lter
Clean the lter and element
Clean the element
Filter Sign Resetting
Maintenance
Remote Controller
EDSG281001
Maintenance
Be sure to stop the operation of

the air conditioner and turn off
the power supply breaker at the
time of maintenance.
Failure to do so may result in
electric shocks or injury.
3P243520-1B
323
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd 52
52
Do not use ammable materials (e.g., hairspray or insecticide) near the air
conditioner.
Do not clean the product with organic solvents such as benzine or paint
thinner.
The use of organic solvents may cause crack damage to the product, electric shocks,
or re.
Warning
Note
Do not use any paint thinner, organic solvent, or strong acid.
English
1
28C
Set temperature
Return
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
Contact address
012345678900
Error code:A1
Setting
/000
/000
Error : Press Menu Button
Cool
Operation Method
The error code blinks and the contact

address and model name will appear.
Notify your Daikin dealer of the Error
code and Model name.
* The operation indicator will not blink.
Warning: Press Menu Button.
* The operation indicator will blink.
Error: Press Menu Button.
If an error occurs, either one of the following

items will blink in the basic screen.
53
5/15/2009 10:21:32 AM
Operation
lamp
Continued operation under such circumstances may result in failure, electric shocks, or re.
Contact your Daikin dealer.
When the air conditioner is malfunctioning (e.g., giving off a burning odor),
stop the air conditioner and turn off power.
Warning
Contact your Daikin dealer in the following cases
Error code Display
Useful Information
5/15/2009 10:21:32
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd
AM
53
English
Wipe the LCD and other surface part of the remote controller with a dry cloth when they become
dirty.
If the dirt on the surface cannot be removed, soak the cloth in neutral detergent diluted with
water, squeeze the cloth tightly, and clean the surface. Wipe the surface with a dry cloth then.
Maintenance of Unit and LCD
Do not wash the remote

controller.
Doing so may cause electric
leakage and result in electric shocks
or re.
Caution
Maintenance
EDSG281001
Remote Controller
Useful information
324
Improper installation may result in
electric shocks or re.
Do not relocate or reinstall the

remote controller by yourself.
3P243520-1B
01_EN_3P243520-1B.indd 54
54
Contact your Daikin dealer.
Inquiry about After-sale Service

Fair-paying services may be possible at the request of the customer.
(The warranty period is one year counting from the date of installation.)
Repairs after Warranty Period
5/15/2009 10:21:33 AM
English
The relocation of the remote controller requires special technology. Consult your Daikin dealer.
Actual expenses required for the relocation of the remote controller will be charged.
Relocation
Model name
Date of installation
Failure conditions: As precise as possible.
Your address, name, and telephone number
Advise the repairer of the following items
Do not disassemble, modify, or

repair the unit.
Doing so may result in electric
shocks or re.
Warning
After-sale Service
Useful Information
Remote Controller
EDSG281001
3P243521-1
01_EN_3P243521-1.indd 1
English
Failure to follow these instructions properly may result in personal

injury or loss of life.
Failure to observe these instructions properly may result in property
damage or personal injury, which may be serious depending on the
circumstances.
2/3/2009 1:19:14 PM
English
Ask your dealer or qualied personnel to carry out installation work.

Do not attempt to install the remote controller yourself. Improper installation may result in water
leakage, electric shocks or re.
Consult your local dealer regarding relocation and reinstallation of the remote controller.
Improper installation work may result in leakage, electric shocks or re hazards.
Install the remote controller in accordance with the instructions in this installation manual.
Improper installation may result in water leakage, electric shocks or re.
Be sure to use only the specied accessories and parts for installation work.
Failure to use the specied parts may result in the unit falling, water leaakage, electric shocks or re.
Install the remote controller on a foundation strong enough to withstand the weight of the remote
controller.
A foundation of insufcient strength may result in the remote controller falling and causing injury.
Electrical work must be performed in accordance with relevant local and national regulations and
with instructions in this installation manual.
Be sure to use a dedicated power supply circuit only. Insufciency of power circuit capacity and
improper workmanship may result in electric shocks or re.
Always perform installation work with the power supply shut-off.
Touch with energized electric parts causes an electric shock.
Do not disassembly, reconstruct or repair.
Electric shock and/or re are caused.
Make sure that all wiring is secured, the specied wires are used, and that there is no strain on the
terminal connections or wires.
Improper connections or securing of wires may result in abnormal heat build-up or re.
The choice of materials and installations must comply with the applicable national and international
standards.
WARNING
After completing installation, conduct a trial operation to check for faults and explain to the customer
how to operate the air conditioner and take care of it with the aid of the operation manual. Ask the
customer to store the installation manual along with the operation manual for future reference.
CAUTION
WARNING
2/3/2009 1:19:14
01_EN_3P243521-1.indd
PM
2
12. Language changeover .................... 22
11. Clock Setting ................................... 22
10. Conrmation of registered

details ............................................... 21
9. Registration method of the

service contract .............................. 20
8. Checking procedure of
error record ..................................... 19
7. Test operation method

(in the case of SkyAir) .................... 16
6. Field setting method ....................... 13
5. Power-on .......................................... 12
4. Functions and menu items

of remote controller buttons .......... 10
3. Remote controller installation

procedure .......................................... 4
2. Accessories ....................................... 4
The precautions described herein are classied as WARNING and CAUTION. They both contain
important information regarding safety. Be sure to observe all precautions without fail.
Please read these Safety Precautions carefully before installing air conditioning
equipment and be sure to install it correctly.
Also see installation manual attached to the indoor unit.
1. Safety Precautions
2.3.4
1. Safety Precautions ............................ 2
Contents
EDSG281001
Remote Controller
Installation Manual
Safety precautions
325
326
3P243521-1
01_EN_3P243521-1.indd 3
English
(M416)
(2 pcs.)
(3.516)
(2 pcs.)
Operation
manual
(1 pc.)
Clamp
(1 pc.)
(1 pc.)
Installation
manual
Safety Precautions when determining the location.
(1 pc.)
Wiring retainer
Through
hole
F8-10
48.5
If the hole size is too large or the location is not

proper, the hole may come out from the controller.
CAUTION
Set the center of the wall hole

to the center of the wiring thro
ugh hole on the controller
lower case when making the
hole.
Take care that dust or moisture does

not touch the PC-board of removed
upper case.
Remote controller PC-board is

installed on the upper case. Take care
not to damage the PC-board with the
screwdriver.
Insert and twist the screwdriver

lightly for removal.
Screwdriver
2/3/2009 1:19:15 PM
English
Lower case
Upper case
Insert a screwdriver in the recess of lower case to remove the upper case (2 points).
3-3 Remove upper case.
Lower case
Through hole
F8-10
External view of the remote controller
3-2 Make a wiring through hole on the wall if the wires are taken
out from the back side.
Make sure to follow 1.
3-1 Determine where to install the remote controller.
3. Remote controller installation

procedure
Small screw
Wood screw
The following accessories are included.
2/3/2009 1:19:14
01_EN_3P243521-1.indd
PM
4
To avoid leakage and electric shock due to entry of water or insects, ll the wiring through hole with
putty.
To avoid electric shocks, do not operate with wet hands.
Do not wash the remote controller with water, as this may result in electric shocks or re.
Install the indoor and outdoor units, power cord and connecting wires at least 1 meter away from
televisions or radios to prevent picture interference and noise.
(Depending on the incoming signal strength, a distance of 1 meter may not be sufcient to eliminate
noise.)
Electromagnetic radiation may disturb the operation of the control system and result in a
malfunction of the unit.
4. Where ammable gas may leak, where there is carbon bre or ignitable dust suspensions in the
air, or where volatile ammables such as paint thinner or gasoline are handled.
Operating the unit in such conditions may result in re.
5. High temperature area or directly amed point.
Heating and/or ring may be caused.
6. Moist area, or place where may be exposed to water.
If water enters inside of the remote controller, electric shock may be caused and inner electronics
may fail.
When remote controller thermo function is used, select the installation location considering the
followings.
A place where average temperature in the room can be detected.
A place where is not exposed to direct sunlight.
A place where is far apart from heat source.
A place where is not affected by outside air due to door opening/closing or the like.
2. Accessories
40
CAUTION
Remote Controller
EDSG281001
Accessories
Remote controller installation procedure

3-4-4 Upper center outlet
Cut off thin area (hatched area) with nippers

or the like, and then remove burr with a le or
the like.
3-4-3 Upper outlet

the like.
CAUTION
3P243521-1
01_EN_3P243521-1.indd 5
English
Sheathed vinyl cord or cable (2 wire) (NOTE)

0.75-1.25mm
Clamp
Clamp
Secure the wiring at

the wiring fixing point
by using attached
clamping material.
Lower case
Cross-section
Indoor unit
P1 P2
<Wiring fixing guideline>
PC-board
Ground the shielded

part on the indoor
unit side. (NOTE.1)
1) Shield wire (2 wire) can be used for remote controller wiring, but it must
conrm to EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) (Australian regulation)
NOTE
Wiring fixing
point
Upper case
3-5-1 Back outlet
2/3/2009 1:19:17 PM
English
Connect the terminals (P/P1, N/P2) of the remote controller upper case with the terminals (P1, P2)
of the indoor unit. (P1 and P2 have no polarities.)
Sheath stripping length:

Ca. 150mm for upper outlet
Ca. 200mm for upper center outlet
Cutting guideline
of the wiring
Peel the shield and sheath
Ca. 10mm
For easy wiring, it is better to
keep ca. 10mm difference
between the length of two wires.
Sheath part in the remote controller case should be stripped.
2/3/2009 1:19:16
01_EN_3P243521-1.indd
PM
6
Shield wire (2 wire) can be used for remote controller wiring, but it must conrm to EMC
(Electromagnetic Compatibility) (Australian regulation)
NOTE
Wiring Type
Wiring Size
Wiring Specications
1. Switch box and transmission wiring are not attached.

2. Do not directly touch the remote controller PC-board.

the like.
Cut off resin area (hatched area).
3-5 Conduct wiring.
3-4-2 Left outlet
3-4-1 Back outlet
3-4 Determine the direction of controller wiring outlet (back

outlet, left outlet, upper center outlet, upper outlet).
EDSG281001
Remote Controller
327
328
PC-board
3P243521-1
01_EN_3P243521-1.indd 7
English
Upper case
PC-board
Wiring retainer
Ground the shielded

part on the indoor
unit side. (NOTE.1)
Indoor unit
P1P2
Lower case
Lower case
Lower case
Install attached
wiring retainer to
prevent wiring pinch
according to left
figure.
Upper case
Indoor unit
P1P2
Ground the
shielded part on
Indoor unit
the indoor unit
P1P2
side. (NOTE.1)
Cross-section
Wiring
Wiring retainer
PC-board
3-5-4 Upper center outlet
Upper case
Wiring retainer
3-5-3 Upper outlet
Upper case
Ground the shielded

part on the indoor
unit side. (NOTE.1)
Switch box
(field supply)
(Use optional accessory
KJB211A)
Small screws (M416)
Secure by using attached small screws (2 pcs.).
(Installation pitch)
46
English
2/3/2009 1:19:18 PM
Switch box for two units

(with no cover)
3-6-2 In the case of installation on the switch box
Wood screws
(F3.516)
Secure by using attached wood screws (2 pcs.).
3-6-1 In the case of installation on the wall
In the case of wiring center upward drawing or rearward drawing, see wiring procedure rst as
wiring with the case is needed before xing.
3-6 Fixing procedure of lower case.
2/3/2009 1:19:17
01_EN_3P243521-1.indd
PM
8
CAUTION
Perform wiring apart from a power line not to receive electrical noise (external noise)
during the wiring.
Seal wiring draw-in port securely with putty (eld supply) to prevent entry of insects or
the like.
84
3-5-2 Left outlet
Remote Controller
EDSG281001

84
28
(Installation pitch)
3P243521-1
01_EN_3P243521-1.indd 9
English
10
Depending on connected model

Airow Direction
Ventilation
Timer setting
Setting status list
Clock setting
Language changeover
Main menu
(3) Menu/Enter button

Used to indicate the main menu.
(For details of main menu, see the
operation manual.)
Used to enter the setting item selected.
(2) Fan speed control button

Used to change the fan control.
(1) Operation mode selector button

Used to change the mode.
4-1 Functions and menu items
2/3/2009 1:19:19 PM
English
(6) Right button

right-hand side.
Display contents are changed to next
screen per page.
(5) Down button

Used to lower the set temperature.
The next items on the lower side will be
highlighted.
pressed.)
(4) Up button
Used to raise the set temperature.
The next items on the upper side will be
highlighted.
pressed.)
(2) Fan speed control button
(10) Cancel button
(3) Menu/Enter button
(8) On/Off button
(9) Operation lamp
(4) Up button
(5) Down button
(6) Right button
(7) Left button
(11) LCD (with backlight)
(1) Operation mode selector button
4. Functions and menu items of remote

controller buttons
2/3/2009 1:19:19
01_EN_3P243521-1.indd
PM
10
Align the upper case with tabs of the lower case (6 points), inset and install the upper case.
Install the wiring with care to prevent the pinch.
Peel off a protective seal which is attached on the upper case.
3-7 Install the upper case as original condition.
Select at place for installation face as possible.

And, do not tighten the installation screws too much not to deform the lower case.
CAUTION
Small screws (M416)
Switch box
(field supply)
(Use optional accessory
KJB111A)
Switch box for one unit

(with no cover)
EDSG281001
Remote Controller
Functions and menu items of remote controller buttons
329
330
Depending on connected model
3P243521-1
01_EN_3P243521-1.indd 11
Return
Setting
Test operation ON/OFF

Register Service Contract
Field setting list
Group No. setting
Indoor unit Airnet No. set
Outdoor unit Airnet No. set
Field setting
1/2
<Field setting menu screen>
In the highlighted display (selected items)

setting screen, button operation
descriptions are displayed.
Highlighted display (selected items)
4-2 Displays for button operation descriptions
English
Field setting menu

Field setting list
Group No. setting
Error record
Indoor status display
Outdoor status display
Fan forced operation ON
Main/Sub changeover
Filter element sign OFF
11
12
5-2
5-1
28C
Set temperature
Return
Fan
<Basic screen>
Main remote contrl
Connection under check

Please wait for a moment
Error code:U5
Main remote contrl

Off reminder Timer
NOTE
When selecting a different language, refer to 12. Language
5-2
5-1
28C
Set temperature
(See page 22.)
2/3/2009 1:19:20 PM
English
Return
Fan
<Basic screen>
Sub remote contrl

Press and hold 4 seconds

or longer the Operation
mode selector button of sub
remote controller side.
Main remote contrl

Error code:U5
Main remote contrl

Off reminder Timer
<Sub remote controller>
changeover.
<Main remote controller>
If sub remote controller is not set at power-on in the case

of one indoor unit controlled by two remote controllers,
Error code: U5 is displayed in the connection checking
screen.
Select the sub remote controller by pressing the
Operation mode selector button of either one of the
remote controllers for 4 seconds or longer.
If the basic screen is not displayed more than 2 minutes
after sub remote controller display, shut off the power
supply and check the wiring.
CAUTION
5-2 Basic screen is displayed.
Be sure to set sub remote

controller during above display.
Press and hold 4 seconds or
longer the Operation mode
selector button of the remote
controller to be set.
When the display is changed from
main remote controller to sub
remote controller, the setting is
completed.
When 1 indoor unit is

controlled by 2 remote
controllers:
During above display, backlight

does not light by button operation.
power-on.
5-1 Followings are displayed after
Check for completion of indoor/outdoor units wiring.

Check for closing of EL. COMPO. BOX cover of indoor and outdoor units before power-on.
5. Power-on
2/3/2009 1:19:20
01_EN_3P243521-1.indd
PM
12
Operate the button during backlight lit.

However, On/Off may be operated concurrently with backlight lit.
When 1 indoor unit is controlled by 2 remote controllers, a remote controller backlight
which is operated rst light.
To operate Up/Down/Left/Right button, always press of the button.
CAUTION
(11) LCD (with backlight)

The backlight will be light for
approximately 30 seconds by pressing
any operation button.
(10) Cancel button

Used to return to the previous screen.
Press and hold this button for 4 seconds
or longer to display eld setting menu.
(9) Operation lamp

Green lamp lights up during operation. The
lamp will blink if an malfunction occurs.
(8) On/Off button

Press once to operate, and press once
again to stop.
(7) Left button

left-hand side.
Display contents are changed to
previous screen per page.
Remote Controller
EDSG281001
Power-on
3P243521-1
01_EN_3P243521-1.indd 13
English
In the case of group total

setting, all of SECOND CODE
NO. which may be set are
displayed as . is
changed to SECOND CODE
NO. to be set. And, SECOND
CODE NO. - means no
function.
the FIRST CODE NO. to be

changed, and select desired
SECOND CODE NO. by using
(Up/Down) button. Multiple
identical mode number settings
are available.
6-5 Highlight SECOND CODE NO. of
In the case of individual setting

per indoor unit, current settings
are displayed. And, SECOND
CODE NO. - means no
function.
unit during group control (When

Mode No. such as 20 , 21 ,
22 , 23 , 25 are selected),
highlight the unit No. and select
Indoor unit No. to be set by
(Up/Down) button.
using
(In the case of group total setting,
this operation is not needed.)
6-4 In the case of setting per indoor
desired Mode No. by using

(Up/Down) button.
6-3 Highlight the mode, and select
eld setting menu, and press

Menu/Enter button.
Field setting list screen is
displayed.
6-2 Select Field setting list in the
4 seconds or longer.
Field setting menu is displayed.
6-1 Press and hold Cancel button for
6-3
6-4
6-5
Press and hold Cancel

button for 4 seconds or
longer during backlight lit.
Return
Unit No
0
001
4
8
Setting
Mode
20
100
200
5
6
9
a
Setting
1/2
Setting
Mode
10
1
5
6
9
a
3
7
b
11 (21)
10 (20)
Mode
No.
Note) 1
14
6-6
6-7
Yes
No
Setting
Setting conrmation
Return
Field setting list
<Setting conrmation screen>
Pair
Setting number of connected Sky Air

simultaneous operation system
indoor units (setting for simultaneous operations system)
Display
Spacing time of display time to

clean air lter count (setting for
when the lter sign is not to be
displayed)
0
Use
Thermostat sensor in remote

controller
Long-life
lter
Approx.
200 hrs.
Approx.
2.500 hrs.
Twin
Do not
display
Not use
Ultra-long
life lter
Approx.
100 hrs.
Approx.
1.250 hrs.
Approx.
5.000 hrs.
02
Double twin
Triple
2/3/2009 1:19:21 PM
English
04
03
SECOND CODE NO. Note) 2
Approx.
10.000 hrs.
Standard
lter
Long life
lter
Ultra
long life
lter
01
Long-life lter type (setting of lter

sign indication time).
(Change setting when ultra-long
lter is installed)
Filter Contamination Heavy/Light

(Setting for spacing time
of display time to clean
air lter)
(Setting for when lter
contamination is heavy,
and spacing time of
display time to clean air
lter is to be halved)
Description of setting
FIRST
CODE
NO.
When an optional accessory is installed on the indoor unit, settings of the indoor unit may be
changed. See the manual of the optional accessory.
For eld setting details of the outdoor unit, see installation manual attached to the outdoor unit.
CAUTION

Please wait for a moment is
displayed for initialization. After
the initialization, the basic screen
returns.
6-10 Backlight goes out, and
pleted, press Cancel button

twice.
6-9 After all setting changes are com-
6-8 In the case of multiple setting

changes, repeat 6-3 to 6-7.
Enter button. Setting details are

determined and eld setting list
screen returns.
6-7 Select Yes and press Menu/
2/3/2009 1:19:21
01_EN_3P243521-1.indd
PM
14
13
FIRST CODE (SW) NO.
SECOND CODE NO.
Return
Unit No
0
001
4
8
Field setting list
300
7
b
6-3
6-5
In the case of group total

setting
<Field setting screen>
Return

Field setting list
Group No. setting
Field setting
In the case of individual

setting per indoor unit
6-2
Field setting list
28C
Set temperature
Return
Fan
6-1
<Basic screen>
conrmation screen is displayed.
6-6 Press Menu/Enter button. Setting
Light

Heavy
6. Field setting method
EDSG281001
Remote Controller
Field setting method
331
332
4-way ow
Equipped
Thermostat differential changeover

(setting for when using remote
sensor).
High air outlet velocity (for high

ceiling applications).
Selection of airow direction (setting

for when a blocking pad kit has
been installed).
Selection of airow function (setting

for when using a decoration panel
for outlet).
Airow direction range setting.
Setting the external static pressure

(setting according to the connected
duct resistance) (for FHYK, follow
the high ceiling setting)
3
Permitted
Level 3
Use
Not equipped
High static
pressure
(High ceiling)
Normal
Not equipped
3-way ow
> 2.7 3.0m
0.5C
ON/OFF
operation
02
Low static
pressure
Lower
2-way ow
> 3.0 3.5m
03
SECOND CODE NO. Note) 2
Not permitted
Level 2
Permission level setting
Home leave function
Not use
Thermostat sensor in remote

controller (for limit operation and
Home leave function only)
Equipped
Drain pump operation with

humidifying.
(Normal)
Normal
Upper
2.7m
1C
Forced OFF
ON/OFF input from outside (setting

for when forced ON/OFF is to be
operated from outside).
01
Description of setting
FIRST
CODE
NO.
04
3P243521-1
01_EN_3P243521-1.indd 15
English
16
eld setting menu, and press Menu/

Enter button. Basic screen returns and
Test operation is displayed.
7-5 Select Test operation ON/OFF in the
4 seconds or longer. Field setting

menu is displayed.
using the remote controller.
7-3 Set the operation mode to cooling by
and gas are opened.

<Make sure that outer panel and
piping cover is closed before
operation (danger of electric
shock). >
After air purge by vacuum pump,
refrigerant pressure may not rise
even though the stop valve is
opened. The reason is that refrigerant system of the outdoor unit is
blocked by electrical expansion valve
or the like. Operation is no problem.
7-2 Conrm that stop valves of both liquid
more than 6 hours before operation

start with front panel closed to protect
compressor.
7-1 Make sure to turn on the power supply
Return
Cool
Setting
28C
Set temperature
<Basic screen>
7-5
Return
Setting

Field setting list
Group No. setting
Field setting
1/2
7-3
7-4
2/3/2009 1:19:22 PM
English

The backlight will be light for approximately

30 seconds by pressing any operation button.
Operate the buttons during the backlight lit.
However, On/Off can be operated concurrently with the backlight lit.
Notes for backlight
Check that wiring work of the indoor unit and the outdoor unit is completed.
Check that EL. COMPO. BOX cover of the indoor unit and the outdoor unit is closed.
After refrigerant piping, drain piping and electric wiring are completed, clean inside of the indoor unit
and decorative panel.
Perform the test operation according to following procedure.
Also see installation manuals attached to the indoor unit and the outdoor
unit.
In the case of VRV, see the manual attached to the outdoor unit.
7. Test operation method (in the case of

SkyAir)
2/3/2009 1:19:22
01_EN_3P243521-1.indd
PM
16
15
Notes) 1. Though setting is performed totally in the group, set Mode No. in the parenthesis when
individual setting per indoor unit or checking after the setting should be performed.
2. SECOND CODE NO. at factory shipment is set to 01. However for the following cases it is
set to 02.
Airow direction range setting (except round ow cassette)
Thermostat sensor in remote controller (SkyAir only)
Thermostat sensor in remote controller for limit operation and Home leave function only
Home leave function
3. Any function which the indoor unit does not have is not displayed.
1e
1c
15 (25)
13 (23)
12 (22)
Mode
No.
Note) 1
Remote Controller
EDSG281001
Test operation method (in the case of SkyAir)
3P243521-1
01_EN_3P243521-1.indd 17
English
(If the operation is performed, the

indoor unit may be contaminated with
the materials which arise from paints or
adhesives during the interior work, and
water splash or water leak may occur.)
If interior work is not completed after the

test operation nish, explain to the
customer that operation should not be
performed until the interior work completion to protect the indoor unit.
installed, shut off the power supply

after the test operation nishes.
7-13 When the decorative panel is not
operation manual.
7-12 Check the functions according to the
eld setting menu, and press Menu/

Enter button. Basic screen returns and
normal operation is conducted.
7-11 Select Test operation ON/OFF in the
4 seconds or longer in the basic

screen.
is conrmed, press Menu/Enter button.

Basic screen returns.
7-9 After the operation of airow direction
direction setting function, select

Airow Direction in the main menu
and check that airow direction is
actuated according to the setting.
For operation of airow direction
setting, see the operation manual.
7-8 In the case of a model having airow
screen. Main menu is displayed.
7-7 Press Menu/Enter button in the basic
7-6 in reverse order, test

operation can start as well.
tioned procedures 7-5 and
10 seconds. The test operation starts.

Check operation condition for
3 minutes.
Note) In the case of above-men-
7-6 Press On/Off button within about
7-11
7-10
7-9
7-8
7-6
7-7
Setting
Setting
<Basic screen>
Return
1/2
28C

Field setting list
Group No. setting
Field setting
Setting
1/2
Set temperature
Test Operation
Cool
Return
Swing
Airflow Direction
Return

Airflow Direction
Ventilation
Timer setting
MainMenu
<Main menu screen>
28C
Set temperature
Test Operation
Cool
18
Checking
procedure of error record.
conrmed, refer to 8.
When the remote controller displays

any item in following table, inspect the
details in the table.
If a error occurs, code is displayed in
the LCD like right gure.
Conduct the failure analysis referring to
Error code list in the installation
And when the unit No. which detected
the error during group control is
Failure diagnosis method
conduct the failure diagnosis referring

to <Error code list> in the installation
After the failure diagnosis nishes,
press and hold On/Off button for
4 seconds or longer in the Service
Contact/Model Info screen to erase
the error code record.
7-17 If the error code record is displayed,
screen is displayed. Check that error

code record is not displayed in the
screen.
Screen which does not display the
error code record means normal
status.
7-16 Service Contact/Model Information
the main menu, and press Menu/Enter

button.
7-15 Select Service Contact/Model Info in
screen. Main menu screen is displayed.
2/3/2009 1:19:22
01_EN_3P243521-1.indd
PM
18
17

Change the airow

direction by using
(Up/Down)button.
Press On/Off button

(within 10 seconds).
CAUTION
7-16
7-17
7-15
7-14
Setting
28C
Set temperature
1/2
28C
Set temperature
Setting
/000
/000
Setting
Test Operat. CODE : U5
Cool
Return
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
Contact address
012345678900
Error code:U5
Return

Airflow Direction
Ventilation
Timer setting
MainMenu
<Main menu screen>
Return
Cool
<Basic screen>
2/3/2009 1:19:23 PM
English
Press and hold On/Off

If operation is not available due to any malfunction, refer to following Failure diagnosis method .
After the test operation nishes, check that error code record is not displayed in the Service
Contact/Model Information screen of the main menu according to the following procedure.
EDSG281001
Remote Controller
333
334
Indoor PC-board assembly failure

Wrong wiring (between indoor and outdoor units)
Description
Power outage, power voltage error or open-phase
Wrong wiring (between indoor and outdoor units)
Indoor PC-board assembly failure
Remote controller wiring disconnection
Remote controller failure
Fuse blow (outdoor unit)
3P243521-1
01_EN_3P243521-1.indd 19
English
display screen 3 times.

The basic screen returns.
8-5 Press Cancel button in the error record
latest are displayed in order.
8-4 In the error record, 10 items from the
error record menu, and press Menu/

Enter button.
Error codes and unit No. can be
conrmed in the error record display
screen.
8-3 Select Remote controller record in the
menu, and press Menu/Enter button.

The error record menu screen is
displayed.
8-2 Select Error record in the eld setting

screen. Field setting menu is displayed.
<Basic screen>
Setting
Setting
Error
Return
Unit
01
02
03
04
Setting
Date
/ /
/ /
/ /
/ /
Remote controller record
Return
Remote controller record

Indoor unit record
Error record
Return
1/3
2/2
2/2
Time
:
:
:
:
Error record
Indoor status display
Outdoor status display
Fan forced operation ON
Main/Sub changeover
Filter element sign
OFF
Field setting
Unit No.
Latest record
8-4
8-5
8-3
8-2
8-1
20
9-7 Press Cancel button once.
button.
Setting details are determined and eld
setting menu screen returns.
9-6 Select Yes and press Menu/Enter
Setting conrmation screen is

displayed.
9-5 Press Menu/Enter button.
Numeric varies by using

(Up/
Down) button. Enter from the left end,
and blank digit should be left as - .
9-4 Enter the telephone number.
and press Menu/Enter button.
9-3 Select Register Service Contract ,
the eld setting menu, and press

Menu/Enter button. Register service
contract menu screen is displayed.
9-2 Select Register Service Contract in

screen.
Registration of the service contract.

<Basic screen>
Setting
Setting
Setting
Return
Setting
01234567890
Return
Return
None
Return

Field setting list
Group No. setting
Field setting
1/2
1/2
1/2
Return
Yes
Setting
No
9-6
<Setting conrmation screen>
9-5
9-4
9-3
9-2
9-1
2/3/2009 1:19:25 PM
English
9. Registration method of the service

contract
2/3/2009 1:19:24
01_EN_3P243521-1.indd
PM
20
19
8. Checking procedure of error record
Though
Please wait for a moment is displayed for 90 seconds at maximum after power-on, this does not mean a
failure. (Determine after 90 seconds.)
Display of
Please wait for a moment is turned on.
No display
Remote Controller
EDSG281001
Checking procedure of error record
Registration method of the service contract
3P243521-1
01_EN_3P243521-1.indd 21
English
10-2 Press Cancel button twice.
10-1
Setting
28C
Set temperature
Setting
Return
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
Contact address
012345678900
Setting
/000
/000
Return

Airflow Direction
Ventilation
Timer setting
MainMenu
1/2
<Main menu screen>
Return
Cool
21
11-4
11-2
11-3
11-1
22
(Up/Down) buttons to select

Language on the language changeover screen.
English/Deutsch/ Franais/Espaol/
Italiano/E/Nederlands/
Portugues/Pycc/rke
Pressing Menu/Enter button.
Setting details are conrmed and basic
screen returns.
12-2 Press
screen.
Main menu is displayed.
Select Language changeover in the
main menu, press Menu/Enter button.
12-2
12-1
Setting
Setting
Setting
No
<Basic screen>
Return
Yes
Clock setting
Return
00:00
Year 2008
Month 01
Day
01
Tuesday
Clock setting
Return
Setting status list
Clock setting
Language changeover
MainMenu
Setting
Return
Setting
English
Language changeover
Return
Convinient functions
Setting status list
Clock setting
Language changeover
MainMenu
2/2
<Main menu screen>
<Basic screen>
2/2
<Main menu screen>
<Basic screen>
12. Language changeover
If duration of power outage exceeds

48 hours, reset is needed.
button.
Setting details are conrmed and basic
screen returns.
11-4 Select Yes and press Menu/Enter
Setting conrmation screen is displayed.
11-3 Press Menu/Enter button.
by using
(Left/Right) button and
(Up/Down) button in
set by using
the clock setting screen. During the
button is pressed and held, numeric
changes continuously.
Day of the week is set automatically.
11-2 Select year, month, day and time
2/3/2009 1:19:25
01_EN_3P243521-1.indd
PM
22
Registered details
are displayed.
screen.
Select Clock setting in the main
menu, press Menu/Enter button.
<Basic screen>
screen.
Select Service Contact/Model Info in
the main menu, and press Menu/Enter
button.
11. Clock Setting
10. Conrmation of registered details
2/3/2009 1:19:26 PM
English
EDSG281001
Remote Controller
Confirmation of registered details
Clock setting
Language changeover
335
Remote Controller
2.4
EDSG281001
Wireless Remote Controller

Model series
Name of option
Remote controller
Wireless type
FCQ
FFQ
FHQ
FBQ
BRC7F632F
BRC7E531W
BRC7EA66
BRC4C62
Figure 1
1-1
1
ON OFF
8
3
DOWN
1-2
10
ON OFF
UP
TEMP
H
FAN
L TIME
11
C
UP
hr.
DOWN
FAN
hr.
13
RESERVE CANCEL
hr.
5
TIMER
12
MODE
15
hr.
TEST
7
SWING
14
16
TEST
TEST
17
3P107422-11J
Figure 2 (explanation of receiver)

FCQ
FFQ
22
23
21
20
22
23
19
18
18
19
20
21
3P107422-1S
3P107422-11J
FHQ
FBQ (separate type)

18
20
22 23
22
19
21
23
19
21 20
18
3P107422-8S
336
3P107422-21S
EDSG281001
Remote Controller
Names and functions of the operating section (fig. 1, 2)
DISPLAY
SION)
(SIGNAL TRANSMIS-
This lights up when a signal is being transmitted.

DISPLAY
(OPERATION MODE)
DISPLAY
(SET TEMPERATURE)
This display shows the set temperature.

hr.
DISPLAY hr.
(PROGRAMMED
TIME)
4
This display shows PROGRAMMED TIME
of the system start or stop.
5 DISPLAY
6
DISPLAY
(AIR FLOW FLAP)
OPERATION MODE SELECTOR BUTTON

15 Press this button to select OPERATION
MODE.
FILTER SIGN RESET BUTTON
2 This display shows the current OPERATION MODE. For cooling only type,
(Auto) and
(Heating) are not
installed.
3
14 AIR FLOW DIRECTION ADJUST BUTTON
(FAN SPEED)
The display shows the set fan speed.
16 Refer to the section of MAINTENANCE in

the operation manual attached to the
indoor unit.
INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION BUTTON
17 This button is used only by qualified service persons for maintenance purposes.
EMERGENCY OPERATION SWITCH
18 This switch is readily used if the remote
controller does not work.
RECEIVER
19 This receives the signals from the remote
controller.
OPERATING INDICATOR LAMP (Red)

20 This lamp stays lit while the air
conditioner runs. It flashes when the unit is
in trouble.
21
TEST
DISPLAY
(INSPECTION/ TEST OPERATION)
7 When the INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION BUTTON is pressed, the display
shows the system mode is in.
ON/OFF BUTTON
8 Press the button and the system will start.
Press the button again and the system will
stop.
FAN SPEED CONTROL BUTTON
9 Press this button to select the fan speed,
HIGH or LOW, of your choice.
TEMPERATURE SETTING BUTTON

10 Use this button for SETTING TEMPERATURE (Operates with the front cover of the
remote controller closed.)
PROGRAMMING TIMER BUTTON

Use this button for programming START
11 and/or STOP time. (Operates with the
front cover of the remote controller
opened.)
12 TIMER MODE START/STOP BUTTON
13 TIMER RESERVE/CANCEL BUTTON
22
TIMER INDICATOR LAMP (Green)

This lamp stays lit while the timer is set.
AIR FILTER CLEANING TIME
INDICATOR LAMP (Red)
Lights up when it is time to clean the air filter.
DEFROST LAMP (Orange)
23 Lights up when the defrosting operation

has started. (For cooling only type this
lamp does not turn on.)
NOTES
For the sake of explanation, all indications are
shown on the display in Figure 1 contrary to
actual running situations.
Fig. 1-2 shows the remote controller with the
front cover opened.
If the air filter cleaning time indicator lamp
lights up, clean the air filter as explained in the
operation manual provided with the indoor
unit.
After cleaning and reinstalling the air filter,
press the filter sign reset button on the remote
controller. The air filter cleaning time indicator lamp on the receiver will go out.
The Defrost Lamp will flash when the power is
turned on. This is not a malfunction.
C : 3P107422-11J
337
FCQ
EDSG281001
3. FCQ
3.1
BYCP125K-W1 Decoration Panel
1. PRECAUTIONS
Refer also to the installation manual attached to the indoor unit.
2. ACCESSORIES
Installation manual.
3. NOTE TO INSTALLER
Be sure to instruct the customer how to properly operate the system showing him/her the attached
operation manual.
2. PREPARATION OF DECORATION PANEL

For this unit, you are able to select air flow directions. To discharge air in 2 or 3 directions, it is necessary
to purchase optional blocking pad kit.
HANDLING OF DECORATION PANELS
Never place the panel facing down nor lean it against a wall nor leave it on a projecting object.
Never touch or put pressure on the swing flap.
(The swing flap may malfunction)
(1) Remove the suction grille from the decoration panel.
1 Press the lever on the suction grille and lift the lever side. (Refer to Fig. 1)
2 Detach the suction grille from the decoration panel by lifting the grille up approximately 45 degrees.
(Refer to Fig. 2)
3 Remove the transporting cardboard (in 4 locations) from the main unit. (Refer to Fig. 3)
4 Remove the transporting tape (in 4 locations) on the back of the suction grille. (Refer to Fig. 4)
Corner section
decoration cover
Suction grille
Decoration
panel
Lever
45
Swing flaps
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
1
3PA64319-13Q
338
EDSG281001
FCQ
(2) Remove the corner section decoration cover.

Lift the four corner decoration covers in the direction of the arrow and remove. (Refer to Fig. 5)
Cardboard
Tape
Corner section
decoration cover
Suction grille
Rear side of the suction grille

Fig. 3
Fig. 5
Fig. 4
3. INSTALLATION OF THE DECORATION PANEL TO THE INDOOR UNIT BODY

Refer to the installation manual attached to the indoor unit for the installation of the indoor unit.
(1) Match the PIPING SIDE and DRAIN SIDE displays on the decoration panel with the position of the piping section and drain section on the indoor unit.
(2) Install the decoration panel
1 Temporarily install the decoration panel to the indoor unit by hanging the temporary latch of the decoration panel to the hook of the indoor unit body. (2 locations)
2 Hook the four mounting brackets on the corner sections of the decoration panels onto the hooks around
the main indoor unit body.
(Make sure at this time that the swing motor lead wire does not get caught between the decoration panel
and the main unit.)
3 Screw all 4 hexagon head screws located right beneath the latches in approximately 5 mm. (Panel will rise)
4 Adjust the decoration panel by turning it to the arrowed direction in Fig. 6 so that the ceiling opening is
completely covered.
Drain
section
Mounting bracket
Piping section
Hook
Hook
(4 locations)
Temporary latch (2 locations)

PIPING SIDE marking
DRAIN SIDE marking
3 5
4
Fig. 6
2
3PA64319-13Q
339
FCQ
EDSG281001
5 Tighten the screws until the thickness of the sealing material between the decoration panel and the
indoor unit body reduces to 5-8 mm.
Sealing material
Indoor unit
5 - 8mm
Ceiling
material
Swing flaps
Decoration panel
[ PRECAUTIONS ]
Inproper screwing of the screws may cause the
troubles shown in Fig. 7 Screw properly.
Air leak
Air leak from ceiling
Contamination
Dew formation, dew dripping

Fig. 7
If gap is still left between the ceiling and the decoration panel after screwing the screws, readjust the indoor
unit body height. (Refer to Fig. 8)
Adjustment of the indoor unit body

height from the holes in the corner
of the decoration panel is possible
if the indoor unit is kept leveled and
the drain piping, etc. is unaffected.
No gap is allowed
Fig. 8
(3) Wiring of the decoration panel (Refer to Fig. 9)
6 Remove the electric components box lid.
7 Connect the connectors for swing flap motor lead wire installed on the decoration panel.
8 Replace the electric components box lid reversing the procedure to remove it.
Make sure that the swing flap motor lead wire is not caught between the electric components box and its lid,
and between the indoor unit body and the decoration panel.
3
3PA64319-13Q
340
EDSG281001
FCQ
7 Swing flap motor lead wire

Decoration panel side
Connector
Connect securely
Indoor unit side
Hooks
Swing flap motor lead wire

<Wiring Diagram>
(The orientation of the indoor unit is changed
for purposes of description.)
Screw
(2 locations)
6 8 Electric
components box lid
Loosen the two screws, slide the cover

in the direction of the arrows,
and disengage from the hooks.
Fig. 9
4. INSTALLATION OF SUCTION GRILLE AND SERVICE COVER

(1) Install the suction grille
Install by reversing the procedure shown in PREPARATION OF DECORATION PANEL.
It is possible to install the suction grille in 4 directions by turning the suction grille.
Change the direction when adjusting the direction of the suction grille of multiple units or in meeting
customers demands.
Install the suction grill.
1 Tilt the suction grill at a
45 angle and fix 3 hooks
to the decoration panel.
Decoration
panel body
Hook up the strings of the suction grill to the fixtures of the

body corners (2 places) as shown below.
NOTE:
String
When mounting the
suction grill, strings may
be caught in the grill.
Be sure that
strings do not
Suction grill
hang out of the
suction grill edges.
String
Slowly push the suction

grill up and lastly, ensure
the grill is fastened to the
decoration panel body,
keeping pressing 2 knobs.
It should not
hang outside.
Fixture
String
Fixture
String
When installing the grill,
change the direction of
the strings.
Suction grill
Suction grill
NOTE :
Be careful not to get swing flap motor lead wire get caught when installing the suction grille.
C : 3PA64319-13Q
341
FCQ
EDSG281001
(2) Install the corner section decoration cover.

1 Attach the string of the corner section decoration cover to the pin of the decoration panel. (Refer to Fig. 10)
2 Install the corner section decoration cover over the decoration panel. (Refer to Fig. 11)
Hole
Hole
Attach by inserting the
five tabs on the corner
section decoration cover
Tab
into the holes on the
Tab decoration panel.
Hole
Tab
Fig. 10
Fig. 11
4
C : 3PA64319-13Q
342
EDSG281001
3.2
FCQ
KDBH55K160F Sealing Member of Air Discharge Outlet
KDBH55K160 / KDBH55K160F
Dimensions
Unit:mm
Sealing materials for long air outlets (Polyethylene foam t10): 2 pieces
Sealing materials for horizontal blades (Polyethylene foam t10): 8 pieces
Slit
Sealing materials for air outlets at the corner (Polyethylene foam t10): 1 piece for each
Tape for sealing materials

for long air outlets (Non-woven fabric t0.6): 2

for air outlets at the corner (Non-woven fabric t0.6): 3

for air outlets at the corner (Non-woven fabric t0.6): 1
Slit
Side insulation plate (NB foam t10) : 2
Antisweat material (Flocking tape): See right
Applicable part number
Q'ty and colour

4, grey
4 for each, Dark grey or black
Antisweat material (Flocking tape): See right
Applicable part number
Q'ty and colour

4, grey
4 for each, Dark grey or black
J : D3K05112
343
FCQ
EDSG281001
Installation
Precautions
Use this manual with the installation manuals attached to the indoor unit's main body and decoration panel.
When other separately-sold products are mounted, the 3-way blow and 2-way blow may not be selected.
For details, refer to the Engineering Data or catalog.
Parts content
Name
Check the following parts.

Corner air outlet Corner air outlet Corner air outlet Corner air outlet Corner air outlet
sealing material A sealing material B1 sealing material B2 sealing material C sealing material D
Longitudinal air outlet sealing material
Number of pieces
Shape/Symbol
Absorbent (Inside 1)
B2
B1
Longitudinal air outlet

Corner air outlet
Corner air outlet
tape for fixing the sealing material tape for fixing the sealing material tape for fixing the sealing material
2
Absorbent (Inside 2)
Absorbent (Outside)
Absorbent (Bridge centre)
Absorbent (Bridge outside)
10 Use only classes 28 to 56
Name
Number of pieces
13
The sticking procedure for absorbent

differs with classes 28 to 56 and with
classes 63 to 160.
(Refer to 2 Sticking of absorbent to air outlet.)
14
Shape/Symbol
24mm328mm
24mm410mm
Name
Side insulator plate
Number of pieces
24mm290mm
8mm505mm
47mm47mm
Horizontal
blade sealant
Horizontal blade absorbent

With 4-blade
KDBH55K160F
16
With 8-blade (2 colours)

KDBH55K160
With 4-blade
KDBH55K160F
18
17
Shape/Symbol
KDBH55K160, two colours are available,

( With
gray and black, matching the blade colours. )
100mm1480mm
With 8-blade (2 colours)

KDBH55K160
8 pieces
19
15mm200mm
KDBH55K160, two colours are available,

( With
gray and black, matching the blade colours. )
10mm95mm
Blow Direction Selection and Sealing Material Mounting

(1) Blow direction selection
Depending on the installation location, select a blow direction from the table below. For the setting position number, refer to
For the selection of installation location, refer to the installation manual attached to the indoor unit's main body.
Field Setting .
Precautions Blow direction patterns other than those shown in the figure below cannot be selected. (Condensation may occur.)
3
Air outlet 3
Air outlet A
Air outlet C
Pipe side Drain side
4-way
Air outlet B1, B2

Air outlet 2
4-way
3-way
Drain side
1
3-way
Air outlet 1
Air outlet 4
2
Air outlet D
2-way
Pipe side
1
2-way
3
(2) Matching with the corner air outlets A to D that are to be blocked, stick the sealing material to the tape for fixing the sealing material.
(Stick the sealing material so that the sealing material comes to the positions shown in the schematic diagram.)
Sealing material 3
Sealing material 4
(3) Stick the sealing material that was prepared in

(2) to the air outlet of indoor unit main body.
Sealing material 2
B1
Release paper
A
(12
B2
(12
2
(12
Procedure 1
Remove the
release paper.
)
(12
Air outlet B1
the indoor unit's main

( When
)
body belongs to classes 28 to 56
Tape for fixing the sealing material 8
Air outlet B2
the indoor unit's main body

( When
)
belongs to classes 63 to 160
Sealing material 5
(12
Air outlet A
Stick the sealing material to the

tape for fixing the sealing material.
Procedure 2
Sealing material 6
Air outlet
(12)
With air outlets B to D , using the same procedure,

stick the sealing material to the tape for fixing the sealing material as shown in the figure.
Precautions
)
(12
(12
(12
Air outlet C
Indoor unit main body
Air outlet D
The sealing material has a directional property. Be sure to stick the sealing material to the tape for fixing the sealing material so that the printed number of outlet to be blocked becomes visible.
When blocking both the air outlet 1 and air outlet D , start the sticking of sealing material with the air outlet D .
(4) Matching the longitudinal air outlet numbered 1 to 4 that are to be blocked, prepare the sealing material and tape for fixing the sealing material.
Cut both the sealing material and tape for fixing the sealing material along the perforation (dotted line).
Stick the sealing material to the tape for fixing the sealing material.
(Stick so that the sealing material comes to the centre of tape for fixing the sealing material.)
Example) When blocking air outlet 2 or 3
(5) Stick the sealing material that was prepared in

(4) to the air outlet of indoor unit main body.
Sealing material 1
Procedure 2
Procedure 1
Cut off
Remove the
release paper.
Release paper
Procedure 3
<Sealing material treatment> Stick the sealing material so that it comes

to the centre of tape for fixing the sealing material.
Air outlet 1
<Mounting to air outlet>
When blocking the air outlet 1 , the sealing material preparation is not necessary.
Precautions
The sealing material has a directional property. Be sure to stick the sealing material to
the tape for fixing the sealing material so that the printed number of outlet to be blocked becomes visible.
J : 1P177350A
344
EDSG281001
FCQ
Sticking of Absorbent to Air Outlet
Stick the absorbent indicated in the table below to the air outlet that was not blocked in
according to the procedure shown in the figure below.
If the sticking of absorbent is omitted, condensation may occur.

To positions where the absorbent is already stuck,
the sticking of absorbent is not necessary.
Precautions
Classes 63 to 160
Classes 28 to 56
Air outlet 1
Air outlet 2
Absorbent 10
13
14
Air outlet 3
Absorbent 10
13
14
Air outlet 4
Absorbent 12
15
Total 3 pieces
15
Absorbent 11
Total 4 pieces
13
14
Total 3 pieces
Total 2 pieces
Classes 28 to 56
e
ing
10
fe
re
nc
13
re
Air outlet 3
St
ing
en
Stic
kin
g re
ce
ren
refe
10
St
ick
ing
re
fer
ce
10 13 Sticking reference
(Upper surface)
re
fer
14
king
Stic
en
ick
ick
St
13
ce
13 Sticking reference
(Upper surface)
fere
10
nce
10
14
14
10
13
Sticking reference
(Upper surface)
ce
en e)
c
fer
re ren
ing efe
ick tre r
t
S
en
4
C
1
(
13
ce
14
king
Stic
n
fere
15
14
re
15
St
(C ickin
en g
tre refe
re re
fer nc
en e
ce
)
View
Air outlet 2
15
k
Stic
re
ing
fere
S
(C tick
en ing
tre re
re fer
fe en
re ce
nc
e)
View
nce
(Upper surface)
15
12
fere
nce
(5)
g re
(5)
12
kin
Stic
Cross section -
15
Air outlet 1
15
Air outlet 4
Sticking not necessary
Cross section -
Classes 63 to 160
13
king
Stic
refe
renc
11
g
ckin
Sti
ick
ing
re
fer
en
c
Air outlet 3
14
St
11 13 Sticking reference
(Upper surface)
ce
ren
refe
11
14
Air outlet 2
13
14
St
(C ickin
en g
tre refe
re re
fer nc
en e
ce
)
View
Air outlet 1
Air outlet 4
continuted on back side
J : 1P177350A
345
FCQ
EDSG281001
Sticking of Insulator to Indoor Unit Main Body

For safety, be sure to shut off power supply before starting the insulator sticking operation, decoration panel mounting operation, and connecting of connectors for swinging.
Precautions
If the sticking of insulator is omitted, condensation may occur.
Stick the side insulator plate 16 according to the figure below.
Side insulator plate 16
For a wiring takeoff point with two sections, make a slit on

the side insulator plate 16 as shown in the figure below,
then route the wiring.

Wiring
Wiring
Slit
Slit
Superimpose the surplus section.
Wiring takeoff point
Sticking of Absorbent to Panel Horizontal Blade

Perform the operation on soft cloth to prevent damage to the panel.
Perform sticking for the horizontal blades of all air outlets.
Do not apply force to the horizontal blade. (Application of force may lead to horizontal blade
swing failure.)
Stick the horizontal blade sealing pad 19 to the backside of the blade. (For both left and right)
According to the figure below, stick the horizontal blade absorbent 17 and 18 as well as the horizontal blade
sealing pad 19 .
(With KDBH55K160, stick the horizontal blade absorbent with matching blade colour.)
Precautions When the sticking of absorbent and sealant is omitted, condensation may occur.
1 Stick the horizontal blade absorbent 17 in line with the blade shape to the front face of the horizontal blade.
Horizontal blade
Horizontal blade absorbent 17
Horizontal blade sealing pad 19
A
A
Using the base of the rib as a reference, stick without leaving any gap.
Rib
Horizontal blade
Horizontal blade
Front face
Stick the horizontal blade absorbent 18 in between the horizontal blade sealing pad 19 .
Backside
A-A cross section

Horizontal blade sealing pad 19
B-B cross section
Field Setting
Depending on the installation status of the indoor unit's main body, the field setting needs to be performed by remote control operation.
Perform the setting by switching among the following three items: "Mode number", "Setting switch number", and "Setting position number".
The setting procedure and operation method are described in "How to perform field setting" attached to the remote control.
(1) Setting by number of air outlets used
While referring to "How to perform field setting" attached to the remote control, perform the setting according to the table
in the right.
Also, when the corner air outlet is blocked with 4-way blow, set the wind direction slightly downward.
(Note) When the installation height becomes higher than the standard, the setting by ceiling height in (2) becomes
necessary.
[Setting content] (Setting by number of air outlets used)
(2) Setting by ceiling height

For the ceiling height, refer to the guidelines of ceiling height and number of air outlets used, then perform the setting for
each air outlet used according to the table below.
[Setting content] (Setting for when corner air outlet is blocked with 4-way blow)
(Guidelines of ceiling height and number of air outlets used)
Ceiling height
3-way blow
2-way blow
Standard
Types 28 to 90
Types 112 to 160
All-around blow 4-way blow 3-way blow 2-way blow
All-around blow 4-way blow 3-way blow 2-way blow
13 (23)
02
03
Setting position number

4
02
03
[Setting content] (Setting by ceiling height)

Mode number
2.7m or less 3.1m or less 3.0m or less 3.5m or less
Standard
High ceiling 1 3.0m or less 3.4m or less 3.3m or less 3.8m or less
High ceiling 1
High ceiling 2 3.5m or less 4.0m or less 3.5m or less
4.2m or less 4.5m or less 4.2m or less
High ceiling 2
Standard
13 (23)
(Wind direction) Mode number

Slightly downward
Number of air outlets used

Indoor unit
(Number of air outlets used) Mode number Setting switch number Setting position number
Setting position number

01
13 (23)
02
03
Values for ceiling height are provided as reference.
J : 1P191031A
346
EDSG281001
3.3
FCQ
KDBP55H160FA Panel Spacer
KDBP55H160FA
Model
Item
KDBP55H160FA
Exterior
Fresh White
Material
Outside frame: Resin

Insulation: Polyethylene foam
Fixture : 4 pieces
Screws : 1 set
Accessories
Sealing material : 1 set

Mass (Weight)
Using the panel spacer in areas of the ceiling

with limited space makes it possible to install
the air conditioner.
Hides the gap between the decoration panel
and the ceiling.
kg
1.2
Caution
When the panel spacer is installed, it is not possible to have 2-way air outlet.
Refer to the installation manual for both indoor unit and the panel spacer for
its installation.
Dimensions
Unit:mm
4-5 Hole
J : D3K04626
347
FCQ
EDSG281001
Installation
C : 1P136564E
348
EDSG281001
FCQ
1P136564E
349
FCQ
3.4
EDSG281001
KDDP55K160(K) Fresh Air Intake Kit (Chamber Type)
KDDP55K160 (without T-shape, without Fan)
Model
KDDP55K160
Item
Fresh air intake method
Fresh air intake by air conditioning fan

150
Diameter of connection duct

Mass (Weight)
kg
4.5
Dimensions
Unit:mm
Number
Inspection hole o 450 or more
(See note 2)
Name
Decoration panel
Suction chamber
Connecting port chamber (right)
Connecting port chamber (left)
Description
Accessories
Screws (M512) : 4 pieces
Sealing materials for air outlets at the corner
Tape for fixing sealing materials for air outlets at the corner
Installation manual
(See note 2)
How to establish an inspection hole
(Note 7)
Note)
1. Maximum length of the duct is 4 meters.
2. When installing this kit, an inspection hole is required
(in order to maintain this kit). Establish an inspection holes on either side.
3. This kit is field assembly.
4. Install the hanging fixing for the T joint. Otherwise the load from T-shape pipe
assembly, etc., could create a gap between the indoor unit and suction chamber.
5. When mounting the duct fan, be sure to use the wiring modification adaptor to
interlock with the indoor unit fan.
6. With the intake wind volume, 10% or less of the "H" wind volume of the indoor unit
is recommended.
7. This graph shows values from the inlet of the T joint through that of the
indoor unit when KDDP55K160K (with a T joint) is connected.
Static pressure in the chamber
Resistance in the passage inside the chamber
Airflow rate
BYCP125K-W1
Indoor unit
Classes 28 to 90
Classes 112 to 160
Mountable Indoor unit models

SkyAir
FCQ(N)71K / 100K / 125K / 140KVEA

F C Q 7 1 K / 1 0 0 K / 1 2 5 K / 1 4 0 K V LT
JC : D3K05058
350
EDSG281001
FCQ
KDDP55K160K (with T-shape, without Fan)
Model
KDDP55K160K
Item
Fresh air intake method
Fresh air intake by air conditioning fan

150

Mass (Weight)
kg
6.5
Dimensions
Unit:mm
Number
(See note 2)
Flexible duct
(Accessory)
Name
Decoration panel
Suction chamber
Connecting port chamber (right)
Connecting port chamber (left)
Description
Accessories
Screws (M512) : 4 pieces
Sealing materials for air outlets at the corner
Tape for fixing sealing materials for air outlets at the corner
Installation manual
(See note 2)
How to establish an inspection hole
T joint
(Accessory)
Suction duct
(Accessory)
Resistance in the passage inside the chamber
(Note 7)
Hanging fitting (Field supplied)

(See note 4)
Note)
1. Maximum length of the duct is 4 meters.
2. When installing this kit, an inspection hole is required
(in order to maintain this kit). Establish an inspection
holes on either side.
3. This kit is field assembly.
4. Install the hanging fixing for the T joint. Otherwise the load
from T-shape pipe assembly, etc., could create a gap between
the indoor unit and suction chamber.
5. When mounting the duct fan, be sure to use the wiring modification
adaptor to interlock with the indoor unit fan.
6. With the intake wind volume, 10% or less of the "H" wind volume
of the indoor unit is recommended.
7. This graph shows values from the inlet of the T joint through that of the
indoor unit when KDDP55K160K (with a T joint) is connected.
Static pressure in the chamber
Plate band (Accessory)
Airflow rate
BYCP125K-W1
Indoor unit
Classes 28 to 90
Classes 112 to 160
Mountable Indoor unit models

SkyAir
FCQ(N)71K / 100K / 125K / 140KVEA

F C Q 7 1 K / 1 0 0 K / 1 2 5 K / 1 4 0 K V LT
JC : D3K05059
351
FCQ
EDSG281001
Installation
Caution
After thoroughly reading these "Safety precautions", properly perform the installation.
For the installation parts, accessory parts and specified components must always be used.
If the specified components are not used, the kit may fall or an air leak may occur.
After the completion of installation, perform a test run to check that no abnormality is present.
Combination table
Model name
Installable indoor unit / Panel model name

SkyAir
FCQ(N)71K/100K/125K/140KVEA
FCQ71K/100K/125K/140KVLT
Panel
BYCP125K-W1
KDDP55K160 (K)
Parts content Check the following parts. (Shaded part

Name
Suction chamber
Connecting chamber (left)
Recommendations
This product can be mounted to a ceiling mounted cassette-type air conditioner
<Round flow>.
According to the table to the left, check the model name of the indoor unit, then mount the kit.
At the time of mounting, also refer to the installation manual for the indoor unit and to the
one for the decoration panel.
When mounting the duct fan, be sure to use the wiring modification adaptor [KRP1C63] to
interlock with the indoor unit fan.
For the intake wind volume, 10% or less of the indoor unit wind volume of "H" is
recommended.
When the intake wind volume becomes excessive, operation noise may become louder or
the intake temperature detection of the indoor unit may be affected.
Be sure to mount the supplied sensor assembly.
<For the duct used for field connection, those in the table below are recommended.>
Part number
Flexible duct
(Nominal diameter 150)
K-FDS151D (1m)
K-FDS152D (2m)
K-FDS153D (3m)
K-FDS154D (4m)
is included in a different package.)
Connecting chamber (right)
Corner air outlet

sealing material
Shape
Corner air outlet tape for

fixing the sealing material
Name
Part name
Mounting screw 7 Sensor assembly
Clamp
10
Mounting screw
(for sensor)
T joint
11
14
Partition plate
Shape
Number KDDP55K160
of pieces KDDP55K160K
Flexible duct
12
Sealing pad
13
1
1
Installation manual
Number KDDP55K160
of pieces KDDP55K160K
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
M5 12
4
4
2
2
1
1
1
1
(this document)
1
1
Selection of Installation Location and Establishment of Inspection Opening

(1) Refer to the figure below to select the installation location.
(2) Establish an inspection opening.
Inspection opening ( 450 or more)

(Refer to *2.)
Duct (arrangement at site)
*1
Inspection opening
opening
455mm (ceiling
dimension)
(mm)
Indoor unit
classes 28 to 90
306
classes 112 to 160
348
*1. Install the suspension bracket for

the T joint section.
Because of the load from T joint,
etc., a gap may be created in
between the indoor unit and
suction chamber.
*2. Establish an inspection opening ( 450 or more).

Establish an inspection opening to either side.
Inspection opening ( 450 or more)
725
(Refer to *2.)
BYCP125K-W1
Mounting of Sensor Assemblies and Suction Chamber

* When the indoor unit main body is already installed, perform the following operations, complying with precautions below.
Shut off power supply before performing operation.
Remove the decoration panel from the indoor unit main body.
(For details, refer to the installation manual attached to the decoration panel.)
<Mounting of sensor assembly>
<Mounting of suction chamber>
(1) According to the installation manual attached to the indoor unit main
body, remove the cover of the control box.
(2) Using the supplied screws, tighten the sensor assembly together with
the bell mouth to the indoor unit main body.
(Mount without pinching the float switch lead wire.)
(3) Remove the connector (X16A) of the existing sensor from the PC
board of the indoor unit main body.
(4) Connect the lead wire of the mounted sensor assembly to the
connector (X16A) on the PC board of the indoor unit main body as
shown in the figure below.
(5) As shown in the figure below, fix the lead wire using the supplied
clamp.
(6) After all the wiring is completed, fit the control box cover according to
the installation manual attached to the main body.
(7) Making sure that the control box cover is covered with the partition
plate 14 , tighten these together using the screws on the cover. (Hook
the partition plate tab onto the cover.)
Sensor assembly 7
Bell mouth
Fixing screw 9
(2) Using the supplied
screws, tighten the
sensor assembly
together with the bell
mouth.
(5) Tighten with the
existing wiring.
* Figure shows an example where the indoor unit main body is newly
installed.
(1) Stick the corner air outlet tape for fixing the sealing material 5 to
the corner air outlet sealing material 4 , then stick it to the air outlet
Figure 2
of the indoor unit main body. (2 positions) Figure 1
(2) Mount the suction chamber 1 to the indoor unit main body using
the hook (4 positions). Figure 3 to Figure 5
For the fixing method of the hook, refer to Figure 4 , then mount at
4 positions.
* Mount so that the contours of the indoor unit main body and suction
chamber match. Figure 4
Figure 6
)
(12
(5) Tighten with the float switch

lead wire of the indoor unit
main body.
To Figure 4
Sensor assembly 7
Remove the
release paper.
(12
Indoor unit
main body
Procedure 2
Figure 2 For 2 positions
Sensor assembly
Refrigerant piping
|PS<
Air outlet
(3) Disconnect the connector of

the existing sensor.
Hook
(4 positions)
Stick the sealing material to the tape for

fixing the sealing material. (2 pieces)
X16A
WHITE
Procedure 1
Clamp 8
* The figure
shows SkyAir
Control box cover

(1) Remove the control box
cover. (Screws at 2 positions)
Figure 3
Release paper Suction chamber 1

A
(4) Connect the connector of the

mounted sensor assembly.
Partition plate 14
(7) Using screws, tighten the
partition plate together with
the control box cover so that
the box cover is covered
with the partition plate.
Corner air outlet sealing material 4
Figure 1
Float
switch
lead wire
Control box cover

Suspension bracket
(4 positions)
Bell mouth
JC : 3K017588D
352
EDSG281001
FCQ
Figure 4 Mounting status
Figure 5 Status after mounting

Hook
Suction chamber 1
Figure 6 Drawing of mounting at completion
Hook
Hook
Suction chamber 1
Suspension bracket
Match the contour
Fixing method of hook

Suspension bracket
Suspension bracket
Installation of Indoor Unit Main Body and Suction Chamber

Install the indoor unit main body and suction chamber.
At the time of installation, perform the engineering work according to the installation
manual attached to the indoor unit main body. (For the installation height, refer to the figure
to the right.)
When mounting the suction chamber to the existing indoor unit main body, change the
installation height of the indoor unit main body to height in the figure to the right.
(mm)
Suspension bracket
BYCP125K-W1
Indoor unit
main body
185
Mounting of Connecting Chamber and Connection of Flexible Duct

Suction chamber
Ceiling surface
Mount the connecting chamber. (1 piece each for left and right, a total of 2 pieces) Figure 7
(1) Press the square hole area of the connecting chamber 2 ( 3 ) into the hook
section (tab) of the suction chamber 1 . (2 positions)
(2) Using the supplied screws 6 , fix the connecting chamber. (2 positions)
Connecting chamber left (right) 2 ( 3 )
Square hole
(Procedure 1)
Press the square hole area of the
connecting chamber 2 ( 3 ) into the
hook section of suction chamber 1 .
(2 positions each)
Screw 6
Outside air inlet
<How to Tight Sealing Pad>

(1)
7
(2)
(3)
(4)
Flexible duct
Split pin
Suction chamber 1
wrong
correct
(Procedure 2)
Using the supplied screws 6 , fix the
connecting chamber. (2 positions each)
Figure 7 Mounting of connecting chamber
(This figure shows the connecting chamber (left)
.)
(1) Wrap the sealing pad

to the position to be
tightened.
(2) Insert the tip of the

band through the
gap of the split pin,
then lightly tighten
by hand.
Precautions
Drawing of mounting
at completion
(3) Using a standard

tool (driver, pliers,
etc.), turn the split
pin to the direction
shown in the figure
to tighten the band.
(4) This completes

the mounting.
Because the split pin has a structure to prevent counter rotation, be careful with the
turning direction. (When a counter rotation is forced, the ratchet will be damaged, and
the tightening force will be weakened.)
In case of KDDP55K160K
(3) Connect the connecting chamber and T joint. Figure 8
Flexible duct 11
Connecting chamber (right) 3
T joint 10
Duct (field supplied)
Hanging band for duct

(field supplied)
(150)
(4) Mount the supplied installation pattern paper to the indoor unit by using screws to
cure the indoor unit.
(Refer to the installation manual of the indoor unit main body.)
(Refer to the figure below.)
Installation pattern paper
(Mounting of installation
(Supplied with the indoor unit
pattern paper)
main body)
Screw
(Supplied with the indoor unit
main body)
Sealing pad 12
Connecting chamber (left) 2
Insert the flexible duct
until the base of the
connecting chamber.
Figure 8
Duct Connection
To prevent applying weight to the

connecting chamber, hang the T
joint using the hanging band for
the duct.
Complete all the refrigerant and drain piping works for the indoor unit main body.
<<Duct: Nominal diameter 150>>
(1) Connect the duct to the duct connection area.

(2) Wrap the connection area with vinyl tape, etc., (arrangement at site) to prevent an air leak.
Precautions
a) Extreme bending
b) Multiple bending
c) Reduction of connecting duct diameter
For the duct, be sure to apply the insulation treatment to prevent condensation.
Do not perform duct manipulations described in the figure to the right.
Beware that, in accordance with the local law, there may be cases where the use of a nonflammable duct is
compulsory.
When a duct goes through fire protection areas including a fire proof structure, beware that, in accordance with the local law, it may be required to establish a damper or to build a
structure that is not detrimental to fire protection.
When penetrating a wooden construction wall with a metal duct, apply electrical insulation to the duct and wall.
Mount the outside duct so that it has a downslope toward the outside, and prevent rainwater from leaking in with a hood, etc. (Gradient of 1/100 to 1/50)
To prevent the intrusion of small animals, such as birds, and bugs, be sure to attach a netting to sections open to outside air.
To protect the heat exchanger of the indoor unit, be sure to attach an air filter to sections open to outside air.
Mounting of Decoration Panel

After temporarily hooking the decoration panel, pass the swing motor lead wire, which is coming out from the decoration panel, through the wiring hole of the suction chamber.
However, when used in combination with the air purifier unit or streamer deodorization unit, perform wiring without routing through the wiring hole.
Mount the decoration panel according to the installation manual attached to the decoration panel.
Suction chamber 1
Wiring hole
Swing motor lead wire: Route from the panel side to the
suction chamber 1 .
(After temporarily hooking the decoration panel, pass
through the wiring hole.)
With an air purifier unit or

streamer deodorization unit
With wireless unit

For details on connection method, refer to the installation manual
attached to the wireless remote control kit (sold separately).
Decoration panel
JC : 3K017588D
353
FCQ
EDSG281001
KDDP55K160 (without T joint, without fan)
KDDP55K160K (with T joint, without fan)
354
EDSG281001
3.5
FCQ
KDDP55X160 Fresh Air Intake Kit (Direct Installation Type)
KDDP55X160
Model
KDDP55X160
Item
Material
Hot-dip zinc-coated carbon steel sheet

100
Insulation material retainer plate : 1

Insulation material : 1 set
Accessories
Mounting screws : 4
Dimensions
Unit:mm
98
12
67
137
124
4 5 Hole (cyclotomic)
J : D3K04240A
355
FCQ
EDSG281001
Installation
Precautions
This kit can be mounted to a ceiling mounted cassette-type air conditioner.

When using this kit, a duct (nominal diameter: 100) is required separately.
Beware that, in accordance with the local law, there may be cases where the use of a nonflammable duct is compulsory.
When a duct goes through fire protection areas including a fire proof structure, beware that, in accordance with the local law,
it may be required to establish a damper or to build a structure that is not detrimental to fire protection.
When penetrating a wooden construction wall with a metal duct, apply electrical insulation to the duct and wall.
Mount the outside duct so that it has a downslope toward the outside, and prevent rainwater from leaking in.
(Gradient of 1/100 to 1/50)
To prevent the intrusion of small animals, such as birds, and bugs, be sure to attach a netting to sections open to
outside air.
Parts content Check the following parts.

Name
1 Duct flange 2 Mounting screws 3 Duct flange insulator
Number of pieces
1
4
1
4 Main body opening insulator 5 Sealing pad retainer 6 Installation manual

1
1
1
Shape
M412
Tools needed for mounting
Phillips-type screwdriver, nippers, and cutter, etc.
Mounting of Duct Flange

1) Cut off the side plate of the indoor unit main body along the dowel hole without damaging
the internal insulator. Figure 1
Piping position
Drain pipe position
Internal insulator
Side plate
Cut off using

nippers, etc.
Slit
Side plate
Figure 1
2) Stick the main body's opening insulator 4 to the opening. Figure 2
Figure 2
Main body opening insulator 4
JC : 2P137676B
356
EDSG281001
FCQ
3) After mounting the duct flange 1 to the opening using the mounting screws 2 (M412, 4 pieces),
stick the duct flange insulator 3 . Figure 3
Duct flange 1
Mounting screws 2
(M412, 4 pieces)
Figure 3
Duct flange insulator 3
4) Before mounting the decoration panel, remove the insulator, and stick the sealing pad retainer 5 to
the indoor unit drain pan. Figure 4
Figure 4
Sealing pad retainer 5

Be careful not to
block the air outlet.
Insulator
Duct Connection
Duct: Nominal diameter 100
1) Connect the duct to the outside of the duct flange. Figure 5

2) After the connection, wrap the connection area with tape (field supplied) to prevent an air leak.
Duct flange 1
Wrap with tape to prevent an air leak.
Figure 5
Tape
Precautions
Perform insulation for all ducts.
Do not perform duct manipulations
shown to the right.
100 duct (field supplied)
a) Extreme bending
b) Multiple bending
c) Reduction of connecting
duct diameter
J : 2P137676B
357
FCQ
3.6
EDSG281001

High Efficiency Filter (Including Chamber)
KAFP556H80 / KAFP556H160
Dimensions
Unit:mm
50 (dimensions when mounted)
842
842
J : D3K04253
Caution
Field setting by remote controller is necessary
when the high efficiency filter is installed.
Model
Item
KAFP556H80
KAFP557H80
Initial
pressure loss
Pa
34 or less
Final pressure
loss
Pa
98 or less
Air flow rate
65 (colorimetric method)
m3/min
19
35
19
35
l/sec
317
583
317
583
Life
2,500
(dust concentration 0.15 mg/m3)
Filter element
1,800
(dust concentration 0.15 mg/m3)
Non-woven fabric of synthetic fiber
Number of sheets
included
Accessories
Mass (Weight)
KAFP557H160
Galvanized sheet iron.

Foam polystyrene.
Material
Average
efficiency
Sealing material : 2
kg
Replacement filter
(optional
accessories)
358
KAFP556H160
3.6
4.2
3.6
4.2
KAFP552H80
KAFP552H160
KAFP553H80
KAFP553H160
EDSG281001
FCQ
Installation
Caution
For the installation parts, accessory parts and specified components must always
be used.
After the completion of installation, perform a test run to check that no abnormality
is present.
Recommendations
<round flow >.
According to the table below, check the model name of the indoor unit main body,
then mount the product.
At the time of mounting, also refer to the installation manual of the indoor unit and to
the installation manual of the decoration panel.

Combination table
Name
High efficiency filter unit
Sealing pad Installation manual
Model name
Installable indoor unit model name / Panel model name
KAFP556H80
KAFP557H80
Shape
FCQ71KVLT
KAFP556H160
KAFP557H160
Number of pieces
FCQ(N)71KVEA
SkyAir
FCQ(N)100K / 125K / 140KVEA
SkyAir
FCQ100K / 125K / 140KVLT
1 (This document)
Panel
BYCP125K-W1
Mounting of High Efficiency Filter Unit

Figure 1
* When the indoor unit main body is already installed, perform the following operations, complying with
precautions below.
Shut off power supply before performing the operation.
Remove the decoration panel from the indoor unit's main body.

Filter clasp
* When the indoor unit main body is newly installed
Rotate the filter clasp by 90

to remove the filter
(4 positions)
(1) Remove the high efficiency filter from the chamber. Figure 1
(2) Mount the high efficiency filter unit to the indoor unit main body using the hooks
(4 positions). Figure 2 to Figure 4
For the fixing method of the hooks, refer to the figure to the right. Mount at 4 positions.
* Mount so that the contours of the indoor unit main body and chamber match.
Hook
Figure 3
Figure 5
Suspension bracket
Figure 2
Fixing method of hooks

unit
Figure 3
Mounting status

Hook
Hook
(4 positions)
Match the contour.

Control box cover
Suspension bracket
Suspension bracket
(4 positions)
Refrigerant piping
Figure 5 Drawing of mounting at

completion
JC : 3K015220F
359
FCQ
EDSG281001
Installation of Indoor Unit Main Body and High Efficiency Filter Unit
Install the indoor unit main body and high efficiency filter unit.
At the time of installation, perform engineering work according to the installation manual attached
to the air conditioner's main body. (For the installation height, refer to the figure to the right.)
Suspension bracket
When mounting the high efficiency filter unit to the existing indoor unit main body, change the
Indoor unit
main body
(Installation height
guideline)
Mount the supplied installation pattern paper to the indoor unit using screws to
cure the indoor unit.
(Refer to the installation manual for the indoor unit main body.)
Ceiling surface
(mm)

(Supplied with indoor unit main body)
185
BYCP125K-W1
M412 Screws
[Mounting of installation pattern paper]

Complete all the refrigerant and drain piping work for the indoor unit main body.
Mounting of Decoration Panel and Mounting of High Efficiency Filter

After temporarily hooking the decoration panel, pass the swing motor lead wire, which is coming out from the decoration panel, through the wire through hole of
the high efficiency filter unit.
Sealing pad (supplied): For preventing air bypass

(Stick to 2 positions in the same manner.)
Figure 6
High efficiency
filter chamber
Wire through hole
Swing motor lead wire:

Route from the panel side to
the high efficiency filter chamber.
Decoration panel
(After temporarily hooking

the decoration panel,
pass through the wire through hole.)
High efficiency
filter unit
Decoration panel
Mounting of high efficiency filter

After the completion of wiring and sticking of sealing pad (2 positions), mount the high efficiency
filter. Figure 6 Figure 7
Rotate the filter clasp by 90 to

fix the filter.
(4 positions)
Filter clasp
With wireless unit
Figure 7
Route the connector of the receiver lead wire through the wire through hole, then connect the connector on the indoor PC board ass'y.
For details on the connection method, refer to the installation manual attached to the wireless remote control kit (sold separately).
Preparation of Indoor Unit

With the mounting of a high efficiency filter unit, setting the indoor unit main
body is required.
Using the field setting mode on the remote control, switch to the setting
position number as shown in the table to the right.
For the field setting mode, refer to "How to perform field setting" attached to
the remote control.
Mode number
Setting switch number Setting position number
Remarks
02
80 only
02
Both 80 and 160
13 or 23
JC : 3K015220F
360
EDSG281001
3.7
FCQ

Replacement High Efficiency Filter
Dimensions
Unit:mm
Model
KAFP552H80 KAFP553H80
A
25
45
560
560
3
0
10
540 -2
10
D3K04256A
Caution
Cannot be water-washed for reuse.
The filter chamber (KDDFP55H160) is required
when the high efficiency filter will be installed.
Model
Item
KAFP552H80
KAFP553H80
Initial
pressure loss
Pa
34 or less
Final pressure
loss
Pa
98 or less
Average
efficiency
Air flow rate
19
35
19
35
l/sec
317
583
317
583
2,500 (dust concentration 0.15 mg/m3) 1,800 (dust concentration 0.15 mg/m3)
Filter element
Number of sheets
included
Mass (Weight)
KAFP553H160
m3/min
Life
KAFP552H160
kg
0.6
1.2
0.6
1.2
361
FCQ
3.8
EDSG281001
KDDFP55H160 High Efficiency Filter Chamber
KDDFP55H160
Dimensions
Unit:mm
50 (dimensions when attached)
842
842
J : D3K04252
Model
Item
65% (colorimetric method)
High efficiency
Inserted filter
90% (colorimetric method)
filter
Ultra long-life filter
KAFP553H160
KAFP55H160H
Installation manual
Sealing pad : 2
Accessories
362
KAFP553H80
Galvanized sheet iron.

Foam polystyrene.
Material
Mass (Weight)
KDDFP55H160
kg
8.0
EDSG281001
FCQ
Installation
Caution
Recommendations
After thoroughly reading these "Safety Precautions", properly perform the installation.
This product can be mounted to ceiling mounted cassette-type air conditioner

<round flow>.
According to the table below, check the model name of the indoor unit main body, then
mount the product.
At the time of mounting, also refer to the installation manual for the indoor unit and to
the one for the decoration panel.
For the installation parts, accessory parts and specified components must
always be used.
After the completion of installation, perform a test run to check that no
abnormality is present.
Recommendations (When using ultra-long life filter)
Combination table
The ultra-long life filter can be reused after cleaning.

After engineering work is completed, provide instructions to the customer about
the filter cleaning interval and how to remove the filter.
Model name High efficiency filter Ultra-long life filter Installable indoor unit model name / Panel model name
KAFP552H80
Or
KAFP553H80

Name
Filter chamber
KDDFP KAFP552H160
55H160
Or
KAFP553H160
FCQ(N)100K / 125K / 140KVEA
SkyAir
Panel
FCQ71KVLT
KAFP55H160H
Shape
Number of pieces
FCQ(N)71KVEA
SkyAir
FCQ100K / 125K / 140KVLT
BYCP125K-W1
1 (This document)
Mounting of Filter Chamber

precautions below.
Hook
(1) Mount the filter chamber to the indoor unit main body using the hooks (4 positions).
Suspension bracket
Figure 1 to Figure 3
* Mount so that the contours of the indoor unit main body and chamber are match. Figure 2
Figure 1
Figure 4

Filter chamber
Filter chamber
Hook
Hook
(4 positions)
Match the contour
Suspension bracket
Lead wire
Suspension bracket
(4 positions)
Refrigerant piping
Figure 4
Drawing of mounting at
completion
Filter chamber
JC : 3K015219F
363
FCQ
EDSG281001
Installation of Indoor Unit Main Body and Filter Chamber

Install the indoor unit main body and filter chamber.
At the time of installation, perform engineering work according to the installation manual
attached to the air conditioner's main body. (For the installation height, refer to the figure to
the right.)
Suspension bracket
When mounting the filter chamber to the existing indoor unit main body, change the
installation height of the indoor unit main body to height
in the figure to the right.
Indoor unit
main body
Mount the supplied installation pattern paper to the indoor unit using screws
to cure the indoor unit.

guideline)
Filter chamber
Ceiling surface
(mm)
185
BYCP125K-W1
M4 12 screws
Mounting of Decoration Panel and Mounting of Filter Chamber

After temporarily hooking the decoration panel, pass the swing motor lead wire, which is coming out from the decoration panel, through the wire through hole of the filter chamber.
(Stick to 2 positions in the same manner.)
Figure 5
Filter chamber
Wire through hole
Decoration panel
Route from the panel side to the
filter chamber.
(After temporarily hooking the
decoration panel, pass through
the wire through hole.)
Filter chamber

to fix the filter.
(2 positions)
Decoration panel
Filter clasp
Mounting of filter
After the completion of wiring and sticking of sealing pad (2 positions), mount the filter.
Figure 5 Figure 6
Before mounting each filter to the chamber,

cut off at the perforation (2 positions).
Filters
With wireless unit
Figure 6
Route the connector of the receiver lead wire through the wire through hole, then connect the connector on the indoor PC board assembly.

Filter name
Mode number Setting switch number
Depending on the types of mounting filters, setting the
High
indoor unit main body is may be required.
80 only
0
performance
13 or 23
Using the field setting mode on the remote control, switch
Both 80 and 160
1
to the setting position number shown in the table to the right. filter
For the field setting mode, refer to "How to perform field
setting" attached to the remote control.
0
10 or 20
Ultra-long life filter
1
Setting position number Filter sign display interval time

02
02
Where there is minimal fouling
01 Approximately every 10,000 hours
(Example: Office, etc.)
Where there is considerable fouling
(Example: Pachinko parlor, etc.)
02
Initial setting for ultra-long life filter
JC : 3K015219F
364
EDSG281001
3.9
FCQ
KAFP551K160 Replacement Long-life Filter
KAFP551K160
Model
KAFP551K160
Item
Initial pressure loss
Pa
Final pressure loss
Pa
49 or less
Average efficiency
60 (gravity method)
Air flow rate
4.9 or less
m3/min
18
l/sec
300
5,000 (dust concentration 0.15 mg/m3)
Life
Filter element
Mould-proof and antibacterial resin net
Number of sheets included
Mass (Weight)
kg
0.2
Caution
Can be water-washed. Can be reused.
Dimensions
Unit:mm
535.5
2310
492.5
3.5
552.5
>PS<
6 3.5
Square hole (both sides)
J : D3K05114
365
FCQ
EDSG281001
3.10 KAFP55H160 Ultra Long-life Filter Unit (Including Chamber)

KAFP55H160
Dimensions
Unit:mm
50 (dimensions when attached)
842
842
12
J : D3K04254
Caution
In order to mount a ultra long life filter unit,
setting of the main unit of indoor unit should
be made.
Individual filter (KAFP55H160H) is available
as an optional accessory.
Model
Item
Filter cleaning period
Locations with much

dust
Approximately every
5,000 hours
Locations with little dust Approximately every

(e.g. offices)
10,000 hours
Pa
8 or less
Final pressure loss
Pa
49 or less
50 (gravity method)
m3/min
29.5
Average efficiency
Life
l/sec
492
Filter element
Polypropylene honeycomb (with mould-proof)
1
Sealing pad : 2
Accessories
Mass (Weight)
366
Galvanized steel iron.

Foam polystyrene.
Material
Air flow rate
Mounting locations
KAFP55H160
kg
4.7
EDSG281001
FCQ
Installation
Caution
For the installation parts, accessory parts and specified components must
always be used.
After the completion of installation, perform a test run to check that no
abnormality is present.
Recommendations
<Round flow>.
According to the table below, check the model name of the indoor unit main body, then
mount the product.
At the time of mounting, also refer to the installation manual for the indoor unit and to
the one for the decoration panel.
Recommendations
The ultra-long life filter can be reused after cleaning.
After the engineering works are completed, provide instructions to the customer
about the filter cleaning interval and how to remove the filter.
Combination table
Installable indoor unit model name / Panel model name
Model name

Ultra-long life filter unit
Name
KAFP55H160
FCQ(N)71K/100K/125K/140KVEA
FCQ71K/100K/125K/140KVLT
SkyAir
Shape
Panel
Number of pieces
BYCP125K-W1
1 (This document)
Mounting of Ultra-Long Life Filter Unit

Figure 1
precautions below.

Filter clasp
Rotate the filter clasp by
90 to remove the filter
(4 positions)
(1) Remove the ultra-long life filter from the chamber. Figure 1
(2) Mount the ultra-long life filter unit to the indoor unit main body using the hooks (4 positions).
Figure 2 to Figure 4
Hook
* Mount so that the contours of the indoor unit main body and chamber match. Figure 3
Figure 5
Suspension bracket
Figure 2

Hook
(4 positions)
Hook
Match the contour.

Control box cover
Suspension bracket
Suspension bracket
(4 positions)
Refrigerant piping
Figure 5 : Drawing of mounting at completion

JC : 3K015221E
367
FCQ
EDSG281001
Installation of Indoor Unit Main Body and Ultra-Long Life Filter Unit
Install the indoor unit main body and ultra-long life filter unit.
At the time of installation, perform engineering work according to the installation manual
attached to the air conditioner's main body. (For the installation height, refer to the figure to
the right.)
Suspension bracket
Indoor unit
main body
When mounting the ultra-long life filter unit to the existing indoor unit main body, change the
guideline)
Mount the supplied installation pattern paper to the indoor unit by using screws
to cure the indoor unit.
Ceiling surface
(mm)

BYCP125K-W1
185
M4 12 Screw

Mounting of Decoration Panel and Mounting of Ultra-Long Life Filter

After temporarily hooking the decoration panel, pass the swing motor lead wire, which is coming out from the decoration panel, through the wire through hole of the ultra-long
life filter unit.

Figure 6 (Stick to 2 positions in the same manner.)
Ultra-long life filter chamber
Wire through hole

Route from the panel side to the
ultra-long life filter chamber.
Decoration panel
(After temporarily hooking the

decoration panel, pass through
the wire through hole.)
Decoration panel

to fix the filter.
(4 positions)
Mounting of ultra-long life filter

After the completion of wiring and sticking of sealing pad (2 positions), mount the
ultra-long life filter. Figure 6 Figure 7
Filter clasp
Figure 7
With wireless unit

Route the connector of the receiver lead wire through the wire through hole, then connect the connector on the indoor printed circuit board assembly.

With the mounting of a ultra-long life filter unit, setting the indoor unit main
body is required.
Using the field setting mode on the remote control, switch to the setting
position number shown in the table to the right.
For the field setting mode, refer to "How to perform field setting" attached
to the remote control.
Mode number Setting switch number Setting position Number Filter sign display interval time
Where there is minimal fouling
(Example: Office, etc.)
10 or 20
Where there is considerable fouling

(Example: Pachinko parlor, etc.)
02

Initial setting for ultra-long life filter
JC : 3K015221E
368
EDSG281001
FCQ
3.11 KAFP55H160H Replacement Ultra Long-life Filter

Dimensions
Unit:mm
10
536-20
10
KAFP55H160H
10
536 -20
12
10
12
60
12
12.5
J : D3K04257
Caution
The filter chamber (KDDFP55H160) is
required when the ultra long life filter will be
installed.
Model
Item
Pa
8 or less
Final pressure loss
Pa
49 or less
50 (gravity method)
m3/min
29.5
Average efficiency
Air flow rate
Life
l/sec
492
Filter element
Mould-proof resin net

Mass (Weight)
KAFP55H160H
1
kg
3.4
369
FCQ
EDSG281001
3.12 KKSJ55K160 Chamber Connection Kit

KKSJ55K160
Dimensions
Unit:mm
Vinyl tube
J : D3K2186
Installation
, F H (Y) C ~ K V E
FHC~NUV1, FHC~NUV2S, ~KV2S
C : 3P089651D
370
EDSG281001
FCQ
3.13 KDJP55H80 / KDJP55H160 Branch Duct Chamber

KDJP55H80 / KDJP55H160
Model
KDJP55H80
Item
KDJP55H160

(with insulation)
Material
Mounting screws : 10
Blocking pad : 2
Tape for fixing the blocking pad : 2
Accessories
Opening sealing material : 1 set

Insulation material : 1 set
Caution
1. When mounting, refer to the installation manuals for the indoor unit and the
decoration panel.
Dimensions
Unit:mm
KDJP55H160
208
11
206
198
6-6 10
oblong holes
4-6 holes
J : D3K04231
232
177
106
179
167
77
156
148
15
6-6 10
oblong holes
4-6 holes
256
382
366
200
232
176
190
121
109
382
366
200
240
KDJP55H80
J : D3K04232
371
FCQ
EDSG281001
Installation
Combination table
Precautions
This product can be mounted to a ceiling mounted cassette-type air conditioner <round flow>.
According to the table to the right, check the model name of the indoor unit, then mount the product.
At the time of mounting, also refer to the installation manual for the indoor unit main body and to the
one for the decoration panel.
For the duct (field supplied) to be connected, those specified in the table to the right are recommended.
Parts content
Name
Model name
Installable indoor unit model name
KDJP55H80
SkyAir
KDJP55H160
SkyAir
FCQ(N)71KVEA
FCQ71KVLT
Check the following parts.

Branch duct chamber
Mounting screw Installation manual Sealing material Tape for fixing the sealing material
Shape/
Number
FCQ(N)100K / 125K / 140KVEA

FCQ100K / 125K / 140KVLT
M416
Number
80
of pieces 160
Name
10
Main body insulator

1
Main body opening sealant

3
5A
Recommended duct
5B
Branch duct chamber
Shape/
Number
(Large)
(Small)
Number
80
of pieces 160
Preparation Before Installation
2
1
Connecting duct kit name
KDJP55H80
K-FDK151B (1 m) or K-FDK152B (2 m) (Flexible duct: Nominal diameter of 150)
KDJP55H160
K-FDK201B (1 m) or K-FDK202B (2 m) (Flexible duct: Nominal diameter of 200)
With this branch duct, an independent 4-way and simultaneous 2-branch drawing are also possible.
With this branch duct chamber, the blow directions shown in the
figure to the right can be selected.
Select the blow direction that is most appropriate for the room
shape and installation position. (Blow directions other than those
in the figure to the right cannot be selected.)
From the external static pressure/air volume characteristics (refer
to the technical guide), select the duct length and air outlet.
Closed
Precautions
Branch
Be sure to securely block the air outlet of the indoor unit main
body to which the branch duct chamber is mounted. If the
blocking is incomplete, water spraying or condensation may
occur. Do not block the corner sections.
Mounting of Sealing Material to Indoor Unit .)
(Refer to
When mounting the branch duct chamber, be sure to perform field
setting of the indoor unit main body.
Field Setting .)
(Refer to
1-way branching, main body 3-direction blow

Drain side
Branch
Closed
Closed
Branch
Closed
Piping side
Branch

Closed
Closed
Closed
Branching to
either side
Closed
Branching to
either side
Another branch duct chamber set is necessary.

Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Branch
Branch
Mounting of Branch Duct Chamber

Face 3
When an installation is performed after mounting the branch duct chamber to the indoor unit main body
(at new installation), do not apply force to the branch duct chamber. (Deformation may occur.)
Face 2
Face 4
(1) Select the position where the branch duct chamber is mounted.
(2) Mount the branch duct chamber to the indoor unit according to the following procedure. ( Figure 2 is an
example of the face 1 side.)
1) Along the slit, cut the side plate of the indoor unit to which the branch duct chamber is mounted. Then,
cut the internal insulator along the groove.
(Use nippers, etc., to cut the slit section, and cutter, etc., to cut the groove section.) Figure 2
Face 3
Face 2
Figure 1
Face 1
Internal insulator
For the port opening operation, do not use a tool that produces chips, such as a saw. The drain system may become clogged, and a water
leak may occur.
Side plate
2) Use the sealant for sticking so that the gaps between the side plate and internal insulator are filled around the full circumference. Figure 3
First, stick the main body's opening sealant 4 to left and right of the opening, and the main body's opening sealant 5A ( 5B ) to the upper and lower sides of Face 4
the opening.
Figure 2
At this time, fold the main body opening sealant towards the inside so that the gap between the side plate and internal insulator is no longer visible.
Main body opening sealant

5A ( 5B )
(Top plate side)
Main body opening sealant 4
Stick without leaving

any gap against the main
body's opening sealant
5A ( 5B ).
Main body opening sealant 4
Stick without leaving

any gap against the main
body's opening sealant
5A ( 5B ).
Main body opening sealant 5A
Face 1
Side plate slit (Internal insulator groove)
Figure 3
Internal
insulator
Side plate
Opening
Main body opening sealant 5A ( 5B )

Internal
insulator
Sectional View
Stick so that the gap between

the side plate and internal
insulator are filled around the
full circumference.
JC : 1P137894D
372
EDSG281001
FCQ
3) Mount the branch duct chamber. Figure 4
Mount so that the flat face becomes

the top plate side of the indoor unit.
Indoor unit
Branch duct chamber

Mounting screw, 10 pieces
(M416)
Figure 4
(3) Stick the main body insulator to the indoor unit. (The figure is an example of the face 1 side) Figure 5
Main body insulator 1

Stick with the end folded.
Stick with the left sides of

the main body insulators
1 , 2 , and 3 aligned.

Create a slit to the wiring hole using a cutter, etc..
Duct Connection
Be sure to stick the main body insulator from the top of the branch duct
chamber flange (sheet metal section). Otherwise, condensation may occur.
Figure 5
KDJP55H80 ... Nominal diameter of 150
<<Duct: KDJP55H160 ... Nominal diameter of 200>>

Tape
1) Connect the duct to the outside of the branch duct chamber. Figure 6
After the connection, wrap the connection area with tape (field supplied)
to prevent an air leak.
Indoor unit
main body
Apply insulation for all the ducts.

2) Do not perform duct manipulation described below.
a) Extreme bending
Wrap with tape to prevent

an air leak.
Branch duct chamber
b) Multiple bending
c) Reduction of connecting
duct diameter
Duct of 150 or 200

(field supplied)
Figure 6
1. Beware that, in accordance with the local law, there may be cases where the use of a nonflammable duct is compulsory.
2. When a duct goes through fire protection areas, including a fire proof structure, beware that, in accordance with the local law, it may
be required to establish a damper or to build a structure that is not detrimental to fire protection.
3. When penetrating a wooden construction wall with a metal duct, apply electrical insulation to the duct and wall.
Mounting of Sealing Material to Indoor Unit

For the block position, refer to
<<With the sealing material supplied in this kit, blocking of two openings can be performed.>>
Preparation Before Installation , then determine the position. Always block the branch duct mounting surface.
Closed
Air outlet 2
Air outlet 3
Closed
Closed
3-way blow
Closed
1
Drain side
Air outlet 3
Air outlet 1
Closed
2-way blow
Closed
Closed
Closed
Piping side
(1) Matching the longitudinal air outlets numbered from 1 to 4 to be blocked, prepare the sealing material and tape for fixing the sealing material.
Cut both the sealing material and tape for fixing the sealing material along the perforation (dotted line).
Stick the sealing material to the tape for fixing the sealing material.
(Stick so that the sealing material is at the centre of the tape for fixing the sealing material.)
Example) When blocking air outlet 2 or 3
<Sealing material preparation>

Procedure 2
Remove the
release paper.
Release paper
Sealing material
Procedure 1
Cut off.
Precautions
Procedure 3
Tape for fixing the sealing material
Stick the sealing material so that

it is at the centre of the tape for
fixing the sealing material.
When blocking the air outlet 1 , sealing material preparation is not necessary.
Mounting of Decoration Panel
(2) Stick the sealing material that was prepared in (1) to

the air outlet of the indoor unit main body.
The sealing material has a directional

property. Be sure to stick the sealing
material to the tape for fixing the sealing
material so that the printed number of the
outlet to be blocked becomes visible.
Air outlet 1
<Mounting to air outlet>
For safety, be sure to shut off power supply before starting the decoration
panel mounting operation and connecting the connectors for swinging.

After mounting the decoration panel, check that no gap is present between the decoration panel and the unit's main body.
Field Setting
When mounting the branch duct chamber, setting the indoor unit main body is required.
After all the engineering work is completed, perform setting together with field setting of
the indoor unit.
Using the field setting mode on the remote control, switch to the setting position number
shown in the table to the right. For the field setting mode, refer to "How to perform field
setting" attached to the remote control.
Branch blow pattern

1-way branching,
3-direction blow
Mode number
1-way branching and 2-way blow

or
2-way branching and 2-way blow
13 or 23
Setting switch number Setting position number

02
1
03
JC : 1P137894D
373
FCQ
EDSG281001
3.14 KDTP55K80 / KDTP55K160 Insulation Kit for High Humidity

KDTP55K80
Dimensions
Unit:mm
Model
AA
KDTP55K80 245
KDTP55K160 287
Top panel insulation (1) (t10) 1

862
AB
157
186
Side panel insulation (1) (t10) 1

7781
AA
144
slit

862
slit
AB
AA
574

7651
perforation

7691
slit
AA
144

862
slit
Insulation for decoration panel (t5) 4
900
AA
7721
34
2-hole
J : D3K05113
Model
Item
Material
Applicable ambient temperature
Accessories
374
KDTP55K80
KDTP55K160
Polyethylene foam
(with adhesive on the reverse side)
40CDB, RH85%
Insulation for hanger bracket : 4
EDSG281001
FCQ
Installation
Precautions
This kit can be mounted to an ceiling mounted cassette-type air conditioner <round flow>.
According to the chart below, check the model name of indoor unit, then mount the kit.
This kit cannot be used for the mounting of humidifier and branch duct.
Combination table
Installable indoor unit model name
Model name
KDTP55K80
SkyAir
FCQ(N)71KVEA
FCQ71KVLT
KDTP55K160
SkyAir
FCQ(N)100K/125K/140KVEA
FCQ100K/125K/140KVLT
Parts content
778mm
765mm
3 Side insulator plate (3)
769mm
80 A=245mm
160 A=287mm
Shape
80 A=245mm
160 A=287mm
Slit
Name
772mm
5 Top insulator plate (1)
80 A=245mm
160 A=287mm
Slit
Number of pieces
80 A=245mm
160 A=287mm
Name
8 suspension bracket insulator
9 Panel insulator
1
Others
Shape
This manual
Number of pieces
Sticking Procedure
Perform the work on soft cloth to prevent damage to the indoor unit and panel.
<Procedure>
(1) According to the sticking procedure for the side insulator plate, stick the side insulator plates (1 to 4) in sequential
order without leaving any gap in between. (Figure 1)
(When mounting the fresh air intake kit (KDDP55X160), cut off the side insulator plate (2) with a knife along the
perforation. The cut-off insulator is no longer needed.)
(2) Stick the top insulator plates (1 to 3) without leaving any gap in between. Also, stick the top insulator plates without
leaving any gap against the side insulator plates all the way around. (Figure 2)
(3) Hang the product.
(4) Stick the suspension bracket insulator to the suspension bracket together with the washer and bolt. (Figure 3)
(5) Lastly, stick the panel insulator to the backside of the panel. (Figure 4)
Slit
Top insulator plate (3)
* Fresh air intake kit

When mounting (KDDP55X160), cut off
the insulator along the perforation.
Slit
(Figure 2)
Perforation
Suspension bracket
(4 points)
8
2
Slit
Sticking reference for
side insulator plate (2)
Suspension bracket insulator

Suspension bracket
(4 points)
(Figure 3)
9 Panel insulator
At the suspension bracket section,

the slit must be passed through.
At the suspension bracket section,

the slit must be passed through.
1
3
* After hanging the product, stick the

suspension bracket insulator.
Match these corners

before sticking.

4
Sticking procedure for side insulator plate

(Figure 1)
Panel insulator
(Figure 4)
JC : 3P179341C
375
FCQ
EDSG281001
3.15 KRP1H98 Installation Box for Adaptor PCB

Model
Item
Material
Adaptor for wiring
Accessories
KRP1H98
KRP1C63
KRP4AA53
Clamp : 2
Code sticker : 6
Screws for adaptor box cover : 1
Wire clamp material : 8
Mounting screws : 3
Earth wire (length 1060m) : 1
Dimensions
Unit:mm
Adaptor box
Adaptor box cover
hole
hole
hole
Fixture
hole
hole
hole
hole
hole
J : D3K04202
376
EDSG281001
FCQ
Installation
2P196605A
377
FCQ
EDSG281001
2P196605A
378
EDSG281001
FCQ
2P196606A
379
FCQ
EDSG281001
2P196606A
380
EDSG281001
FCQ
3.16 KRCS01-4B Remote Sensor (for Indoor Temperature)

Model
Item
Length of branch wiring
Appearance
12
ABS resin
Mass (Weight)
kg
0.3
Dimensions
mm
W50 H60 D15
Component parts
KRCS01-4B
Light ivory (with the Daikin logo)
Box material
Recommended for ceiling suspension and

ceiling-embedded types which often result in a
difference between set temperature and actual
temperature.
The sensor for detecting the temperature can
be placed away from the indoor air conditioner.
(Branch wiring is included in the kit.)
KRCS01-1B
Remote sensor.
Extension cord (12m).
Screws: 2
Clamps: 2
Caution
Select a location for the sensor where it can detect the average temperature.
Avoid the following locations.
1. Locations in direct sunlight.
2. Locations where the outlet air from the air conditioner is directed.
3. Locations close to other heat sources.
4. Locations near doors which might be affected by air coming in.
381
FCQ
EDSG281001
Installation
3K019189B
382
EDSG281001
FCQ
3K019189B
383
FCQ
EDSG281001
3K019189B
384
EDSG281001
FFQ
4. FFQ
4.1
BYFQ60B8W1 Decoration Panel
Installation
4PW42160-1
385
FFQ
386
EDSG281001
EDSG281001
FFQ
387
FFQ
4.2
EDSG281001
KDBH44BA60 Sealing Member of Air Discharge Outlet
Installation
1P109292B
388
EDSG281001
FFQ
1P109292B
389
FFQ
4.3
EDSG281001
KDBQ44BA60A Panel Spacer

Model
Item
Applicable decoration panel
KDBQ44BA60A
BYFQ60B8W1
Exterior
White
Material
Outside frame: Resin

Insulation: Foam polyethylene
Panel spacer. Insulation. Sealant.
Mounting screws. Installation manual.
Component Parts
Mass (Weight)
kg
1.5
Using the panel spacer in areas of the ceiling with

limited space makes it possible to install the air
conditioner.
Hides the gap between the decoration panel and
the ceiling.
Dimensions
Installation
700
654
Unit:mm
654
700
43
Ceiling surface
Panel spacer
4-5 Hole
FFQ + KDBQ44B60A
Unit:mm
3D041038
390
EDSG281001
FFQ
Installation
C : 1P107764C
391
FFQ
EDSG281001
1P107764C
392
EDSG281001
4.4
FFQ
KAFQ441BA60 Replacement Long-life Filter
2P100214B
393
FFQ
4.5
EDSG281001
KDDQ44XA60 Fresh Air Intake Kit (Direct Installation Type)
Installation
2P108307A
394
EDSG281001
FFQ
2P108307A
395
FFQ
4.6
EDSG281001
DTA112BA51 Interface Adaptor for SkyAir Series
Installation
1P107904C
396
EDSG281001
FFQ
1P107904C
397
FFQ
4.7
EDSG281001
KRP1BA101 Installation Box for Adaptor PCB
KRP1BA101
Model
KRP1BA101
Item
Material

KRP1BA57
KRP4AA53
Adaptor for wiring
Clamp material : 3
Mounting screws : 5
Code sticker : 3
Accessories
Dimensions
Unit:mm
Adaptor box
Adaptor box cover
hole
hole
Insulation
hole
hole
hole
J : D3K05389
398
EDSG281001
FFQ
Installation
1P107687C
399
FFQ
EDSG281001
1P107687C
400
EDSG281001
FFQ
1P133507
401
FFQ
EDSG281001
1P133507
402
EDSG281001
4.8
FFQ
KRCS01-1B Remote Sensor (for Indoor Temperature)

Model
Item
Appearance
12
ABS resin
Mass (Weight)
kg
0.3
Dimensions
mm
W50 H60 D15
Component parts
KRCS01-4B
Box material

temperature.
KRCS01-1B
Remote sensor.
Screws: 2
Clamps: 2
Caution
403
FFQ
EDSG281001
Installation
3K019189B
404
EDSG281001
FFQ
3K019189B
405
FFQ
EDSG281001
3K019189B
406
EDSG281001
FHQ
5. FHQ
5.1
KDU50N60VE / KDU50N125VE Drain-up Kit
KDU50N60VE
KDU50N125VE
Model
Item
Drain-up lift
mm
KDU50N125VE
600
VP20 (Ex. dia. 26, Int. dia. 20)
Drain Con. diameter
Single phase 220-240V/220V 50/60Hz

(from Indoor Unit PCB)
Power supply
Pump
KDU50N60VE
Power consumption
13.5/12 (50/60Hz)
Dimensions
Unit:mm
34
167
Drain outlet
(VP20)
149
140
Drain pump
transmission
wiring
Float switch
Drain pump
115
Float switch transmission wiring
173
227
J : D3K03613A
407
FHQ
EDSG281001
Installation
SkyAir
FHQ355060BVVIB
SkyAir
FHQ71100125BVVIB
C : 3K012642A
408
EDSG281001
Preparations before hanging the indoor unit

The drain up kit is installed after the air conditioner main unit is hung. Preparations are required before hanging the air conditioner.
At least 60 mm
(Installation service space)
Mounting space
Select the place for the indoor unit to be installed in consideration of the installation service space.
Note, however, that there must be at least 60 mm of service space to the right of the indoor unit main unit.
See the installation manual attached to the indoor unit for the service space for the indoor unit. Figure 2
Figure 2
(1) Select the position of the pipe outtake, the drain pipe outtake, and the wiring outtake,
and make holes in those positions.
The locations are displayed on the installation pattern paper attached to the indoor unit,
so use the paper pattern. Figure 3
(2) Perform the refrigerant and drain piping work following the installation manual attached
to the indoor unit.
Field drain piping should be as short as possible and with a downward slope (1/25 1/100)
to prevent air pockets. Figure 4
Be sure to insulate all drainpipes which run above the ceiling.
Be sure to fix the field drain pipe to the support brackets in the ceiling. Figure 4
(3) Connect the attached piping 6 and the field refrigerant piping.
For the attached pipes 6 , select the liquid and gas pipes which match the pipe diameters
of the corresponding indoor unit.
When connecting the flare nuts, refer to the installation manual attached to the indoor unit.
(4) Wrap the insulation pipe cover attached to the indoor unit and fasten with the clamp material 5 .
(For both gas and liquid pipes.) Figure 5
(5) Be sure to use adhesive when connecting the attached drain hose 2 and the field drain piping
in the ceiling. Figure 4
(6) Insulate the drain hose using the attached insulation pipe cover(large) 7 . Figure 6
A (Dimension of the main unit)

B (Hanging pitch)
C
210
260
(Hanging pitch)
680 (Dimension of the main unit)
185
85
D
160
FHQ
(Seen from above)
Eyebolt
(4)
Outlet
Model (FHQ~)
3550 type
6071 type
100 type
125 type
Position for connecting

upward drain hose
upward gas pipe
upward liquid pipe
A
960
1160
B
920
1120
C
390
490
D
375
475
E
310
410
1400
1590
1360
1550
610
800
595
785
530
720
Figure 3
Ceiling slab
Field refrigerant piping
Support bracket
(Field supplied)
Anti-condensation tubing
7
5
Fasten with adhesive

Local pipes
Top side
Drain hose
Top side
Install the pipe
to the support
bracket, then fix it.
(70)
VP20
Figure 4
Attached piping
(Select the liquid and gas pipes

which match the pipe diameters
of the corresponding indoor unit.)
Figure 5
(For use outside the unit)
Clamp material
VP20
Wrap with vinyl tape to prevent

air from entering through split.
Insulation pipe cover

(Large)
Hose band instead of
clamp material (20)
1~1.5m
Insulating material
Figure 6
Installation Outline
Remove the lid from the top of the indoor unit, and hang the indoor unit main unit before installing the drain up kit in the following manner. Figure 7
1. Complete the electrical wiring following the installation manual attached to the indoor unit.
(Use the wiring through-hole in the top side of the indoor unit to pull the wiring into the indoor unit main unit.)
2. Connect the refrigerant piping to the indoor unit.
(1) Connect the liquid and gas piping to the indoor unit main unit. Figure 8
(2) Wrap the piping connections with the attached insulation pipe cover (medium and small) 7 and fasten either end with the attached clamp material 5 .
Next, put the attached insulating material 8-1 . Wrap gas-side piping with the insulating material attached the indoor unit on top of the insulation pipe cover
wrapped on the piping connections. (For the KDU50M60VE, there are two types of Insulation pipe covers (medium) for the gas pipe connection. Select the one appropriate for the piping size.)
Also, pass the lead wires of swing moter and thermistor through the clamp section of the top lid and fix it so they are as they were before removing the topside through lid.
In order to prevent dust from entering the indoor unit, block any crevices between the lid and the pipes with putty.
Top
plate
Liquid-side attached piping
Clamp material
Clamp part on the top lid
Insulation pipe cover
Liquid-side: small
Gas-side: medium
(1)
(2) For 9.5 : ID 32L100
8-1
Insulating material attached

with the indoor unit main unit
Gas-side attached piping
Only for gas-side

(One piece, 100230, thickness 5mm)
Figure 7
Thermistor lead wires
Cut to fit
the piping
For 12.7 : ID 35L100
Top lid
Swing motor lead wires
Insulating material
one piece, 150200, thickness 5mm

( Gas-side:
Liquid-side: one piece, 30200, thickness 5mm )
Figure 9
Figure 8
3. Mount the drain up kit to the indoor unit.

(1) Remove the screws from the top of the indoor unit, and insert the attached screws 4 temporarily. Next, temporarily put the screwed clamps on either end of the drain up kit,
and tighten the screws. Figure 10
Take out the lead wires of drain pump and the float switch from the back of the drain up kit.
Wire the local wiring as shown in Figure 11 .
From the rear side of the
drain up kit to the control box
Remote control cord
Replace with the
attached screw 4
Temporary
fixing
Screw
(M4 12)
Float switch lead wires (black)

Drain pump lead wires (yellow)
Swing motor lead wires

Thermistor lead wires
Pass under the

installation stay and
to the control box
Field wiring
Temporary
fixing
Approx. 5mm
Top plate
Drain up kit
installation stay
Screw

Drain pump lead wires (yellow)
A
View from direction of arrow A
Screw
Figure 10
Pass over
the installation Local wiring
stay and to the
Remote control cord
control box
Wiring outline
Figure 11
C : 3K012642A
409
FHQ
EDSG281001
(2) Insert the hose band 3 into the external drain hose, firmly insert the drain hose all the way into the drain socket in the drain up kit, and wrap it firmly with the hose band 3
within the area designated by the black tape on the hose end. Figure 12
(3) Put the attached insulating material 8-3 to the external drain hose connector, as shown in Figure 13 .
(4) Connect the indoor unit drain socket and the drain up kit drain socket with the attached drain hose 2 inserting it all the way in, and wrap it firmly with the hose band 3 within
the area designated by the black tape on the hose end. Make sure the hose band connector comes to the top, as in Figure 15 . Figure 14
(5) Insulate the drain hose 2 fixed by the procedure (4) using the attached insulating material 8-2 . Wrap the entire surface over the hose band on the drain hose. Figure 16
8-3
3
Insulating material
Indoor unit main unit
drain socket
Hose band
3
Insert firmly
all the way in.
Connector
Drain up kit
drain socket
Hose band
Tape section (black)
8-2
Figure 12
Fix making sure that there are no
split between the rising face of the
drain up kit and the insulation.
External drain hose
8-3
Insulating
material
Insert firmly
all the way in.
Drain hose
8-3
Drain hose
Figure 15
External drain hose
Cross section
Figure 14
Insulating
material
Attach facing the

external drain hose
from the drain up kit wall.
Hose band
Hose band
8-2
Wrap the insulating material
Insulating material
Drain hose
Figure 16
Top view
Figure 13
Electrical wiring
Wire the float switch lead wires (black), coming out of the drain up kit, and the drain pump lead wires (yellow) in the manner described below.
(Removing the control box makes wiring work easier.) When doing wiring work, be sure to shut off the power. Figure 17
Refer also to the Electric Wiring Diagram Plate when performing wiring work. (It can be found on the control box lid.)
(1) Remove the control box from the indoor unit.
(2) Connect the drain pump lead wires (yellow) to X25A (the white connector) on the indoor unit PC board assembly.
(3) The connector on the PC board assembly to which the float switch lead wires (black) must be connected differs depending on the indoor unit series (Sky Air or VRV Air Conditioner).
Sky Air : Remove the short circuit connector connected to X15A (a green connector), and connect the float switch lead wires.
VRV Air Conditioner : Remove the short circuit connector connected to X8A (a green connector), and connect the float switch lead wires.
(4) After all the wires are connected, arrange them, pass the float switch lead wire (black) through the clamping material, and secure it together with the drain
pump lead wire (yellow) from above the wiring inside the indoor unit using the included clamping material 5 .
(5) Store and secure any extra lead wire with the included clamping material 5 , so that the lid is not pushed up.
Attach the control box securely.
Remove the
short circuit
connector.
Pass through
the clamp material
Drain pump lead

wires (yellow)
Drain pump lead wires
5 Clamp material
Float switch
laed wires
Sky Air : X15A

VRV Air Conditioner : X8A
X15A (green) or X25A

X8A (green)
(white)
X25A
Pass through the clamp material
Control box
Fixing screws
for the control box lid (2)
Control box lid
Float switch lead wires
Electric wiring
diagram plate
Field wiring
(wiring between units)
Remote control cord
Clamp material
Internal wiring in the

indoor unit
Bind and fix the lead wires from the drain up kit over
the internal wiring in the indoor unit using the attached
clamp material 5 .
Figure 17
Installing the decorative panels and suction grill

Refer to the installation manual for the indoor unit and mount the decorative panels and suction grill firmly following the procedure in the opposite way of removing.
3K012643
410
EDSG281001
FHQ
Test Run Procedure

In order to determine the condition of the drainage, slowly pour approximately 1500 ml of water into the unit from the air outlet. Follow the procedure below to check the drainage. Figure 18
The test run procedure differs depending on the indoor unit series (Sky Air or VRV Air Conditioner), so follow the appropriate procedure below.
Sky Air
VRV Air Conditioner
If the wiring work is complete

Check the drainage while operating in cooling mode.
If the wiring work is not complete
Remove the control box lid, connect a single-phase power supply (50/60Hz 220-240V)
to No. 1 and No. 2 (in the power supply terminal block), and then for safetys sake, close the lid
before turning the power on. Figure 19
Only the drain pump will run automatically for 10 minutes, so during this time make sure water is
draining out.
Once the drain check is complete, remove the power wires and replace the control box lid as it was.
If the wiring work is complete

Check the drainage while operating in cooling mode.
If the wiring work is not complete
Remove the control box lid and connect the remote control and the singie-phase
power source (50/60Hz 220-240V/220V) to the remote control terminal block (P1, P2)
and the power supply terminal block (L, N).
Next, switch the unit to test run mode from the remote control, press the mode
switch button to select fan, and then press the start/stop button to start the indoor
fan and the drain pump. Check the drainage.
Take precaution, because the fan will operate as well.
Do not connect anything to No. 3 in the power supply terminal block (the drain pump will not operate.)
Do not touch the electrical part, emergency switch. The drain check described above can be
performed without moving the emergency switch.
Plastic container
for pouring
Air outlet
Figure 19
Make sure not to splash the water.
Figure 18
Power supply
terminal block
Single phase
power supply
3K012643
411
FHQ
5.2
EDSG281001
KAF501DA56 / KAF501DA80 / KAF501DA112 / KAF501DA160

Replacement Long-life Filter
KAF501DA56 / KAFJ501D56
Dimensions
Unit:mm
A
254.5
260
Model
530
KAF501DA112
KAFJ501D112
430
KAF501DA160
KAFJ501D160
493
11.5
Model
Item
KAF501DA56
KAFJ501D56
D3K3074A
KAF501DA80
KAFJ501D80
KAF501DA112 KAF501DA160
KAFJ501D112 KAFJ501D160
Initial pressure
loss
Pa
10 or less
Final pressure
loss
Pa
59 or less
Average
efficiency
45 (gravity method)
Air flow rate

Life
m3/min
13
I/sec
217
24
32
283
400
533
Mildew-proof resin net
Number of sheets
included
Mass (Weight)
17
Filter element
412
430
KAF501DA80
KAFJ501D80
20
Caution
KAF501DA56
KAFJ501D56
kg
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
EDSG281001
5.3
FHQ
KHFP5MA35 / KHFP5MA63 / KHFP5MA160

L-type Piping Kit (for Upward Direction)
KHFP5MA35
Dimensions
Unit:mm
KHFP5MA35
Piping for Liquid Side

R410A
6.4
Piping for Gas side

R410A
When you install the refrigerant piping in the

ceiling, the piping is required to be bent L-type
in the unit as shown on the right. This L-type
piping kit is developed to facilitate such
installation.
9.5
KHFP5MA63
Piping for Liquid Side

R410A
6.4
Installation
Piping for Gas side
L-type piping kit
R410A
12.7
KHFP5MA160
Piping for liquid side
Piping for gas side
J : D3K03612B
Model
Item
Accessories
KHFP5MA35
KHFP5MA63
KHFP5MA160
Installation for fitting : 1 set

Clamp material : 4 pieces
413
FHQ
5.4
EDSG281001
KRP1CA93 Installation Box for Adaptor PCB

Model
Item
Installation
Interior of unit
Material
Dimensions
Component parts
KRP1CA93

Width
mm
109
Length
mm
124
Depth
mm
38
Installation box. Box cover. Clamp. Screws.
Installation Manual.
Installation
3K09595B
414
EDSG281001
FHQ
3K09595B
415
FHQ
5.5
EDSG281001

Model
Item
Appearance
12
ABS resin
Mass (Weight)
kg
0.3
Dimensions
mm
W50 H60 D15
Component parts
416
KRCS01-4B
Box material

temperature.
KRCS01-1B
Remote sensor.
Screws: 2
Clamps: 2
Caution
EDSG281001
FHQ
Installation
3K019189B
417
FHQ
EDSG281001
3K019189B
418
EDSG281001
FHQ
3K019189B
419
FHQ
5.6
EDSG281001
Installation
1P107904C
420
EDSG281001
FHQ
1P107904C
421
FHQ
5.7
EDSG281001
KJB212AA / KJB311AA Electrical Box with Earth Terminal
Installation
3PA34878C
422
EDSG281001
FHQ
3PA34878C
423
FBQ
EDSG281001
6. FBQ
6.1
KTBJ25K56W / KTBJ25K80W (T) (F) / KTBJ25K160W(T) (F)

Service Access Panel
KTBJ25K80W
Model
Item
Colour
KTBJ25K36W(T)(F)
KTBJ25K80W(T)(F)
KTBJ25K160W(T)(F)
W : White, T : Brown, F : Fresh white
Accessories
Mass (Weight)
KTBJ25K56W(T)(F)
kg
6.0
6.5
9.0
10.7
Caution
Ceiling joist and ceiling joist support required. (Locally procured.)
Dimensions
Unit:mm
Filter chamber for

rear side air inlet
(optionl accessories)
Air
conditioner
Rear side
of the unit
Ceiling
Model
Colour
White
Brown
Fresh white
White
Brown
Fresh white
White
Brown
Fresh white
White
Brown
Fresh white
JC : D3K1126A
The inspection hatch can be made to look nice with the service access panel.
Thin 10 mm design for the exposed part.
424
EDSG281001
FBQ
Installation
3P225173A
425
FBQ
EDSG281001
3P225173A
426
EDSG281001
6.2
FBQ
KDAJ25K56A / KDAJ25K71A / KDAJ25K140A Air Discharge Adaptor
KDAJ25K56A
Model
Item
Duct connection
diameter
KDAJ25K36A
KDAJ25K56A
2001 port
Material
KDAJ25K71A
2002 port
KDAJ25K140A
2004 port
Hot-dip zinc coated steel sheets. EPS. Insulation.
Accessories
Mass (Weight)
Screws. Installation manual.

kg
1.0
Dimensions
1.5
2.5
3.5
Unit:mm
KDAJ25K36A
KDAJ25K56A
375
200
150
245
332
300
A arrow view
D3K06518
D3K06136
KDAJ25K71A
KDAJ25K140A
D3K06137
D3K06138A
Installation
Suction duct (Field supply)
To air discharge unit
To air discharge unit
Flexible duct with insulation

(Field supply)
Suction grille (Field supply)

Inlet air
427
FBQ
EDSG281001
Installation
3P012475C
428
EDSG281001
6.3
FBQ
KAF372AA80 / KAF372AA160 / KAF373AA80 / KAF373AA160

High Efficiency Filter
Model
Item
Initial pressure
loss
Pa
Final pressure
loss
Pa
Average
efficiency
(colourimetric
method)
Air flow rate /

1 sheet
m3/min
Life *1
KAF372 KAF373 KAF372 KAF373 KAF372 KAF373 KAF372 KAF373

AA36
AA36
AA56
AA56
AA80
AA80
AA160 AA160
15 or
less
21 or
less
Caution
Cannot be water-washed for reuse.
The filter chamber (for high efficiency filter)
(KDDF37AA36 / KDDF37AA56 / KDDF37AA80
/ KDDF37AA160) is required when the high
efficiency filter will be installed.
54 or
less
35 or
less
54 or
less
38 or
less
56 or
less
65
90
65
90
2,500
1,800
2,500
1,800
98 or less
65
90
65
90
2,500
1,800
2,500
1,800
9.8
Filter element
Number of sheets
included
35 or
less

1
Note:
*1. Dust concentration 0.15 mg/m3
Dimensions
Hook and loose

fastener
(black)
Unit:mm
AA
Hook and
loose fastener
(white)
AA
550
355
Applied models
KAF372AA36
KAF373AA36
KAF372AA56, 80, 160
KAF373AA56, 80, 160
Note:
KAF372AA36, KAF373AA36:
Without hook and loose fastener.
Filter connecting figure

Filter element Filter frame
J : D3K06645
J : D3K07003
429
FBQ
6.4
EDSG281001
KDDF37AA80 / KDDF37AA160 High Efficiency Filter Chamber

Model
KDDF37AA36
KDDF37AA56
KDDF37AA80
KDDF37AA160
65% (colourimetric method)
KAF372AA36
KAF372AA56
KAF372AA80
KAF372AA160
90% (colourimetric method)
KAF373AA36
KAF373AA56
KAF373AA80
KAF373AA160
KAF371AA56
KAF371AA80
KAF371AA160
Item
Inserted
filter
High
efficiency
filter
Long life filter
KAF371AA36
Accessories
Mass (Weight)
kg
4.5
Dimensions
Unit:mm
oblong hole
Indoor unit side
Service space
(Service cover side)
Long life filter
Service cover
burring
Connection duct side

Model
Connection duct
opening
JC : D3K06642C
430
EDSG281001
FBQ
Installation
C : 3K021007
431
FBQ
EDSG281001
3K021007
432
EDSG281001
6.5
FBQ
KAF371AA80 / KAF371AA160 Long Life Filter

Dimensions
Unit:mm
AA
AA
548
353
Applied models
KAF371AA36
KAF371AA56, 80, 160
J : D3K06644
J : D3K07004
Caution
The filter chamber (KDDF37AA36 /
KDDF37AA56 / KDDF37AA80 / KDDF37AA160)
is required when the long life filter will be
installed.
Model
Item
KAF371AA36
KAF371AA56
3 or less
Pa
Final pressure loss
Pa
49 or less
Average efficiency
50 (gravity method)
8 or less
9.8
Filter element
Mildew-proof resin net (Polypropylene)
Filter frame
KAF371AA160
7 or less
Air flow rate / 1 sheet m3/min

Life
KAF371AA80
Polystyrene
1
433
FBQ
6.6
EDSG281001
KAF375AA80 / KAF375AA160 Long Life Filter Chamber Kit

Model
KAF375AA36
Item
Long life filter *1
KAF371AA36
Accessories
Mass (Weight)
kg
KAF375AA56
KAF375AA80
KAF375AA160
KAF371AA56
KAF371AA80
KAF371AA160
Protection net. Mounting screws. Installation manual.
4.5
5.5
7.5
Note: *1. The long life filter is packed inside the chamber.
Dimensions
KAF375AA36
Unit:mm
oblong hole
Indoor unit side
Service space
Service space
Long life filter
Air inlet side

Service cover
duct connection of the long

( The
life filter chamber is not possible. )
J: D3K07519A
KAF375AA56 / KAF375AA80 / KAF375AA160
oblong hole
Indoor unit side
Service space
Long life filter
Service cover
Air inlet side

duct connection of the long
( The
life filter chamber is not possible. )
Model
J: D3K06729A
434
EDSG281001
FBQ
Installation
C : 3K021008
435
FBQ
EDSG281001
3K021008
436
EDSG281001
6.7
FBQ
KRP4A96 Mounting Plate for Adaptor PCB
Dimension
Unit:mm
Model
Item
Main unit mounting

claw (2 places)
Material
Accessories
Hole
KRP4A96
Steel sheet (t=0.8 coating)
Mounting screws (M48) : 2.
Sealing material : 2.
Clamp : 8. Installation manual.
Hole
Main unit mounting hole

hole
Adaptor mounting hole

hole
Clamp material mounting hole (10 places)
J : D3K06565A
437
FBQ
EDSG281001
Installation
2P226887
438
EDSG281001
FBQ
2P226887
439
FBQ
6.8
EDSG281001

Model
Item
Appearance
12
ABS resin
Mass (Weight)
kg
0.3
Dimensions
mm
W50 H60 D15
Component parts
440
KRCS01-4B
Box material

temperature.
KRCS01-1B
Remote sensor.
Screws: 2
Clamps: 2
Caution
EDSG281001
FBQ
Installation
3K019189B
441
FBQ
EDSG281001
3K019189B
442
EDSG281001
FBQ
3K019189B
443
FBQ
6.9
EDSG281001
Installation
1P107904C
444
EDSG281001
FBQ
1P107904C
445
Outdoor Unit
EDSG281001
7. Outdoor Unit
7.1
KPW937A4 Air Direction Adjustment Grille
KPW937A4
Dimensions
Unit:mm
Item
Model
KPW937A4
Material
Resin
Air direction
80
UpperLowerLeftRight
Colour
Ivory white
Accessories
Screws.
434 (Bolt Pitch)

490
Mass (Weight) kg
1.1
434 (Bolt Pitch)

490
Installation
Louver
KPW937A4 KPW937AA4
Installation manual
Please be sure to read before installation and follow

the instruction carefully when performing installation work.
Before Installation
Checking the parts
Check the following parts

Name
Louver
Installation manual
Shape
With 4 screws
Quantity
1piece
1piece
Installation Procedure
Selection of Installation Location
Use when installing in a location that meets the following conditions.
When installing near the border to a neighbor's house
If exhaust blows directly on passers-by because outdoor unit is installed facing a road.
Changing the fan direction of the outdoor unit to prevent it blowing directly on shrubbery, etc.
Installation of Louver
Installation is possible in the four directions:
upward, downward, rightward, and leftward.
The installation screws are attached to the louver.
First temporarily attach the louver with 4 screws,
then check that the angle is correct, and finally Prepared hole
pitch 435 mm
tighten the screws fully.
Fan partition
Prepared hole
pitch 435 mm
Fan partition
Part A
(see figure below)
CAUTION
1. Install so that a short circuit is prevented.

2. For the use in snowy regions, avoid installation
with the air outlet facing upward. Install so that
the air outlet faces leftward, rightward, or downward.
The prepared hole is in between the grating of the grill.
Snow accumulates in the air outlet of the outdoor
Part A (prepared hole) cross section (the shape of
unit, causing malfunction of the main body of the
either a or b)
outdoor unit.
a) Grill grating
b) Grill grating
3. Be advised that if the fan direction is up,
dead leaves and other foreign matter
Prepared hole
Prepared hole
easily accumulates in the exhaust vent.
4P104499A
446
EDSG281001
7.2
Outdoor Unit
KPW945A4 Air Direction Adjustment Grille
KPW945A4
Dimensions
Unit:mm
Item
Model
KPW945A4
Material
549
452
(Bolt Pitch)
Resin
Air direction
109
UpperLower
Colour
Ivory white
Screws.
Accessories
484.5
(Bolt Pitch)
552
Mass (Weight) kg
1.5
3
Installation
Air direction louver
Installation manual
Please be sure to read before installation and follow

the instruction carefully when performing installation work.
KPW945A4 KPW945AA4
Before installation
Check the following parts
Name
Louver
Truss tapping screw
Installation manual
1piece
M4x4screws(max.7.5kW class)
M5x4screws(8.0/9.0kW class)
1piece
Shape
Quantity
Installation Procedure
Selection of Installation Location
Use when installing in a location that meets the following conditions.
When installing near the border to a neighbor's house
If exhaust blows directly on passers-by because outdoor unit is installed facing a road.
If exhaust blows directly on vegetation
Space Needed for Installation

A minimum of 100 is needed
between the back of the outdoor
unit and any obstructions
(walls, etc.)
100
han
re t
mo
Installation of Louvers
Caution
Attach the louvers overlapping the standard grill.
Installing the louvers without the grill would allow hands to enter the fan area,
which is dangerous, so be sure to install the standard grill.
When pointing up
When pointing down
1Remove the 4 attachment screws from

the standard grill.
1Remove the 4 attachment screws from

the standard grill.
2Install the louver pointed up.
2Install the louver pointed down.
Overlap the standard grill and

screw both in together.
The attachment screws
are in the louvers.
3Installation complete
Overlap the standard grill and

screw both in together.
The attachment screws
are in the louvers.
3Installation complete
3P089958-2C
447
Outdoor Unit
7.3
EDSG281001
KKP937A4 Drain Plug
KKP937A4
Dimensions
Unit:mm
Component parts
Drain Plug (5pcs.)
Connectable Drain Hose: 16(I.D.)
16.5
36
448
EDSG281001
KKP945A4 Drain Plug

Dimensions
Unit:mm
12
Receiver
14
43
2 44 3
43
Socket (1pc.)
Cap (2pcs.)
Receiver (3pcs.)
12
Cap
14
Socket
Component parts
Connectable Drain Hose: 25(I.D.)
9.5
KKP945A4
3.5
7.4
Outdoor Unit
Installation
3P089958-1B
449
Outdoor Unit
7.5
EDSG281001
KKPJ5F180 Central Drain Plug
KKPJ5F180
Dimensions
Unit:mm
Drain socket
Drain cap
Drain receiver
J : D3K1342A
Model
Item
Connecting drain hose
KKPJ5F180
25 (inside diameter)
Installation
3P066795B
450
EDSG281001
7.6
Outdoor Unit
K-KYZP15C Wire Fixture for Preventing Overturning
K-KYZP15C
Item
Model
Accessories
Mass (Weight) kg
K-KYZP15C
Adjustor pin: 1 piece
Bolt, nut, plain washer: 1 set
1.0
3
Dimensions
Unit:mm
Wire rope
(SUS2.020m)
nd
Arou
170
30
15
24
Attachment Plate (1)
32
718
Oblong hole 5
Attachment Plate (2)
35
24
32
12 Hole
10
64
29
2-7 Hole
30
12 14 15
65
Gripple
5
J : D3K2523
C : 3K07319A
451
Outdoor Unit
EDSG281001
Installation
C : 3K07319A
452
EDSG281001
7.7
Outdoor Unit
KPT-60B160 Fixture for Preventing Overturning
KPT-60B160
Model
Item
Material
KPT-60B160
Steel plate (t 3.2)
Colour
Ivory white
Screw : 4
Accessories
Allows the outdoor unit to be secured to the foundation.

Prevents tipping of the outdoor unit due to strong gusts.
Useful for locations where anti-tipping wires (Locally procured) cannot be
installed.
Dimensions
Oblong hole
Unit:mm
Oblong hole
Oblong hole
Oblong hole
J : D3K2759A
453
Outdoor Unit
EDSG281001
Installation
(1) Check that this kit contains the following parts.
Metal fixture
Metal fixture
Metal fixture
Metal fixture
Screws (4 pieces)
(2) Installation Procedure

1. Install the metal fixtures ~ to the base legs as shown
below.
2. Remove the screw from the casing and fix the metal fixture to
the casing.
Note:
When you install the metal fixtures , and , fix the metal
fixture through the casing by the screws M513 attached.
When you install the metal fixture , fix the metal fixture through
the casing by the screw M513 attached. However, remove the
screw on the casing, if the screw of the casing will contact with
metal fixture.
3. Fix the metal fixtures firmly by the anchor bolts. (The anchor
bolts, nuts and washers should be M12 type sold on the
market.)
J : 3K07893
454
EDSG281001
7.8
Outdoor Unit
KRP58M51 Demand Adaptor
KRP58M51
Installation
C : 3P134153B
455
Outdoor Unit
EDSG281001
RZR71KUV1
C : 3P201377A
456
EDSG281001
Outdoor Unit
C : 3P134153B
457
Outdoor Unit
EDSG281001
C : 3P201377A
458
Warning
Daikin Industries, Ltd.s products are manufactured for export to numerous countries throughout the
world. Daikin Industries, Ltd. does not have control over which products are exported to and used in a
particular country. Prior to purchase, please therefore confirm with your local authorised importer,
distributor and/or retailer whether this product conforms to the applicable standards, and is suitable for
use, in the region where the product will be used. This statement does not purport to exclude, restrict
or modify the application of any local legislation.
Ask a qualified installer or contractor to install this product. Do not try to install the product yourself.
Improper installation can result in water or refrigerant leakage, electrical shock, fire or explosion.
Use only those parts and accessories supplied or specified by Daikin. Ask a qualified installer or
contractor to install those parts and accessories. Use of unauthorised parts and accessories or
improper installation of parts and accessories can result in water or refrigerant leakage, electrical
shock, fire or explosion.
Read the User's Manual carefully before using this product. The User's Manual provides important
safety instructions and warnings. Be sure to follow these instructions and warnings.
If you have any enquiries, please contact your local importer, distributor and/or retailer.
Cautions on product corrosion

1. Air conditioners should not be installed in areas where corrosive gases, such as acid gas or alkaline gas, are produced.
2. If the outdoor unit is to be installed close to the sea shore, direct exposure to the sea breeze should be avoided. If you need to install
the outdoor unit close to the sea shore, contact your local distributor.
Organization:
DAIKIN INDUSTRIES, LTD.
AIR CONDITIONING MANUFACTURING DIVISION
JMI-0107
Scope of Registration:
THE DESIGN/DEVELOPMENT AND MANUFACTURE OF
COMMERCIAL AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING, COOLING,
REFRIGERATING EQUIPMENT, COMMERCIAL HEATING
EQUIPMENT, RESIDENTIAL AIR CONDITIONING
EQUIPMENT, HEAT RECLAIM VENTILATION, AIR
CLEANING EQUIPMENT, MARINE TYPE CONTAINER
REFRIGERATION UNITS, COMPRESSORS AND VALVES.
Organization:
DAIKIN INDUSTRIES
(THAILAND) LTD.
JQA-1452
Scope of Registration:
THE DESIGN/DEVELOPMENT
AND MANUFACTURE OF AIR
CONDITIONERS AND THE
COMPONENTS INCLUDING
COMPRESSORS USED FOR THEM
All of the Daikin Groups business

facilities and subsidiaries in Japan
are certified under the ISO 14001
international standard for
environment management.
Dealer
Head Office:
Umeda Center Bldg., 2-4-12, Nakazaki-Nishi,
Kita-ku, Osaka, 530-8323 Japan
Tokyo Office:
JR Shinagawa East Bldg., 2-18-1, Konan,
Minato-ku, Tokyo, 108-0075 Japan
http://www.daikin.com/global_ac/
c All rights reserved
Specifications, designs and other content appearing in this brochure are current as of February 2010 but subject to change without notice.
EDSG281001
Printed in Japan 02/10/001 FS.K

Edsg281001 (Sky Air - R410a)

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Edsg281001 (Sky Air - R410a)

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

EDSG281001

Part 1 SkyAir Inverter Series ....................................................... 1

9. Capacity Tables ....................................................................................86

10.Operation Limits ....................................................................................97

12.Air Velocity and Temperature Distributions.........................................102

13.Sound Level ........................................................................................106

Part 2 Installation of Indoor / Outdoor Unit.............................. 113

2.4 FBQ50BV1A / FBQ60BV1A / FBQ71BV1A..........................................190

3. Installation of Outdoor Unit..................................................................238

RKS25AVMG / RKS35AVMG ..............................................................238

Part 3 Detail Information of Options ........................................ 279

2. Remote Controller ...............................................................................285

BYCP125K-W1 Decoration Panel ...................................................338

BYFQ60B8W1 Decoration Panel.....................................................385

5.3 KHFP5MA35 / KHFP5MA63 / KHFP5MA160

KPW937A4 Air Direction Adjustment Grille .....................................446

100KU 125KU 140KU

7.3 Field Wiring ............................................................................................80

9. Capacity Tables ....................................................................................86

10.Operation Limits ....................................................................................97

12.Air Velocity and Temperature Distributions.........................................102

13.Sound Level ........................................................................................106

SkyAir RXS, RKS, RZR Series

SkyAir RXS, RKS, RZR Series

Model Name, Power Supply and Nomenclature

2. Model Name, Power Supply and Nomenclature

Model Name and Power Supply

1 phase, 220-240V, 50Hz

3 phase, 380-415V, 50Hz

1 phase, 220-240V, 50Hz /

1 phase, 220-240V, 50Hz /

1 phase, 220-240V, 50Hz

3 phase, 380-415V, 50Hz

1 phase, 220-240V, 50Hz

3 phase, 380-415V, 50Hz

1. : New Model or Changed Model

SkyAir RXS, RKS, RZR Series

Model Name, Power Supply and Nomenclature

SkyAir RXS, RKS, RZR Series

Swing pattern selection

Switchable fan speed

High ceiling application

High fan speed mode

Year-round cooling applicable

Mould resistant treatment for filter

Mould-proofing drain pan

Drain pump mechanism

Ceiling soiling prevention

Low gas pressure detection

Control by 2 remote controllers

Control by 1 remote controller

External command control

Central remote control

Ultra long life filter

Fresh air intake kit

PE fin for outdoor unit

SkyAir RXS, RKS, RZR Series

Night time Quiet Operation

Wide Operation Range

Night time Quiet Operation

Wide Operation Range

SkyAir RXS, RKS, RZR Series

Sound level (H/L) *5